SAP PowerDesigner

Document Version: 16.5 SP05 2015-03-24

Data Modeling

Content

Building Data Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.1

Getting Started with Data Modeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Conceptual Data Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Logical Data Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Physical Data Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Creating a Data Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Customizing your Modeling Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.2

Conceptual and Logical Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Supported CDM/LDM Notations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Conceptual Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Logical Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Data Items (CDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Entities (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Attributes (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Identifiers (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Relationships (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Associations and Association Links (CDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Inheritances (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

1.3

Physical Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Physical Diagram Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Tables (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Columns (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Primary, Alternate, and Foreign Keys (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Indexes (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Views (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Triggers (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Stored Procedures and Functions (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Users, Groups, and Roles (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Synonyms (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Defaults (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Sequences (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Abstract Data Types (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
References (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
View References (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Content

Lifecycles (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Tablespaces and Storages (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Web Services (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
1.4

Multidimensional Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Multidimensional Diagram Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Identifying Fact and Dimension Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Generating Cubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Facts (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Dimensions (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Associations (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Operational to Warehouse Data Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Generating Data Warehouse Extraction Scripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Generating Cube Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

1.5

Checking a Data Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254

Abstract Data Type Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Abstract Data Type Procedure Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Association Checks (CDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Association Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Column Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Cube Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Database Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Database Package Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Database Package Sub-Object Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Data Format Checks (CDM/LDM/PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Data Item Checks (CDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Data Source Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Default Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Dimension Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Domain Checks (CDM/LDM/PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Entity Attribute Checks (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Entity Identifier Checks (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Entity Checks (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Fact Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fact Measure, Dimension Hierarchy, and Attribute Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Horizontal and Vertical Partitioning and Table Collapsing Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Index and View Index Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Inheritance Checks (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Join Index Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Key Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Lifecycle and Lifecycle Phase Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Package Checks (CDM/LDM/PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Data Modeling
Content

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Procedure Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Reference and View Reference Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Relationship Checks (CDM/LDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Sequence Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Synonym Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Table and View Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Tablespace and Storage Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Trigger and DBMS Trigger Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
User, Group, and Role Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
View Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Web Service and Web Operation Checks (PDM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
1.6

Generating and Reverse-Engineering Databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Previewing SQL Statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Connecting to a Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Generating a Database from a PDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Generating an SAP BusinessObjects Universe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Generating Test Data to a Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Estimating Database Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Modifying a Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Displaying Data from a Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Reverse Engineering a Database into a PDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Reverse-Engineering an SAP BusinessObjects Universe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Archive PDMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

1.7

Generating Other Models from a Data Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Generating Other Models from a CDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Generating Other Models from an LDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Generating Other Models from a PDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

1.8

Migrating from ERwin to PowerDesigner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Importing Individual ERwin Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Importing Multiple ERwin Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Post-Import. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
PowerDesigner vs ERwin Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Getting Started Using PowerDesigner for Former ERwin Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

DBMS Definition Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

2.1

Hadoop Hive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Partitions and Partition Values (Hadoop Hive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

2.2

HP Neoview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Materialized View Groups (Neoview). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

2.3

IBM DB2 for z/OS (formerly OS/390). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Trusted Contexts (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Content

Auxiliary Tables (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

Tablespace Prefix (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Materialized Query Tables (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Masks (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Row Permissions (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
2.4

IBM DB2 for Common Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Database Partition Groups (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Index Extensions (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Security Policies (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Event Monitors (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Federated Systems (DB2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

2.5

Greenplum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Conversions (Greenplum). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Aggregates (Greenplum). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Rules (Greenplum). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Resource Queues (Greenplum). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

2.6

Microsoft SQL Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Horizontal Partitioning (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Common Language Runtime (CLR) Integration (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Encryption (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Full Text Search (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Spatial Indexes (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
XML Indexes (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
XML Data Types (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Database Mirroring (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Service Broker (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Resource Governor (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Schemas (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Synonyms (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Analysis Services (SQL Server). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

2.7

Netezza. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
History Configurations (Netezza). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

2.8

Oracle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Object and SQLJ Object Data Types (Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Bitmap Join Indexes (Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Database Packages (Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Transparent Data Encryption (Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Clusters (Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Database Links (Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Materialized View Logs (Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Editions (Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Data Modeling
Content

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

2.9

SAP Business Suite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Importing an SAP Business Suite Data Dictionary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Generating an SAP Business Suite Data Dictionary to HANA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

2.10

SAP HANA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

Smart Data Access/Remote Sources (HANA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Extended Storage/ Extended Tables (HANA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Exporting Objects to the HANA Repository. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Importing Objects from the HANA Repository. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

2.11

SAP Adaptive Server Enterprise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Proxy Tables (ASE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Encryption Keys (ASE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

2.12

SAP IQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

Reference Architecture Modeling (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Information Lifecycle Management (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Events (IQ/SQL Anywhere). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Dbspaces (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Table and Column Partitions (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Logical Servers and Policies (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Multiplex Servers (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Login Policies (IQ/SQL Anywhere). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
LDAP Servers (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Remote Servers (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
External Logins (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Spatial Data (IQ/SQL Anywhere). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Full Text Searches (IQ/SQL Anywhere). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Indexes (IQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Join Indexes (IQ/Oracle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
IQ Data Movement Scripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

2.13

SAP SQL Anywhere. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Auto-Increment Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Mirror Servers (SQL Anywhere). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Spatial Data (SQL Anywhere). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Events, Login Policies, and Full Text Searches (SQL Anywhere). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Certificates (SQL Anywhere). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Proxy Tables (ASE/SQL Anywhere). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

2.14

Teradata. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Partitions (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Transform Groups (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Database Permissions (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Primary Indexes (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Error Tables (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Content

Join Indexes (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

Hash Indexes (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Glop Sets (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Replication Groups (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Replication Rules and Rule Sets (Teradata). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
2.15

Other Databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

Informix SQL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Ingres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Interbase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Microsoft Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
MySQL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
NonStop SQL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
PostgreSQL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Red Brick Warehouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

Data Modeling
Content

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Building Data Models

The chapters in this part explain how to model your data systems in SAP PowerDesigner.

1.1

Getting Started with Data Modeling

A data model is a representation of the information consumed and produced by a system, which lets you analyze
the data objects present in the system and the relationships between them. PowerDesigner provides conceptual,
logical, and physical data models to allow you to analyze and model your system at all levels of abstraction.

Suggested Bibliography
Graeme Simsion, Van Nostrand Reinhold, Data Modeling Essentials, 1994, 310 pages; paperbound; ISBN
1850328773
James Martin, Prentice Hall, Information Engineering, 1990, three volumes of 178, 497, and 625 pages
respectively; clothbound, ISBN 0-13-464462-X (vol. 1), 0-13-464885-4 (vol. 2), and 0-13-465501-X (vol. 3).
Joe Celko, Joe Celko's SQL for Smarties (Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, Inc., 1995), 467 pages; paperbound;
ISBN 1-55860-323-9.

1.1.1

Conceptual Data Models

A conceptual data model (CDM) helps you analyze the conceptual structure of an information system, to identify
the principal entities to be represented, their attributes, and the relationships between them. A CDM is more
abstract than a logical (LDM) or physical (PDM) data model.
A CDM allows you to:
Represent the organization of data in a graphic format to create Entity Relationship Diagrams (ERD).
Verify the validity of data design.
Generate a Logical Data Model (LDM), a Physical Data Model (PDM) or an Object-Oriented Model (OOM),
which specifies an object representation of the CDM using the UML standard.
To create a CDM, see Creating a Data Model [page 10]. For detailed information about conceptual diagrams,
see Conceptual Diagrams [page 32].

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.1.2

Logical Data Models

A logical data model (LDM) helps you analyze the structure of an information system, independent of any specific
physical database implementation. An LDM has migrated entity identifiers and is less abstract than a conceptual
data model (CDM), but does not allow you to model views, indexes and other elements that are available in the
more concrete physical data model (PDM).
You can use a logical model as an intermediary step in the database design process between the conceptual and
physical designs:
Start with a CDM containing entities, attributes, relationships, domains, data items and business rules. If need
be, you may develop the CDM in several design steps starting from a high level model to a low level CDM
Generate an LDM. Create indexes and specify FK column names and other common features
Generate one or more PDMs, each targeted to a specific DBMS implementation
This design process allows you to keep everything consistent in a large development effort.
To create an LDM, see Creating a Data Model [page 10]. For detailed information about logical diagrams, see
Logical Diagrams [page 45].

1.1.3

Physical Data Models

A physical data model (PDM) helps you to analyze the tables, views, and other objects in a database, including
multidimensional objects necessary for data warehousing. A PDM is more concrete than a conceptual (CDM) or
logical (LDM) data model. You can model, reverse-engineer, and generate for all the most popular DBMSs.

PowerDesigner provides you with tools for modeling your operational and business intelligence environments:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

 Operational/relational environment - modeled in physical diagrams (see Physical Diagrams [page 83]). The
physical analysis may follow a conceptual and/or logical analysis, and addresses the details of the actual
physical implementation of data in a database, to suit your performance and physical constraints.
Business intelligence environment:
Data warehouse or data mart database tables - can be modeled in physical diagrams and mapped to their
source operational tables to generate data extraction scripts.
Data warehouse cubes (in ROLAP or HOLAP environments) - can be modeled in multidimensional
diagrams (see Multidimensional Diagrams [page 236]) and mapped to their source warehouse tables.
SAP BusinessObjects Universes - can be generated from warehouse PDMs for direct consumption or
for editing in BusinessObjects environments (see Generating an SAP BusinessObjects Universe [page
315]).
OLAP cubes - can be modeled in multidimensional diagrams and mapped to their source operational or
warehouse tables to generate cube data.
PowerDesigner provides support for a wide range of database families through DBMS definition files (*.xdb,
located in Resource Files\DBMS inside your installation directory), which customize the metamodel to support
the specific syntax of a DBMS, through extended attributes, objects, and generation templates. To view and edit
the resource file for your DBMS, select Database Edit Current DBMS . For detailed information about
working with these files, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files.

1.1.4

Creating a Data Model

You create a new data model by selecting

File

New Model .

Context
Note
In addition to creating a data model from scratch with the following procedure, you can also:
create a CDM by importing an ERwin model (.ERX) or by generating it from another PowerDesigner model.
create an LDM by generating it from another PowerDesigner model.
create a PDM by reverse-engineering it from an existing database (see Reverse Engineering a Database
into a PDM [page 328]) or generating it from another PowerDesigner model.
The New Model dialog is highly configurable, and your administrator may hide options that are not relevant for
your work or provide templates or predefined models to guide you through model creation. When you open the
dialog, one or more of the following buttons will be available on the left hand side:
Categories - which provides a set of predefined models and diagrams sorted in a configurable category
structure.
Model types - which provides the classic list of PowerDesigner model types and diagrams.
Template files - which provides a set of model templates sorted by model type.

10

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Procedure
1. Select

File

New Model

to open the New Model dialog.

2. Click a button, and then select a category or model type ( Conceptual Data Model, Logical Data Model or
Physical Data Model ) in the left-hand pane.
3. Select an item in the right-hand pane. Depending on how your New Model dialog is configured, these items
may be first diagrams or templates on which to base the creation of your model.
Use the Views tool on the upper right hand side of the dialog to control the display of the items.
4. Enter a model name. The code of the model, which is used for script or code generation, is derived from this
name using the model naming conventions.
5. [PDM only] Select a target DBMS , which customizes PowerDesigner's default modifying environment with
target-specific properties, objects, and generation templates.
By default, PowerDesigner creates a link in the model to the specified file. To copy the contents of the
resource and save it in your model file, click the Embed Resource in Model button to the right of this field.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

11

Embedding a file in this way enables you to make changes specific to your model without affecting any other
models that reference the shared resource.
6. [optional] Click the Select Extensions button and attach one or more extensions to your model.
7. Click OK to create and open the data model .

Note
Sample data models are available in the Example Directory.

1.1.4.1

Data Model Properties

You open the model property sheet by right-clicking the model in the Browser and selecting Properties.
Each data model has the following model properties:
Table 1:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the model. The name should clearly convey the model's purpose to non-technical
users, while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and
should not normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more de
tailed information about the model. By default the code is auto-generated from the name by
applying the naming conventions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code syn
chronization, click to release the = button to the right of the Code field.

Filename

Specifies the location of the model file. This box is empty if the model has never been saved.

Author

Specifies the author of the model. If you enter nothing, the Author field in diagram title boxes
displays the user name from the model property sheet Version Info tab. If you enter a space,
the Author field displays nothing.

Version

Specifies the version of the model. You can use this box to display the repository version or a
user defined version of the model. This parameter is defined in the display preferences of the
Title node.

DBMS

[PDM only] Specifies the model target.

Database

Specifies the database that is the target for the model. You can create a database in the
model by clicking the Create tool to the right of this field.
If your DBMS supports multiple databases in a single model (enabled by the

EnableManyDatabases entry in the Database category of the DBMS), this field is not
present, and is replaced by a list of databases in the Model menu. A Database category is also
displayed in the physical options of your database objects.
Default diagram

12

Specifies the diagram displayed by default when you open the model.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, sepa
rate them with commas.

1.1.4.1.1

Creating a Database in the Model

You can create a database from the General tab of the model property sheet or, if your DBMS supports multiple
databases in a single model, from the list of databases in the Model menu.

Context
Creating a database in your model allows you to specify physical options for it and to reference the database in
the physical options of other objects. For example, you can specify that a table is created in a particular
tablespace with the in [<db>.<tablespace>] physical option:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

13

Procedure
1. Select

Model

Model Properties

or right-click the diagram background and select Properties.

2. Click the Create tool to the right of the Database field and click Yes in the confirmation dialog to open the
database property sheet.
3. Enter the following properties for the database as appropriate:
Table 2:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,

Comment

while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add ster
eotypes to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

DBMS

DBMS for the database

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Physical Options/Physical Options (Common) - Specifies the physical options associated with the
database (see Physical Options (PDM) [page 100]).
Script - Specifies begin and end scripts to bookend the database creation script (see Customizing
Creation Statements [page 314]).
Rules - Specifies the business rules associated with the database (see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM)
[page 207]).
Dependencies - Lists the objects that reference the database in their physical options.

14

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.1.5

Customizing your Modeling Environment

The PowerDesigner data model provides various means for customizing and controlling your modeling
environment.

1.1.5.1

Setting CDM/LDM Model Options

You can set CDM/LDM model options by selecting

background and selecting Model Options.

Tools

Model Options

or right-clicking the diagram

You can set the following options on the Model Settings page:
Table 3:
Option

Description

Name/Code case sen Specifies that the names and codes for all objects are case sensitive, allowing you to have two objects
sitive

with identical names or codes but different cases in the same model. If you change case sensitivity
during the design process, we recommend that you check your model to verify that your model does
not contain any duplicate objects.

Enable links to re

Displays a Requirements tab in the property sheet of every object in the model, which allows you to

quirements

attach requirements to objects (see Requirements Modeling).

Enforce non-diver

Specifies that attributes attached to a domain must remain synchronized with the selected properties

gence

(see Controlling Non-Divergence from a Domain [page 188]).

Use data type full

Specifies that the complete data type is displayed in entity symbols.

name
Default data type

Specifies the default data type to apply to domains and attributes if none is selected for them.

External Shortcut

Specifies the properties that are stored for external shortcuts to objects in other models for display in

Properties

property sheets and on symbols. By default, All properties appear, but you can select to display only
Name/Code to reduce the size of your model.

Note
This option only controls properties of external shortcuts to models of the same type (PDM to
PDM, EAM to EAM, etc). External shortcuts to objects in other types of model can show only the
basic shortcut properties.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

15

Option

Description

Notation

You can choose between the following notations:

Entity / Relationship [Default used throughout this manual] Entity/relationship notation con
nects entities with links representing one of four relationships between them. These relationships
have properties that apply to both entities involved in the relationship

Merise - uses associations instead of relationships

E/R + Merise - both entity/relationship and Merise are used in the same model

IDEF1X - data modeling notation for relationships and entities. In this notation, each set of rela
tionship symbols describes a combination of the optionality and cardinality of the entity next to it

Barker inheritances are represented by placing the child entities inside the parent entity sym
bol, and relationships are drawn in two parts, each reflecting the multiplicity of the associated en
tity role.

For more information about these notations, see Supported CDM/LDM Notations [page 28]
Unique code

Requires that data items or relationships have unique codes

Allow n-n relation

[LDM only] Allows n-n relationships to be displayed.

ships
Allow reuse

Allows the reuse of one data item as an attribute for more than one entity provided the attributes have
same name and data type and do not belong to a primary key.
When deselected or when the attribute belongs to a primary key, the data item cannot be reused. In
this case, if the Unique code check box is selected, a new data item with identical name but different
code is created, otherwise a new data item with identical name and code is created.
When you delete an entity or entity attributes, these options determine whether or not the corre
sponding data items are also deleted, as follows:

Both deletes the entity attribute.

Unique Code only deletes the entity attribute.

Allow Reuse only deletes the entity attribute and the corresponding data item (if it is not used
by another entity).

None deletes the entity attribute and the corresponding data item.

For information about controlling the naming conventions of your models, see Core Features Guide > Modeling
with PowerDesigner > Objects > Naming Conventions.

1.1.5.1.1

Assertion Template

The assertion template is a GTL template used to automatically generate sentences from the role names you
specify on the Cardinalities tab of relationship property sheets. To review or edit the template, select
Model Options

Tools

Assertion Template .

The PowerDesigner Generation Template Language (GTL) is used to generate text from the objects, properties,
and relationships defined in the PowerDesigner metamodel and in extensions to it.

16

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

The GTL code in the template extracts various properties of the relationship object and the entities it connects to
generate the assertion statements. The mandatory property and cardinalities are evaluated in each direction in
order to generate the appropriate wording around the entity and role names.
You can edit the assertion template as necessary, to change the wording or to reference other properties. To
reference extended attributes or other extensions, you must specify the extension file for the template to use in
the Assertion Extension list.
A sample extension file, Relationship Assertion with Plural Entity Names, is provided, which
provides support for using plural entity names in assertions. For information about attaching this or any other
xem to your model, see Extending your Modeling Environment [page 25]
For detailed information about working with GTL, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > Customizing
Generation with GTL .

1.1.5.1.2

Migration Settings (LDM)

To set migration settings, select

Model Settings.

Tools

Model Options , and select the Migration settings sub-category under

These options control the migration of identifiers along relationships:

Table 4:
Option

Description

Migrate attribute prop

Enables the domain, the checks or the rules to be kept when an attribute is migrated.

erties
Foreign attribute name

Specifies the naming convention for migrated foreign identifiers. You can select one of the default
templates from the list or enter your own using the following variables:

%PARENT% - Name/Code of the parent entity

%ATTRIBUTE% - Name/Code of the parent attribute

%IDENTIFIER% - Name/Code of the identifier constraint attached to the relationship

%RELATIONSHIP% - Name/Code of the relationship

%PARENTROLE% - Role of the entity that generated the parent entity, this variable proceeds
from the conceptual environment. If no role is defined on the relationship, %PARENTROLE%
takes the content of %PARENT% to avoid generating an attribute with no name

The following example checks the %PARENTROLE% value; if it is equal to the parent name (which is
the replacement value) then the template "%.3:PARENT%_%ATTRIBUTE%" will be used, otherwise
template "%PARENTROLE% will be used because the user has entered a parent role for the relation
ship:
Note that customized naming templates reappear in the generation dialog box the next time you
open it, but are not saved to the list of predefined templates.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

17

Option

Description

Use template

Controls when the primary identifier attribute name template will be used. You can choose between:

1.1.5.2

Always use template.

Only use template in case of conflict.

Setting PDM Model Options

You can set PDM model options by selecting

and selecting Model Options.

Tools

Model Options

or right-clicking the diagram background

You can set the following options on the Model Settings page:
Table 5:
Option

Function

Name/Code case sensi

Specifies that the names and codes for all objects are case sensitive, allowing you to have two ob

tive

jects with identical names or codes but different cases in the same model. If you change case sen
sitivity during the design process, we recommend that you check your model to verify that your
model does not contain any duplicate objects.

Enable links to require

Displays a Requirements tab in the property sheet of every object in the model, which allows you

ments

to attach requirements to objects (see Requirements Modeling).

External Shortcut Proper

Specifies the properties that are stored for external shortcuts to objects in other models for dis

ties

play in property sheets and on symbols. By default, All properties appear, but you can select to
display only Name/Code to reduce the size of your model.

Note
This option only controls properties of external shortcuts to models of the same type (PDM to
PDM, EAM to EAM, etc). External shortcuts to objects in other types of model can show only
the basic shortcut properties.

18

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Option

Function

Notation

Specifies the use of one of the following notation types for the model. You can choose between:

Relational - Arrow pointing to primary key. This option is the default, and is used in this man
ual.

CODASYL - Arrow pointing to foreign key.

Conceptual - Cardinality displayed in IE format (crow's feet).

IDEF1X - Cardinality and mandatory status displayed on reference, primary columns in sepa
rate containers and dependent tables with rounded rectangles.

When you change notation, all symbols in all diagrams are updated accordingly. If you switch from
Merise to IDEF1X, all associations are converted to relationships.

For information about controlling the naming conventions of your models, see Core Features Guide > Modeling
with PowerDesigner > Objects > Naming Conventions.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

19

1.1.5.2.1

Column and Domain Model Options

To set model options for columns and domains, select

Domain sub-category in the left-hand Category pane.

Tools

Model Options , and select the Column &

You can set the following options on this tab:

Table 6:
Option

Function

Enforce non-divergence

Specifies that columns attached to a domain must remain synchronized with the selected proper
ties (see Controlling Non-Divergence from a Domain [page 188]).

Default data type

Specifies the default data type to be applied to columns and domains if none is selected for them.

Column / Domain: Man

Specifies that columns or domains are created, by default, as mandatory and that they may must,

datory by default

therefore contain non-null values.

1.1.5.2.2

Reference Model Options

To set model options for references, select

the left-hand Category pane.

Tools

Model

Options, and select the Reference sub-category in

You can set the following options on this tab:

Table 7:
Option

Function

Unique code

Requires that references have unique codes. If this option is not selected then different references
can have the same code (except when two references share the same child table).

Auto-reuse / Auto-mi

Enable the reuse of columns in child tables as foreign key columns and the migration of primary

grate columns

key columns to child tables during the creation of references (see Automatic Reuse and Migration
of Columns [page 200]).

Mandatory parent

Specifies that the relationship between child and parent tables is, by default, mandatory, i.e., each
foreign key value in the child table must have a corresponding key value, in the parent table.

Change parent allowed

Specifies that a foreign key value can change to select another value in the referenced key in the
parent table.

Check on commit

Specifies that referential integrity is checked only on commit, rather than immediately after row
insertion. This feature can be useful when working with circular dependencies. Not available with
all DBMSs.

Propagate column prop

Propagates changes made to the name, code, stereotype, or data type of a parent table column to

erties

the corresponding child column.

20

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Option

Function

Default link on creation

Specifies how reference joins are created (see Automatic Reuse and Migration of Columns [page
200]).

Default implementation

Specifies how referential integrity is implemented in the reference. You can select either:

Declarative referential integrity is defined by constraint in foreign declarations

Trigger referential integrity is implemented by triggers

For more information on referential integrity, see Reference Properties [page 196].
Default Constraints: Up

Controls how updating a key value in the parent table will, by default, affect the foreign key value in

date

the child table. Depending on your DBMS, you can choose from some or all of the following set
tings:

None no effect

Restrict cannot update parent value if one or more matching child values exist (no effect)

Cascade - update matching child values

Set null - set matching child values to NULL

Set default set matching child values to default value

Default Constraints: De

Controls how deleting a key value in the parent table will, by default, affect the foreign key value in

lete

the child table. Depending on your DBMS, you can choose from some or all of the following set
tings:

1.1.5.2.3

None no effect

Restrict cannot delete parent value if one or more matching child values exist (no effect)

Cascade - delete matching child values

Set null - set matching child values to NULL

Set default set matching child values to default value

Other Object Model Options

To set model options for tables and views, indexes, join indexes, procedures, sequences, triggers, and database
packages select

Tools

Model Options , and select the appropriate sub-category under Model Settings.

You can set the following options for these objects:

Table 8:
Option

Function

Default owner

Specifies a default owner for the specified object from the list of users (see Creating a User,
Group, or Role [page 169]). To create a user, click on the ellipsis button to open the List of Users,
and click the Add a Row tool.
If the user specified is subsequently deleted, this option (and the ownership of all associated ob
jects) will be reset to none.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

21

Option

Function

Ignore identifying owner

[tables and views] Specifies that the owner of a table or view is ignored for identification purposes.
Since, by default, both the name/code and the owner are considered during a uniqueness check,
this option enables you to enforce distinct names for these objects.
For example, if a model contains a table called "Table_1", which belongs to User_1, and another
table, also called "Table_1", which belongs to User_2, it will, by default, pass a uniqueness check
because of the different owners.

Rebuild automatically

[triggers] Automatically rebuilds the triggers on the child and parent tables of a reference when

triggers

you:

change the implementation of a reference

change the referential integrity rules of a reference implemented by a trigger

change the child or parent table of a reference implemented by a trigger (new and old)

create or delete a reference implemented by a trigger

change the maximum cardinality of the references

If this option is not selected, you can manually instruct PowerDesigner to rebuild triggers at any
time by selecting

1.1.5.3

Tools

Rebuild Objects

Rebuild Triggers

Setting Data Model Display Preferences

PowerDesigner display preferences allow you to customize the format of object symbols, and the information that
is displayed on them. To set data model display preferences, select
the diagram background and select Display Preferences.

Tools

Display Preferences

or right-click

In the Display Preferences dialog, select the type of object in the list in the left pane, and modify its appearance in
the right pane.
You can control what properties it will display on the Content tab, and how it will look on the Format tab. If the
properties that you want to display are not available for selection on the Content tab, click the Advanced button
and add them using the Customize Content dialog.
For detailed information about controlling the appearance and content of object symbols, see Core Features
Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Diagrams, Matrices, and Symbols > Display Preferences.

1.1.5.4

Viewing and Editing the DBMS Definition File

Each PDM is linked to a definition file that extends the standard PowerDesigner metamodel to provide objects,
properties, data types, and generation parameters and templates specific to the language being modeled.
Definition files and other resource files are XML files located in the Resource Files directory inside your
installation directory, and can be opened and edited in the PowerDesigner Resource Editor.

22

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Caution
The resource files provided with PowerDesigner inside the Program Files folder cannot be modified directly.
To create a copy for editing, use the New tool on the resource file list, and save it in another location. To include
resource files from different locations for use in your models, use the Path tool on the resource file list.
To open your model's definition file and review its extensions, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS .

For detailed information about the format of these files, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS
Definition Files.

Note
Some resource files are delivered with "Not Certified" in their names. We will perform all possible validation
checks, but we do not maintain specific environments to fully certify these resource files. We will support them
by accepting bug reports and providing fixes as per standard policy, with the exception that there will be no
final environmental validation of the fix. You are invited to assist us by testing fixes and reporting any
continuing inconsistencies.

1.1.5.4.1

Changing the DBMS

You can change the DBMS being modeled in your PDM at any time.

Context
If you change the DBMS being modeled, the model will be altered to conform with the new DBMS as follows:
All data types specified in your model will be converted to their equivalents in the new DBMS.
Any objects not supported by the new DBMS will be deleted
Certain objects, whose behavior is heavily DBMS-dependent may lose their values.

Note
You may be required to change the DBMS if you open a model and the associated definition file is unavailable.

Procedure
1. Select

Database

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Change Current DBMS :

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

23

2. Select a DBMS from the list.

By default, PowerDesigner creates a link in the model to the specified file. To copy the contents of the
resource and save it in your model file, click the Embed Resource in Model button to the right of this field.
Embedding a file in this way enables you to make changes specific to your model without affecting any other
models that reference the shared resource.
3. [optional] Click the DBMS Preserve Options tab, and select the check boxes for the objects and options that
you want to preserve:
Triggers and stored procedures triggers are always rebuilt when you change DBMS.
Physical options - if the syntax of an option is incompatible with the new DBMS, the values will be lost,
even if you have selected to preserve the physical option. For example, the physical option in used by ASA
is not supported by Oracle and any values associated with that option will be lost.
DBMS-specific objects - databases, storages, tablespaces, abstract data types, sequences.
Extended attributes - which are defined for a particular DBMS.

24

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Note
If you are changing DBMS within a database family, for example between SAP Adaptive Server Enterprise
12.5 and 15, all preserve options available are selected by default. The database objects not supported by
the old and new DBMSs are disabled.
4. Click OK.
A message box opens to tell you that the DBMS has been changed.
5. Click OK to return to the model.

1.1.5.5

Extending your Modeling Environment

You can customize and extend PowerDesigner metaclasses, parameters, and file generation with extensions,
which can be stored as part of your model or in separate extension files (*.xem) for reuse with other models.
To access extensions defined in a *.xem file, simply attach the file to your model. You can do this when creating a
new model by clicking the Select Extensions button at the bottom of the New Model dialog, or at any time by
selecting

Model

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Extensions

to open the List of Extensions and clicking the Attach an Extension tool.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

25

In each case, you arrive at the Select Extensions dialog, which lists the extensions available, sorted on sub-tabs
appropriate to the type of model you are working with:

To quickly add a property or collection to an object from its property sheet, click the menu button in the bottomleft corner (or press F11) and select New Attribute or New List of Associated Objects. For more information, see
Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Objects > Extending Objects.
To create a new extension file and define extensions in the Resource Editor, select Model Extensions , click
Add a Row, and then click Properties. For detailed information about working with extensions, see Customizing
and Extending PowerDesigner > Extension Files.

1.1.5.6

Traceability Links

Traceability links provide a flexible means for creating a connection between any object in any type of model and
any other object in the same model or any other model of any type. Traceability links have no formal semantic
meaning, but can be followed when performing an impact analysis or otherwise navigating through the model
structure.
To create a traceability link between objects in the same diagram, select the Link/Traceability Link tool in the
Toolbox. Click inside the symbol of the object that is dependent and, while continuing to hold down the mouse
button, drag the cursor and release it on the symbol of the object on which it depends.
In the following example, the Work entity is shown as being dependent on School through a traceability link:

To create a traceability link to any object in any model that is open in the Workspace, open the property sheet of
the dependent object, click its Traceability Links tab, and click the Add Objects tool. Use the Model list to select a

26

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

different model, select the object to point to and click OK to create the link and return to the dependent object's
Traceability Links tab.
You can optionally specify a type for any traceability link in the Link Type column.
Click the Types and Grouping tool to perform various actions on this tab:
To make a link type available for selection in the Link Type column, click the Types and Grouping tool and
select New Link Type. Enter a Name for the link type and, optionally, a Comment to explain its purpose, and
then click OK.

Note
Traceability link types created in this way are stored as stereotypes in an extension file embedded in the
model. To work directly with this file click the Types and Grouping tool and select Manage Extensions. For
detailed information about working with these files, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner >
Extension Files.
To control the display and grouping of links, click the Types and Grouping tool and select:
No Grouping - to display all the links in a single list.
Group by Object Type - to display links to different types of objects on separate sub-tabs. To add a link to
a new object type, click the plus sign on the leftmost sub-tab.
Group by Link Type - to display different link types on separate sub-tabs. To add a new link type, click the
plus sign on the leftmost sub-tab.

Note
To see all of the objects that point to an object via traceability links, open its property sheet, click its
Dependencies tab, and click the Incoming Traceability Links sub-tab.

1.2

Conceptual and Logical Diagrams

The data models in this chapter allow you to model the semantic and logical structure of your system.
PowerDesigner provides you with a highly flexible environment in which to model your data systems. You can
begin with either a CDM (see Conceptual Diagrams [page 32]) or an LDM (see Logical Diagrams [page 45]) to
analyze your system and then generate a PDM (see the Physical Diagrams [page 83]) to work out the details of
your implementation. Full support for database reverse-engineering allows you to take existing data structures
and analyze them at any level of abstraction.
For more information about intermodel generation, see Generating Other Models from a Data Model [page 341].

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

27

1.2.1

Supported CDM/LDM Notations

PowerDesigner supports the most popular data modeling notations in the CDM and LDM. You can choose your
notation by clicking

Tools

Model Options

and selecting it in the Notation list.

Entity/relationship Notation
In the Entity/relationship notation, entities are represented as rectangles and divided in three compartments:
name, attributes, and identifiers.

The termination points of relationships indicate the cardinality as follows:

28

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

(Note that the Merise notation uses associations instead of relationships):

Inheritance symbols indicate if they are complete and if they have mutually exclusive children:
Table 9:
Complete

Mutually exclusive

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Symbol

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

29

IDEF1X Notation
In the Idef1x notation, entity names are displayed outside the symbol, and dependent entities are drawn with
round corners.

Relationship symbols indicate the cardinality as follows:

30

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Inheritance symbols indicate if the inheritance is complete:

Table 10:
Complete

Symbol

Yes

No

Barker Notation
In the Barker notation, entities are drawn with round corners, and inheritances are displayed by placing children
inside the parent entity.

Only attributes are listed and a symbol specifies whether each attribute is a key, a mandatory or an optional
attribute as follows:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

31

Relationship symbols indicate the cardinality as follows:

The line style specifies if a relationship is mandatory:

1.2.2

Conceptual Diagrams

A conceptual data diagram provides a graphical view of the conceptual structure of an information system, and
helps you identify the principal entities to be represented, their attributes, and the relationships between them.

Note
To create a conceptual diagram in an existing CDM, right-click the model in the Browser and select

New

Conceptual Diagram . To create a new model, select File New Model , choose Conceptual Data Model as
the model type and Conceptual Diagram as the first diagram, and then click OK.
In the following conceptual diagram, the Teacher and Student entities inherit attributes from the Person parent
entity. The two child entities are linked with a one-to-many relationship (a teacher has several students but each
student has only one main teacher).

32

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

In addition:
a teacher can teach several subjects and a subject can be taught by several teachers (many-to-many).
a teacher can teach several lessons and a lesson is taught by only one teacher (one-to-many).
a student attends multiple lessons and a lesson is followed by multiple students (many-to-many).
a student studies multiple subjects and a subject can be studied by multiple students (many-to-many).

1.2.2.1

Conceptual Diagram Objects

PowerDesigner supports all the objects necessary to build conceptual diagrams.

Table 11:
Object

Tool

Symbol

Description

Domain

[none]

[none]

Set of values for which a data item is valid. See

Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 183].

Data Item

[none]

[none]

Elementary piece of information. See Data Items

(CDM) [page 49].

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

33

Object

Tool

Symbol

Entity

Description
Person, place, thing, or concept that is of interest
to the enterprise. See Entities (CDM/LDM) [page
51].

Entity Attribute

[none]

[none]

Elementary piece of information attached to an

entity. See Attributes (CDM/LDM) [page 57].

Identifier

[none]

[none]

One or many entity attributes, whose values

uniquely identify each occurrence of the entity.
See Identifiers (CDM/LDM) [page 60].

Relationship

Named connection or relation between entities

(ER modeling methodology). See Relationships
(CDM/LDM) [page 61].

Inheritance

Relationship that defines an entity as a special

case of a more general entity. See Inheritances
(CDM/LDM) [page 78].

Association

Named connection or association between enti

ties (Merise modeling methodology). See Associ
ations and Association Links (CDM) [page 71].

Association Link

Link that connects an association to an entity. See

Associations and Association Links (CDM) [page
71].

1.2.2.2

Example: Building a Data Dictionary in a CDM

PowerDesigner supports the definition and maintenance of an enterprise data dictionary in a CDM. A data
dictionary defines the data items, entities and attributes of the enterprise, and by managing it in a CDM and linking
it (through generation or through the mapping editor) with your data and other models, you can ensure
consistency of use and benefit from sophisticated impact analysis and "where used" reporting.

Context
Data dictionaries ensure consistency of use by providing a single authoritative definition for all common data
elements used across the enterprise. They are used to standardize data content, context, and definitions and to

34

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

achieve consistency and reusability while increasing the quality of the data used throughout the organization. By
clearly defining and delineating the objects that comprise the enterprise and its systems, they enable:
easier integration and communication between systems
more standardized messaging between applications
higher quality business intelligence and analytics
better understanding between all subject matter experts
more agile response to change and more complete impact analysis
A data dictionary defined in a PowerDesigner CDM provides:
a unique list of entities and data items
data items as descriptions of data artifacts
entities connected to data items through attributes
entity-to-entity relationships
traceability from the data dictionary to logical and physical data models and other models
impact analysis and where used reporting capabilities

Procedure
1. Select File New to open the New Model dialog, select to create a new CDM and give it an appropriate
name, for example, Enterprise Data Dictionary.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

35

2. Select Model Data Items to open the List of Data Items and enter some concepts that you want to
define. Each data item is an elementary piece of information, which represents a fact or a definition defined
using business terms.

36

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Some examples of data items are Customer Name, Order Description, and Zip Code. Data items exist
independently of any containing entity, which is important in a data dictionary as you are seeking to define
atomic business data and terms, independent of how they may ultimately be used by entities. For more
information about defining data items, see Data Items (CDM) [page 49].
3. Select Model Entities to open the List of Entities and enter some of the entities that you want to define.
Entities represent more complex business structures composed of one or more attributes (which are
associated with data items).
Some examples of entities are Customer, Product, Order. When you create entities, a symbol for each one
will be created in the CDM diagram. While such a graphical representation is not strictly necessary for the
purposes of creating a data dictionary, you may find this diagram useful to help you visualize the content and
structure of business concepts.

For more information about defining entities, see Entities (CDM/LDM) [page 51].
4. Double-click an entity in the Browser or diagram to open its property sheet, and click the Attributes tab. Entity
attributes provide the link between an entity and a data item:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

37

Create a new attribute by reusing an existing data item by clicking the Reuse Data Item tool and selecting the
data item that you want to reuse. By default, PowerDesigner allows you to reuse a data item for more than
one entity attribute so that, for example, you can define a Zip Code data item once, and reuse it in whatever
entities contain addresses. If you then update the data item, your changes will simultaneously cascade down
to all the entity attributes that use it. This is a great way to enforce consistency throughout the data dictionary
model.
You can also create data items in this list by clicking the Insert a Row or Add a Row tool to add a new line in the
list and entering an appropriate name. PowerDesigner will create the attribute and an associated data item.
You can also create a new attribute by creating a copy of an existing data item. Click the Add Data Item tool
and select the data item that you want to copy. Any changes made through this attribute or directly to this
copy of the data item will only affect this attribute and no others.
5. Double-click one of your entity symbols (or its Browser entry) to open its property sheet so that you can
provide a precise definition for it. The Comment field on the General tab is intended for a simple, short
description in unformatted text, while the Description field on the Notes tab allows for fully formatted text, and
is intended to contain the complete, detailed definition from the business:

38

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

6. [optional] Select the Relationship tool in the pallet and create relationships between the entities in your data
dictionary. Click and hold in one entity, then drag the cursor to a second entity and release the mouse button.
Draw other relationships as necessary and then right-click anywhere in the diagram to drop the tool. Doubleclick a relationship line to open its property sheet and specify properties such as role name and cardinality.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

39

For detailed information about defining relationships, see Relationships (CDM/LDM) [page 61].
7. The purpose of a data dictionary is to map the concepts that it defines to the concepts, logical entities, and
physical tables that make up the implementation of these ideas in the enterprise. PowerDesigner provides
two complementary methods for connecting the data dictionary with your other models:
Generation - If you have no existing PDM, you can generate a new model from your data dictionary. Click
Tools Generate Physical Data Model to open the Generate dialog, select the Generate new... option,
and specify a name for the model to generate. Click the Selection tab and select the concepts you want to
generate to the new model, and then click OK.

40

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

You can review the links created between the data dictionary and your other models in the Generation
Links Viewer (select Tools Generation Links Derived Models ).
You can regenerate whenever necessary to propagate updates or additions in the data dictionary to your
other models. The Merge Models dialog (see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Comparing and Merging Models) will appear, which lets you review and approve (or reject) the changes
that will be propagated from the data dictionary to the model.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

41

For detailed information about generating models, see Generating Other Models from a Data Model [page
341].
Mapping Editor - If you have an existing PDM or other model it may be more appropriate to map your data
dictionary concepts to your PDM objects using the Mapping Editor, which provides a finer degree of
control and a simple drag and drop interface.
Open the model containing the objects you want to link with your data dictionary and select

Tools

Mapping Editor . In the Data Source Creation Wizard, enter Data Dictionary in the Data Source field,
select Conceptual Model in the Model type list, and click Next. Select your data dictionary CDM and
click Next. Select the Create default mapping option to instruct PowerDesigner to auto-create mappings
where possible based on shared names, and click Finish to open your model and the data dictionary in the
Mapping Editor:

42

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

You can create additional mappings as necessary by dragging and dropping entities and attributes from
the data dictionary onto objects in the target model. Note that mappings created in this way will not
automatically propagate changes.
For detailed information about using the Mapping Editor, see Core Features Guide > Linking and
Synchronizing Models > Object Mappings.
8. Once the data dictionary is established and linked to the other models used in the enterprise to define the
information architecture, you will need to manage changes to it. New concepts will be added and existing
elements updated due to refinements in understanding the business or changes to business operations.
Some elements may also be removed (though this will probably be rare). Maintaining your data dictionary in a
PowerDesigner CDM enables you to leverage sophisticated impact analysis tools to help you understand the
time, cost and risk associated with proposed changes.
To launch an impact analysis, select one or more objects in a diagram or the Browser and select

Tools

Impact and Lineage Analysis :

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

43

You can edit the rule sets used to control the analysis and manually adjust the tree view by right-clicking
items. Once the analysis view contains the level of detail you want, click the Generate Diagram button to
create an impact analysis diagram. This diagram, which can be saved and compared to other impact analysis
snapshots, shows the connections that link your dictionary concepts through intermediate objects and
models to the physical objects that implement them, providing a graphical "where used" report:

44

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

The diagram helps you plan the implementation of a change, as everything defined in the diagram will require
further assessment to ensure the change does not invalidate any specific work we have done at the
implementation level.
For detailed information about working with impact analysis, see Core Features Guide > Linking and
Synchronizing Models > Impact and Lineage Analysis.
9. Share your data dictionary with your modeling team and ensure that the latest version is always available to
them, by checking it into your PowerDesigner repository library as a reference model (see Core Features
Guide > Administering PowerDesigner > Deploying an Enterprise Glossary and Library).
10. Share your data dictionary with other members of your organization through the PowerDesigner Portal (see
Core Features Guide > Storing, Sharing and Reporting on Models > Repository Web Clients > The
PowerDesigner Portal) or by publishing it to HTML or RTF (see Core Features Guide > Storing, Sharing and
Reporting on Models > Reports).

1.2.3

Logical Diagrams

A logical data diagram provides a graphical view of the structure of an information system, and helps you analyze
the structure of your data system through entities and relationships, in which primary identifiers migrate along
one-to-many relationships to become foreign identifiers, and many-to-many relationships can be replaced by
intermediate entities.

Note
To create a logical diagram in an existing LDM, right-click the model in the Browser and select

New

Logical

Diagram . To create a new model, select File New Model , choose Logical Data Model as the model type
and Logical Diagram as the first diagram, and then click OK.
The following logical diagram represent the same system as that in our CDM example (see Conceptual Diagrams
[page 32]).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

45

Primary identifiers have migrated along one-to-many relationships to become foreign identifiers, and many-tomany relationships are replaced with an intermediary entity linked with one-to-many relationships to the
extremities.

1.2.3.1

Logical Diagram Objects

PowerDesigner supports all the objects necessary to build logical diagrams.

Table 12:
Object

Tool

Symbol

Description

Domain

[none]

[none]

Set of values for which a data item is valid. See

Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 183].

46

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Object

Tool

Symbol

Entity

Description
Person, place, thing, or concept that is of interest
to the enterprise. See Entities (CDM/LDM) [page
51].

Entity Attribute

[none]

[none]

Elementary piece of information attached to an

entity. See Attributes (CDM/LDM) [page 57].

Identifier

[none]

[none]

One or many entity attributes, whose values

uniquely identify each occurrence of the entity.
See Identifiers (CDM/LDM) [page 60].

Relationship

Named connection or relation between entities

(ER modeling methodology). See Relationships
(CDM/LDM) [page 61].

n-n Relationship

[LDM only] Named cardinality represented with

an intermediary entity. See Relationships (CDM/
LDM) [page 61].

Inheritance

Relationship that defines an entity as a special

case of a more general entity. See Inheritances
(CDM/LDM) [page 78].

1.2.3.2

Importing a Deprecated PDM Logical Model

If you have previously created a PDM with the logical model DBMS, you will be invited to migrate to an LDM when
you open it.

Procedure
1. Select

File

Open

and browse to the PDM logical model to open.

2. Click Open to display the Import Logical Data Model dialog:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

47

3. Choose one of the following options:

Convert the model to a logical data model Note that only tables, columns, keys and references are
preserved
Change the DBMS target to "ANSI Level 2" and open it as a PDM
4. Click OK to open the model.

Results

Note
A PDM with the logical model DBMS that had been generated from a CDM will retain its links to the source CDM
when you convert it to an LDM. However, for any PDM generated from the old LDM, you will need to restore the
generation links by regenerating the PDM from the new LDM, using the Update existing PDM option (see Core
Features Guide > Linking and Synchronizing Models > Generating Models and Model Objects).

1.2.3.3

Importing Multiple Interconnected PDM Logical

Models

If you have previously created multiple PDMs with the logical model DBMS, and these models are connected by
shortcuts and generation or other links, you can convert them en masse to logical data models and preserve their
interconnections.

Procedure
1. Select

48

File

Import

Legacy Logical Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

to open the Import Logical Data Models dialog:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2. Click Open, browse to the legacy PDMs you want to import, select them, and then click OK to add them to the
list. You can, if necessary, add multiple PDMs from multiple directories by repeating this step.
3. When you have added all the necessary PDMs to the list, click OK to import them into interconnected LDMs.

1.2.4

Data Items (CDM)

A data item is an elementary piece of information, which represents a fact or a definition in an information system,
and which may or may not have any eventual existence as a modeled object.
You can attach a data item to an entity (see Entities (CDM/LDM) [page 51] ) in order to create an entity
attribute (see Attributes (CDM/LDM) [page 57]), which is associated with the data item.
There is no requirement to attach a data item to an entity. It remains defined in the model and can be attached to
an entity at any time.
Data items are not generated when you generate an LDM or PDM.

Example
In the information system for a publishing company, the last names for authors and customers are both important
pieces of business information. The data item LAST NAME is created to represent this information. It is attached
to the entities AUTHOR and CUSTOMER, and becomes entity attributes of those entities.
Another piece of information is the date of birth of each author. The data item BIRTH DATE is created but, as
there is no immediate need for this information in the model, it is not attached to any entity.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

49

1.2.4.1

Creating a Data Item

You can create a data item from the Browser or Model menu. Data items are automatically created when you
create entity attributes.
Select

Model

Data Items

to access the List of Data Items, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Data Item .

Create an entity attribute (see Attributes (CDM/LDM) [page 57]). A data item will be automatically created.
For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.2.4.2

Data Item Properties

To view or edit a data item's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 13:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of
the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes
to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Data type/ Length/

Specifies the form of data to be stored, such as numeric, alphanumeric, or Boolean, and, where appro

Precision

priate, the maximum number of characters or numerals that can be stored, and the maximum number
of places after the decimal point. Click the ellipsis button to choose from the list of standard data types
(see PowerDesigner Standard Data Types [page 185]).

Domain

Specifies the domain associated with the object (see Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 183]). Use the
tools to the right of this field to create or browse to a domain, or to open the property sheet of the se
lected domain.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Standard Checks - Specifies constraints to control the range and format of permitted data (see Setting Data
Profiling Constraints [page 106])

50

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

 Additional Checks - Displays an editable SQL statement, initialized with the standard checks, which can be
used to generate more complex constraints (see Specifying Advanced Constraints [page 110]).
Rules - Lists the business rules associated with the object (see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page
207]).

1.2.4.3

Controlling Uniqueness and Reuse of Data Items

You can control naming restraints and reuse for data items with CDM model options, by selecting

Tools

Model Options .

Context
Table 14:
Option

When selected

When cleared

Unique code

Each data item must have a unique code.

Multiple data items can have the same code, and you dif

If you try to select this option and some existing

data items are already sharing a code, the follow
ing error will be displayed:

ferentiate them by the entities that use them. The enti

ties are listed in the Used By column of the list of data
items.

Note

Unique Code option could not be selected because

two data items have the same code:
<data_item_code>

Allow reuse

To make an item visible in a list, click the Customize

Columns and Filter tool in the list toolbar, select the

To be able to select the option, you must first as

appropriate check box from the list of filter options

sign unique codes to all data items.

that is displayed, and click OK.

One data item can be an entity attribute for multi

Each data item can be an entity attribute for only one en

ple entities.

tity

For more information about CDM model options, see Setting CDM/LDM Model Options [page 15].

1.2.5

Entities (CDM/LDM)

An entity represents an object about which you want to store information. For example, in a model of a major
corporation, the entities created may include Employee and Division.
When you generate a PDM from a CDM or LDM, entities are generated as tables.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

51

1.2.5.1

Creating an Entity

You can create an entity from the Toolbox, Browser, or Model menu.
Use the Entity tool in the Toolbox.
Select

Model

Entities

to access the List of Entities, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Entity .

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.2.5.2

Entity Properties

To view or edit an entity's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property sheet
tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 15:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally in
clude spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object.
By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the
model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the
Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes
to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Number

Specifies the estimated number of occurrences in the physical database for the entity (the number of
records).

Generate

Specifies that the entity will generate a table in a PDM. When modeling in the Barker notation (see Sup
ported CDM/LDM Notations [page 28]), only leaf subtypes can be generated as PDM tables, and so this
option is disabled on Barker supertype property sheets.

Parent Entity

[read-only] Specifies the parent entity. Click the Properties tool at the right of the field to open the pa
rent property sheet.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Attributes - lists the attributes associated with the entity (see Attributes (CDM/LDM) [page 57]).
Identifiers - lists the attributes associated with the entity (see Identifiers (CDM/LDM) [page 60]).

52

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

 Rules - lists the business rules associated with the entity (see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 207]).
Subtypes [Barker only] lists the subtypes that inherit from the entity.

1.2.5.3

Copying Entities

You can make a copy of an entity within the same model or between models. When you copy an entity, you create
a new entity with a new name and code, attributes, and identifiers. Model options control whether you create new
data items or reuse the data items that are attached to the original entity.

Procedure
1. Select an entity in the CDM/LDM, and then select

Edit

Copy

(or press Ctrl+C).

2. Select the diagram or model to where you want to copy the entity and select
+V).

Edit

Paste

(or press Ctrl

The entity is copied and the new entity is displayed in the Browser and diagram.

Note
When copying an entity to the same model, a new entity with a new name and code, attributes, and
identifiers is always created, but the creation of new data items is controlled by data item model options
(see Setting CDM/LDM Model Options [page 15]). Select:
Allow reuse - to attach the original data items to the new entity attributes. If this option is not selected,
the original data items will be copied and these copies will be attached to the new entity attributes.
Unique code - to force all data items to have unique codes (though two or more data items can have
the same name). If neither this option nor Allow reuse is selected, then duplicate data items will be
created with the same names and codes.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

53

1.2.5.4

Displaying Attributes and Other Information on an

Entity Symbol

To set display preferences for entities, select

in the left-hand Category pane.

Tools

Display Preferences , and select the Entity sub-category

Entity
By default the following properties can be displayed on entity symbols:
Table 16:
Preference

Display description

Attributes

Specifies whether Attributes are displayed on entity symbols. If selected, you can choose between
displaying:

54

All attributes - All attributes:

Primary attributes - Only primary identifier attributes:

Identifying attributes - All identifier attributes:

Display limit - Number of attributes shown depends on defined value. For example, if set to 5:

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Preference

Display description

Identifiers

All identifier attributes for the entity are listed at the bottom of the entity symbol:

Stereotype

Stereotype of the entity.

Comment

Comment of the entity. When selected, all other check boxes are deselected, except for Stereotype:

Entity Attributes
By default the following properties can be displayed for entity attributes:
Table 17:
Preference

Display description

Data type

Data type for each entity attribute:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

55

Preference

Display description

Domain or data type

Domain for each entity attribute. You can only display domains when the Data type check box is se
lected.

Domain

Domain of an attribute in an entity. This display option interacts with the selection for Data types. As a
result, there are four display options:

Data types - Displays only the data type, if any:

Domains - Displays only the domain, if any:

Data types and Domain - Displays both data type and domain, if any:

Data types and Replace by domains - Displays either data type or domain, if any, and domain if
both are present:

Mandatory

56

<M> indicators are displayed next to each mandatory attribute:

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Preference

Display description

Identifier indicators

<pi> indicators are displayed next to primary identifiers and <ai> indicators next to non-primary iden
tifiers:

Stereotype

Displays the stereotype of the entity attributes

Note
For information about selecting other properties to display, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with
PowerDesigner > Diagrams, Matrices, and Symbols > Display Preferences.

1.2.6

Attributes (CDM/LDM)

In a CDM, attributes are data items attached to an entity, association, or inheritance. In an LDM, there are no data
items, and so attributes exist in entities without a conceptual origin.
When you generate a PDM from a CDM or LDM, entity attributes are generated as table columns.

1.2.6.1

Creating an Attribute

You can create an entity attribute from the Attributes tab in the property sheet of an entity, association, or
inheritance.
You can use the following tools, available on the Attributes tab:
Table 18:
Tool

Description
Add a Row Creates a new attribute and associated data item.
If you have enabled the Allow Reuse model option (see Setting CDM/LDM Model Options [page 15]), the new data
item can be used as an attribute for other objects.
If you have enabled the Allow Reuse and Unique Code model options and you type the name of an existing data
item, it will be automatically reused.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

57

Tool

Description
Add Data Item (CDM)/Add Attributes (LDM) - Opens a Selection window listing all the data items/attributes avail
able in the model. Select one or more data items/attributes in the list and then click OK to make them attributes
to the object.
If the data item/attribute has not yet been used, it will be linked to the object. If it has already been used, it will be
copied (with a modified name if you have enabled the Unique code model option) and the copy attached to the
object.
Reuse Data Item (CDM) - Opens a Selection window listing all the data items/attributes available in the model.
Select one or more data items/attributes in the list and then click OK to make them attributes to the object.

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.2.6.2

Attribute Properties

To view or edit an attribute's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:

Note
Unlike the majority of PowerDesigner objects, entity attributes do not support new properties or other
extensions.
Table 19:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally in
clude spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object.
By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the
model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the
Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes
to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Entity/ Associa

[read-only] Specifies the parent object. Click the tool to the right of the field to open its property sheet.

tion/ Inheritance
Data Item

[CDM only, read-only] Specifies the related data item (see Data Items (CDM) [page 49]). Click the tool
to the right of the field to open its property sheet.

58

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Inherited from

[LDM only, read-only] Specifies the parent entity from which the attribute is migrated through an inheri
tance.

Data type/ Length/

Specifies the form of data to be stored, such as numeric, alphanumeric, or Boolean, and, where appro

Precision

priate, the maximum number of characters or numerals that can be stored, and the maximum number
of places after the decimal point. Click the ellipsis button to choose from the list of standard data types
(see PowerDesigner Standard Data Types [page 185]).

Domain

Specifies the domain associated with the object (see Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 183]). Use the
tools to the right of this field to create or browse to a domain, or to open the property sheet of the se
lected domain.

Primary Identifier

[entity attributes only] Specifies that the attribute is the primary identifier of the entity.

Displayed

[entity and association attributes] Displays the attribute in the object symbol.

Mandatory

Specifies that every object occurrence must assign a value to the attribute. Identifiers (see Identifiers
(CDM/LDM) [page 60]) are always mandatory.

Foreign identifier

[LDM only, read-only] Specifies that the attribute is the foreign identifier of the entity.

The following tabs are also available:

Standard Checks - Specifies constraints to control the range and format of permitted data (see Setting Data
Profiling Constraints [page 106])
Additional Checks - Displays an editable SQL statement, initialized with the standard checks, which can be
used to generate more complex constraints (see Specifying Advanced Constraints [page 110]).
Rules - Lists the business rules associated with the object (see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page
207]).

1.2.6.3

Deleting Attributes (CDM)

When you delete an attribute, model options determine whether or not the corresponding data items are also
deleted:
Table 20:
Model options selected

Result of deleting an attribute

Unique Code and Allow Reuse

Does not delete corresponding data item

Unique Code only

Does not delete corresponding data item

Allow Reuse only

Deletes corresponding data item if it is not used by another entity

None

Deletes corresponding data item

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

59

1.2.7

Identifiers (CDM/LDM)

An identifier is one or many entity attributes, whose values uniquely identify each occurrence of the entity.
Each entity must have at least one identifier. If an entity has only one identifier, it is designated by default as the
primary identifier.
When you generate a PDM from a CDM or LDM, identifiers are generated as primary or alternate keys.

1.2.7.1

Creating an Identifier

You can create an identifier from the property sheet of an entity.

Open the Attributes tab in the property sheet of an entity, select one or more attributes, and click the Create
Identifier tool. The selected attributes are associated with the identifier and are listed on the attributes tab of
its property sheet.
Open the Identifiers tab in the property sheet of an entity, and click the Add a Row tool.
For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.2.7.2

Identifier Properties

To view or edit an indentifier's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 21:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally in
clude spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object.
By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the
model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the
Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes
to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Entity

Specifies the name of the entity to which the identifier belongs.

Primary identifier

Specifies that the identifier is a primary identifier.

60

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Attributes - lists the attributes (see Attributes (CDM/LDM) [page 57]) associated with the identifier: Click the
Add Attributes tool to add an attribute.

1.2.8

Relationships (CDM/LDM)

A relationship is a link between entities. For example, in a model that manages human resources, the Member
relationship links the Employee and Team entities and expresses that each employee works in a team, and each
team has employees.
For example, the employee Martin works in the Marketing team is one occurrence of the Member relationship.
When you generate a PDM from a CDM or LDM, relationships are generated as references.

Note
Relationships are used to link entities in the ER, Barker, and IDEF1X methodologies, while Merise uses
associations (see Associations and Association Links (CDM) [page 71]). PowerDesigner lets you use
relationships or associations exclusively, or combine the two methodologies in the same model. The following
examples use the ER format. For more information about the other notations, see Supported CDM/LDM
Notations [page 28].
A one-to-many relationship links one instance of the first entity to multiple instances of the second entity.
Additional properties can make one or both sides of this relationship mandatory and define identification rules:
Table 22:
One-to-many relationship

Description
Each division may have zero or more employees
Each employee may belong to zero or one division

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

61

One-to-many relationship

Description
Each division must have one or more employees
Each employee may belong to zero or one division

Each division may have zero or more employees

Each employee must belong to one and only one di
vision

Each division must have one or more employees

Each employee must belong to one and only one di
vision

Each division may have zero or more employees

Each employee must belong to one and only one di
vision
Each employee is identified uniquely by division
number and employee number

Each division must have one or more employees

Each employee must belong to one and only one di
vision
Each employee is identified uniquely by division
number and employee number

A one-to-one relationship links one instance of the first entity with one instance of the second entity:

62

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Table 23:
One-to-one relationship

Description
Each team works on zero or one project
Each project is managed by zero or one team

Each team works on one and one project only

Each project is managed by zero or one team

Each team works on zero or one project

Each project is managed by one and one team only

A many-to-many relationship links multiple instances of the first entity to multiple instances of the second entity.
This type of relationship is not permitted, by default, in the LDM (see Enabling Many-to-many Relationships in an
LDM [page 68]):
Table 24:
Many-to-many relationship

Description
Each division may have zero or more employees
Each employee may belong to zero or more divi
sions

Each division must have one or more employees

Each employee may belong to zero or more divi
sions

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

63

Many-to-many relationship

Description
Each division may have zero or more employees
Each employee must belong to one or more divi
sions

Each division must have one or more employees

Each employee must belong to one or more divi
sions

1.2.8.1

Creating a Relationship

You can create a relationship from the Toolbox, Browser, or Model menu.
Use the Relationship tool in the Toolbox. Click inside the first entity to be linked and, while continuing to hold
down the mouse button, drag the cursor to the second entity. Release the mouse button inside the second
entity.
Select

Model

Relationships

to access the List of Relationships, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Relationship .

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

64

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.2.8.2

Relationship Properties

To view or edit a relationship's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 25:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Entity1
Entity2

Specifies the two entities linked by the relationship. Use the tools to the right of the list to create,
browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Generate

Specifies that the relationship should be generated as a reference when you generate a PDM.

Cardinalities

Contains data about cardinality as the number of instances of one entity in relation to another entity.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

65

Cardinalities Tab
The Cardinalities tab allows you to specify the nature of the relationship between the two entities. The following
properties are available:
Table 26:
Property

Description

Cardinality

Specifies the number of instances (none, one, or many) of an entity in relation to another entity. You can
choose from the following values:

One-to-one (<1..1>) - One instance of entity A can correspond to only one instance of entity B.

One-to-many (<1..n>) - One instance of entity A can correspond to more than one instance of entity
B.

Many-to-one (<n..1>) - More than one instance of entity A can correspond to the same one instance
of entity B.

Many-to-many (<n..n>) - More than one instance of entity A can correspond to more than one in
stance of entity B. To use n..n relationships in an LDM, see Enabling Many-to-many Relationships in
an LDM [page 68].

For information about the termination points of the relationships in each of the supported notations, see
Supported CDM/LDM Notations [page 28].
Dominant role

[one-to-one relationships only] Specifies one direction of the relationship as dominant. If you define a
dominant direction, the one-to-one relationship generates one reference in a PDM, with the dominant
entity as the parent table. If you do not define a dominant direction, the one-to-one relationship gener
ates two references.
In the following example, the author is the dominant entity:

In a PDM, this relationship generates a reference with Author as the parent table, and its primary key
migrated to the Picture table as a foreign key:

66

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

In addition, this tab contains a groupbox for each direction of the relationship, containing the following properties:
Table 27:
Property

Description

Role name

Text that describes the relationship of EntityA to EntityB, and which is used to generate the assertion
statements displayed at the top of this tab. You should use the infinitive phrase that describes the rela
tionship of one entity to the other. For example, Each Order may <contain> one or more

line., and Each line must <belong to> one and only one Order.
To modify the sentences generated from your role names, edit your model's assertion template (see
Assertion Template [page 16]).
Dependent

Specifies that the entity is dependent on and partially identified by the other entity.
In the following example, the task entity is dependent on the project entity. Each task is a part of a
project and each project can contain zero or more tasks:

Mandatory

Specifies that each instance of the entity requires at least one instance of the other entity.
For example, the subcontract relationship is optional from customer to project, but mandatory from
project to customer. Each project must have a customer, but each customer does not have to have a
project.
Implied by dependent

Cardinality

Specifies the maximum and minimum number of instances of EntityA in relation to EntityB (if manda
tory, at least 1). You can choose from the following values:

0..1 Zero to one instances

0..n Zero to many instances

1..1 Exactly one instance

1..n one to many instances

Joins Tab (LDM)

The Joins tab lists the joins defined between parent and child entity attributes. Joins can link primary, alternate, or
foreign identifiers, or any user-specified attributes.
On this tab, you can either:
Select an identifier from the parent entity in the Parent field on which to base the join to autopopulate the list
with its associated parent and child attributes. If necessary, you can modify the specified child attributes.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

67

 Specify <None> in the Parent field and specify your own attribute pairs on which to base the join using the
following tools:
Table 28:
Tool

Description
Reuse Attributes - Create a join by matching parent and child attributes that share the same code.

Migrate Attributes - First specify attributes in the Parent Attribute column and then click this tool to migrate
them to foreign identifier attributes in the child table. If the attributes do not exist in the child table, they are
created.
Cancel Migration - Remove any attributes migrated to the child table.

Insert a Row - Inserts a row before the selected row in the list to specify another attribute to join on.

Add a Row - Adds a row at the end of the list to specify another attribute to join on.

1.2.8.3

Enabling Many-to-many Relationships in an LDM

In an LDM, many-to-many relationships are, by default, not permitted and are represented with an intermediary
entity. If you allow many-to-many relationships, you can select the many-to-many value in the cardinalities tab.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Model Options .

2. Select the Allow n-n relationships check box in the Relationship groupbox, and then click OK to return to the
model.

Note
When generating an LDM from a CDM, you can authorize the generation of many-to-many relationships by
clicking the Configure Model Options button on the General tab of the generation dialog, and selecting the
Allow n-n relationships option.

68

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.2.8.4

Creating a Reflexive Relationship

A reflexive relationship is a relationship between an entity and itself.

Context
In the following example, the reflexive relationship <Supervise> expresses that an employee (Manager) can
supervise other employees.

Note
To obtain clean lines with rounded corners when you create a reflexive relationship, select
Preferences
list.

Format

Relationship

Display

and modify the Line Style with the appropriate type from the Corners

Procedure
1. Click the Relationship tool in the Toolbox.
2. Click inside the entity symbol and, while continuing to hold down the mouse button, drag the cursor a short
distance within the symbol, before releasing the button.
A relationship symbol loops back to the same entity.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

69

Results
Note
In the Dependencies page of the entity, you can see two identical occurrences of the relationship, this is to
indicate that the relationship is reflexive and serves as origin and destination for the link

1.2.8.5

Defining a Code Option for Relationships

You can control naming restraints for relationships so that each relationship must have a unique code.

Context
If you do not select Unique Code, two relationships can have the same code, and you differentiate them by the
entities they link.
The following error message is displayed when the option you choose is incompatible with the current CDM:
Table 29:
Error message

Solution

Unique Code option could not be selected because at least two

Change the code of one relationship

relationships have the same code: <relationship_code>.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Model Options

to open the Model Options dialog box:

2. Select or clear the Unique Code check box in the Relationship groupbox, and then click OK to return to the
model.

70

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.2.8.6

Changing a Relationship into an Associative Entity

You can transform a relationship between two entities into an associative entity linked by two relationships, and
then attach entity attributes to the associative entity that you could not attach to the relationship.

Procedure
1. Right-click a relationship symbol and select

Change to Entity .

The original relationship is split in two and an associative entity is created between the two new relationships,
taking the name and code of the original relationship.
2. Open the property sheet of the associative entity or one of the new relationships to modify their properties as
appropriate.

1.2.8.7

Identifier Migration Along Relationships

Migrations are made instantaneously in an LDM or during generation if you generate a PDM from a CDM.
Table 30:
Relationship type

Migration

Dependent one-to-many

Foreign identifiers become attributes of the primary identifier of the child entity.

Many-to-many

No attributes are migrated.

Dominant one-to-one

Primary identifier migrate from the dominant attribute.

Mandatory one-to-many

If the child to parent role is mandatory, migrated attributes are mandatory.

1.2.9

Associations and Association Links (CDM)

In the Merise modeling methodology an association is used to connect several entities that each represents
clearly defined objects, but are linked by an event, which may not be so clearly represented by another entity.
Each instance of an association corresponds to an instance of each entity linked to the association.
When you generate a PDM from a CDM, associations are generated as tables or references.
In the following example, three entities VIDEOK7, CLIENT, and STORE contain video cassette, client, and store
information. They are linked by an association which represents a video cassette rental (K7RENTAL). The
K7RENTAL association also contains the attributes DATE and STAFF_ID, which give the date of the rental, and the
identity of the staff member who rented out the video cassette.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

71

When you generate a PDM, K7RENTED is generated as a table with five columns, STORE_ID,K7_ID, CLIENT_ID,
DATE, and STAFF_ID.

You can use associations exclusively in your CDM, or use both associations and relationships.

Association Links
An association is connected to an entity by an association link, which symbolizes the role and the cardinality
between an association and an entity.

72

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.2.9.1

Creating an Association with Links

The easiest way to create an association between entities is to use the Association Link tool, which will create the
association and the necessary links as well.

Procedure
1. Click the Association Link tool in the Toolbox.
2. Click inside the first entity and while continuing to hold down the mouse button, drag the cursor to a second
entity. Release the mouse button.
An association symbol is created between the two entities.

1.2.9.2

Creating an Association Without Links

You can create an association without links from the Toolbox, Browser, or Model menu.
Use the Association tool in the Toolbox..
Select

Model

Associations

to access the List of Associations, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Association .

Once you have created the association, you can link it to the relevant entities by using the Association Link tool.
For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

73

1.2.9.3

Association Properties

To view or edit an association's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 31:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally in
clude spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object.
By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the
model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the
Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes
to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Number

Specifies the estimated number of occurrences in the physical database for the association (the number
of records).

Generate

Specifies that the association will generate a table in a PDM.

Attributes

Specifies the data item attached to an association.

Rules

Specifies the business rules associated with the association.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

1.2.9.4

Association Link Properties

To view or edit an association link's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The
property sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface
by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 32:
Property

Description

Entity

Specifies the entity connected by the association link. Use the tools to the right of the list to create,
browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Association

74

Specifies the association connected by the association link.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Role

Specifies the label indicating the role of the association link.

Identifier

Indicates if the entity is dependent on the other entity.

Cardinality

Specifies the number of occurrences (one or many) that one entity has relative to another. You define
the cardinality for each association link between the association and the entity. You can choose between:

0,1 - There can be zero or one occurrence of the association in relation to one instance of the entity.
The association is not mandatory

0,n - There can be zero or many occurrences of the association in relation to one instance of the
entity. The association is not mandatory

1,1 - One occurrence of the entity can be related to only one occurrence of the association. The as

1,n - One occurrence of the entity can be related to one or many occurrences of the association. The

sociation is mandatory
association is mandatory
You can change the default format of cardinalities from the registry:

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Sybase\<PowerDesigner <version>
\ModelOptions\Conceptual Options CardinalityNotation=1 (0..1) or 2
(0,1)
Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

1.2.9.5

Creating a Reflexive Association

A reflexive association is a relationship between an entity and itself.

Procedure
1. Click the Association Link tool in the Toolbox.
2. Click inside the entity symbol and, while continuing to hold down the mouse button, drag the cursor a short
distance within the symbol, before releasing the button.
3. Drag the resulting association symbol away from entity to make clear its two links to the entity:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

75

In the example above, the reflexive association Manager expresses that an employee (Manager) can manage
other employees.

1.2.9.6

Defining a Dependent Association

In a dependent association, one entity is partially identified by another. Each entity must have an identifier. In
some cases, however, the attributes of an entity are not sufficient to identify an occurrence of the entity. For these
entities, their identifiers incorporate the identifier of another entity with which they have a dependent association.

Context
An entity named Task has two entity attributes, TASK NAME and TASK COST. A task may be performed in many
different projects and the task cost will vary with each project.
To identify each occurrence of TASK COST the unique Task entity identifier is the compound of its Task name
entity attribute and the Project number identifier from the Project entity.

When you generate a PDM, the TASK table contains the PROJECT NUMBER column as a foreign key, which is also
a primary key column. The primary key therefore consists of both PROJECT NUMBER and TASK NAME columns.

76

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Note
The same association can not have two identifier association links.

Procedure
1. Double-click an association link symbol to display the association link property sheet.
2. Select the Identifier check box and then click OK to return to the model.
The cardinality of the association link is enclosed in parenthesis to indicate that the association link is an
identifier.

1.2.9.7

Changing an Association into an Associative Entity

You can transform an association into an associative entity linked by two associations. The associative entity gets
the name and code of the association. The two new associations handle cardinality properties.

Context
Two entities PROJECT MANAGER and CONTRACTOR are linked by the association WORKS ON PROJECT WITH:

You can represent this association with an associative entity:

The two new associations can be represented as follows:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

77

Procedure
Right-click an association symbol, and select Change to Entity from the contextual menu.
An associative entity that is linked to two associations replaces the original association. The associative entity
takes the name of the original association.

1.2.9.8

Creating an Association Attribute

The tools used for creating association attributes on this tab are the same as those for creating entity attributes.
For more information, see Creating an Attribute [page 57].

1.2.10 Inheritances (CDM/LDM)

An inheritance allows you to define an entity as a special case of a more general entity. The general, or supertype
(or parent) entity contains all of the common characteristics, and the subtype (or child) entity contains only the
particular characteristics.
In the example below, the Account entity represents all the bank accounts in the information system. There are
two subtypes: checking accounts and savings accounts.

The inheritance symbol displays the inheritance status:

Table 33:
IDEF1X

E/R and Merise

Description
Standard

78

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

IDEF1X

E/R and Merise

Description
Mutually exclusive inheritance

Complete inheritance

Mutually exclusive and complete inheritance

Note
There is no separate inheritance object in the Barker notation (see Supported CDM/LDM Notations [page 28]),
as inheritances are represented by placing one entity symbol on top of another. Barker inheritances are always
complete and mutually exclusive, and the supertype lists its subtypes on the Subtypes tab (see Entity
Properties [page 52]). Only leaf subtypes can be generated as PDM tables, and the Generate option is disabled
on Barker supertype property sheets.

1.2.10.1

Creating an Inheritance

You can create an inheritance from the Toolbox, Browser, or Model menu.
Select the Inheritance tool in the diagram Toolbox, click and hold inside the child entity and then drag to the
parent entity and release the mouse button to create a link between the two entities with a half-circle symbol
in the middle with the arrow pointing to the parent entity:

To add further child entities, click and hold inside the child entity and then drag to the inheritance half circle
and release the mouse button:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

79

 Select Model Inheritances to access the List of Inheritances, and click the Add a Row tool. You will be
required to specify a parent entity.
Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select
specify a parent entity.

New

Inheritance . You will be required to

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.2.10.2

Inheritance Properties

To view or edit an inheritance's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 34:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally in
clude spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object.
By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the
model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the
Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes
to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Parent

Specifies the name of the parent entity. Use the tools to the right of the list to create, browse for, or view
the properties of the currently selected object.

Mutually exclusive

Specifies that only one child can exist for one occurrence of the parent entity.

children
Complete

Specifies that all instances of the parent entity (surtype) must belong to one of the children (subtypes).
For example, entity Person has 2 sub-types Male and Female; each instance of entity Person is either a
male or a female.

80

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

Generation Tab
This tab allows you to specify how the inheritance structure will be generated to a PDM, including which attributes
will be inherited.
Table 35:
Property

Description

Generation Mode

Specifies which parts of the inheritance will be generated. You can specify one or both of the following:

Generate parent - Generates a table corresponding to the parent entity. If one or more child entities
are not generated, the parent will take on their attributes and references.

Generate children - Generates a table corresponding to each child entity. The primary key of each
child table is the concatenation of the child entity identifier and the parent entity identifier. You must
additionally choose between:

Inherit all attributes Each table inherits all the entity attributes of the parent entity

Inherit only primary attributes - Each table inherits only the identifier of the parent entity

Note
For LDM inheritances, primary identifiers of a parent entity always migrate to all child entities, even if
the children are not selected for generation, and any changes you make on this tab will have an imme
diate effect on the inheritance of attributes in the LDM.

Note
You can control the generation of individual child tables using the Generate option in the property
sheet of each child entity (see Entity Properties [page 52]).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

81

Property

Description

Specifying attrib

In the case of parent-only generation, you can choose to define a specifying attribute, an entity attribute

utes

that is defined for a parent entity which differentiates occurrences of each child. For information about
the tools on this tab, see Creating an Attribute [page 57].
In the example below, the TITLE entity has two non-generated children, NONPERIODICAL and

PERIODICAL, and a specifying entity attribute PERIODICAL is defined for the inheritance link to dif
ferentiate between the two child entities.

In the PDM, the child entity attributes will generate columns in the table TITLE, and the specifying en
tity will generate a boolean PERIODICAL column, which indicates whether an instance of TITLE is a
periodical.

The following tabs are also available:

Children - lists the child entities of the inheritance. Use the Add Children and Delete tools to modify the
contents of the list.

1.2.10.3

Making Inheritance Links Mutually Exclusive

When an inheritance link is mutually exclusive, one occurrence of the parent entity cannot be matched to more
than one child entity. This information is for documentation only and has no impact in generating the PDM.
To make an inheritance link mutually exclusive, open the inheritance property sheet and select the Mutually
Exclusive Children check box. Then click OK to return to the diagram.
The mutually exclusive inheritance link displays an X on its half-circle symbol.
In the diagram below, the inheritance link is mutually exclusive, meaning that an account is either checking or
savings, but never both.

82

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3

Physical Diagrams

A physical data diagram provides a graphical view of your database structure, and helps you analyze its tables
(including their columns, indexes, and triggers), views, and procedures, and the references between them.

Note
To create a physical diagram in an existing PDM, right-click the model in the Browser and select

New

Physical Diagram . To create a new model, select File New Model , choose Physical Data Model as the
model type and Physical Diagram as the first diagram, and then click OK.
In the following example, the Employee table is shown in relation to the Team, Division, Material, Task, and Project
tables:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

83

1.3.1

Physical Diagram Objects

PowerDesigner supports all the objects necessary to build physical diagrams.

Table 36:
Object

Tool

Symbol

Table

Description
Collection of rows (records) that have associated columns (fields).
See Tables (PDM) [page 86].

Column

[none]

[none]

Data structure that contains an individual data item within a row (re
cord), model equivalent of a database field. See Columns (PDM)
[page 103].

Primary key

[none]

[none]

Column or columns whose values uniquely identify each row in a ta

ble, and are designated as the primary identifier of each row in the ta
ble. See Primary, Alternate, and Foreign Keys (PDM) [page 119].

84

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Object

Tool

Symbol

Description

Alternate key

[none]

[none]

Column or columns whose values uniquely identify each row in a ta

ble, and which is not a primary key. See Primary, Alternate, and For
eign Keys (PDM) [page 119].

Foreign key

[none]

[none]

Column or columns whose values depend on and migrate from a pri

mary or alternate key in another table. See Primary, Alternate, and
Foreign Keys (PDM) [page 119].

Index

[none]

[none]

Data structure associated with one or more columns in a table, in

which the column values are ordered in such a way as to speed up ac
cess to data. See Indexes (PDM) [page 123].

Default

[none]

[none]

[certain DBMSs] A default value for a column. See Defaults (PDM)

[page 180].

Domain

[none]

[none]

Defines valid values for a column. See Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM)

[page 183].

Sequence

[none]

[none]

[certain DBMSs] Defines the form of incrementation for a column.

See Sequences (PDM) [page 190].

Abstract data type

[none]

[none]

[certain DBMSs] User-defined data type. See Abstract Data Types

(PDM) [page 192].

Reference

Link between a primary or an alternate key in a parent table, and a

foreign key of a child table. Depending on its selected properties, a
reference can also link columns that are independent of primary or
alternate key columns. See References (PDM) [page 195].

View

Data structure that results from a SQL query and that is built from
data in one or more tables. See Views (PDM) [page 127].

View Reference

Link between a table and a view. See View References (PDM) [page
204].

Trigger

[none]

[none]

A segment of SQL code associated with a table or a view. See Trig

gers (PDM) [page 134].

Procedure

Precompiled collection of SQL statements stored under a name in

the database and processed as a unit. See Stored Procedures and
Functions (PDM) [page 157].

Database

[none]

[none]

The database of which the PDM is a representation. See Creating a

Database in the Model [page 13].

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

85

Object

Tool

Symbol

Description

Storage

[none]

[none]

A partition on a storage device. See Tablespaces and Storages

(PDM) [page 221].

Tablespace

[none]

[none]

A partition in a database. See Tablespaces and Storages (PDM)

[page 221].

User

[none]

[none]

A person who can log in or connect to the database. See Users,

Groups, and Roles (PDM) [page 168].

Role

[none]

[none]

A predefined user profile. See Users, Groups, and Roles (PDM) [page
168].

Group

[none]

[none]

Defines privileges and permissions for a set of users. See Users,

Groups, and Roles (PDM) [page 168].

Synonym

[none]

[none]

An alternative name for various types of objects. See Synonyms

(PDM) [page 178].

Web service

[none]

[none]

Collection of SQL statements stored in a database to retrieve rela

tional data in HTML, XML, WSDL or plain text format, through HTTP
or SOAP requests. See Web Services (PDM) [page 223].

Web operation

[none]

[none]

Sub-object of a Web service containing a SQL statement and display

ing Web parameters and result columns. See Web Operations (PDM)
[page 227].

1.3.2

Tables (PDM)

A table is used to store data in a set of columns. Each record in the table is represented as a row, which is uniquely
identified by the values in its primary key column or columns.
Tables are generally defined using the following sub-objects:
Columns - are named properties of a table that describe its characteristics (see Columns (PDM) [page 103]).
Primary Keys - Uniquely identify rows through the values in the column or columns with which they are
associated (see Primary, Alternate, and Foreign Keys (PDM) [page 119]). Each key can generate a unique
index or a unique constraint in a target database.
Indexes - Help improve search times by ordering the values in the column or columns with which they are
associated (see Indexes (PDM) [page 123]).
Triggers - SQL code invoked automatically whenever there is an attempt to modify data in the tables (see
Triggers (PDM) [page 134]).
Tables are linked together by references (see References (PDM) [page 195]).

86

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.2.1

Creating a Table

You can create a table from the Toolbox, Browser, or Model menu.
Use the Table tool in the Toolbox.
Select

Model

Tables

to access the List of Tables, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Table .

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.2.2

Table Properties

To view or edit a table's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property sheet
tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 37:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while the

Comment

code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally include
spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object. By default
the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the model options. To
decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes to
the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

Specifies the user who is the owner of the object. This is usually its creator. Use the tools to the right of the
list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Number

Specifies the estimated number of records in the table, which is used to estimate database size. This field is
automatically populated during reverse engineering if you select the Statistics option (see Reverse Engineer
ing from a Live Database [page 331]).
You can enter your own value in this field, or refresh its statistics (along with those for all of the table's col
umns) at any time by right-clicking the table and selecting Update Statistics. To update the statistics for all
tables, select

Generate

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Tools

Update Statistics

(see Reverse Engineering Database Statistics [page 338]).

Selects the table for generation to the database.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

87

Property

Description

Dimensional

Specifies the type of the table for purposes of creating star or snowflake schemas containing fact tables and

type

dimensions. You can choose between:

Fact - see Facts (PDM) [page 241]

Dimension - see Dimensions (PDM) [page 243]

Exclude - PowerDesigner will not consider the table when identifying or generating multidimensional ob
jects.

You can instruct PowerDesigner to complete this field for you (see Identifying Fact and Dimension Tables
[page 238]). PowerDesigner's support for the generation of BusinessObjects universes (see Generating an
SAP BusinessObjects Universe [page 315]) and of facts and dimensions in a multidimensional diagram (see
Generating Cubes [page 239]) depends on the value of this field.
Type

[if your DBMS supports various types of table] Specifies the type of the table. You can choose between:

Relational - Standard tables.

Object - Tables based on abstract data types (see Linking a Table to an Abstract Data Type [page
89]).

Keywords

XML - Tables storing XML documents (see Creating an XML Table or View [page 89]).

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them with
commas.

Lifecycle Tab
The Lifecycle tab is available if data lifecycle modeling (see Lifecycles (PDM) [page 211]) is supported for your
DBMS. These properties can be set for all the tables governed by the lifecycle on the lifecycle property sheet
Tables tab (see Lifecycle Properties [page 215]).
Table 38:
Property

Description

Lifecycle

Specifies the lifecycle with which the table is associated. Select a lifecycle from the list or click the tools to
the right of this field to create a new lifecycle or open the property sheet of the currently selected one.

Start date

Specifies the start date from which to generate the first partition. Click the Generate Partitions tool to the
right of this field to create partitions for the table, based on the partition range and start date.

Partition range

[read only] Specifies the duration of the partitions that will be created for the table. This value is controlled
by the lifecycle (see Lifecycle Properties [page 215]).

Row growth
rate (per year)/
Initial Rows

Specifies an estimate of the increase of the size of the table per year, and the number of rows to start from
as a basis for the calculation of cost savings. Click the Estimate Cost Savings tool to the right of this field to
perform the calculation.

Cost Savings

This groupbox lists the cost savings that accrue to the storage of this table's data through its association
with the lifecycle. Each line in the grid represents one year of savings, which are shown as a monetary value
and as a percentage of the cost of storing the data statically outside of a lifecycle.

88

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

The following tabs are also available:

Columns - Lists the columns associated with the table (see Columns (PDM) [page 103]). The following tools
are available on this tab:
Table 39:
Tool

Description
Insert a Row / Add a Row - Creates a column above the selected column or at the end of the list.
Add Columns / Replicate Columns - Copies or replicates columns from another table (see Copying
or Replicating a Column from Another Table [page 118]).
Create Index - Creates an index associated with the selected columns (see Creating Standard, Key,
or Function-Based Indexes [page 124]).

Create Key - Creates a (by default, alternate) key associated with the selected columns (see Creat
ing Alternate Keys [page 121]).

Indexes - Lists the indexes associated with the table (see Indexes (PDM) [page 123]).
Keys - Lists the keys associated with the table (see Primary, Alternate, and Foreign Keys (PDM) [page 119]).
Triggers - Lists the triggers associated with the table (see Triggers (PDM) [page 134]).
Procedures - Lists the procedures associated with the table (see Stored Procedures and Functions (PDM)
[page 157]).
Security Procedures - [data lifecycle modeling only] Lists the procedures which control access to the table
(see Stored Procedures and Functions (PDM) [page 157]).
Check - Specifies the constraints associated with the table (see Setting Data Profiling Constraints [page
106]).
Physical Options - Lists the physical options associated with the table (see Physical Options (PDM) [page
100]).
Preview - Displays the SQL code associated with the table (see Previewing SQL Statements [page 298]).

1.3.2.3

Linking a Table to an Abstract Data Type

If your DBMS supports it, PowerDesigner allows you to base tables on abstract data types (ADT), where the table
uses the properties of the ADT and the ADT attributes become table columns. To link a table to an ADT, open the
table property sheet to the General tab, and select the ADT (of type Object, SQLJ Object, or Structured type) in
the Based On field.
For detailed information about working with abstract data types, see Abstract Data Types (PDM) [page 192].

1.3.2.4

Creating an XML Table or View

If your DBMS supports it, PowerDesigner allows you to create XML tables and views. An XML table does not
contain columns, and instead stores an XML document. You must associate the table with a registered XML

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

89

schema to validate the XML document stored in the table, and can specify a root element for the structure stored
in your table.
When you select the XML in the Type field, the Column tab is removed and the following properties are added to
the General tab:
Table 40:
Property
Schema

Description
Enter the target namespace or name of an XML model (see XML Modeling) or use the Select tool to the
right of the field to connect to the database and select a registered schema. The schema must be regis
tered in the database to be used for validating XML documents.

Element

Allows you to specify a root element in the XML document. You can enter an element name or click the
Select tool to the right of the field to select an element from an XML model open in the workspace or from
the schema registered in the database
If you select an element from a PowerDesigner XML model, the Schema property is set to the XML model
target namespace.

1.3.2.5

Specifying Table Constraints

The table Check tab is initialized with the PowerDesigner %RULES% variable to generate validation rules specified
on the Rules tab. You can edit the code on this tab by entering an appropriate SQL expression to supplement,
modify, or replace these constraints.
You can override the default Constraint name. To revert to the default name, click to reset the User-Defined button
to the right of the field:
For information about business rules, see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 207]. For information about
setting column constraints, see Setting Data Profiling Constraints [page 106].

1.3.2.6

Denormalizing Tables and Columns

Database normalization consists in eliminating redundancy and inconsistent dependencies between tables. While
normalization is generally considered the goal of database design, denormalization, the deliberate duplication of
certain data in order to speed data retrieval, may sometimes be more desirable.
PowerDesigner supports denormalization through:
Horizontal partitioning - dividing a table into multiple tables containing the same columns but fewer rows.
Vertical partitioning - dividing a table into multiple tables containing the same number of rows but fewer
columns.
Table collapsing - merging tables in order to eliminate the join between them.
Column denormalization - repeating a column in multiple tables in order to avoid creating a join between them.
Horizontal and vertical partitioning involve tradeoffs in terms of performance and complexity. Though they can
improve query response time and accelerate data backup and recovery, they require additional joins and unions

90

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

to retrieve data from multiple tables, more complex queries to determine which table contains the requested data,
and additional metadata to describe the partitioned table. Column denormalization can simplify queries but
requires more maintenance and storage space as data is duplicated.
When deciding whether to denormalize, you should analyze the data access requirements of the applications in
your environment and their actual performance characteristics. Often, good indexing and other solutions may
more effectively address performance problems. Denormalization may be appropriate when:
Critical queries rely upon data from more than one table.
Many calculations need to be applied to columns before queries can be successfully answered.
Tables need to be accessed in different ways by different kinds of users simultaneously.
Certain columns are queried extremely frequently.

1.3.2.6.1

Horizontal Partitions

Horizontal partitioning consists in segmenting a table into multiple tables each containing a subset of rows and
the same columns in order to optimize data retrieval. You can use any column, including primary keys, as
partitioning criteria.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Denormalization

Horizontal Partitioning

Horizontal Partitioning , or right-click a table in the diagram and select

to open the Horizontal Partitioning Wizard.

2. Select the table to partition, specify whether you want to keep the original table after partitioning, and then
click Next.
3. Create as many partition tables as necessary using the Insert and Add a Row tools (specifying an appropriate
name for each, which must be unique in the model), and then click Next.
4. Click the Add Columns tool to select one or more discriminant columns to use as partition criteria (these
columns will be excluded from the partitions), and then click Next.
5. Specify a name and code for the transformation object that will be created to preserve information about the
partitioning, and then click Finish to create a table for each partition, taking the name of the partition. All
references to the original table are created on each partition table.
In this example, the table Annual Sales, which contains a very large amount of data is horizontally
partitioned on the Year column:
Table 41:
Before

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

After

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

91

Note
Horizontal partitionings created in a PDM generated from another model are preserved when applying
changes from the original model. The absence of discriminant columns in the target PDM is respected in
the Merge dialog (see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Comparing and Merging
Models), and changes in the source model are selected, by default, to be cascaded as appropriate to all
partition tables.

1.3.2.6.2

Vertical Partitions

Vertical partitioning consists in segmenting a table into multiple tables each containing a subset of columns and
the same number of rows as the partitioned table. The partition tables share the same primary key.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Denormalization

Vertical Partitioning

Vertical Partitioning , or right-click a table in the diagram and select

to open the Vertical Partitioning Wizard.

2. Select the table to partition, specify whether you want to keep the original table after partitioning, and then
click Next.
3. Create as many partition tables as necessary using the Insert and Add a Row tools (specifying an appropriate
name for each, which must be unique in the model), and then click Next.
4. Drag columns from under the original table in the Available columns pane, to the appropriate partition table in
the Columns distribution pane, (or select source and target tables and use the Add and Remove buttons), and
then click Next.
5. Specify a name and code for the transformation object that will be created to preserve information about the
partitioning, and then click Finish to create a table for each partition, taking the name of the partition. All
references to the original table are created on each partition table.

92

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

In this example, the table Customer, is divided into two tables, each of which details one type of information
about the customer:
Table 42:
Before

After

Note
Vertical partitionings created in a PDM generated from another model are preserved when applying
changes from the original model. The columns absent from each partition table in the target PDM are
shown but not selected in the Merge dialog (see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Comparing and Merging Models). Any changes in the source model are proposed, where appropriate, to
each of the partition tables, and you should deselect the change for those partitions to which you do not
want to apply it.

1.3.2.6.3

Table Collapsings

Table collapsing consists in merging tables in order to eliminate joins and to improve query performance. You can
collapse tables related to each other with a reference or tables with identical primary keys.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Denormalization Table Collapsing , or right-click a reference between the tables to
collapse and select Table Collapsing to open the Table Collapsing Wizard.
2. Specify a name and code for the table to be created, and then click Next.
3. Click the Add Tables tool to select tables to collapse into the new table, specify whether you want to keep the
original tables after collapsing, and then click Next.
4. Specify a name and code for the transformation object that will be created to preserve information about the
collapsing, and then click Finish to collapse the selected tables into a single unified table (with graphical
synonyms replacing each original table symbol in the diagram to minimize disruption of references.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

93

In this example, the tables Customer and Order are collapsed together to eliminate the join and optimize
data retrieval. The result is a single table (with 2 synonym symbols) with the primary key of the child table:
Table 43:
Before

After

5. [optional] Delete one of more of the synonyms. References will redirect to the remaining symbol.

1.3.2.6.4

Column Denormalization

Column denormalization consists in replicating columns from one table to another to reduce the number of joins
needed for frequently called queries. Though it can provide improved performance, column denormalization
requires more maintenance and disk space as the data in the replicated column is stored twice.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Denormalization Column Denormalization , or right-click the table to which you want to
replicate columns and select Column Denormalization to open the Column Denormalization Wizard.
2. Specify the table to which you want to replicate columns, and then click Next.
3. Select one or more columns, and then click Finish to replicate them to the selected table.

Note
Replicas are, by default, read-only copies of objects. Any changes made to the original column are
automatically propagated to the replica. This synchronization is controlled by a replication object for each
replica, a list of which is available by selecting Model Replications . To revert a column
denormalization, simply delete the duplicated column from the target table property sheet. For detailed
information about working with replicas and replications, see Core Features Guide > Linking and
Synchronizing Models > Shortcuts and Replicas.

94

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

In this example, to obtain the division name on the pay slip of each employee without requiring a link to the
Division table, the DivisionName column is replicated to the PaySlip table:
Table 44:
Before

1.3.2.6.5

After

Denormalization Object Properties

A denormalization transformation object is automatically created when you partition a table using the Horizontal
or Vertical Partitioning Wizard or collapse tables with the Table Collapsing Wizard. To access the property sheet of
this object, select Model Transformations to open the List of Transformations, select the appropriate
denormalization, and then click the Properties tool.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 45:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should
not normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed infor
mation about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the nam
ing conventions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click
to release the = button to the right of the Code field.

Partitioned table

[partitionings only] Specifies the name of the table used to create the table partitions.

Discriminant Columns

[horizontal partitionings] Specifies the name and code of the columns used as partition criteria.

Target table

[collapsings] Specifies the name of the table resulting from the collapsing of the tables.

The following tabs are also available:

Partitions - [partitionings] Lists the tables associated with the partitioning. You can create or delete partition
tables, and edit their properties. If you delete a partition, you are prompted to specify whether you want to
delete the corresponding table.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

95

 Partition Columns - [vertical partitionings] Displays the distribution of columns between the partition tables.
You can drag and drop columns between tables.
Source Tables - [table collapsings] Lists the tables that were collapsed. These tables will no longer exist unless
you selected to keep them in the wizard.

1.3.2.6.6

Removing Partitionings and Table Collapsings

You can remove partitionings or table collapsings and either keep or remove the associated tables.
Select Model Transformations
removing transformations:

to open the List of Transformations. The following tools are available for

Table 46:
Tool

Description
Delete - Removes the denormalization but retains any tables created by it.

Cancel [if the denormalization object is based upon a table generated from another model] Removes the de
normalization and any tables created by it. You can recover the original table by regenerating it from the
source model.

Note
You cannot move or paste a denormalization object to another model or package.

1.3.2.7

PowerBuilder DataWindow Extended Attributes

When designing tables to be used in a SAP PowerBuilder DataWindow, you can manage the extended attributes
which PowerBuilder uses to store application-based information, such as label and heading text for columns,
validation rules, display formats, and edit styles.

Context
PowerDesigner supports the modeling of this information through an extension file. To enable the PowerBuilder
extensions in your model, select Model Extensions , click the Attach an Extension tool, select the
PowerBuilder file (on the General Purpose tab), and click OK to attach it.
When this extension file is attached, additional properties for two PowerBuilder system tables (PBCatTbl for
tables and PBCatCol for columns) are available on the PowerBuilder tab of tables and columns:

96

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

To import the PowerBuilder extended attributes contained in your database to your PDM, select

Tools

PowerBuilder Reverse Extended Attributes , click the Connect to a Data Source tool, select a machine or file
data source and click Connect. Select the tables you want to reverse-engineer, and click OK.
To update the PowerBuilder extended attribute system tables in your database, select

Tools

PowerBuilder

Generate Extended Attributes , click the Connect to a Data Source tool, select a machine or file data source and
click Connect. Select the tables you want to generate, and click OK. Reversed extended attributes are compared
with the translated default values in the PowerBuilder extension file. If these attributes match, the reversed value
is replaced by the default value from the extension file.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

97

1.3.2.8

Displaying Column, Domain, and Data Type

Information on a Table Symbol

To set display preferences for tables, select

the left-hand Category pane.

Tools

Display Preferences , and select the Table sub-category in

Columns
Keys and indexes are represented by indicators in the table symbol. Each key and index indicator is assigned a
number. You can use these numbers to keep track of the different groups of alternate keys, foreign keys, and
indexes in your model.
By default, the following information about columns can be displayed on table symbols.
Table 47:
Preference

Displays

Data types

Data type for each column

Replace by domains

Domain codes for each column at

Example

tached to a domain

Domains

Domain of an attribute in the table.

See the Display Domain and Data Type section below for

This display option interacts with the

options and examples.

selection for Data types. As a result,

there are four display options
Key Indicators

<pk>, <fk>, and <ak> indicators next

to primary key, foreign key, and alter
nate key columns respectively. When
the Keys preference is also selected,
the key names are listed at the bottom
of the table symbol

98

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Preference

Displays

Index indicators

<i(n)> indicator next to indexed col

Example

umns. When the Indexes preference is

also selected, the index names and
corresponding numbers are listed at
the bottom of the table symbol

NULL/NOT NULL

Column indicator: null, not null, iden

tity, or with default (DBMS-dependent)

Display Domain and Data Type

You can display the domain of an attribute in the symbol of a table. There are four display options available:
Table 48:
Preference

Displays

Data types

Only the data type, if it exists

Domains

Only the domain, if it exists

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Example

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

99

Preference

Displays

Data types and Do

Both data type and domain, if they exist

Example

mains

Data types and Replace If domain exists and data type does not
by domains

exist, then displays domain.

If domain does not exist and data type
exists, then displays data type.

Note
For information about selecting other properties to display, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with
PowerDesigner > Diagrams, Matrices, and Symbols > Display Preferences.

1.3.2.9

Physical Options (PDM)

Physical options are DBMS-specific parameters that specify how an object is optimized or stored in a database,
and are included at the end of the object's Create statement. Physical options are defined in the DBMS definition
file, and may be available for tables, columns, indexes, tablespaces, and other objects. You can specify default
physical options for all objects of a particular type and for individual objects (overriding the default, if one is
specified).

Context
There are two different interfaces for specifying physical options for individual objects, both of which are
accessible through tabs on the object's property sheet. Changes made on either of these tabs will be reflected on
the other:
Physical Options (Common) this tab is displayed by default (along with the Partition tab, if applicable), and
lists the most commonly-used physical options as a standard property sheet tab. Select or enter values for
the appropriate options and click OK
Physical Options this tab is hidden by default, and lists all the available physical options for the object in a
tree format. To display this tab, click the Property Sheet Menu button and select

Customize Favorite Tabs

Physical Options (All) . Follow the procedure in Defining Default Physical Options [page 101], to specify
options and set values for them.
Physical options can vary widely by DBMS. For example, in Oracle, you specify the tablespace where the table is
stored with the Tablespace keyword, while in SAP SQL Anywhere, you use In. When you change DBMS, the

100

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

physical options selected are preserved as far as possible. If a specific physical option was selected, the default
value is preserved for the option in the new DBMS. Unselected physical options are reset with the new DBMS
default values.
For detailed information about the syntax of physical options and how they are specified, see Customizing and
Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files > Physical Options.

Note
In Oracle, the storage composite physical option is used as a template to define all the storage values in a
storage entry to avoid having to set values independently each time you need to re-use them same values in a
storage clause. For this reason, the Oracle physical option does not include the storage name (%s).

1.3.2.9.1

Defining Default Physical Options

You can define default physical options for all the objects of a particular type in the model.

Procedure
1. Select Database Default Physical Options to open the Default Physical Options dialog. There is a tab for
each kind of object that supports physical options.
The Table tab opens by default. The Syntax sub-tab in the left pane lists the physical options available in the
DBMS, and the Items sub-tab in the right pane lists the physical options that have been selected for the
object.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

101

The following tools are available for adding and removing physical options to an object:
Table 49:
Tool

Action when clicked

Adds physical option selected in Syntax tab (left pane) to Items tab (right pane)
Aligns a selected physical option in the Items tab with the corresponding physical option in the Syntax tab
Removes physical option selected in Items tab

2. To add a default option for the object, select it in the Syntax pane and click the Add tool to copy it to the Items
pane. To add only a sub-parameter for the option, expand the option in the Syntax pane, select the required
parameter and then click the Add tool.
3. To set a default value for a physical option parameter, select it in the Items pane and enter or select the
appropriate value in the field below the pane. The entered value will then be displayed against the parameter
in the Items list.
4. Repeat the above steps as many times as necessary to specify all your required physical options. By default,
these options will be applied to all tables created subsequently in the model. To apply them to existing tables,
click the Apply to button to select the tables to which you want to apply the options, and then click OK.
5. Select the other tabs to specify physical options for other object types. (Note that the Apply to button is not
available on the Database tab).
6. Click OK to close the dialog and return to your model.

102

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

To override the default physical options for a particular object, set the appropriate values on the the object's
Physical Options (Common) or Physical Options tab
You can view the physical options set for an object in its Preview tab.

Note
The default physical options are stored in your model file.

1.3.3

Columns (PDM)

A column is a set of values of a single type in a table. Each row of the table contains one instance of each column.
Each table must have at least one column, which must have a name and code and to which you can assign a data
type, either directly, or via a domain.

1.3.3.1

Creating a Column

You can create a column from the property sheet of, or in the Browser under, a table.
Open the Columns tab in the property sheet of a table, and click the Add a Row or Insert a Row tool

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

103

 Right-click a table in the Browser, and select

New

Column

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.3.2

Column Properties

To view or edit a column's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 50:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Table

Specifies the table which contains the column.

Data type/ Length/

Specifies the form of data to be stored, such as numeric, alphanumeric, or Boolean, and, where appro

Precision

priate, the maximum number of characters or numerals that can be stored, and the maximum number
of places after the decimal point. Click the ellipsis button to choose from the list of standard data
types (see PowerDesigner Standard Data Types [page 185]).
To review the data types permitted by your DBMS, select
navigate to

Script

DataType

PhysDataType

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and

). The following variables specify length and pre

cision requirements:

%n - length

%s - length with precision

%p - decimal precision

For example, the data type char(%n) , requires you to specify a length.
Domain

Specifies the domain associated with the object (see Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 183]). Use
the tools to the right of this field to create or browse to a domain, or to open the property sheet of the
selected domain.

Primary key

Specifies that the values in the column uniquely identify table rows (see Creating Primary Keys [page
120]).

104

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Foreign key

Specifies that the column depends on and migrates from a primary key column in another table (see
Creating Foreign Keys [page 122]).

Sequence

[if supported by your DBMS] Specifies the sequence associated with the column (see Sequences
(PDM) [page 190]).

Displayed

Specifies that the column can be displayed in the table symbol.

With default

[if supported by your DBMS] Specifies that the column must be assigned a value that is not null.

Mandatory

[if supported by your DBMS] Specifies that a non-null value must be assigned.

Identity

[if supported by your DBMS] Specifies that the column is populated with values generated by the da
tabase. Identity columns are often used as primary keys.

Computed

[if supported by your DBMS] Specifies that the column is computed from an expression using values
from other columns in the table (see Creating a Computed Column [page 116]).

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

Detail Tab
The Detail tab contain the following properties:
Table 51:
Property

Description

Column fill parame

The fields in this groupbox model the size and distinctness of data values that you expect to store in

ters

the column and are used in conjunction with test data profiles (see Populating Columns with Test Data
[page 111]). You can specify:

Null values - [Default: 0%] Specifies the percentage of values to leave empty.

Distinct values - [Default: 100%] Specifies the percentage of values that must be unique

Average Length - [read only] Used for estimating the size of the database (see Estimating Data
base Size [page 322]). The default value is the maximum length for the data type defined for the
column.

You can enter values by hand or obtain them from your database by selecting the Statistics option in
the Reverse Engineering dialog (see Reverse Engineering from a Live Database [page 331]).
To refresh the values in these fields for all a table's columns at any time, right-click the table symbol or
its entry in the Browser and select Update Statistics. To update the column statistics for all the tables
in a model, select

Tools

Update Statistics

(see Reverse Engineering Database Statistics [page

338]).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

105

Property

Description

Profile

Specifies a test data profile to use to generate test data (see Populating Columns with Test Data
[page 111]). Use the tools to the right of this field to create or browse to a profile, or to open the
property sheet of the selected profile.

Computed Expression Specifies an expression used to compute data for the column (see Creating a Computed Column
[page 116]).

The following tabs are also available:

Standard Checks - Specifies constraints to control the range and format of permitted data (see Setting Data
Profiling Constraints [page 106])
Additional Checks - Displays an editable SQL statement, initialized with the standard checks, which can be
used to generate more complex constraints (see Specifying Advanced Constraints [page 110]).
Rules - Lists the business rules associated with the object (see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page
207]).

1.3.3.3

Setting Data Profiling Constraints

PowerDesigner allows you to define data profiling constraints to control the range and format of data allowed in
your database. You can specify constraints on the Standard Checks and Additional Checks tabs of table columns
in your PDM, entity attributes in your CDM or LDM, and domains. You can also specify data quality rules on the
Rules tab of PDM tables and columns, CDM/LDM entities and attributes, and domains.
The following constraints are available on the Standard Checks tab of PDM columns, CDM/LDM entity attributes,
and CDM/LDM/PDM domains:
Table 52:
Property

Description

Values

Specifies the range of acceptable values. You can set a:

Minimum - The lowest acceptable numeric value

Maximum - The highest acceptable numeric value

Default - The value assigned in the absence of an expressly entered value. For the PDM, you
can directly enter a default value or select a keyword (defined in the Script\Sql

\Keywords\ReservedDefault entry of the DBMS definition file) from the list. Default
objects (see Defaults (PDM) [page 180]) are also available for selection if your DBMS sup
ports them.

106

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Characteristics

These properties are for documentation purposes only, and will not be generated. You can choose
a:

Format - A number of standard formats are available in the list. You can enter a new format
directly in the field or use the tools to the right of the field to create a data format for reuse
elsewhere.

Character case

List of values

Unit - A standard measure.

No space - Space characters are not allowed.

Cannot modify - The value cannot be updated after initialization.

Specifies the acceptable case for the data. You can choose between:

Mixed case [default]

Uppercase

Lowercase

Sentence case

Title case

Specifies the various values that are acceptable.

When specifying strings in the list of values, single or double quotation marks (depending on the
DBMS) will be added around the values in the generated script unless:

You surround the value by the appropriate quotation marks.

You surround the value by tilde characters.

The value is a keyword (such as NULL) defined in the DBMS.

PowerDesigner does not recognize your data type as a string.

The following examples show how string values are generated for a DBMS that uses single quota
tion marks:

Active - generates as 'Active'

'Active' - generates as 'Active'

"Active" - generates as '"Active"'

~Active~ - generates as Active

NULL - generates as NULL

If you have specified a non-automatic test data profile, you can use the values defined in the pro
file to populate the list by clicking the Update from Test Data Profile tool.
Select the Complete check box beneath the list to exclude all other values not appearing in the list.

1.3.3.3.1

Specifying Constraints Through Business Rules

In addition to the constraints specified on the Standard Checks tab, you can specify business rules of type
Validation or Constraint to control your data. Both types of rule contain SQL code to validate your data, and

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

107

you can attach them to tables and table columns in your PDM, entities and entity attributes in your CDM or LDM,
and domains.

Context
You can use the following PowerDesigner variables when writing your rule expression:
Table 53:
Variable

Value

%COLUMN%

Code of the column to which the business rule applies

%DOMAIN%

Code of the domain to which the business rule applies

%TABLE%

Code of the table to which the business rule applies

%MINMAX%

Minimum and maximum values for the column or domain

%LISTVAL%

List values for the column or domain

%RULES%

Server validation rules for the column or domain

To attach a business rule (see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 207]) to a table, column, entity, attribute,
or domain, open the object's property sheet, select the Rules tab, and click the Add Objects tool.
At generation time, business rules of type validation are concateneated together into a single constraint, while
rules of type Constraint will be generated as separate constraints if your DBMS supports them.

1.3.3.3.2

Creating Data Formats For Reuse

You can create data formats to reuse in constraints for multiple objects by clicking the New button to the right of
the Format field on the Standard Checks tab. Data formats are informational only, and are not generated as
constraints.

Note
To create multiple data formats, use the List of Data Formats, available by selecting

Model

Data

Formats .

Data Format Properties

To view or edit a data format's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.

108

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

The General tab contains the following properties:

Table 54:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Type

Expression

Specifies the type of the format. You can choose between:

Date/Time

String

Regular Expression

Specifies the form of the data to be stored in the column; For example, 9999.99 would represent a
four digit number with two decimal places.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

109

1.3.3.3.3

Specifying Advanced Constraints

The Additional Checks tab is initialized with PowerDesigner variables to generate the data profiling constraints
specified on the Standard Checks tab and the validation rules specified on the Rules tab. You can edit the code on
this tab by entering an appropriate SQL expression to supplement, modify, or replace these constraints.

Context
For columns, you can override the default Constraint name. To revert to the default name, click to reset the UserDefined button to the right of the field:

The following variables are inserted by default:

%MINMAX% - Minimum and maximum values specified on the Standard Checks tab
%LISTVAL% - List of values specified on the Standard Checks tab
%CASE% - Character case specified on the Standard Checks tab
%RULES% - Constraint and validation rules specified on the Rules tab

110

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.3.4

Populating Columns with Test Data

You can use test data to quickly fill your database with large amounts of data in order to test its performance and
estimate its size. You can also use test data as the basis for data profiling. PowerDesigner allows you to create
test data profiles, which generate or provide lists of data items and are assigned to columns or domains. You can
create test data profiles that contain number, character, or date/time data.
For example, you could create a test data profile called Address that specifies character data appropriate to
represent addresses, and then associate that profile with the columns Employee Location, Store Location, and
Client Address.
If you associate a test data profile with a domain, its data will be generated to all columns that are attached to the
domain. If you specify a data profile as the default for its type, its data will be generated to all columns that are not
associated with another profile.
To generate test data with or without test data profiles, see Generating Test Data to a Database [page 319]
You can create a test data profile in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Test Data Profiles

to access the List of Test Data Profiles, and click the Add a Row tool

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Test Data Profile

Note
You can import and export test data profiles to reuse them across multiple models by using the commands
under the:

Tools

Test Data Profile

menu. The *.xpf file format can contain one or more test data

profiles.

1.3.3.4.1

Test Data Profile Properties

To view or edit a test data profile's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and
fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 55:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while the

Comment

code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally include
spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object. By default
the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the model options. To
decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes to
the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

111

Property

Description

Class

Specifies the kind of data to be generated from the profile. You can choose between:

Number - to populate numerical columns

Character - to populate text columns

Date & Time - to populate date columns

Generation

Specifies from where PowerDesigner will draw the data to populate the columns associated with the profile.

source

You can choose between:

Automatic - PowerDesigner generates the data based on the parameters you set on the Detail tab.

List - PowerDesigner draws the data from the list you define on the Detail tab.

Database - PowerDesigner draws the data using a query from a live database connection that you

File - PowerDesigner draws the data from the CSV file that you specify on the Detail tab.

specify on the Detail tab.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them with
commas.

Detail Tab (Automatic Number Data)

If you have selected to automatically generate number data on the General tab, you must define the following
properties on the Detail tab:
Table 56:
Property

Description

Type

Specifies whether the data is to be generated randomly or sequentially.

Range

Specifies the range of numbers to generate from and, if a sequential type is specified, the step value to use
when traversing the range.

Decimal num

Specifies that the numbers to be generated are decimal, and the number of digits after the decimal point to

bers

generate.

112

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Detail Tab (Automatic Character Data)

If you have selected to automatically generate character data on the General tab, you must define the following
properties on the Detail tab:
Table 57:
Property

Description

Valid charac

Specifies the characters that can be generated (by default, all alphanumeric characters and spaces), sepa

ters

rated by commas. You can specify:

Single characters or strings of characters - surrounded by double quotes. For example, "a", "bcd",

"e".

Character intervals - in which the boundary characters are surrounded by single quotes and separated
by a dash. For example, 'a'-'z', 'A'-'Z'

To allow any character, select the All checkbox.

Invalid charac

Specifies the characters that cannot be generated, using the same syntax as for the valid characters. To dis

ters

allow accented characters, select the No accents checkbox.

Mask

Specifies the mask characters used to tell users what kind of character they must enter in a given context.
By default the test data profile uses the following mask characters:

Case

A - Letter

9 - Number

? - Any character

Specifies the case in which to generate the data. If you select Lower or Mixed case, select the First
Uppercase checkbox to require that each word begin with a capital letter.

Length

Specifies the length of character strings to generate. You can specify either an exact required length or a
range.

Detail Tab (Automatic Date & Time Data)

If you have selected to automatically generate date and time data on the General tab, you must define the
following properties on the Detail tab:
Table 58:
Property

Description

Date range

Specifies the upper and lower limits of the date range within which data can be generated.

Time range

Specifies the upper and lower limits of the time range within which data can be generated.

Step

Specifies step values for use when traversing the date and time ranges, if sequential values are generated.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

113

Property

Description

Values

Specifies whether the values are to be generated randomly or sequentially.

Note
The format in which date and time data is generated can be controlled by DBMS items in the Script/Sql/
Format category (see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files > Script/Sql
Category.

Detail Tab (List Data)

If you have selected to provide list data on the General tab, enter as many value-label pairs as necessary on the
Detail tab.

Detail Tab (Database Data)

If you have selected to provide data from a database on the General tab, you must define the following properties
on the Detail tab:
Table 59:
Property
Data Source

Description
Specifies the data source from which to draw data for the profile. Click the Select a Data Source tool to the
right of this field to open a separate dialog on which you can specify your connection parameters.

Login and Pass Specifies the login and password to use when connecting to the data source.
word
Table, Column,

Specifies the table and column from which the data will be drawn. By default, a query selecting distinct val

and Query

ues from the column is used.

114

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Detail Tab (File Data)

If you have selected to provide data from a file on the General tab, you must define the following properties on the
Detail tab:
Table 60:
Property

Description

File

Specifies the file from which to draw data for the profile.

Type

Specifies whether the values are to be drawn randomly or sequentially.

1.3.3.4.2

Assigning Test Data Profiles to Columns

You can associate a test data profile directly to a column or to a domain.

Context
Note
To assign a test data profile to a domain (see Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 183], open the domain
property sheet and select the appropriate test data profile in the Profile list on the General tab. A test data
profile assigned to a domain will generate test data for all the columns attached to the domain.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of a column and click the Detail tab.
2. Select the appropriate test data profile.
3. [optional] Adjust the following properties in the Column fill parameters group box as appropriate:
Null values - [Default: 0%] Specifies the percentage of values to leave empty.
Distinct values - [Default: 100%] Specifies the percentage of values that must be unique. For example, if
you set this field to 100 % for one column and to 80% for a second column, and then generate the table
with 10 rows, all 10 rows in the first column will have different values, while 2 values in the second column
will be repeated. This is a maximum value, and can change depending on the referential integrity
parameters of primary key columns. Alternately, you can enter a specific value without a percentage sign,
to indicate the exact number of column rows that should contain unique entries.

Note
If you use a test data profile with a list generation source to a column with a given percentage of
distinct values, PowerDesigner uses the values from the test data profile list. If there are not enough

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

115

values declared in the list, a warning message is displayed in the Output window to inform you that the
distinct value parameter cannot be enforced due to lack of distinct values in the list of values.
Average Length - [read only] Used for estimating the size of the database (see Estimating Database Size
[page 322]). The default value is the maximum length for the data type defined for the column.

Note
These properties on the column property sheet General may override values entered in the Column fill
parameters groupbox:
Mandatory (M) - Specifies that the column must contain a value and sets Null values to 0%.
Unique (U) - Specifies the column must contain a unique value and sets Null value to 0% and Distinct
values to 100%.
Foreign (F) - The column is a foreign key column and takes the values of the corresponding primary key
column in the parent table.
4. Click OK to close the column property sheet and return to the model.

Note
To quickly assign test data profiles to multiple columns, use the List of Columns or the Columns tab of a
table property sheet. If the Test Data Profile column is not visible in your list, use the Customize Columns
and Filter tool to display it.
5. [optional] Generate your test data (see Generating Test Data to a Database [page 319]).

1.3.3.5

Creating a Computed Column

Computed columns are columns whose content is computed from values in other columns in the table. Computed
columns are not supported by all DBMSs.

Procedure
1. Open the table property sheet and click the Columns tab.
2. Click the Add a Row tool, and then click the Properties tool to open the property sheet for the new column.
3. On the General tab, select the Computed checkbox, and then click the Detail tab.
Simple computed expressions can be entered directly in the Computed expression field. For more complex
expressions, click the Edit tool to the right of the field to access the SQL Editor (see Writing SQL Code in
PowerDesigner [page 295]).
In the following example a column must be filled with the total sales of widgets computed by multiplying the
number of widgets by the widget price:

116

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

4. Click OK to return to the column property sheet.

The expression is displayed in the Computed Expression pane.

1.3.3.6

Attaching a Column to a Domain

You can attach a column to a domain, and have the domain specify the data type, check parameters, and business
rules for the column. Domains can help with data consistency across columns storing similar types of data.

Procedure
1. Double-click a table to open its property sheet, and click the Columns tab.
2. Select the required column and then click the Properties tool to open its property sheet.
3. Select a domain from the Domain list and then click OK.
For detailed information about working with domains, see Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 183].

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

117

1.3.3.7

Copying or Replicating a Column from Another Table

You can reuse existing columns from other tables by copying or replicating them using the tools on the table
property sheet Columns tab or by drag and drop. If your table already contains a column with the same name or
code as the copied column, the copied column is renamed.

Context
Copying a column creates a simple copy that you can modify as you wish. Replicating a column creates a
synchronized copy which remains synchronized with any changes made to the original column (see Core Features
Guide > Linking and Synchronizing Models > Shortcuts and Replicas).

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of the table you want to copy or replicate the columns to, and click the Columns tab.
2. Click the Add Columns or Replicate Columns to open a selection box listing the columns attached to all other
tables in the model.

3. Select one or more columns in the list and then click OK to copy or replicate them to the table.
4. Click OK to close the table property sheet and return to your model.

118

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Note
To copy or replicate a column from one table to another in the diagram or browser, select the column in the
table symbol or its Browser entry, and then right-click and hold while dragging the column to over the
second table symbol or its Browser entry. Release and select Copy Here or Replicate Here.

1.3.4

Primary, Alternate, and Foreign Keys (PDM)

A key is a column, or a combination of columns, that uniquely identifies a row in a table. Each key can generate a
unique index or a unique constraint in a target database.
You can create the following types of keys:
Primary keys - Contain one or more columns whose combined values uniquely identify every row in a table.
Each table can have only one primary key.
Alternate keys - Contain one or more columns whose combined values uniquely identify every row in a table.
Foreign keys - Contain one or more columns whose values match a primary or alternate key in some other
table.
In the following example, the TITLE table has a primary, alternate and foreign key:

The primary key, TITLE_ID contains the column TITLE ISBN, and uniquely identifies each book in the table.
The alternate key, TITLE_NAME, contains the columns TITLE NAME and TITLE TYPE, and enforces a
constraint that no two titles of the same type can have the same name.
The foreign key contains the column PUBLISHER ID and references the primary key column in the
Publisher table.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

119

1.3.4.1

Creating Primary Keys

A primary key is the primary identifier for a table, and is attached to one or more columns whose combined values
uniquely identify every row in the table. Every table must have a primary key.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of the table and click the Columns tab, which lists all the columns defined for the
table (see Columns (PDM) [page 103]).
2. Select the check box in the P column for one or more columns in the list to associate them with the primary
key.
3. [optional] Click the Keys tab and rename the key or select it and click the Properties tool to open its property
sheet.
4. Click OK to close the property sheet and return to the diagram.
In the following example, Employee number is the primary key for the table Employee, and each employee
must have a unique employee number:

1.3.4.1.1

Rebuilding Primary Keys

Rebuilding primary keys in a physical diagram updates primary keys for tables by creating primary keys for tables
that have no key and a single unique index. Rebuilding primary keys is useful when not all of the primary keys
could be reverse engineered from a database, or if you did not select the rebuild option for primary keys during
reverse engineering.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Rebuild Objects Rebuild Primary Keys
which lists all the tables in the current model.

120

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

to open the Rebuild Primary Keys dialog box,

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Note
To rebuild the primary keys in package, select the package from the list at the top of the tab. To rebuild the
primary keys in a sub-package, click the Include Sub-Packages tool, and then select a sub-package from
the dropdown list.
2. Select the tables containing the primary keys that you want to rebuild and then click OK.

1.3.4.2

Creating Alternate Keys

An alternate key is a key associated with one or more columns whose values uniquely identify every row in the
table, but which is not the primary key. For example, where the primary key for a table may be the employee id,
the alternate key might combine the first, middle, and last names of the employee. Each alternate key can
generate a unique index or a unique constraint in a target database.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of a table and select the Columns tab.
2. Select the column or columns to associate with the alternate key and click the Create Key tool.
The new key property sheet opens.
3. Enter a name for the key. Alternate keys are conventionally named AK<x>_<ColumnCodes> (for example
AK1_CUSNAME).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

121

4. [optional] Modify the default Constraint Name.

5. Click OK to complete the creation of your alternate key and return to the table property sheet.

Note
You can also create an alternative key using the Add a Row tool on the table property sheet Keys tab, click
the Properties tool to open its property sheet, and select the Columns tab to manually associate columns
with the key.

1.3.4.3

Creating Foreign Keys

A foreign key is a primary or alternate key migrates from another table. Foreign keys are generally migrated
automatically when you draw a reference from a child to a parent table.
The columns that are defined in a foreign key can also be user-specified at creation and changed at any time from
the Joins tab of the reference property sheet (see References (PDM) [page 195]). For information about automigration of foreign keys, see Automatic Reuse and Migration of Columns [page 200].

1.3.4.4

Key Properties

To view or edit a key's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields listed
here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 61:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add ster
eotypes to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Table

122

Specifies the name of the table where the key is defined.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Constraint name

Specifies the name of the key constraint. A primary key constraint is a named check that enforces
the uniqueness and the presence of values in a primary key column. PowerDesigner automatically
creates a default constraint name for a key, which you can modify. To return to the default click to
release the User-Defined button. You can use the following variables:

%AK% and %AKNAME% - Code and name of the alternate key.

%TABLE%, %PARENT%, %CHILD% - Code of the table, the parent table, and the child table.

%REFRCODE% and %REFRNAME% - Code and name of the reference.

For a complete list of PDM variables, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Defi
nition Files > PDM Variables and Macros
Primary key

Specifies that the key is the primary key of the table. There can be only one primary key in a table,
so selecting this key as the primary key will deselect any existing primary key.

Cluster

Specifies that the key constraint is a clustered constraint (for those DBMSs that support clustered
indexes).

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Columns - Lists the columns associated with the key. Use the Add Columns tool to associate additional
columns with the key.

1.3.5

Indexes (PDM)

An index is a data structure associated with one or more columns ordered by the column values. Indexes are
typically created for columns that you are frequently searched on to improve response times. Most types of index
are more effective when applied to columns with high cardinality.
For example, in an Author table, you might create an index for the primary key ID and another for the LastName
column, as it is regularly searched on, but you will probably not create an index for the BirthCity column, as it is
not often searched on.

Note
PowerDesigner supports the creation of indexes for materialized views, if your DBMS allows them (see
Materialized Views [page 131]).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

123

1.3.5.1

Creating Standard, Key, or Function-Based Indexes

You can create indexes by selecting columns on a table property sheet Columns tab and clicking the Create Index
tool.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of a table and select the Columns tab.
2. Select the column or columns on which to base the index and click the Create Index tool.
The index is created and its property sheet opens.
3. Enter a name for the index and then click the Columns tab.
4. PowerDesigner supports the creation of the following types of index:
Standard indexes are associated with one or more columns containing high-cardinality values that are
frequently searched on. Use the arrow buttons at the bottom of the list to reorder the columns in order of
descending cardinality.
Key indexes are associated with a primary, foreign, or alternate key and based on the same columns as
the key. Select the appropriate key from the Columns definition field above the list to empty the list and
replace it with the columns associated with the key.

Note
Key indexes are conventionally named after the table with a _PK, _FK, or AK suffix (for example,
Project_AK).
Function-based indexes [if supported by the DBMS] are populated with values derived from a function or
expression based on one or more columns, and provide an efficient mechanism for evaluating statements
that contain functions in their WHERE clauses. Click the Add a Row tool, then click in the Expression
column and click the ellipsis button to open the SQL Editor to specify an expression.
5. Select an ascending or descending sort order for each column using the list's Sort column.
6. Click OK to complete the creation of your index and return to the table property sheet.

Note
You can alternatively create an index using the Add a Row tool on the table property sheet Indexes tab, click
the Properties tool to open its property sheet, and select the Columns tab to manually associate columns
with the index.

124

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.5.2

Index Properties

To view or edit an index'sproperties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields listed
here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 62:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

[if supported by the DBMS] Specifies the user who is the owner of the object. This is usually its crea
tor. Use the tools to the right of the list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently
selected object.

Table

Specifies the table to which the index belongs.

Type

Specifies the type of index (if supported by your DBMS). For information about SAP IQ index types,
see Indexes (IQ) [page 575].

Unique

Specifies that the index cannot contain duplicate values.

Cluster

Specifies that the index is a clustered index. A table cannot have more than one clustered index.

Note
Clusters in Oracle 11 and higher are modeled as extended objects with a <<Cluster>> stereo
type (see Clusters (Oracle) [page 507]).

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Columns - Lists the columns with which the index is associated (see Creating Standard, Key, or FunctionBased Indexes [page 124]). Use the following tools to specify columns:
Table 63:
Tool

Description

N/A

Columns definition - Select the appropriate key to empty the list and replace it with the columns as
sociated with the key.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

125

Tool

Description
Add Columns - Choose columns from the table to add to the list.
Add / Insert a Row [if your DBMS supports function-based indexes] - Create a new row, then click in
the Expression column and click the ellipsis button to open the SQL Editor to specify an expression.
For example, to define an index to convert all names to lowercase to simplify searching, you could
enter an expression such as:

lower(SURNAME)

1.3.5.3

Rebuilding Indexes

You can rebuild indexes at any time to reflect any changes that you have made to primary keys, foreign keys, or
alternate keys in your model.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Rebuild Objects

Rebuild Indexes , and enter the appropriate options:

Table 64:
Option

Description

Primary key

Rebuilds primary key indexes. The field displays the naming convention for primary key indexes,
which is by default %TABLE%_PK. You can use the following variables:

%TABLE% - Generated code of the table. The generated code of a variable is the code de
fined in the object property sheet, but may be truncated if it contains characters not sup
ported by the DBMS.

Other keys

%TNAME%, %TCODE%, %TLABL% - Table name, code, and comment.

Rebuilds alternate key indexes. The field displays the naming convention for alternate key in
dexes, which is by default %AKEY%_AK.

Foreign key indexes

Rebuilds foreign key indexes. The field displays the naming convention for foreign key indexes,
which is by default %REFR%_FK. You can use the following variables:

126

%REFR%, %PARENT%, %CHILD% - Generated code of the reference, parent, and child table.

%PNAME%, %PCODE%, %PQUALIFIER% - Parent table name, code, and qualifier.

%CNAME%, %CCODE%, %CQUALIFIER% - Child table name or code, and qualifier.

%REFRNAME%, %REFRCODE% - Reference name or code.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Option

Description

Foreign key threshold

Specifies the minimum number of estimated records in a table (specified in the Number field in
the table property sheet) that are necessary before a foreign key index can be created. If the
Number field is empty, foreign key indexes are generated.

Mode

Specifies the type of rebuild. You can select:

Delete and Rebuild Delete and rebuild all indexes attached to primary, alternate, and for
eign keys.

Add missing indexes Preserve existing key indexes and add any missing key indexes.

2. [optional] Click the Selection tab to specify which tables you want to rebuild indexes for.
3. Click OK. If you selected the Delete and Rebuild mode, a confirmation box asks you to confirm your choice.
Click Yes to confirm the deletion and rebuild of the selected indexes.

1.3.6

Views (PDM)

A view is a query that provides access to all or a subset of the data in a table or multiple tables connected by joins.
Views do not copy the data from their underlying tables and are updated when data in those tables changes.
Views can reference other views, can order or filter data as necessary, and may be indistinguishable from tables
for users accessing them.

1.3.6.1

Creating a View

You can create a view populated with columns from selected tables and other views via the Tools menu.
Alternately, you can create an empty view from the Toolbox, Browser, or Model menu.

Procedure
1. [optional] Select one or more tables and views in the diagram. You can select multiple objects by holding
down the Shift key while you select them.
2. Select

Tools

Create View .

If you have not selected any tables or views, then a selection box opens, allowing you to select the objects to
be included in the view. Select the appropriate objects and then click OK.
A view symbol is created in the diagram, displaying all the columns in each of the tables and views selected for
the view. The names for the tables and views appear at the bottom of the view symbol.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

127

3. [optional] Edit the view's query to remove unwanted columns or otherwise modify the view (see View Queries
[page 129]).
Alternatively, you can create an empty view, which you should complete by specifying a query (see View
Queries [page 129]) in the following ways:
Use the View tool in the Toolbox.
Select

Model

Views

to access the List of Views, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

1.3.6.2

New

View .

View Properties

To view or edit a view's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property sheet
tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 65:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Type

Specifies the type of the view, where supported by your DBMS (see Materialized Views [page 131]
and Creating an XML Table or View [page 89]).

128

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property
Owner

Description
Specifies the user who is the owner of the object. This is usually its creator. Use the tools to the right
of the list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Usage

Dimensional type

Specifies how the view will be used. You can choose between:

Query only - Consultation only. The view cannot update tables.

Updatable - Consultation and update of underlying tables.

With Check options - Implements controls on view insertions.

Specifies the type of the view for purposes of creating star or snowflake schemas containing fact ta
bles and dimensions. You can choose between:

Fact - see Facts (PDM) [page 241]

Dimension - see Dimensions (PDM) [page 243]

Exclude - PowerDesigner will not consider the view when identifying or generating multidimen
sional objects.

You can instruct PowerDesigner to complete this field for you (see Identifying Fact and Dimension
Tables [page 238]). PowerDesigner's support for the generation of BusinessObjects universes (see
Generating an SAP BusinessObjects Universe [page 315]) and of facts and dimensions in a multidi
mensional diagram (see Generating Cubes [page 239]) depends on the value of this field.
Generate

Selects the view for generation to the database.

User-defined

By default, the view query is updated to reflect changes to model objects on which it is based. Select
ing this option freezes the view and protects your manual changes.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Columns - Lists the columns in the view based on the SELECT orders from the queries. You can modify
column properties in this list but to add or remove columns, you must modify the appropriate view query.
View column properties are initialized from the properties of their source columns. The read-only Expression
column specifies the qualified name of the view column.
Indexes - [materialized views] Lists the indexes defined on the materialized view (see Indexes (PDM) [page
123]).
SQL Query - Displays the SQL code for all the queries associated with the view. You can edit this code directly
in this tab or access the property sheets of individual queries (see View Queries [page 129]).
Triggers - [if supported by your DBMSs] Lists the triggers associated with the view (see Triggers (PDM) [page
134]. You can define a trigger to fire when one or more attributes of a table view column are modified.
Preview - Displays the SQL code to be generated for the view (see Previewing SQL Statements [page 298]).

1.3.6.3

View Queries

You can edit queries associated with a view from the SQL Query tab of the view property sheet.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

129

Any number of queries may be associated with a view, and the totality of their SQL statements is shown in this
tab, linked by any of the standard SQL constructs, such as Union, etc.
You can edit the code shown in the SQL Query tab:
Directly in the tab.
Click the Edit with SQL Editor tool to edit the code in the PowerDesigner SQL Editor (see Writing SQL Code in
PowerDesigner [page 295]).
Click the Edit with tool (CTRL+E) to open the code in your favorite editor.
Any edits you make in this tab will propagate to the property sheets of the associated individual queries, which are
available from the Query list at the bottom of the tab. Use the tools to the right of this list to create a new query
(with the appropriate linking construct), delete the selected query, or open the property sheet of the selected
query.
The following SQL constructs are available (if supported by your DBMS) for linking queries:
Table 66:
Construct

Result

Example

Union [default]

Displays all the data retrieved by both the queries, except where re

SELECT 1: ABC SELECT 2:

sults are repeated.

BCD Result: ABCD

130

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Construct

Result

Example

Union All

Displays all the data retrieved by both the queries, including repeated

SELECT 1: ABC SELECT 2:

results.

BCD Result: ABCBCD

Displays only the data retrieved by both the queries.

SELECT 1: ABC SELECT 2:

Intersect

BCD Result: BC
Minus

Displays only the data retrieved by one or other of the queries, but not

SELECT 1: ABC SELECT 2:

by both.

BCD Result: AD

The following tabs are available:

SQL tab - displays the SQL code for the query. You can edit the query directly in this tab or in PowerDesigner's
built-in SQL Editor (see Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page 295]) by clicking the Edit with SQL Editor
tool or in an external editor by clicking the Edit with tool (CTRL+E). Any edits you make in this tab will
propagate to the query's other tabs and the SQL Query tab of the parent view, as changes made in other tabs
will propagate here and to the parent view.
Tables tab - lists the tables in the FROM clause.You can add or delete tables in the list, and reorder the list
using the arrows at the bottom of the tab. For each line, select a table or click the elipsis button to enter a
more complex expression in the SQL Editor and, optionally, enter an alias in the Alias column. For the second
and subsequent lines in the list you can specify an appropriate join condition keyword, and then specify the
join condition.
Columns tab - lists the columns in the SELECT clause. You can add or delete columns in the list, specify aliases
for them, and reorder the list using the arrows at the bottom of the tab.
Where tab - lists the expressions in the WHERE clause.You can add or delete expressions in the list, and reorder
the list using the arrows at the bottom of the tab. For each line, select a column in each of the two Expression
columns (or click the ellipsis button to specify a more complex expression), and select the appropriate
operator between them. You can optionally enter a prefix and suffix.
Group By tab - lists the columns in the GROUP BY clause. You can add or delete columns in the list, and
reorder the list using the arrows at the bottom of the tab.
Having tab - lists the expressions in the HAVING clause. You can add or delete expressions in the list, and
reorder the list using the arrows at the bottom of the tab. For each line, select a column in each of the two
Expression columns (or click the ellipsis button to specify a more complex expression), and select the
appropriate operator between them. You can optionally enter a prefix and suffix.
Order By tab - lists the columns in the ORDER BY clause. You can add or delete columns in the list, and reorder
the list using the arrows at the bottom of the tab. For each line, select a column (or click the ellipsis button to
specify a more complex expression), and select ASC or DESC for the sort direction.

1.3.6.4

Materialized Views

A materialized view is a table containing the results of a query. PowerDesigner supports materialized views for the
DB2, HP Neoview, Netezza, Oracle, and SQL Anywhere DBMS families.
Materialized views are supported in the following ways:
DB2 - Select materialized query table (or for earlier versions, summary table) in the Type list on the
General tab of a view property sheet.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

131

 HP Neoview - Use the List of Materialized Views (available from

Netezza - Use the List of Materialized Views (available from
Oracle - Use the List of Materialized Views (available from

Model

Model
Model

Materialized Views ).

Materialized Views ).
Materialized Views ).

SQL Anywhere - Select Materialized View in the Type list on the General tab of a view property sheet to
display the DB space field, and specify the dbspace in which to create the materialized view. The default is the
current dbspace.

1.3.6.5

Showing View Dependencies using Traceability Links

You can use traceability links to make the relationships between views and tables clearer. These links are not
interpreted and checked by PowerDesigner.
In the following example, the Book Sales view is shown as depending on the Title and Sale tables via two
traceability links with their type set to depends on:

For detailed information about traceability links, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects > Traceability Links.

132

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.6.6

Defining a Generation Order for Views

You can define the order of the generation of views by using traceability links with a type of DBCreateAfter. The
view from which you start the traceability link is dependent on the view you link it to, and this influent view will be
generated before the dependent view.

Context
For example you create the view DEPARTMENT STORE from the table STORE, and then another view called
COMPUTER COUNTER from the view DEPARTMENT STORE to show only part of the department store offer.
By default, views are generated in alphabetical order, so the generation of COMPUTER COUNTER will fail since the
view DEPARTMENT STORE on which it depends is not yet generated. To bypass this problem, you should create a
traceability link of type <<DBCreateAfter>> from COMPUTER COUNTER to DEPARTMENT STORE to ensure that
DEPARTMENT STORE is generated before COMPUTER COUNTER:

Note
There is a model check to warn you if you create a reflexive or circular set of traceability links of type
DBCreateAfter. If you generate without correcting this error, views will be generated in alphabetical order,
without taking into account the generation order.

Procedure
1. Select the Traceability Links tool in the toolbox.
2. Click inside the dependent view and, while holding down the mouse button, drag the cursor into the influent
view. Release the mouse button.
3. Double-click the traceability link to open the property sheet of the dependent object at the Traceability Links
tab.
The influent view is displayed in the Linked Object column.
4. Click in the Link Type column, click the down arrow and select DBCreateAfter.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

133

5. Click OK to close the property sheet and return to your model.

Note
You can, alternatively, create DBCreateAfter traceability links directly on the Traceability Links tab (see
Defining a Generation Order for Stored Procedures [page 154]). For detailed information about
traceability links, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Objects > Traceability Links.

1.3.7

Triggers (PDM)

A trigger is a segment of SQL code associated with a table or a view, which is invoked automatically whenever
there is an attempt to modify data in the associated table or view with an insert, delete, or update command. A
DBMS trigger is not associated with any table or view, and fires on modifications to the database structure itself,
such as the creation or dropping of a table or events like startup, shutdown, login etc. You can use triggers to
enforce referential integrity (where declarative constraints are not sufficient) and to implement sequences for
columns.
In the PowerDesigner interface, table and view triggers are called simply triggers, while DDL or database triggers
are called DBMS triggers. View and DBMS triggers are not supported by all DBMSs.
PowerDesigner provides trigger templates to generate triggers (see Trigger Templates [page 142]) and template
items, which are reusable blocks of SQL script that can be inserted into triggers or trigger templates (see Trigger
Template Items [page 144]) and you can modify these templates and items and create your own.

134

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.7.1

Creating a Table or View Trigger

You can create a trigger for a table from its property sheet and base it on a PowerDesigner template, or on a
template of your own, or write it from scratch.

Procedure
1. Open the table or view property sheet, and then click the Triggers tab.
2. Click the Add a Row tool to create a new trigger, enter a name and code, and then click the Properties tool to
open its property sheet.
3. Click the Definition tab, and select a trigger template (see Trigger Templates [page 142]) from the Template
list. The time and event fields will be set and the template code copied into the definition editor.

Note
You can create a trigger by entering code by hand, but we recommend that you use a template as this will
simplify reuse of your code and make your triggers more portable.
4. [optional] Modify the trigger definition code. You can insert trigger template items (see Trigger Template
Items [page 144]), use PDM variables and macros and various other tools available from the toolbar (see
Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page 295]).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

135

If you edit the code, then the trigger will be marked as user-defined and will be excluded from most forms of
rebuilding (see Rebuilding Triggers [page 141]).
5. Click OK to return to your model.

1.3.7.2

Creating Triggers from References

You can create triggers to enforce referential integrity individually or instruct PowerDesigner to create them by
default.

Procedure
1. Create a reference between two tables, and then double click the reference symbol to open its property sheet.
2. Click the Integrity tab, and then select Trigger from the Implementation list.
3. Specify the form of Update and Delete constraints using the radio buttons (see Reference Properties [page
196]), and then click OK to return to the diagram.
4. If you have set the Automatically rebuild triggers model option (see Reference Model Options [page 20],) then
triggers will have been created automatically in the parent and child tables. To verify this open the table
property sheet and click the Triggers tab. If the triggers are not present, you will need to rebuild your triggers
manually (see Rebuilding Triggers [page 141]).

Note
To instruct PowerDesigner to implement referential integrity between tables using triggers by default
whenever you create a reference, select Tools Model Options , click
in the Category list, select Trigger in the Default implementation list.

1.3.7.3

Model Settings

Reference

Creating a DBMS Trigger

DBMS triggers are not associated with any table or view. You create them directly under the model.

Context
You can create a DBMS trigger in any of the following ways:
Select
tool

Model

Triggers

DBMS Triggers

to access the List of DBMS Triggers, and click the Add a Row

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

DBMS Trigger

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

136

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.7.4

Trigger and DBMS Trigger Properties

To view or edit a trigger's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 67:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

Specifies the user who is the owner of the object. This is usually its creator. Use the tools to the right
of the list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Table

[Table or view triggers only] Specifies the table to which the trigger belongs.

Scope

[DBMS triggers only] Specifies the scope of the DBMS trigger. You can choose either Schema or Da
tabase, and this choice will control the types of events that you can select in the DBMS trigger defini
tion.

Generate

Specifies to generate the trigger.

User-defined

[Read-only] Specifies that the trigger definition has been modified. You modify a trigger definition
when you change the trigger template script in the Definition tab of the trigger

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

137

Definition Tab
This tab allows you to enter code for the trigger. For information about the tools available on the toolbar, see
Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page 295]. The following properties are available:
Table 68:
Property

Description

Template

Specifies the template on which the trigger is based (see Trigger Templates [page 142]). The Userdefined button is automatically depressed when you modify the definition of a trigger. Click the button
to release it and restore the template trigger definition.

Time

Specifies when the trigger will fire in relation to the associated event. The content of the list depends
on the values defined in the trigger template and in the Time entry in the Trigger category of the
DBMS.

Event

Specifies the event that will cause the trigger to fire. Click the ellipsis tool to the right of this field to
select multiple events (see Defining Triggers with Multiple Events [page 140])
For table and view triggers, this field is a list, the content of which depends on the values defined in the
trigger template and in the Event entry in the Trigger category of the DBMS. You can add your own
events to this entry and they will appear in this list.
For DBMS triggers, this field allows you to enter any text.

Order

[table and view triggers only] Specifies the firing order of trigger.

The following tabs are also available:

Template Items - lists the trigger template items available for use in the trigger definition (see Trigger
Template Items [page 144]).
Preview - displays the SQL code that will be generated for the trigger (see Previewing SQL Statements [page
298]).

1.3.7.5

Trigger Naming Conventions

The pre-defined trigger templates that ship with PowerDesigner indicate naming conventions for the trigger
scripts that it generates. The naming convention consists of a prefix indicating the trigger type followed by the
table code.

Context
The default naming conventions include a variable (%L:TABLE). The name of the resulting trigger script replaces
this variable with a lower-case table code. For example, a resulting trigger script may have the name ti_employee.
You can change the trigger naming convention in PowerDesigner pre-defined DBMS trigger templates from the
Trigger Templates tab of the DBMS property sheet.

138

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Procedure
1. Select Database Edit Current DBMS
click the Trigger Template tab.

to open the DBMS definition file in the Resource Editor, and then

2. Click a trigger template in the list, and then click the Properties tool to open its property sheet.
3. Type a new trigger name in the Trigger Name text box at the bottom of the tab.
For example, mytempl_%TABLE%
4. Click OK in each of the dialog boxes.

1.3.7.6

Calling a Related Procedure in a Trigger Template

Some target databases do not accept code within a trigger statement. For these databases, a trigger template
can call a related procedure as a parameter, which is defined in a procedure template. In these cases, procedure
templates are listed in the list of trigger templates.

Example
Informix does not accept code in trigger templates. The template InsertTrigger calls the procedure in the form
of the variable %PROC%, as follows:
-- Insert trigger "[%QUALIFIER%]%TRIGGER%" for table "[%QUALIFIER%]%TABLE%"
create trigger [%QUALIFIER%]%TRIGGER% insert on [%QUALIFIER%]%TABLE%
referencing new as new_ins
for each row (execute procedure %PROC%(.FKCOLN("new_ins.%COLUMN%", "", ",", "));")
/
The template InsertProc defines the procedure, as follows:
-- Insert procedure "%PROC%" for table "[%QUALIFIER%]%TABLE%"
create procedure %PROC%(.FKCOLN("new_%.14L:COLUMN% %COLTYPE%", "", ",", ")")
.DeclInsertChildParentExist
.DeclInsertTooManyChildren
define errno
integer;
define errmsg char(255);
define numrows
integer;
.InsertChildParentExist
.InsertTooManyChildren
end procedure;
/

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

139

1.3.7.7

Indicating Trigger Order for Multiple Triggers

Some DBMSs allow you to have multiple triggers for the same insert, update, or delete event at the same time.
You can indicate the order in which each trigger within the group fires.

Context
In the following example, a company is considering candidates for various positions, and must ensure that new
employees are offered a salary that is within the range of others working in the same field, and less than their
prospective manager.
The EMPLOYEE table contains two BeforeInsert triggers to perform these tests:
create trigger tibTestSalry1 before insert order 1 on EMPLOYEE
referencing new as new_ins for each row
begin
[Trigger code]
end
create trigger tibTestSalry2 before insert order 2 on EMPLOYEE
begin
[Trigger code]
end

Procedure
1. Open the trigger property sheet and click the Definition tab.
2. Select a number from the Order list to indicate the position in which the trigger fires.
3. Click OK to return to your model.

1.3.7.8

Defining Triggers with Multiple Events

Some DBMSs support multiple events on triggers. If such is the case, the Ellipsis button to the right of the Event
box on the trigger definition tab is available.
You can click the Ellipsis button to open the Multiple Events Selection box. If you select several events and click
OK, the different events will be displayed in the Event box, separated by the appropriate delimiter.

140

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.7.9

Rebuilding Triggers

PowerDesigner can rebuild triggers to ensure that they are attached to all tables joined by references to ensure
referential integrity. You can instruct PowerDesigner to automatically rebuild triggers whenever a relevant change
is made and you can manually rebuild triggers at any time.

Context
The Rebuild Triggers function creates new triggers based on template items that correspond to trigger referential
integrity defined for references and sequence implementation for columns.
To instruct PowerDesigner to automatically rebuild triggers, select

Tools

Model Options , click

Model

Settings Trigger , select Automatically rebuild triggers, and click OK. PowerDesigner rebuilds all triggers and
will, from now on, rebuild triggers whenever you make a relevant change in the model.
To rebuild triggers manually:

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Rebuild Objects

Rebuild Triggers

2. Specify a rebuild mode. You can choose between:

Delete and Rebuild all triggers attached to templates are deleted and rebuilt, including those to which
you have made modifications
Preserve only those triggers attached to templates that have not been modified are deleted and rebuilt.
Any triggers that you have modified are preserved.
3. The Trigger selection box shows an expandable tree view of trigger types. Expand the tree and select the
types to rebuild. There are three levels in this tree:
All trigger types supported by the current DBMS
All trigger templates corresponding to the trigger types
All template items defined for each trigger template
For example, in the list below, the two template items InsertChildParentExist and
InsertTooManyChildren are used in the BeforeInsertTrigger template that is, in turn, used in all
triggers with a time of Before and an event type of Insert:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

141

4. [optional] Click the Error Messages tab to define the types of error messages to generate (see Generating a
User-Defined Error Message [page 156]).
5. [optional] Click the Selection tab to specify which tables to rebuild the triggers for.
6. Click OK to begin the rebuild process.
Progress is shown in the Output window. You can view the triggers that have been created from the Triggers
tab of the table property sheet, or from the List of Triggers.

Note
If you change the target DBMS family, for example from Oracle to IBM DB2, triggers are automatically
rebuilt.
For information about rebuilding dependencies between triggers and other objects, see Tracing Trigger and
Procedure Dependencies [page 160].

1.3.7.10

Trigger Templates

PowerDesigner trigger templates allow you to write trigger code in a modular reusable fashion. We provide basic
templates for before, after, and with insert, update, and delete events and for other types of triggers
where supported by the DBMS. You can modify the code specified in these templates or create your own
templates in the DBMS definition file or in your model.
To apply a trigger template to your trigger definition, select the template from the list on the trigger property
sheet Definition tab (see Trigger and DBMS Trigger Properties [page 137]).

142

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

To review or modify the provided trigger templates, select Database

Trigger Templates tab. You cannot delete or rename these templates.

Edit Current DBMS , and then click the

Caution
The resource files provided with PowerDesigner inside the Program Files folder cannot be modified directly.
To create a copy for editing, use the New tool on the resource file list, and save it in another location. To include
resource files from different locations for use in your models, use the Path tool on the resource file list.
To create a new template, click the Create from Trigger Template tool (to copy the code of an existing template to
your new template) or the Add a Row tool (to start from scratch).

Note
You can, alternatively, create trigger templates in your model by selecting

Model

Triggers

Trigger

Templates , but these templates will not be accessible from other models.

Trigger Template Properties

The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 69:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.

DBMS

Specifies the parent DBMS.

Applies to

[for DBMSs supporting multiple types of triggers] Specifies whether the template can be applied
to table, view, or DBMS triggers.

Trigger time

Specifies when triggers based on the template will fire in relation to their associated event.

Trigger event

Specifies the event that will cause the firing of triggers based on the template.

Trigger name

Specifies the conventions for naming triggers based on the template.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

143

 Definition - Contains a field for entering the trigger code for the template.You can use trigger template items,
PDM variables and macros and other tools available from the toolbar (see Writing SQL Code in
PowerDesigner [page 295]).
Template Items - Lists the template items (see Trigger Template Items [page 144]) that are defined in the
trigger template and that will be generated when a trigger is generated from the template.

Note
If you delete a template item from this list, it is not deleted from the template definition, but is excluded
from generation when rebuilding triggers. PowerDesigner-provided template items listed on this tab are
generated in a trigger if they match the trigger implemented referential integrity defined for a reference
attached to the table. User-created template items are always generated regardless of trigger referential
integrity constraints.

1.3.7.11

Trigger Template Items

Trigger template items are named reusable blocks of script that can be inserted into triggers or trigger templates.
In a generated trigger script, a template item calls a macro that implements a trigger referential integrity
constraint or does any other updating work on tables in the database.
To insert a trigger template item into your trigger or template definition, click the Add Trigger Item from Model or
Add Trigger Item from DBMS tool, select the items from the list and click OK. The item is inserted with a dot
followed by its name, and is also added to the list on the Template Items tab. For example, the following script
contains two template items InsertChildParentExist and InsertTooManyChildren:
/* Before insert trigger "%TRIGGER%" for table "[%QUALIFIER%]%TABLE%" */
create trigger %TRIGGER% before insert order %ORDER% on [%QUALIFIER%]%TABLE%
referencing new as new_ins for each row
begin
declare user_defined_exception exception for SQLSTATE '99999';
declare found integer;
.InsertChildParentExist
.InsertTooManyChildren
end
/

Note
Certain DBMSs require that a cursor and variables are declared for each template item before the template
item name is used in the script. You can use the following format to declare a template item:
.Decl<template item name>
For example, the trigger definition for Oracle 8 declares and then inserts the .InsertChildParentExist
template item:
-- Before insert trigger "[%QUALIFIER%]%TRIGGER%" for table "[%QUALIFIER%]%TABLE
%"
create trigger [%QUALIFIER%]%TRIGGER% before insert
on [%QUALIFIER%]%TABLE% for each row
declare
integrity_error exception;
errno
integer;

144

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

errmsg
char(200);
dummy
integer;
found
boolean;
.DeclInsertChildParentExist
begin
.InsertChildParentExist
-- Errors handling
exception
when integrity_error then
raise_application_error(errno, errmsg);
end;
/

To review or modify the provided trigger template items, select Database

the Trigger Template Items tab. You cannot delete or rename these items.

Edit Current DBMS , and then click

Caution
The resource files provided with PowerDesigner inside the Program Files folder cannot be modified directly.
To create a copy for editing, use the New tool on the resource file list, and save it in another location. To include
resource files from different locations for use in your models, use the Path tool on the resource file list.
To create a new template item, click the Create from DBMS Trigger Item tool (to copy the code of an existing item
to your new item) or the Add a Row tool (to start from scratch).

Note
You can, alternatively, create trigger template items in your model by selecting

Model

Triggers

Trigger

Template Items , but these templates will not be accessible from other models.

Trigger Template Item Properties

The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 70:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally in
clude spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object.
By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the
model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the
Code field.

DBMS

Specifies the parent DBMS.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

145

 Definition - Contains a field for entering the trigger code for the item.You can use PDM variables and macros
and other tools available from the toolbar (see Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page 295]).
Declaration - Contains a field for entering the declaration for the item in trigger scripts.

1.3.7.11.1

PowerDesigner Pre-Defined Trigger Template Items

PowerDesigner provides pre-defined template items for the trigger templates defined in each DBMS. The Rebuild
Triggers function uses both pre-defined and user-defined trigger templates to automatically create triggers for
selected tables.
In the pre-defined trigger templates, each pre-defined template item corresponds to a referential integrity
constraint. Although a pre-defined template item is defined in a trigger template, it is only generated in a trigger
script if it implements the trigger referential integrity defined for a reference. The item is available for generation if
it is present on the Template Items tab of a trigger property sheet and will be generated if it is present on the
Template Items tab of a trigger template property sheet.

Insert Constraints
The template items below implement referential integrity in insert trigger templates.
Table 71:
Template item

Integrity constraint

Description

DeclInsertChildParentExist
InsertChildParentExist

Mandatory parent

Parent must exist when insert

DeclInsertTooManyChildren
InsertTooManyChildren

Cannot exceed maximum car

Cannot insert a child if maxi

dinality constraint

mum cardinality has been

ing a child

reached

DeclInsertSequenceColumn
InsertSequenceColumn

Select value in sequence list for

Select a value for the column

column

from a list of sequences

Update Constraints
The template items below implement referential integrity in update trigger templates.

146

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Table 72:
Template item

Integrity constraint

Description

DeclUpdateChildParentExist

Mandatory parent

Parent must exist when updat

ing a child

UpdateChildParentExist
DeclUpdateChildChangeParent

Change parent not allowed

child

UpdateChildChangeParent
DeclUpdateParentRestrict

Restrict on update

Cascade on update

Modify parent code in all chil

dren

UpdateParentCascade
DeclUpdateChangeColumn

Cannot modify parent if child

exists

UpdateParentRestrict
DeclUpdateParentCascade

Cannot modify parent code in

Non-modifiable column

Cannot modify column

Set null on update

Set parent code to null in all

UpdateChangeColumn
DeclUpdateParentSetNull

children

UpdateParentSetNull
DeclUpdateParentSetDefault

Set default on update

children

UpdateParentSetDefault
DeclUpdateTooManyChildren
UpdateTooManyChildren

Set parent code to default in all

Cannot exceed maximum

Cannot update a child if maxi

cardinality constraint

mum cardinality has been

reached

Delete Constraints
The template items below implement referential integrity in delete trigger templates.
Table 73:
Template item

Integrity constraint

Description

DeclDeleteParentRestrict

Restrict on delete

Cannot delete parent if child

exists

DeleteParentRestrict
DeclDeleteParentCascade
DeleteParentCascade

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Cascade on delete

Delete parent code in all chil

dren

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

147

Template item

Integrity constraint

Description

DeclDeleteParentSetNull

Set null on delete

Delete in parent sets child to

null

DeleteParentSetNull
DeclDeleteParentSetDefault

Set default on delete

Delete in parent sets child to

default

DeleteParentSetDefault

Constraint Messages
You can insert the following template items in any trigger template. They generate error messages that indicate
the violation of an integrity constraint.
Table 74:
Template item

Description

UseErrorMsgText

Error handling without a message table

UseErrorMsgTable

Error handling with a message table

1.3.7.12

Creating SQL/XML Queries with the Wizard

You can use the SQL/XML Wizard to insert a SQL/XML query in the definition of a trigger, stored procedure, or
function to store or retrieve data, in an XML format, from relational databases supporting SQL/XML. The wizard,
allows you to select tables and views from a PDM to build a mapped XML model. This XML model (which does not
appear in the workspace) is used to generate SQL/XML queries from global elements.

Procedure
1. Open the trigger property sheet, click the Definition tab and position the cursor in the trigger definition where
you want to insert the SQL/XML query:

148

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2. Click the SQL/XML Wizard tool to launch the wizard at the Tables and Views Selection page:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

149

3. Select the tables and views that you want to include in your query and click Next to go to the XML Hierarchy
Design page:

On this tab, you construct the XML hierarchy that you want to generate:
The left-hand pane lists the tables and views that you have selected
The right-hand pane displays the XML hierarchy to be generated, containing a default root element.
4. You can build your XML hierarchy using the following techniques:
Specify whether columns will be generated as elements or attributes by using the radio buttons above the
panes.
Drag and drop a table, view, or column onto a node in the XML hierarchy. You must respect the PDM
hierarchy: You cannot create an XML hierarchy between two elements if there is no reference between
their corresponding tables, and a parent table cannot be placed beneath one of its children.
Right-click a table, view, or column and select Add from the contextual menu to add it to the last selected
node in the XML hierarchy.
Rename an element or attribute by clicking its node and typing a new name.
Create new elements and attributes not in the PDM, and Sequence, Choice and All group particles, by
right-clicking an XML node and selecting

New

<object>

from the contextual menu.

Delete an XML node by right-clicking it and selecting Delete from the contextual menu.
5. When you have finished building your hierarchy, click Next to go to the Query tab:

150

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

6. Review your query and click Back, if necessary, to make revisions in your hierarchy. When you are satisfied,
click Finish to close the wizard and insert the SQL/XML query in the trigger definition

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

151

7. [optional] Add code to complete the SQL/XML query:

152

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

8. Click OK to close the trigger property sheet:

1.3.7.13

Generating Triggers and Procedures

You can create or modify database triggers to a script or to a live database connection.

Procedure
1. Select Database Generate Database to open the Database Generation window, and specify the
standard options, including whether you want to generate to a script or to a live database connection.
For detailed information about using this window, see the Generating a Database from a PDM [page 304].
2. Select "Triggers & Procedures (with Permissions)" from the Settings set list in the Quick Launch groupbox at
the bottom of the window. This settings set specifies standard options for generating triggers and
procedures.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

153

or:
Click the Options tab and click on Trigger in the left-hand pane to display the trigger generation options.
Change the default options as appropriate.
For detailed information about settings sets, see Quick Launch Selection and Settings Sets [page 313].
3. [optional] Click the Selection tab and select the Table or Procedure subtab at the bottom of the tab. Select the
tables or procedures that you want to generate for. Note that if you want to generate a trigger script for tables
owned by a particular owner, you can select an owner from the Owner list.
4. Click OK to begin the generation.

1.3.7.13.1

Defining a Generation Order for Stored Procedures

You can define the order of the generation of stored procedures by using traceability links with a type of
DBCreateAfter. The procedure from which you start the traceability link is dependent on the procedure you link it
to, and this influent procedure will be generated before the dependent procedure.

Context
For example, a publisher may decide to sell certain books at a reduced rate (15%) when a customer's order is
above 10 000$. The GENERAL CHECK stored procedure verifies orders globally by checking availability, the order
amount, if a discount rate is required, and so on. This procedure calls the DISCOUNT CALC procedure to calculate
the 15% discount rate. Consequently, DISCOUNT CALC must be generated before GENERAL CHECK, and you can
enforce this by creating a traceability link of type DBCreateAfter from GENERAL CHECK to DISCOUNT CALC.

Note
There is a model check to warn you if you create a reflexive or circular set of traceability links of type
DBCreateAfter. If generate without correcting this error, procedures will be generated in alphabetical order,
without taking into account the generation order.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of the dependent stored procedure and click the Traceability Links tab.
2. Click the Add Objects tool, click the Procedure sub-tab in the Add Object selection dialog, select the influent
stored procedure, and click OK.
3. Click in the Link Type column, click the down arrow and select DBCreateAfter.

154

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

4. Click OK to close the property sheet and return to your model.

Note
You can also create DBCreateAfter traceability links using the Traceability Links tool (see Defining a
Generation Order for Views [page 133]). For detailed information about traceability links, see Core Features
Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Objects > Traceability Links.

1.3.7.13.2

Creating User-Defined Error Messages

You can create a message table in your database to store user-defined error messages. When you select trigger
generation parameters, you can choose to generate an error message from this table.

Procedure
1. Create a table with columns to store the following information:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

155

Table 75:
Column to store...

Description

Error number

Number of the error message that is referenced in the trigger script

Message text

Text of message

2. Generate the table in your database.

3. Select

Database

Execute SQL .

4. Select a data source, fill in connection parameters, and click Connect.

An SQL query editor box is displayed.
5. Enter an SQL statement to insert a message number and text in the appropriate columns. For example:
insert into table values (error number,'error message')
insert into ERR_MSG values (1004,'The value that you are trying to insert does
not exist in the referenced table')
6. Click Execute.
A message box tells you that the command has been successfully executed.
7. Click OK to return to the SQL query dialog.
8. Click Close.

1.3.7.13.2.1

Generating a User-Defined Error Message

You can choose to generate a user-defined error message from the trigger generation parameters box.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Rebuild Objects

Rebuild Triggers .

2. Click the Error Messages tab, and select the User-defined radio button.
3. Enter the name of the table that contains the error message, the name of the column that contains the error
number, and the name of the column that contains the error message text.

156

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

4. Click the General tab and select the mode and triggers to create.
5. Click the Selection tab and select the tables for which you want to create triggers.
For more information on rebuilding triggers, see Rebuilding Triggers [page 141].
6. Click OK.
The trigger rebuilding process is shown in the Output window.
7. Select Database Generate Database , select generation parameters as required (see Generating
Triggers and Procedures [page 153]), and click OK.

1.3.8

Stored Procedures and Functions (PDM)

You can define stored procedures and functions for any DBMS that supports them.
A stored procedure is a precompiled collection of SQL statements stored under a name and processed as a unit.
Stored procedures are stored within a database; can be executed with one call from an application; and allow
user-declared variables, conditional execution, and other programming features.
The use of stored procedures can be helpful in controlling access to data (end-users may enter or change data but
do not write procedures), preserving data integrity (information is entered in a consistent manner), and improving
productivity (statements in a stored procedure only need to be written one time).
A user-defined function is a form of procedure that returns a value to the calling environment for use in queries
and other SQL statements.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

157

1.3.8.1

Creating a Stored Procedure or Function

You can create a stored procedure or function from a table property sheet or from the Toolbox, Browser, or Model
menu.

Context
Use the Procedure tool in the diagram Toolbox.
Open the Procedures tab in the property sheet of a table, and click the Add a Row tool.
Select

Model

Procedures

to access the List of Procedures, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

Procedure .

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.
You can create a procedure based on one of the PowerDesigner templates or on a template of your own.

Procedure
1. Double-click a table symbol to open its property sheet, and then click the Procedures tab.
2. Click the Add a Row tool to create a new procedure, and type a name and code.
3. Click Apply to commit the creation of the new procedure, and then click the Properties tool to open its
property sheet.
4. Click the Definition tab:

158

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

5. [optional] Select a procedure template from the Template list (see Procedure Templates (PDM) [page 167]).
6. Modify the procedure definition code. You can use PDM variables and macros and various other tools
available from the toolbar (see Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page 295]).
7. You can also modify the procedure's other properties. For a full list of the properties available, see Procedure
Properties [page 159].
8. Click OK in each of the dialog boxes.

Results

Note
When using the PowerDesigner Eclipse plug-in, you can right-click a procedure in the Browser or diagram and
select Edit in SQL Editor from the contextual menu to open it in the Eclipse SQL Editor. You can optionally
connect to your database in order to obtain auto-completion for table names. The procedure definition is
added to the Generated SQL Files list in the Workspace Navigator.

1.3.8.2

Procedure Properties

To view or edit a procedure's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 76:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

Specifies the name of the procedure owner.

Table

Specifies the table to which the procedure is attached. Use the tools to the right of the list to create,
browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

159

Property

Description

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Definition - allows you to enter the SQL code for the procedure. For information about the tools available, see
Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page 295].

1.3.8.3

Tracing Trigger and Procedure Dependencies

When you write a trigger or procedure, PowerDesigner automatically creates dependencies to any table, view,
procedure, or database package referenced in the code. These dependencies are taken into account when
performing an impact analysis prior to deleting the trigger or procedure or objects on which they depend. For
procedures, if the procedure has a symbol in your diagram, then any dependencies will be shown graphically by
way of arrows linking the procedure to these objects.
The diagram below shows a procedure, ProcChangeLocation, which is dependent on a number of other objects:

Its Traceability Links tab lists the objects upon which it depends, and the link type of DBCreateAfter
(computed) shows that PowerDesigner has determined that it can only be created after these objects:

160

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

The Employee table Dependencies tab shows that ProcChangeLocation is dependent upon it, and if you were
to perform an impact analysis prior to deleting the Employee table, you would be warned of the procedure's
dependency on it.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

161

1.3.8.3.1

Creating Procedure Dependencies Manually

Since procedures have diagram symbols, you can manually add dependencies for them using the Traceability
Links tool in the toolbox.
In the diagram below, ProcChangeLocation has a dependency on a new procedure, ProcOccupancy:

162

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Since ProcOccupancy is not directly referenced in ProcChangeLocation, you must manually set the type of the
link to DBCreateAfter on the Traceability Links tab of the ProcChangeLocation property sheet:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

163

1.3.8.3.2

Rebuilding Trigger and Procedure Dependencies

Trigger and procedure dependencies are rebuilt automatically after the following actions:

Context
Importing a PDM created with a former version of PowerDesigner
Reverse engineering a database into a PDM
Merging PDMs
You can also manually rebuild trigger and procedure dependencies at any time.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Rebuild Objects
Dependencies window.

Rebuild Triggers and Procedures Dependencies

to open the Procedures

2. Specify a rebuild mode for each of Procedures and Triggers. You can choose between the following options:
Delete and Rebuild all triggers and/or procedures attached to templates are deleted and rebuilt,
including those to which you have made modifications
Preserve only those triggers and/or procedures attached to templates that have not been modified are
deleted and rebuilt. Any triggers and/or procedures that you have modified are preserved.

164

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

3. [optional] Click the Selection tab and specify the tables, views, procedures, and (for Oracle only) database
packages for which you want to rebuild dependencies. By default all are selected.
4. Click OK to begin the rebuild process.

1.3.8.4

Attaching a Stored Procedure to a Table

You can attach a stored procedure to a table when your current DBMS supports stored procedures. This feature
lets you update the table or retrieve information from this table.

Context
For example, the stored procedure TABLE_ADDROW can be attached to a table in which you need to insert rows.
When you generate an OOM from a PDM, the procedures attached to a table become operations with the
<<procedure>> stereotype in the generated class. By attaching procedures to tables, you are able to define class
operations in the generated OOM.
When you generate a PDM from an OOM, class operations with the <<procedure>> stereotype become stored
procedures attached to the generated table. The operation body is generated as a comment in the procedure
definition.
You can attach a table to a procedure from the property sheet of a procedure or the property sheet of a table.

Procedure
1. Open the table property sheet and click the Procedures tab.
2. Click the Add Objects tool to open a selection box, choose the the stored procedure you want to attach to the
table and click OK.
The stored procedure is displayed in the list of stored procedures.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

165

3. Click OK.

1.3.8.4.1

Rebuilding Procedures Attached to Tables

You can rebuild procedures attached to tables at any time.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Rebuild Objects
Procedures window.

166

Rebuild Table Stored Procedures

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

to open the Rebuild Table Stored

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2. Specify a rebuild mode. You can choose between the following options:
Delete and Rebuild all procedures attached to tables are deleted and rebuilt
Add missing table stored procedures adds procedures to any selected tables that do not presently have
them.
3. [optional] Click the Selection tab to specify for which tables you want to rebuild stored procedures.
4. Click OK to begin the rebuild process.

1.3.8.5

Procedure Templates (PDM)

PowerDesigner procedure templates allow you to write table procedures in a modular reusable fashion. We
provide basic templates for insert, select, update, and delete procedures. You can modify the code
specified in these templates or create your own templates in the DBMS definition file.
To apply a procedure template to your procedure definition, select the template from the list on the procedure
property sheet Definition tab (see Procedure Properties [page 159]).
To review or modify the provided procedure templates, select Database Edit Current DBMS , and then click
the Procedure Templates tab. You cannot delete or rename these templates.

Caution
The resource files provided with PowerDesigner inside the Program Files folder cannot be modified directly.
To create a copy for editing, use the New tool on the resource file list, and save it in another location. To include
resource files from different locations for use in your models, use the Path tool on the resource file list.
To create a new template, click the Add a Row tool.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

167

Procedure Template Properties

The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 77:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.

DBMS

Specifies the parent DBMS.

Function

Specifies whether the template defines procedures or functions.

Procedure Name

Specifies the conventions for naming procedures based on the template.

Linked to table

Specifies whether the resulting procedure will be linked to a table.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Definition - Contains a field for entering the procedure code for the template.You can use PDM variables and
macros and other tools available from the toolbar (see Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page 295]).

1.3.9

Users, Groups, and Roles (PDM)

A user is a database object that identifies a person who can login or connect to the database. Groups and roles are
used to simplify the granting of rights to users, as privileges and permissions granted to a group or role are
inherited by users who belong to that group or incarnate that role.
Not all DBMSs support each of the concepts of user, role, and group.

Note
For many DBMSs, users can have an implicit schema, and PowerDesigner can reverse-engineer create
statements contained within a schema. For SQL Server 2005 and higher, where users can have multiple
schemas, PowerDesigner reverse-engineers schemas as separate objects (see Schemas (SQL Server) [page
466]).

168

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.9.1

Creating a User, Group, or Role

You can create a user, group, or role from the Browser or Model menu. You can also create a user from the Owner
field of various objects.
Select

Model

Users and Roles

<Type>

to access the appropriate model object list, and click the Add a

Row tool.
Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

<Type> .

[users] Click the Create tool to the right of the Owner field on the General tab of a table (see Table Properties
[page 87]) or other object that allows you to specify an owner.
For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.9.2

User, Group, and Role Properties

To view or edit a user, group, or role's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs
and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 78:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Password

[users and groups] Password used for database connection.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Privileges - lists the system privileges granted to the user (see Granting System Privileges [page 170]).
Permissions - lists the operations that the user is permitted to perform on various database objects (see
Granting Object Permissions [page 173]).
Users - [groups and roles] Lists the users belonging to the group or role.
Groups - [groups and roles] Lists the groups belonging to the group or role.
Roles - [roles] Lists the roles belonging to the role.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

169

1.3.9.3

Assigning an Owner to an Object

The database user who creates an object (table, view, stored procedure, etc) is the owner of the object and is
automatically granted all permissions on it. In a PDM, you can specify the owner of an object by attaching a user to
it. Each object can have only one owner. Where other users must access the object, you can restrict object
modifications to the owner and grant Select or other permissions for the other users.

Context

Note
To automatically assign a default owner for any type of object that supports the concept of ownership, select
Tools Model Options , choose the appropriate object type in the left-hand pane, and select the
appropriate user in the Default owner field (see Other Object Model Options [page 21]).

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of the object to the General tab.
2. Select a user in the Owner field. To create a new user, click the Create tool to the right of this field.
3. Click OK to return to your model.

Note
When generating to your database (see Generating a Database from a PDM [page 304]), you can restrict
the tables and other objects generated to only those belonging to a particular owner, by selecting the
owner on the Database Generation dialog Selection tab.

1.3.9.4

Granting System Privileges

System privileges are granted to users, groups, and roles to give them the right to perform particular types of
action in the database. By default, a user belonging to a group or having a role inherits the group or role privileges
and these inherited privileges are identifies as such in the Privileges tab of the user property sheet. A user with an
administrative profile is also allowed to revoke a privilege.

170

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Context
System privileges are used in association with object permissions (see Granting Object Permissions [page 173])
to evaluate the rights of a user, group, or role. For example, even if a user has the Modify privilege, he cannot
modify an object on which he has no Update permission.

Note
In some DBMSs, system privileges are called permissions. In PowerDesigner, the term privilege is reserved for
any right granted to a user, a group, or a role. Permissions are defined for objects.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of a user, role, or group, and click the Privileges tab.
2. [optional] Click the Show/Hide All Inherited Privileges tool to show privileges that have been inherited from a
group. Inherited privileges are red, while privileges directly granted to the user are blue.
3. Click the Add Objects tool to choose one or more of the privileges available in the DBMS, and click OK to grant
them to the user, role, or group:
System privileges are defined in the DBMS definition file. To review and edit the list of available privileges,
select Database Edit Current DBMS , select the item Script Objects Privilege System , and
edit the list as appropriate. The Privilege category also contains entries that define the syntax for the
necessary SQL statements for granting and revoking privileges. For more information, see Customizing and
Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files > Script/Objects Category.
4. [optional] To change the state of a privilege (whether granted directly, or inherited from a group), click in the
State column to cycle through the available states, or click on the appropriate tools in the Privilege state group
box at the bottom of the tab:
Table 79:
Privilege

Description
Grant [default] Assigns the privilege to the user.

Inherited/None - Reverts the cell to the inherited state.

Revoke Revokes the privilege inherited from a group or role for the current user or group.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

171

Privilege

Description
Grant with admin option - Assigns the privilege to the user, and allows the recipient to pass on the
privilege to other users, groups, or roles. For example, you assign the CREATE TABLE privilege for
user Designer_1 and then click the Grant With Admin Option button to permit Designer_1 to grant this
privilege to other users.

5. When the privileges are correct, click OK to return to the model.

1.3.9.4.1

Generating Privileges

You can generate privileges to a script or to a live database connection.

Procedure
1. Select Database Generate Database to open the Database Generation window, and specify the
standard options, including whether you want to generate to a script or to a live database connection.
For detailed information about using this window, see Generating a Database from a PDM [page 304].

172

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2. Select "Users & Groups (with privileges)" from the Settings set list in the Quick Launch groupbox at the
bottom of the window. This settings set specifies standard options for generating privileges.
or:
Click the Options tab and click on User in the left-hand pane to display the user generation options. Change
the default options as appropriate.
For detailed information about settings sets, see Quick Launch Selection and Settings Sets [page 313].
3. [optional] Click the Selection tab and select the Users sub-tab at the bottom of the tab. Select the users that
you want to generate for.
4. Click OK to begin the generation.

1.3.9.5

Granting Object Permissions

Object permissions are granted to users, groups, and roles to give them the right to perform operations on
particular database objects. PowerDesigner allows you to define permissions on tables, views, columns,
procedures, packages, and other objects depending on your DBMS.

Context
System privileges are used in association with object permissions (see Granting System Privileges [page 170]) to
evaluate the rights of a user, group, or role.

Note
The owner of an object (see Assigning an Owner to an Object [page 170]) automatically has permission to carry
out any operation on that object. These permissions do not appear in the Permissions tab of the object
property sheet but they are implemented during generation and reverse engineering.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of a user, role, or group, and click the Permissions tab. A sub-tab is displayed for
each type of object supporting permissions. The columns in the list on each tab show the permissions
available for a given type of object in the current DBMS (for example, Select, Insert, Alter, Delete, Update,
etc).
The permissions available for each type of object are defined in the DBMS definition file. To review and edit
the list of available permissions, select
<object_type>

Database

Edit Current DBMS , select the item

Script

Objects

Permission , and edit the list as appropriate. The syntax for inserting permissions in

your scripts is defined in the Script Objects Permission category. For more information, see
Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files > Script/Objects Category.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

173

Note
You can assign permissions for multiple users, groups, and roles to an object on the Permissions tab of its
property sheet.
2. Click the Add Objects tool to choose one or more objects of the present type, and click OK to add them to the
list to assign permissions. If the user belongs to a group with permissions on the added objects, these
permissions appear in red in the list.
3. [optional] Click the Show All Inherited Permissions or Hide Inherited Permissions tool to show or hide
permissions that have been inherited from a group. Inherited permissions are red, while permissions directly
granted to the user are blue.
4. [optional] To change the state of a permission (whether granted directly, or inherited from a group), click in
the appropriate column to cycle through the available states, or click on the appropriate tools in the
Permission state group box at the bottom of the tab:
Table 80:
Permission

Description
Grant Assigns the permission to the user.
Inherited/None - Reverts the cell to the inherited state.
Revoke Revokes the permission inherited from a group or role for the current user or group.
Grant with admin option - Assigns the permission to the user, and allows the recipient to pass on
the permission to other users, groups, or roles.
Revoke with cascade Revokes the permission inherited from a group or role for the current user
or group and revokes any permission granted by the user.

174

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

5. [optional] For tables, you can specify permissions on individual columns (see Defining Column Permissions
[page 175]).
6. When the permissions are correct, click OK to return to the model.

1.3.9.5.1

Defining Column Permissions

You can fine tune the permissions on a table by specifying permissions on a column-by-column basis. The
available column permissions are specified in the DBMS resource file. Note that any new or modified permission
may not be supported during generation or reverse-engineering.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of a table, user, role, or group, and click the Permissions tab. For a table, select a
user, group or role in the list to whom you want to grant column permissions. For a user, group or role, select
a table in the list for which you want to specify permissions.
2. Click the ellipsis button to the right of the Columns field to open the Column Permissions dialog. The columns
in the list show the permissions available for each of the table's columns.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

175

3. To change the state of a permission (whether granted directly, or inherited from a group), click in the
appropriate column to cycle through the available states, or click on the appropriate tools in the Permission
state group box at the bottom of the tab.
4. Click OK to close the dialog and return to the property sheet. The cells for which specific permissions have
been set for columns now contain ellipsis symbols. Click on one of these symbols to display the associated
column permissions information in the Columns field:

176

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

5. Click OK to close the property sheet and return to the model.

1.3.9.6

Assigning a User to a Group or Role

Once you have created a group or role, you can assign users to it.

Procedure
1. Select

Model

Users and Roles

Groups

or Roles to open the appropriate list.

2. Select a group or role in the list, click the Properties tool to open its property sheet and then click the Users
tab.
3. Click the Add Objects tool to open a selection box listing the users available in the model.
4. Select one or more users and click OK to insert them into the group.

5. Click OK to return to the model.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

177

1.3.10 Synonyms (PDM)

Synonyms are alternative names for various types of database object, which can be used to mask the name and
owner of the object, provide location transparency for remote objects of a distributed database, and simplify SQL
statements for database users.
For example, if the table SALES_DATA is owned by the user JWARD, you could define a synonym Sales for it to
hide the ownership and simplify the required SQL select statement:
Table 81:
Standard Statement

Statement with Synonym

SELECT * FROM jward.sales_data

SELECT * FROM sales

You can create multiple synonyms for a base object (table, view, etc.), but each synonym can have only one base
object. You can view the synonyms defined for a particular base object on the Dependencies tab of its property
sheet. If you delete the base object of a synonym, the synonym is deleted as well.

Note
PowerDesigner supports the generation and reverse-engineering of synonyms. When you reverse-engineer
synonyms, the link with the base object is preserved if both objects are reverse engineered and if the base
object is displayed before the synonym in the script. You can reverse a synonym without its base object, but
then you should define a base object for it in your model.

1.3.10.1

Creating a Synonym

You can create synonyms from the Model menu.

Procedure
1. Select

Model

Synonyms

to open the List of Synonyms.

2. Click the Create Synonyms tool to open a selection box listing all the available objects in the model on various
sub-tabs, select one or more objects, and click OK to create synonyms for them in the list.

Note
By default, synonyms are created with the same name as their base objects.
3. Click in the Name column and enter a new name for the synonym. Alternatively, click the Properties tool to
open the property sheet of the synonym and edit its name and other properties there.
4. Click OK to return to your model.
For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

178

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.10.2

Synonym Properties

To view or edit a synonym's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 82:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

Specifies the user who is the owner of the object. This is usually its creator. Use the tools to the right
of the list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Base Object

Specifies the name of the object that is aliased by the synonym. Click the Select tool to the right of
the field to select an object from among the PDMs of the same DBMS family open in the workspace.

Visibility

Specifies whether the synonym is public (accessible to all users) or private (available only to its
owner).

Type

[if your DBMS supports synonyms and aliases] Specifies whether to create a synonym or an alias,
both of which are modeled in the same way in PowerDesigner.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

1.3.10.3

Creating a View from a Synonym

You can create views from synonyms in the same way as for tables. The view query displays the content of the
object aliased by the synonym.

Procedure
1. Ensure that no objects are selected in the diagram and select
listing all the available objects in the model.

Tools

Create View

to open a selection box

2. Click the Synonyms tab and select one or more synonyms to add to the view.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

179

3. Click OK. The view is created in the diagram.

For example, the ORDERS_PROD_DEPT table has a synonym ORDERS:

If you create a view for the ORDERS synonym, the view query displays the select order of the table content:

For more information about views, see Views (PDM) [page 127].

1.3.11

Defaults (PDM)

Default objects are named values that can be assigned to columns or domains. Defaults are available for selection
from the Default list on the Check Parameters tab of column and domain property sheets. Defaults are not
supported by all DBMSs.
For example, if you must set a default value for all columns of type city, you can create a default object
citydflt to assign the value London to it. To review how the default will be generated to your database, click the
Preview tab:
create default CITYDFLT as 'London'

180

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.11.1

Creating a Default

You can create a default from the Browser or Model menu.

Select

Model

Defaults

to access the List of Defaults, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Default .

Note
You can also convert default values assigned to column and domains into default objects for reuse through
rebuilding (see Rebuilding Defaults [page 182]).
For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.11.2

Default Properties

To view or edit a default's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 83:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while the

Comment

code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally include
spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object. By de
fault the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the model op
tions. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes to
the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

Specifies the user who is the owner of the object. This is usually its creator. Use the tools to the right of
the list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Value

Specifies the value that will be generated for the default object.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Preview - Displays the SQL code associated with the default (see Previewing SQL Statements [page 298]).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

181

1.3.11.3

Assigning a Default to a Column or a Domain

You can select a default from the Default list on the Check Parameters tab of a column or domain property sheet.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of a column or a domain, and click the Standard Checks tab (see Setting Data
Profiling Constraints [page 106]).
2. Select a default in the Default list in the Value groupbox.
You can, alternatively, enter a default value in the listbox. The value entered is assigned as a default value for
the column or domain, but a default object is not created in the model, and the default cannot be reused
elsewhere. If you enter a name that is already in the list, the relevant default object is attached to the column
or domain.

Note
You can create default objects for reuse from default values, through the Rebuild Default command (see
Rebuilding Defaults [page 182]).
3. Click OK to return to your model.

1.3.11.4

Rebuilding Defaults

You can generate default objects from default values entered into the Default list on the Check Parameters tab of a
column or domain property sheet. The new default objects replace the previously entered values, and can be
reused with other columns and domains.

Context

Note
If your model's DBMS does not support default objects and you have assigned default values to domains then,
if you change to a DBMS that does support default objects, an object will be created for each value. Default
values assigned to columns will not be converted into objects. When changing from a DBMS that supports
default objects to one that does not, default objects are converted into default values.

182

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Rebuild Objects

Rebuild Defaults , and enter the appropriate options:

Table 84:
Option

Description

Domains / Columns

Specifies the naming conventions for defaults applied to domains and columns respectively,
which are both, by default, D_%.U:VALUE%. You can specify different names for each type of
default, and use the following variables:

%DOMAIN%, %COLUMN%, %TABLE% - Code of the domain, column, or table using the de
fault.

Mode

Specifies the type of rebuild. You can select either or both of:

Reuse default with identical value Creates a single default for each value, even if the value
is found in multiple columns and domains. If you deselect this option, multiple defaults may
be created with the same value.

Delete and rebuild Delete and rebuild all existing default objects.

2. [optional] Click the Selection tab to specify which domains and tables to search for defaults to rebuild.
3. Click OK. If you selected the Delete and Rebuild mode, a confirmation box asks you to confirm your choice.
Click Yes to confirm the deletion and rebuild of the selected defaults.

1.3.12

Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM)

Domains allow you to group together a data type, length, precision, mandatoriness, check parameters, and
business rules to standardize their application to a set of columns and entity attributes. You can define domains
for columns of type ID, name, address, or any other kind of data whose use you want to standarize across
multiples columns or attributes in your model.

1.3.12.1

Creating a Domain

You can create a domain from the Browser or Model menu.

Select

Model

Domains

to access the List of Domains, and click the Add a Row tool

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Domain

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

183

1.3.12.2

Domain Properties

To view or edit a domain's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 85:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

[PDM] Specifies the user who is the owner of the object. This is usually its creator. Use the tools to
the right of the list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Data type/ Length/

Specifies the form of data to be stored, such as numeric, alphanumeric, or Boolean, and, where ap

Precision

propriate, the maximum number of characters or numerals that can be stored, and the maximum
number of places after the decimal point. Click the ellipsis button to choose from the list of standard
data types (see PowerDesigner Standard Data Types [page 185]).
To review the data types permitted by your DBMS, select
navigate to

Script

DataType

PhysDataType

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and

). The following variables specify length and

precision requirements:

%n - length

%s - length with precision

%p - decimal precision

For example, the data type char(%n) , requires you to specify a length.
Mandatory

[if supported by your DBMS] Specifies that a non-null value must be assigned.

Identity

[if supported by your DBMS] Specifies that the column is populated with values generated by the
database. Identity columns are often used as primary keys.

With default

[PDM] [if supported by your DBMS] Specifies that the column is populated with values generated by
the database. Identity columns are often used as primary keys.

Profile

[PDM] Specifies a test data profile to use to generate test data (see Populating Columns with Test
Data [page 111]). Use the tools to the right of this field to create or browse to a profile, or to open the
property sheet of the selected profile.

184

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Standard Checks - Specifies constraints to control the range and format of permitted data (see Setting Data
Profiling Constraints [page 106])
Additional Checks - Displays an editable SQL statement, initialized with the standard checks, which can be
used to generate more complex constraints (see Specifying Advanced Constraints [page 110]).
Rules - Lists the business rules associated with the object (see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page
207]).

1.3.12.2.1

PowerDesigner Standard Data Types

To open the list of Standard Data Types, click the ellipsis button to the right of the Data Types field on the General
tab of a column, entity attribute, data item, or domain property sheet.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

185

Numeric Data Types

The following numeric data types are available:
Table 86:
Standard data type

DBMS-specific physical data

Content

Length

type
Integer

int / INTEGER

32-bit integer

Short Integer

smallint / SMALLINT

16-bit integer

Long Integer

int / INTEGER

32-bit integer

Byte

tinyint / SMALLINT

256 values

Number

numeric / NUMBER

Numbers with a fixed decimal point

Fixed

Decimal

decimal / NUMBER

Numbers with a fixed decimal point

Fixed

Float

float / FLOAT

32-bit floating point numbers

Fixed

Short Float

real / FLOAT

Less than 32-bit point decimal number

Long Float

double precision / BINARY DOU

64-bit floating point numbers

BLE
Money

money / NUMBER

Numbers with a fixed decimal point

Fixed

Serial

numeric / NUMBER

Automatically incremented numbers

Fixed

Boolean

bit / SMALLINT

Two opposing values (true/false; yes/no;

1/0)

Character Data Types

The following character data types are available:
Table 87:
Standard data type

DBMS-specific physical data

Content

Length

type
Characters

char / CHAR

Character strings

Fixed

Variable Characters

varchar / VARCHAR2

Character strings

Maximum

Long Characters

varchar / CLOB

Character strings

Maximum

186

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Standard data type

DBMS-specific physical data

Content

Length

type
Long Var Characters

text / CLOB

Character strings

Maximum

Text

text / CLOB

Character strings

Maximum

Multibyte

nchar / NCHAR

Multibyte character strings

Fixed

Variable Multibyte

nvarchar / NVARCHAR2

Multibyte character strings

Maximum

Content

Length

Time Data Types

The following time data types are available:
Table 88:
Standard data type

DBMS-specific physical data

type

Date

date / DATE

Day, month, year

Time

time / DATE

Hour, minute, and second

Date & Time

datetime / DATE

Date and time

Timestamp

timestamp / TIMESTAMP

System date and time

Content

Length

Other Data Types

The following other data types are available:
Table 89:
Standard data type

DBMS-specific physical data

type

Binary

binary / RAW

Binary strings

Maximum

Long Binary

image / BLOB

Binary strings

Maximum

Bitmap

image / BLOB

Images in bitmap format (BMP)

Maximum

Image

image / BLOB

Images

Maximum

OLE

image / BLOB

OLE links

Maximum

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

187

Standard data type

DBMS-specific physical data

Content

Length

type
Other

User-defined data type

Undefined

undefined

Undefined. Replaced by the default data

type at generation.

1.3.12.3

Controlling Non-Divergence from a Domain

You can specify which of the properties of your domains must be applied to the columns or entity attributes
associated with the domain, and which propeties are permitted to diverge.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Model Options to open the Model Options dialog box. In a PDM, click the Column and
Domain sub-category in the left-hand Category pan:

188

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2. Select the checkboxes of the column or entity attribute properties that you want to prevent from diverging
from those defined in the domain:
Data type - Data type, length, and precision.
Check (see Setting Data Profiling Constraints [page 106]).
Rules (see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 207]).
Mandatory Mandatory property of the column or attribute.
[PDM] Profile (see Populating Columns with Test Data [page 111]).
3. Click OK to close the dialog and return to your model.
You are prompted to apply domain properties to columns or attributes currently attached to the domain. If
you click OK, the properties of these objects are modified in order to be consistent with the properties of their
domain.
If you subsequently modify properties of the domain that are not selected for enforcement, you will be
prompted to apply your changes to the columns or attributes attached to the domain. To choose not to apply
your changes, deselect the appropriate checkbox. Properties that are enforced may not be deselected and if
you only modify enforced properties, then this dialog will not be displayed.

Note
Properties specified as non-divergent are read-only in lists and property sheets for associated columns and
attributes. If you want to modify a non-divergent column or attribute property, you must detach the column
or attribute from its domain.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

189

1.3.13

Sequences (PDM)

Sequences are auto-incremented columns that allow you to define complex incrementations. Sequences are
available for selection from the Sequence list on the General tab of column property sheets. Sequences are not
supported by all DBMSs.

Note
If you generate a CDM or OOM from your PDM, then the data types of table columns attached to sequences are
converted to serial numerical data types for entity properties or class attributes with the format NO%<n>, where
<n> indicates the length of the data type.

1.3.13.1

Creating a Sequence

You can create a sequence from the Browser or Model menu.

Context

Note
If your model's DBMS does not support sequences and contains auto-incremented columns then, if you change
to a DBMS that does support sequences, one will be created for each auto-incremented column. When
changing from a DBMS that supports sequences to one that does not, sequences are converted into autoincremented columns.

Procedure
1. Select Model Sequences to open the List of Sequences, and click the Add a Row tool. Then click the
Properties tool to open the property sheet of the new sequence.
Alternatively, you can create a sequence by right-clicking the model (or a package), and selecting

New

Sequence .
2. Enter an appropriate name for the sequence and then click the Physical Options or Physical Options
(Common) tab and enter any DBMS-specific options.
The following example shows a sequence created in SQL Anywhere to represent the months in a year when
quarterly reports are published.

190

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

For information about working with physical options, see Physical Options (PDM) [page 100].
3. Click OK to save the sequence and return to your model.

1.3.13.2

Assigning a Sequence to a Column

You can select a sequence from the Sequence list on the General tab of a column property sheet. You must enable
sequences with the Rebuild Triggers command.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of a column with a numeric data type, and select a sequence in the Sequence list on
the General tab.
2. Click OK to save the change and return to your model.
3. Select Tools Rebuild Objects
Triggers [page 141]).

Rebuild Triggers

to open the Rebuild Triggers dialog (see Rebuilding

4. Click the Selection tab and select the tables containing the column to which you have assigned the sequence.
5. Click OK to rebuild the triggers and enable the sequence on the column.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

191

1.3.13.3

Sequence Properties

To view or edit a sequence's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 90:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

Specifies the user who is the owner of the object. This is usually its creator. Use the tools to the right
of the list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Physical Options / Physical Options (Common) - lists the physical options (see Physical Options (PDM) [page
100]) that control the incrementation of the sequence. For information about these options, see your DBMS
documentation.

1.3.14

Abstract Data Types (PDM)

An abstract data type (ADT) is a user-defined data type which can encapsulate a data set and functions that can
be performed on the data. Abstract data types are not supported by all DBMSs.
For example you could create an abstract data type for the Gregorian calendar to read and write roman numerals
and convert dates between the Julian and Gregorian calendars.
If your model contains abstract data types of type JAVA, you can link them to Java classes in an OOM to model
and review the Java class properties (see Linking an Abstract Data Type to a Java Class [page 195]).

192

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.14.1

Creating an Abstract Data Type

You can create an abstract data type from the Browser or Model menu.

Procedure
1. Select Model Abstract Data Types to open the List of Abstract Data Types, and click the Add a Row tool.
Then click the Properties tool to open the property sheet of the new type.
Alternatively, you can create an abstract data type by right-clicking the model (or a package), and selecting
New

Abstract Data Type .

2. Select the type for the ADT in the Type list on the General tab. Depending on your DBMS, you can choose
from:
Array - Fixed length collection of elements. For example, VARRAY (Oracle 8 and higher).
List - Open collection of objects. For example, TABLE (Oracle 8 and higher).
Java - Java class. For example, JAVA (SAP SQL Anywhere and SAP Adaptive Server Enterprise).
Object - Contains lists of attributes and procedures. For example, OBJECT or SQLJ OBJECT (Oracle 8 and
higher).
Structured - Contains a list of attributes. For example, NAMED ROW TYPE (Informix 9.x and higher).
3. [for object and structured types] Click the Attributes tab and create any appropriate attributes.
4. [for object types] Click the Procedures tab and create any appropriate procedures.
5. Click OK to return to your model.
For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.14.2

Abstract Data Type Properties

To view or edit an abstract data type's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs
and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 91:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while the

Comment

code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally include
spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object. By de
fault the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the model op
tions. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the Code field.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

193

Property

Description

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes to
the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Type

Specifies the kind of the abstract data type (see Creating an Abstract Data Type [page 193]), which will
change the other properties that are available.

Owner

Specifies the user who is the owner of the object. This is usually its creator. Use the tools to the right of
the list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Authorization

[objects] Specifies the Invoker Right attribute used for DDL generation.

Supertype

[objects] Specifies the parent type from which the type is derived, and from which it can inherit the proce
dures.

Final/Abstract

[objects] Mutually exclusive. If Final, the abstract data type cannot be used as supertype by another ab
stract data type. If Abstract, the abstract data type cannot be instantiated.

Data type/

[tables, varrays] Specify the data type of the abstract data type.

Length/Precision
Size

[arrays] Specifies the size of the abstract data type array.

Java class/Java

[SQLJ objects] Specify the name of an external Java class to which the SQLJ object points (see Linking an

data

Abstract Data Type to a Java Class [page 195]) and the mapping interface (CustomDatum, OraData or
SQLData).

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Attributes - [object and structured types] Use the Add a Row tool to create appropriate attributes, specifying
a Name, Code, Data Type, and, if appropriate, select the Mandatory (M) check box.
Procedures - [object types] Use the Add a Row tool to create appropriate procedures, specifying a Name and
Code, and, if appropriate, selecting the Final (F), Static (S) and/or Abstract (A) check boxes.

Note
An object abstract data type with a supertype can inherit non-final procedures. Use the Inherit Procedure
tool to select a non-final procedure from a parent abstract data type.

194

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.14.3

Linking an Abstract Data Type to a Java Class

You can link an abstract data type in a PDM to a Java class in an OOM open in the Workspace to access the
properties of the Java class within the PDM.

Context
Note
If you reverse engineer Java classes from a database into an OOM (see Object-Oriented Modeling) before
reverse-engineering the tables and other database objects into a PDM, then the Java classes that are reverse
engineered into the PDM are created as abstract data types of type JAVA and linked to the appropriate classes
in the OOM (if it remains open in the Workspace).

Procedure
1. Create an abstract data type and select Java from the Type list.
2. Click the Select tool to the right of the Class field to open a selection dialog listing all the Java classes that are
available for linking.
3. Select a Java class and click OK to link it to the abstract data type. The class name is displayed in the abstract
data type property sheet Class field. Click the Properties tool to the right of this field to open the Java class
property sheet.

1.3.15

References (PDM)

A reference is a link between a parent table and a child table, which defines a referential integrity constraint
between column pairs for a primary or alternate key and a foreign key, or between user-specified columns. Each
column pair is linked by a join, and each reference can contain one or more joins. Each value in the child table
column is equal to the value in the parent table column.
In the following example, the STORE parent table is linked to the SALE child table by a reference containing a join
which links the primary key column STORE ID (the referenced column) to the foreign key column STORE ID (the
referencing column).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

195

1.3.15.1

Creating a Reference

You can create a reference that links a primary key, or alternate key, to a foreign key, or user-specified columns in
both parent and child tables.
You can create a reference in any of the following ways:
Use the Reference tool in the Toolbox.
Select

Model

References

to access the List of References, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Reference .

Note
You can control whether the creation of a reference automatically creates a join between a primary key in the
parent table to a foreign key in the parent table (default) or whether the join columns are left undefined with the
Default link on creation model option (see Automatic Reuse and Migration of Columns [page 200]).
For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.15.2

Reference Properties

To view or edit a reference's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 92:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

196

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Parent table/ Child ta

Specify the parent table (which contains the primary or alternate key or a user-selected column) and

ble

the child table (which contains the foreign key or a user-selected column) linked by the reference.
Use the tools to the right of the Parent table field to create, browse for, or view the properties of the
currently selected table.

Parent role/ Child role

Specify the roles of the parent and child tables in the reference (for example Contains and Is

contained by.
Generate

Specifies to generate the reference in the database.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

Joins Tab
The Joins tab lists the joins defined between parent and child table columns. Joins can link primary or alternate
and foreign keys, or any user-specified columns.

Note
You can control the default joins created using the Default link on creation and Auto-migrate columns model
options (see Automatic Reuse and Migration of Columns [page 200]).
On this tab, you can either:
Select a key from the parent table in the Parent key field on which to base the join to autopopulate the list with
its associated parent and child columns. If necessary, you can modify the specified child columns.
Specify <None> in the Parent key field and specify your own column pairs on which to base the join using the
following tools:
Table 93:
Tool

Description
Reuse Columns - Create a join by matching parent and child columns that share the same code and data
type.
Migrate Columns - First specify columns in the Parent Table Column column and then click this tool to mi
grate them to foreign key columns in the child table. If the columns do not exist in the child table, they are
created.
Cancel Migration - Remove any columns migrated to the child table.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

197

Tool

Description
Insert/Add a Row - Inserts a row before the selected row in the list or at the end of the list to specify an
other column to join on.

Note
Select the Auto arrange join order check box to sort the list by the key column order or deselect it to re-arrange
the columns using the arrow buttons. If this option is not available, to enable it, add the
EnableChangeJoinOrder item to the Reference category in the DBMS definition file and set the value to YES
(see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files).

Integrity Tab
Referential integrity governs data consistency between primary or alternate keys and foreign keys by dictating
what happens when you update or delete a value or delete a row in the parent table. The Integrity tab contains the
following properties:
Table 94:
Property

Description

Constraint name

Specifies the name of the referential integrity constraint. Maximum length is 254 characters. If
you edit this name, the User-defined button will be depressed. To return to the default name,
click to release this button.

Implementation

Specifies how referential integrity will be implemented. You can choose between:

Declarative- Referential integrity constraints are defined for particular references. When the
reference is generated the target DBMS evaluates the reference validity and generates ap
propriate error messages.

Trigger - Referential integrity constraints are implemented by triggers based on the integrity
constraints defined in the reference property sheet. The trigger evaluates reference validity
and generates appropriate user-defined error messages.

198

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Cardinality

Indicates the minimum and maximum number of instances in a child table permitted for each
corresponding instance in the parent table. The following values are available by default:

0..* - A parent can have zero or more children.

0..1 - A parent can have zero or one children.

1..* - A parent can have one or more children.

1..1 A parent must have exactly one child

Alternately, you can enter your own integer values in one of the following formats (using * or n to
represent no limit):

x..y - A parent can have between x and y children. For example: 2..n There must be at
least 2 children.

x - A parent can have exactly x children. For example: 10 - There must be exactly 10 chil
dren.

x..y, a..b - A parent can have between x and y or between a and b children. For exam
ple: 1..2, 4..n There must be one, two, four or more children.

Update/Delete constraint

Specifies how updating a key value in the parent table will affect the foreign key value in the child
table. Depending on the implementation and DBMS, you can choose between:

None - No effect on the child table.

Restrict - Values in the parent table cannot be updated or deleted if one or more matching
child values exists.

Cascade - Updates or deletions of parent table values are cascaded to matching values in
the child table.

Set null - Updates or deletions of parent table values set matching values in the child table to
NULL.

Set default - Updates or deletions of parent table values set matching values in the child ta
ble to the default value.

Mandatory parent

Specifies that each foreign key value in the child table must have a corresponding key value, in
the parent table.

Change parent allowed

Specifies that a foreign key value can change to select another value in the referenced key in the
parent table.

Check on commit

[SQL Anywhere only] Verifies referential integrity only on commit, instead of after row insertion.
You can use this feature to control circular dependencies.

Cluster

Specifies that the reference constraint is a clustered constraint (for those DBMSs that support
clustered indexes).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

199

1.3.15.3

Automatic Reuse and Migration of Columns

When you create a reference, PowerDesigner can automatically reuse an appropriate existing column in the child
table as the foreign key column and migrate the primary key column in the parent table to create a foreign key
column in the child table.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Model Options to open the Model Options dialog box and select the Reference subcategory in the left-hand Category pane.
2. Select the following options as appropriate:
Table 95:
Option

Function

Auto-reuse columns

Enables the reuse of columns in a child table as foreign key columns when creating references
if the following conditions are satisfied:

The child column has the same code as the migrating primary key column.

The child column is not already a foreign key column. If you want to reuse a child table
column that is already a foreign key column, you must do this manually from the Joins tab
of the reference property sheet.

200

Data types are compatible.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Option

Function

Auto-migrate columns

Enables the automatic migration of primary key columns from the parent table as foreign key
columns to the child table when creating references.

Note
Foreign key columns created in this way will be deleted if the reference is deleted, while
those created manually will be retained. To review which foreign key columns in a table
were created through auto-migration, click the Customize Columns and Filter tool on the
Columns tab and select to display the AutoMigrated property.
Select the following column property checkboxes as appropriate to specify parent column
properties to migrate:

Domains (see Domains (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 183])

Check (see Setting Data Profiling Constraints [page 106]).

Rules (see Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM) [page 207]).

Last position - Adds migrated columns at the end of the table column list. If this option is
not selected, migrated columns are inserted between key columns and other columns
which implies that a child table must be dropped and recreated each time you add a refer
ence and modify an existing database.

Note
During intermodel generation, whether or not this option is selected, any selected column
property is migrated from the PK to the FK.

Default link on creation

Specifies whether reference joins are automatically created:

Primary key Automatically create joins between the parent table primary key and a child
table foreign key. If the Auto-migrate columns option is not selected then you must man
ually specify foreign key columns on the reference Joins tab.

User-defined Does not create joins. You must manually select columns on the reference
Joins tab.

3. Click OK to close the dialog and return to your model.

Results
The following table shows the results of migrating and reusing primary key columns to a child table that contains a
matching child table column, and where that child table column is already a foreign key column for another table:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

201

Table 96:
Options Se
lected

Matching Child Table Column Exists

[Original tables
before migra
tion]

The child table contains a matching column for one

of the primary key columns:

The child table contains a matching column that is al

ready a foreign key column for another table:

[default] Auto-

Col_1 is reused and Col_2 is created:

T1_Col_1 and Col_2 are created:

T1_Col_1 and Col_2 are created:

T1_Col_1 and Col_2 are created:

Matching Child Table Column Is Already a FK Col

umn

reuse and Automigrate

Auto-migrate
only

Auto-reuse only Col_1 is reused but Col_2 is not created:

Neither

No column is reused or created

No columns are reused or created:

No columns are reused or created:

Note
By default, only the properties of the primary key column are migrated to the foreign key. If the primary key
column is attached to a domain, the domain will not be migrated to the new foreign key column unless the
Enforce non-divergence model option is selected (see Controlling Non-Divergence from a Domain [page
188]).
If you have selected the Auto-migrate columns model option and you modify a reference attach point then
you will migrate primary keys in the parent table to foreign keys in the child table, delete unused foreign key

202

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

columns, and modify the reference join. If you delete the parent primary key column then you will delete
the corresponding foreign key and reference join.
For more information about other reference model options, see Reference Model Options [page 20].

1.3.15.4

Rebuilding References

You can rebuild references at any time to create default references between PK columns in one table and columns
with identical code and data type in another table. Rebuilding is not possible between two tables with PK columns.
Rebuilding references can be useful following the reverse engineering of a database in which not all the references
could be reverse engineered.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Rebuild Objects

Rebuild References , and specify a mode.

Delete and Rebuild - All existing references are deleted, and new references built based on matching key
columns.
Preserve - All existing references are kept, and new references are built based on new matching key
columns.
2. [optional] Click the Selection tab to specify which tables you want to rebuild references for. By default, all
tables are selected.
To rebuild references between tables in a package, select the package from the list at the top of the tab. To
rebuild references between tables in a sub-package, select the Include Sub-Packages tool next to the list, and
then select a sub-package from the dropdown list.
3. Click OK. If you selected the Delete and Rebuild mode, a confirmation box asks you to confirm your choice.
Click Yes to confirm the deletion and rebuild of the selected references.

1.3.15.5

Displaying Information on Reference Symbols

You can display the cardinality, referential integrity, join, table roles and other properties on the source and
destination ends and in the center of a reference. To set display preferences for references, select

Tools

Display Preferences , and select the Reference sub-category in the left-hand Category pane.
The notation for referential integrity and constraints on reference symbols is as follows:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

203

Table 97:
Referential integrity

Constraint Types

upd(<constraint>) - Update

( ) - None

del(<constraint>) - Delete

(R) - Restrict

cpa - Change Parent Allowed

(C) - Cascade

(N) - Set null

(D) - Set default

The Cardinality attribute displays the minimum and maximum number of instances in a child table that can appear
for each corresponding instance in the parent table as follows:
<min>..<max>
In this example, the source of the reference symbol shows a cardinality of 1..n (one or more children is
acceptable), and the child table role (Does) and the destination of the reference shows the parent table role (Is
Done By). The center of the symbol shows the two primary keys that form the join, as well as the referential
integrity (updates and deletions are restricted and change parent is allowed:

For information about changing the notation of references, see Setting PDM Model Options [page 18]. For detailed
information about working with display preferences, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Diagrams, Matrices, and Symbols > Display Preferences.

1.3.16

View References (PDM)

A view reference is a link between a parent table or view and a child table or view, which defines the joins between
the parent and child columns. View references are not generated to the database
If you create a new view from existing views, the joins defined on these views influence the WHERE statement in
the SQL query of the new view.
In this example, French_Store is a view of the Store table with a view reference defining a join between
Store_ID in the table and STORE_STORE_ID in the view. Customer_Orders is a view of the Orders table with a
view reference defining a join between Order_No in the table and ORDER_ORDER_N in the view:

204

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

You can create a view reference between the two views to define a join between
Customer_Order.ORDER_ORDER_STORE and French_Store.STORE_STORE_ID:

If you were then to create a view from the French_Store and Customer_Order views, the SELECT order of the
new view will take into account the join defined between the views to retrieve only those orders sent to French
stores.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

205

1.3.16.1

Creating a View Reference

You can create a view reference between two views or between a table and a view. A view reference cannot link
two tables.
You can create a view reference in any of the following ways:
Use the Reference tool in the Toolbox.
Select

Model

View References

to access the List of View References, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

View Reference .

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.16.2

View Reference Properties

To view or edit a view reference's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The
property sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface
by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 98:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Parent/ Child

Specify the parent and child tables or views linked by the reference. Use the tools to the right of the
list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Parent role

Specify the roles of the parent and child tables or views in the reference.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

Joins Tab
The Joins tab lists the joins defined between parent and child table or views columns. You can specify column
pairs on which to base the join using the following tools:

206

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Table 99:
Tool

Description
Reuse Columns - Create a join by matching parent and child columns that share the same code and data type.
Insert/Add a Row - Inserts a row before the selected row in the list or at the end of the list to specify another
column to join on.

1.3.17

Business Rules (CDM/LDM/PDM)

A business rule can represent a government-imposed law, a customer requirement, or an internal guideline. They
may start as simple observations, such as "customers call toll-free numbers to place orders", and develop into
more detailed expressions during the design process such as what information a customer supplies when placing
an order or how much a customer can spend based on a credit limit.
Business rules complement your diagrams with information that is not easily represented graphically, and can
help guide the creation of a model. For example, the rule "an employee belongs to only one division" can help you
define the link between an employee and a division. Business rules are generated as part of intermodel generation
and can be further specified in the generated model.
There are three ways to use business rules in a data model:
Apply a business rule to a model object as part of its definition (see Attaching a Business Rule to a Model
Object [page 209]).
[PDM only] Create a server expression that can be generated to a database (see Creating and Attaching a
Constraint Rule [page 209]).
[PDM only] Insert a business rule expression in a trigger or stored procedure using the .CLIENTEXPRESSION
or .SERVEREXPRESSION macros (see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files >
PDM Variables and Macros).
When creating business rules, you may find it helpful to ask the following kinds of question:
Do any mandatory regulations impact my system?
How can I clearly and concisely define the specifications for my project?
Do any constraints limit my options?
Is this rule a definition, fact, formula, or avalidation rule?

1.3.17.1

Creating a Business Rule

You can create a business rule from the Browser or Model menu, or from the Rules tab of an object property
sheet.
Select

Model

Business Rules

to access the List of Business Rules, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Business Rule .

Open the property sheet of the object to which you want to apply the rule, click the Rules tab, and click the
Create an Object tool.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

207

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.17.2

Business Rule Properties

To view or edit a business rule's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and
fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 100:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Type

Specifies the nature of the business rule. You can choose between:

Constraint a check constraint on a value. For example, "The start date should be inferior to the
end date of a project." In a PDM, constraint rules attached to tables or columns are generated. If
the DBMS supports multiple constraints, constraint rules are generated as separate constraint
statements with the name of the rule.

Definition a property of the element in the system. For example; "A customer is a person identi
fied by a name and an address".

Fact a certainty in the system. For example, "A client may place one or more orders".

Formula a calculation. For example, "The total order is the sum of all the order line costs".

Requirement a functional specification. For example, "The model is designed so that total
losses do not exceed 10% of total sales".

Validation a constraint on a value. For example, "The sum of all orders for a client must not be
greater than that client's allowance". In a PDM, validation rules attached to tables or columns are
generated as part of the primary constraint for the table or column.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Expression - As you develop your model and analyze your business problem, you can complete the rule by
adding a technical expression. The syntax of expressions depends on the target database, and each rule can
include two types of expression:
Server - Can be generated to a database. You can generate server expressions as check parameters if
they are attached to tables, domains, or columns

208

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

 Client - Used mainly for documentation purposes. However, you can insert both types of expression into a
trigger or a stored procedure

1.3.17.3

Attaching a Business Rule to a Model Object

You can attach a business rule to a model object from the object's property sheet.

Procedure
1. Open the object's property sheet and click the Rules tab.
2. Click the Add Objects tool to open a list of available business rules.
3. Select one or more business rules and click OK.
The business rules are attached to the object and appear on the list of business rules for the object.

Note
When you attach a business rule to an object, it is marked as used in the model. You can review which rules
are used by opening the List of Business Rules and consulting the U (Used) column.
4. Click OK to return to the model diagram.

1.3.17.4

Creating and Attaching a Constraint Rule

Validate and constraint business rules have their expressions generated as constaints for DBMSs where this is
supported. Validate rules can be reused by multiple objects, but constraint rules can only be used once, and will
be generated as a separate constraint for DBMSs that support multiple constraints.

Context
Support for the generation of constraint rules to your database is controlled by the following items in the General
category of your DBMS definition file:
EnableCheck - Permits the generation of constraints to the database.
EnableMultiCheck - Permits the generation of check parameters (see Setting Data Profiling Constraints [page
106]) and validation business rules as a single constraint, followed by the generation of each constraint
business rule as a separate constraint in the order in which they are attached to the table. If this option is not
enabled, then check parameters and all constraint and validation rules are concatenated into a single
constraint expression.
UniqueConstName - Requires that all validate and constraint rules have unique codes.
You can preview the constraints that will be generated on the Preview tab of the table property sheet.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

209

When reverse engineering, the constraint order is respected, with the first constraint retrieved to the Check tab of
the table property sheet, and each subsequent constraint retrieved as a constraint business rule attached to the
table

Procedure
1. Create a business rule, enter a name and code, select Constraint in the Type list, and then click the Expression
tab
2. Enter an expression on the Server sub-tab:

3. Click OK to save your changes and return to the model.

4. Open a table or column property sheet and click the Rules tab.
5. Click the Add Objects tool to open a list of available business rules, select your constraint business rule from
the selection list and click OK to attach it.
6. [optional] Click Apply to confirm the attachment of the rule and then click the table property sheet Preview
tab to verify that the constraint has been created in the script.
In the following example, multiple constraints are defined on the Project table:
Check parameter (in the Check tab of the table) - Verifies that the customer number is different from the
employee number.
Validation business rules - PROJ_NUM to check that the column project number is not null and EMP_NUM to
check that the employee number is not null.

210

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

 Constraint business rule - DATE_CONSTY to check that the start date of the project is inferior to the end
date of the project.

1.3.18

Lifecycles (PDM)

A lifecycle allows you to model the movement of data from expensive, rapid storage, through various forms of
cheaper slower storage as the data ages and access requirements diminish. The period during which data remain
in each kind of storage are modeled as phases, which are associated with tablespaces.

Note
Data lifecycle modeling is supported for SAP IQ v15.0 and higher.
You can attach any number of tables to a lifecycle, and create multiple lifecycles to provide different speeds
and/or methods for data aging. Each table can only be associated with one lifecycle. A lifecycle can be:
Age-based - Data moves through the lifecycle in named partitions, remaining in each phase only for the
specified retention period. The partitions move through the lifecycle in a predictable fashion and will become
candidates for purging at the end of the lifecycle's total retention period.
Access-based - Tables (and any associated indexes) move through the lifecycle based on the permitted idle
time for each phase, which specifies how long a table can remain in the phase without being accessed. Tables
must remain in the lifecycle for (as a minimum) the total retention period, and their movement to the end of
the lifecycle can be delayed indefinitely if the data they contain continue to be accessed.
The following diagram illustrates an age-based lifecycle covering a period of five years, which is divided into three
phases:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

211

 Phase 1 (3 months) - high performance (tier-1) storage for new data that is frequently accessed.
Phase 2 (9 months) - nearline (tier-2) storage for data from the last year.
Phase 3 (48 months) - historical (tier-3) storage for data that is infrequently accessed but which must be
retained.
The data is packaged in partitions (P1, P2, and P3), which each contain one month of data:

PowerDesigner can generate all the necessary scripts to automate all this data movement. In the example above,
scripts will be generated for every month of the lifecycle. At the point illustrated in the picture, the scripts will:
Move partition P1 from the tablespace associated with Phase 1 to the tablespace associated with Phase 2.
Create a new partition, P4, to begin collecting new table rows in the tablespace associated with Phase 1.
As the data ages, scripts will additionally treat the movement of data aged more than one year from the
tablespace associated with Phase 2 to the tablespace associated with Phase 3.
Once a lifecycle is put in place, you can generate scripts to perform data movement indefinitely. Additional scripts
are generated to regularly purge data that arrive at the end of their lifecycle.

1.3.18.1

Modeling a Lifecycle

To correctly model a lifecycle you must define the lifecycle and its phases, and then associate your tables to it.

Procedure
1. Create a lifecycle in any of the following ways:
Select Model Lifecycles (or Database Information Lifecycle Management
to access the List of Lifecycles, and click the Add a Row tool.
Right-click the model in the Browser, and select New
created at the model level and not within packages.

List of Lifecycles )

Lifecycle . Note that lifecycles can only be

2. Click the Properties tool to open the lifecycle property sheet and specify a name for the lifecycle.
3. Click the Definition tab, and select the policy type:
Age-based - Data moves through the lifecycle in named partitions, based on the time since the data was
created. Specify a Start date and the Total retention period (the length of time covered by the lifecycle).

212

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

 Access-based - Tables move through the lifecycle based on the time since the table was last accessed.
Specify a Total retention period, which is treated as the minimum total period of time that a table's data
must remain in the lifecycle.
4. Click the Create Phase tool to create as many phases as you need. Lifecycles often contain three phases to
manage the movement of data from high performance, through nearline, to historical storage.

Note
Your phase will display a yellow warning overlay until it is completely defined.
5. Click on each phase in turn to open its property sheet (see Phases (PDM) [page 217]). Specify a name,
retention period (or, for access-based lifecycles, idle period) and tablespace to represent the physical storage
in which the data is stored during this phase.
For age-based lifecycles, you can assign data from an external database to the first phase of your lifecycle and
have that data loaded to your warehouse database for the second phase (see Linking an External Database
via the Data Source Wizard [page 220]).
6. Open the property sheet for each of your tablespaces (see Tablespace and Storage Properties [page 222])
and enter any appropriate properties, including a value for the cost per GB to be used when calculating cost
savings.
When you have completed the definition of your phases and tablespaces, return to the lifecycle property
sheet and verify that the warning overlays on the phase buttons are no longer present.
7. [age-based lifecycles] Enter a partition range to specify the length of time covered by each table partition
governed by the lifecycle. For example, a partition range of one month means that each partition will contain
one month's data.
8. In the Managed tables groupbox, select the tables you want to associate with the lifecycle. For each table,
specify the start date on which you want it to become subject to the lifecycle, and enter an estimate for the
initial number of rows and a percentage growth rate to permit the calculation of cost savings.
9. [age-based lifecycles] You must, for each table, specify a column with a date datatype as the partition key
used to determine to which partition a row must be assigned. The partition key can alternately be assigned on
the SAP IQ tab of the table property sheets.
10. [optional] Select the Cost savings analysis checkbox and then click the Refresh Cost Savings Analysis tool to
display a summary of the cost savings to be obtained by managing your data with the lifecycle.
You can also view the detail of the cost savings by year for a single table on the Lifecyle tab of the table
property sheet (see Table Properties [page 87]).

Note
If you intend to model multiple lifecycles, and/or want to confirm that all of your tables are associated with
a lifecycle, you may find it useful to visualize these associations in the form of a dependency matrix. To
view the Lifecycle/Table Matrix, select

Database

Information Lifecycle Management

View Lifecycle/

Table Matrix .

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

213

1.3.18.1.1

Generating Data Archiving Scripts to Implement

your Lifecycle

Once you have modeled your lifecycles, you can instruct PowerDesigner to generate scripts to automate the
creation, movement, and purging of data through your lifecycle phases.

Context
Before you generate your data movement scripts, ensure that you have completed all the steps listed in Modeling
a Lifecycle [page 212].

Procedure
1. Select Database
Generate dialog.

Information Lifecycle Management

Generate Data Archiving Scripts

to open the

2. Specify a directory in which to generate the scripts, and, optionally, select to check your model before
generation.
3. Click the Selection tab, and select the tables for which you want to generate data archiving scripts.
4. [for age-based lifecycles] Click the Options tab, specify the start and end date for the period for which you
want to generate scripts. You can generate scripts for all or part of the period covered by your lifecycle, and
also to cleanup data created before the start date of your lifecycle.

Note
For age-based lifecycles used to archive data from an external database, if you specify a generation start
date before the start date of a table associated with the lifecycle, additional scripts will be generated to
advance immediately older data created between the generation start date and the table lifecycle start
date to the appropriate stages of the lifecycle.
5. [for age-based lifecycles] On the Options tab, specify the method for creating partitions. You can choose
between creating partitions:
Individually, when the previous partition ends
All at the beginning (default)
6. Click OK to begin the generation.
The scripts are generated in the specified directory and listed in the Results pane.
The following scripts are generated for age-based lifecyles, and should be run on the date specified in the
order specified by their numerical prefix. You can run the scripts manually or use SAP Control Center to
automate this process:
IQ.CreateRemoteServerAndLogin.date.sql - if you are achiving data stored in an external database.
One or more folders named yyyymmdd for each date on which scripts must be run containing one or more
of the following scripts:

214

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

 01.IQ.CreateAndMovePartition.date.sql - one script per date on which a data movement

action is required between the start and end dates you specify. For example, if you specify a start
date of 01/01/2009 and an end date of 12/31/2009, a partition range of one month, and to create
the partitions individually, then twelve scripts will be generated. The scripts should be run on the
dates included in their filenames.
02.IQ.PurgePartition.date.sql - one script per date on which a data purge action is required
for partitions arriving at the end of the lifecycle.
03.DB.DeleteSourceData.date.sql - if there is data to be purged in an external database.
OldData - if you have specified a generation start date earlier than your table start dates, this folder will
be created and will contain dated subfolders containing scripts to create, move, and purge older data.
The following scripts are generated for access-based lifecyles:
CreateProcedures.sql - creates procedures to test the idle time during which tables have not been
accessed and to move and/or delete them on demand. This script should be run immediately to prepare
the database for data movements called for by an access-based lifecycle
MoveData.sql - calls the procedures to test for and implement data movement based upon the specified
idle times using the current date on the IQ server. This script should be scheduled to run regularly.
DeleteData.sql - calls the procedure to test for and implement data purging based upon the specified
idle times and the specified minimum retention period using the current date on the IQ server. You can
schedule this script to run regularly or run it by hand as needed.

1.3.18.2

Lifecycle Properties

To view or edit a lifecycle's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 101:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = but
ton to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

215

Definition Tab
This tab contains all the properties necessary to define your lifecycle. The Policy group box contains the following
properties:
Table 102:
Property

Description

Policy type

Specifies the criteria used to advance data through the lifecycle. You can choose between:

Age-based - where data are moved from phase to phase in named partitions depending on the time
since their creation.

Access-base - where tables are moved from phase to phase depending on the time since the data in the
tables were last accessed.

Start date

[age-based lifecycles only] Specifies the date from which you want the lifecycle to manage data movement.

Total retention

Specifies the total length of time during which data is controlled by the lifecycle. For example, if you specify a
total retention of 5 years, the lifecycle will manage the movement of each record from the moment of its
creation until it has existed for 5 years.
For age-based lifecycles, the total retention time must be equal to the sum of all the retention times of all the
phases contained within the lifecycle.
For access-based lifecycles, the total retention time is used as the minimum total time that the data must
remain in the lifecycle.

Phases

Lists the phases (see Phases (PDM) [page 217]) associated with the lifecycle. You can create phases using
the Create a New Phase tool. Click on a phase to open its property sheet.

Note
Your phase will display a yellow warning overlay until it is completely defined.
Partition range

[age-based lifecycles only] Specifies the period of data to be contained in partitions for tables governed by
the lifecycle. For example, a partition range of one month means that each partition will contain one month's
data.

The Managed Tables group box lists the tables whose data are managed by the lifecycle. Use the Add Objects and
Create an Object tools to populate the list. If the lifecycle is used to archive data in an external database, the
choice of tables to attach is limited to the tables in the external database, and the selected tables are generated to
the warehouse PDM if they were not already present.
The following properties must be completed for each table in order to correctly generate data archiving scripts:
Name and Code - to identify the table.
Start Date - [optional] Specifies the start date from which to generate the first partition.
Initial Rows and Growth Rate - Specifies the number of rows that the table will start with, and the percentage
growth per year
Partition Key - [age-based lifecycles] Specifies the column to use to determine to which partition a row is
assigned.
Click the Generate Data Archiving Script button to generate scripts to implement your lifecycle (see Generating
Data Archiving Scripts to Implement your Lifecycle [page 214]).

216

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Select the Cost Saving Analysis checkbox and then click the Refresh Cost Savings Analysis tool to display a list of
the cost savings to be obtained by managing data with the lifecycle. Use the tools above the list to export the cost
savings data to Excel or to print it.

1.3.18.3

Phases (PDM)

A phase defines the period of time that data governed by a lifecycle will be retained by a particular tablespace.

Creating a Phase
You create phases on the Definition tab of a lifecycle using the Create Phase tool.

Phase Properties
To view or edit a phase's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields listed
here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator. The
General tab contains the following properties:
Table 103:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while the

Comment

code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally include
spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object. By default
the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the model options. To
decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes to
the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Retention/Time [age-based] Specifies the length of time that data will be retained in this phase.
unit
Idle period/
Time unit

[access-based] Specifies the minimum length of time that the table must remain unaccessed before it is
moved to the next phase.

Source

Specifies where the data to populate the phase is located. The default is the current (warehouse) database.
For the first phase only in an age-based lifecycle, you can specify instead an external database (see Archiv
ing Data From External Databases [page 218]), in which case you must also specify a data source to link to
the PDM that models the external database.

Tablespace

[Current database only] Specifies the tablespace with which the phase is associated. Select a tablespace
from the list or click the tools to the right of this field to create a new tablespace or open the property sheet
of the currently selected one.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

217

Property

Description

Data Source

[External database only] Specifies the data source used to connect to the external database. Click the
Create tool to the right of this field to launch the Data Source Wizard (see Linking an External Database via
the Data Source Wizard [page 220]) to create a data source and apply the appropriate tables to the lifecycle.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them with
commas.

1.3.18.4

Archiving Data From External Databases

When developing an age-based lifecycle policy, you can assign data from an external database modeled in another
PDM to the first phase. At the end of the first phase the data will be loaded from the external database to your
warehouse.
In order to model external database data archiving, you must:
1. Create a PDM to model the external database.
2. Create a PDM to model the data warehouse.
3. Link the second PDM to the first through a data source.
4. Specify access parameters for the warehouse database and the external database on the Database
Connection and Data Movement (Lifecycle) tabs of the data source.
5. Create mappings between the external tables that contain the data to be archived and the warehouse tables
to which this data will be loaded.
6. Create a lifecycle in the warehouse PDM and create the first phase.
7. Set the Source of the first phase to External Database and specify the data source through which you
have connected the external database PDM.
8. Select the tables to attach to the lifecycle.
PowerDesigner provides various tools to help you create parts of this archiving environment:
PDM-PDM model generation - can create the data warehouse PDM, the data source and mappings (see
Linking an External Database by Generation [page 219])
The Mapping Editor - can help you create (or modify) the mappings between the external database and
warehouse PDM tables (see Linking an External Database through the Mapping Editor [page 219])
The Data Source Wizard - can create the data source and table mapping, set the lifecycle source for the first
phase and attach tables to the lifecycle (see Linking an External Database via the Data Source Wizard [page
220])

218

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.18.4.1

Linking an External Database by Generation

You can use the model generation mechanism to generate tables from your external database to your warehouse
PDM and create the required data source and mappings in your warehouse PDM.

Procedure
1. Create a PDM to model the external database containing the tables to be archived by the lifecycle.
2. Select

Tools

Generate Physical Data Model

to open the PDM Generation Options dialog.

3. On the General tab, choose whether you will create a new PDM to represent your warehouse database or add
the tables to be generated to an existing warehouse PDM.
4. On the Detail tab, ensure that the Generate mappings option is selected.
These mappings are used in the subsequent generation of the lifecycle to route the data to be archived in the
warehouse.
5. On the Selection tab, select the tables that contain the data you want to archive via the lifecycle.
6. Click OK to begin the generation.
If you are adding the tables to an existing warehouse PDM, the Merge Models dialog will open, allowing you to
review the changes that will be made to it before clicking OK to continue with the generation.
The selected tables are generated to the warehouse PDM, along with a data source object and the appropriate
mappings.

Note
For detailed information about model generation, see Generating Other Models from a Data Model [page
341]. For information about using the Merge Models dialog, see Core Features Guide > Linking and
Synchronizing Models > Generating Models and Model Objects.

1.3.18.4.2

Linking an External Database through the Mapping

Editor

You can use the Mapping Editor to manually create (or modify) mappings between the external database and
warehouse tables that will be used to archive the data governed by the lifecycle. This method can be useful when

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

219

you have PDMs to represent your external and warehouse databases and will be using non-standard mappings to
load your data.

Context
To open the Mapping Editor from your warehouse PDM, select Tools Mapping Editor . If you have no data
sources defined in the model, the Data Source Wizard will open, and you should use it to define a data source
pointing to the external database PDM, which will then be opened in the Mapping Editor.

Note
For detailed information about using the Mapping Editor (and the Data Source Wizard) see Core Features Guide
> Linking and Synchronizing Models > Object Mappings.

1.3.18.4.3

Linking an External Database via the Data Source

Wizard

The Data Source Wizard guides you through creating an external database data source in your model, and to
attach it and the tables to be managed to the first phase of your lifecycle

Procedure
1. Create an age-based lifecycle policy (see Modeling a Lifecycle [page 212]), add a first phase to it, and open
the property sheet for this phase.
2. Set the retention period for the phase and set the Location property to External database.
3. Click the Create tool to the right of the data source field to open the Data Source Creation Wizard.
4. On the first page, select the PDM that represents your external database and then click Next.
5. On the second page, select the tables that you want to associate with the lifecycle.
6. Click Finish to associate the selected tables with the lifecycle.
The wizard creates a data source in the warehouse PDM and associates it with the first phase of the lifecycle.
The selected tables are generated to the warehouse PDM if they were not already present, and appropriate
mappings are created between the tables in the external database and those in the warehouse PDM.

220

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.19

Tablespaces and Storages (PDM)

Tablespaces and storages are generic objects used to represent physical locations (in named partitions) of tables
and indexes in a database or storage device. A tablespace is a partition in a database. A storage is a partition on a
storage device. Some DBMSs, allow a tablespace to use a specified storage in its definition.
The following table lists the DBMSs that use concepts that are represented by tablespaces and storages in
PowerDesigner:
Table 104:
DBMS

Tablespace represents...

Storage represents...

ADABAS

NA

NA

IBM DB2 UDB Common Server

tablespace

buffer pool

create tablespace
IBM DB2 UDB for OS/390

table space

create tablespace

create bufferpool
storage group

create stogroup

Informix

NA

NA

Ingres

NA

NA

InterBase

NA

NA

Microsoft Access

NA

NA

Microsoft SQL Server

NA

filegroup

alter database add

filegroup...
MySQL

NA

NA

Oracle

tablespace

storage structure (not physical storage)

create tablespace
PostgreSQL

NA

NA

SAP SQL Anywhere

database space

NA

create dbspace
SAP Adaptive Server Enter

NA

segment

prise

sp-addsegment

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

221

DBMS

Tablespace represents...

Storage represents...

SAP IQ

database space

NA

create dbspace
Teradata

NA

NA

Note
When tablespace or storage options are not applicable for a DBMS, the corresponding model menu item is not
available.

1.3.19.1

Creating a Tablespace or Storage

You can create a tablespace or storage from the Browser or Model menu.
Select

Model

Tablespaces

(or

Storages ) to access the appropriate list, and click the Add a Row tool

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Tablespace

(or

Storage )

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.19.2

Tablespace and Storage Properties

To view or edit a tablespace or storage's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs
and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 105:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = but
ton to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

222

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

Cost tab
The Cost tab is available if data lifecycle modeling (see Lifecycles (PDM) [page 211]) is supported by your DBMS.
Table 106:
Property

Description

Cost (per GB)

Specifies the cost per GB of the storage represented by the tablespace

Currency

Displays the currency to use for the cost per GB of storage. You can change the currency by selecting
Tools

Model Options

and choosing a currency from the list on the Model Settings page.

Other tabs
The following tabs are also available:
Physical Options - lists all the physical options that can be applied to the tablespace or storage (see Physical
Options (PDM) [page 100]).
Physical Options (Common) - lists the most commonly used physical options that can be applied to the
tablespace or storage.

Note
For detailed information about tablespace and storage options for a particular DBMS, see its reference manual.

1.3.20 Web Services (PDM)

Web services are applications stored on web servers that are accessed through standard web protocols (HTTP,
SOAP) and data formats (HTML, XML...), whatever the systems and programming languages. PowerDesigner
supports modeling for both the SOAP protocol, in which queries are encapsulated into services, and HTTP, where
operations are invoked directly.
If you use web services to query databases, you no longer need database drivers. The following example shows
the result of an HTTP request for a database web service:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

223

Web services comprise a set of operations, each of which contains a SQL query for retrieving data from a
database. Web parameters are the parameters which appear in the SQL statements, and result columns display
the results. These objects have no symbols, and appear only in the Browser. Web services can be modeled for the
following DBMSs:
SAP SQL Anywhere v9 and over.
SAP Adaptive Server Enterprise v15 and over.
SAP IQ v12.6 and over.
IBM DB2 v8.1 and over - Document Access Definition Extension (DADX) files specify Web services through a
set of operations defined by SQL statements or Document Access Definition (DAD) files, which specify the
mapping between XML elements and DB2 tables (see Generating Web Services for IBM DB2 [page 232] and
XML Modeling > Working with XML and Databases > Generating a DAD File for IBM DB2.
You can test a Web service of type DISH or SOAP from within your model by right-clicking its Browser entry and
selecting Show WSDL. You can test a web service operation belonging to a Web service of another type by rightclicking the operation and selecting Test Web Service Operation. Review the generated URL and then click OK to
display the WSDL file (for SOAP) or results (for RAW) in your Web browser.
You can import a Web service as a service provider into a Business Process Model (BPM) to define the links
between a concrete implementation of service interfaces and operations and their abstract definition (see
Business Process Modeling > Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) > Service Providers (BPM)).

224

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.20.1

Creating a Web Service

You can create a web service from the Browser or Model menu.
Select

Model

Web Services

to access the List of Web Services, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Web Service .

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.3.20.2 Web Service Properties

To view or edit a web service's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 107:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.
In URIs, the name of the web service is used to access the web service, and should not start with a
slash nor contain two consecutive slashes.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add ster
eotypes to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Local path

Specifies the name prefixing the web service, which is by default, the name of the web service.
When several web services concern the same table, their local path usually starts with the name of
the table, followed by a slash and a specific name identifying the query (e.g. Customer/List, Cus
tomer/Name). PowerDesigner treats HTTP web operations which share a local path as belonging
to the web service with that local path name. If you enter a path, the User-Defined tool is de
pressed. Click the tool to release it and recover the original path.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

225

Property

Description

Service type

[ASA, ASE, and IQ only] Specifies the type of web service. A web service invoked via an HTTP re
quest can have a RAW, HTML or XML type. A web service invoked in a SOAP request can have a
SOAP or a DISH type:

DISH - [ASA and IQ only] acts as a proxy for a group of SOAP services and generates a WSDL
(Web Services Description Language) file for each of its SOAP services. When you create a
DISH service, you must specify a Name prefix on the Sybase tab (see SAP SQL Anywhere
[page 583]) for all the SOAP services to which the DISH service applies. PowerDesigner
treats SOAP web services as Web operations (see Web Operations (PDM) [page 227]) of
DISH web services.

HTML [ASA and IQ only] the result of the SQL statement or procedure is formatted as an
HTML document (with a table containing rows and columns).

RAW - the result of the SQL statement or procedure is sent without any additional formatting.

SOAP - [ASE only] generates a WSDL file.

XML - the result of the SQL statement or procedure is sent in XML. By default, the result is
converted into XML RAW format.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

Security Tab
This tab is available for ASA/SQL Anywhere and IQ only, and displays the following properties:
Table 108:
Property

Description

Secured connection

If selected, only HTTPS connections are accepted. If cleared, both HTTP and HTTPS connections
are accepted

Required authorization

If selected, all users must provide a name and a password. When cleared, a single user must be
identified

Connection User

When authorization is required, you can select <None> or a list of user names. When authorization
is not required, you must select a user name. Default value is <None>, which means all users are
granted access

The following tabs are also available:

Operations - Lists the Web operations associated with the Web service (see Web Operations (PDM) [page
227]).
Sybase - [ASA/SQL Anywhere, ASE, and IQ] Includes DBMS-specific properties (see SAP SQL Anywhere
[page 583])
Namespaces - [IBM DB2] Lists the namespaces associated with the Web service, including their prefix, URI
and a comment. An XML Schema can be specified where elements and data types used in web parameters
and result columns are defined.

226

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.20.3 Web Operations (PDM)

A web operation allows you to define the SQL statement of a web service and to display its parameters and result
columns.

Creating a Web Operation

You can create a Web operation in the following ways:
Open the Operations tab in the property sheet of a web service, and click the Add a Row tool.
Right-click a web service in the Browser, and select

New

Web Operation .

Web Operation Properties

To view or edit a web operation's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and
fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator. The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 109:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally in
clude spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object.
By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the
model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the
Code field.
In URIs, the name of the web operation comes after the name of the web service followed by a slash, and
should not start with a slash nor contain two consecutive slashes.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes
to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Web Service

Code of the web service containing the web operation. Click the Properties tool to open the web service
property sheet

Owner

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

[ASE 15 only] Specifies the owner of the operation.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

227

Property

Description

Operation Type

[IBM DB2 only] Specifies the type of operation. You can choose from the following:

call - invokes a stored procedure with parameters and result columns for the web operation

query - retrieves relational data using the SQL select statement in the Implementation tab

retrieveXML - retrieves an XML document from relational data. The mapping of relational data to
XML data is defined by a DAD file with SQL or RDB as MappingType

storeXML - stores an XML document as relational data. The mapping of XML data to relational data
is defined by a DAD file, with RDB as MappingType

update - executes the SQL update statement with optional parameters. Parameters can be created
from the Parameters tab in the web operation property sheet

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Implementation - Contains the SQL statement of the Web operation to select which data you want to retrieve
from the database. For DISH web services, SQL statements are defined in the SOAP web services bearing
their prefix name. For information about the tools on this tab, see Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page
295].

Security - [SQL Anywhere/IQ] Displays the following properties:

228

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Table 110:
Property

Description

Secured connection

Requires an HTTPS connection.

Required authoriza

Requires users to provide a name and a password.

tion
Connection User

When authorization is required, you can select the default <None> (all users are granted access),
or a list of user names. When authorization is not required, you must select a user name.

Parameters - Lists the parameters associated with the Web operation, which are part of the SQL statement
defined on the Implementation tab (see Web Parameters (PDM) [page 229]).
Result Columns - Lists the result columns associated with the Web operation (see Web Result Columns (PDM)
[page 230]).
Sybase - [ASE] Displays ASE-specific options (see SAP Adaptive Server Enterprise [page 544]).

1.3.20.4 Web Parameters (PDM)

Web parameters are part of the SQL statement defined in the Implementation tab of a web operation property
sheet, and are listed on its Parameters tab.

Creating a Web Parameter

You can create a Web parameter in the following ways:
Open the Parameters tab in the property sheet of a Web operation, and click the Add a Row tool. Alternatively,
use the Add Parameters from SQL Implementation tool (ASA, ASE, and IQ only) to display the parameters
resulting from the reverse engineering of the web service.
Right-click a web operation in the Browser, and select

New

Web Parameter .

Web Parameter Properties

To view or edit a web parameter's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and
fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator. The General tab contains the following properties:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

229

Table 111:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally in
clude spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object.
By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the
model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the
Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes
to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Web operation

Name of the web operation containing the web parameter.

Parameter type

Select in if you want the web parameter to be an input parameter. Select in/out if you want the web pa
rameter to be both an input and output parameter. Select out if you want the web parameter to be an
output parameter.

Default value

[ASE only] Specifies a default value for the parameter.

Data type

[For IBM DB2] Select an XML schema data type from the list, or click the Select Object tool to open a
selection dialog box where you select a global element in an XML model open in the workspace.
[For ASE] Select a datatype from the list.

Is element

[IBM DB2 only] Checked and greyed when a global element is attached to a web parameter.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

1.3.20.5 Web Result Columns (PDM)

Result columns are part of the SQL statement defined in the Implementation tab of a web operation property
sheet, and are listed on its Result Columns tab. They belong to a table in the target database.

Creating a Web Result Column

You can create a Web result column in the following ways:
Open the Result Columns tab in the property sheet of a Web operation, and click the Add a Row tool.
Alternatively, use the Add Result Columns from Executing SQL Statement tool to display the result columns
resulting from the execution of the SQL statement in the database.
Right-click a web operation in the Browser, and select

230

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Result Column .

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Web Result Column Properties

To view or edit a result column's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and
fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator. The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 112:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally in
clude spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object.
By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the
model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the
Code field.

Data Type

[IBM DB2] Select an XML schema data type from the list, or click the Select Object tool to select a global
element in an XML model open in the workspace.

Is element

[IBM DB2] Checked and greyed when a global element is attached to a result column.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

1.3.20.6 Generating Web Services for SQL Anywhere, ASE,

and IQ
You can generate database web services to a script or to a live database connection.

Procedure
1. Select Database Generate Database to open the Database Generation dialog, and specify the standard
options, including whether you want to generate to a script or to a live database connection (see Generating a
Database from a PDM [page 304]).
2. [optional] Click the Options tab and click Web Service in the left-hand pane to display the web service
generation options. Change the default options as appropriate.
3. [optional] Click the Selection tab and select the Web Services subtab at the bottom of the tab. Select the web
services that you want to generate.
4. Click OK to begin the generation.

Note
For web services generated to a live database connection, you may have to refresh the Web Services folder
before they appear.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

231

1.3.20.7 Generating Web Services for IBM DB2

For IBM DB2 Web services, PowerDesigner can generate Document Access Definition Extension (DADX) files.

Context
To enable the DADX generation extensions in your model, select Model Extensions , click the Attach an
Extension tool, select the DADX file (on the General Purposetab), and click OK to attach it.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Extended Generation

to open the Generation dialog with DADX selected in the Targets tab.

2. Click the Select a Path tool to the right of the Directory field, and specify a path for the DADX files.
3. Click the Selection tab, and select the web services for which you want to generate a DADX file.

232

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

4. Click OK to begin generation.

When generation is complete, the Result dialog displays the paths of the DADX files.

5. [optional] Select the path of a DADX file and click Edit to display the DADX file in the editor window.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

233

6. Click Close in the Result dialog box.

You can now use the DADX files for SOAP requests in IBM DB2 UDB web services Object Runtime Framework
(WORF).

234

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.3.20.8 Reverse Engineering Web Services

You can reverse engineer Web services from a SQL Anywhere, ASE, and IQ database to a PDM. You can reverse
engineer web services into a new or existing PDM from a script or live database connection via the Database
Reverse Engineering dialog box.
For general information about database reverse engineering, see Reverse Engineering a Database into a PDM
[page 328]. The following list shows how Web service objects in these databases are treated in PowerDesigner:
Database HTTP web services with a common local path are grouped as PowerDesigner web operations of an
HTTP web service with the specified local path:
Table 113:
Software

Web service name

Type

Web operation name

Database

Customers/Name

HTML

PowerDesigner

Customers

HTML

Name

Database HTTP web services without a common local path are grouped as PowerDesigner web operations of
an HTTP web service named raw, xml or html:
Table 114:
Software

Web service name

Type

Web operation name

Database

Customers

HTML

PowerDesigner

html

HTML

Customers

Database SOAP web services with a prefix name are considered as PowerDesigner web operations of a DISH
web service with the prefix name:
Table 115:
Software

Web service name

Type

Web operation name

Database

DishPrefix/Name

SOAP

PowerDesigner

Customers (with DishPrefix as

DISH

Name

prefix)

Database SOAP web services without a prefix name are considered as PowerDesigner web operations of a
DISH web service without a prefix name:
Table 116:
Software

Web service name

Type

Web operation name

Database

Customers

SOAP

PowerDesigner

WEBSERVICE_1

DISH

Customers

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

235

 Database DISH web services with or without a prefix name are considered identically in PowerDesigner:
Table 117:
Software

Web service name

Type

Web operation name

Database

Customers

DISH

PowerDesigner

Customers (with or without

DISH

DishPrefix as prefix)

1.4

Multidimensional Diagrams

A multidimensional data diagram provides a graphical view of your datamart or data warehouse database, and
helps you identify the facts and dimensions that will be used to build its cubes.

Note
Multi-dimensional diagrams are generally generated from a physical diagram (see Generating Cubes [page
239]). To manually create a multidimensional diagram in an existing PDM, right-click the model in the Browser
and select New Multidimensional Diagram . To create a new model, select File New Model , choose
Physical Data Model as the model type and Multidimensional Diagram as the first diagram, and then click OK.
Numeric values or measures such as sales total, budget, and cost, are the facts of the business, while the areas
covered by the business, in terms of geography, time, people and products, are the dimensions of the business. A

236

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

multidimensional diagram shows the facts, surrounded by their dimensions, which will be used to populate cubes
for enterprise information management, query and analysis tool and enterprise reporting. In the following
example, the Sales fact is surrounded by the Product, Time, Customer, and Store dimensions to allow sales data
to be analyzed by any of these criteria:

PowerDesigner maps facts and dimensions to their original operational database tables to enable population of
the cubes (see Operational to Warehouse Data Mappings [page 249]).

1.4.1

Multidimensional Diagram Objects

PowerDesigner supports all the objects necessary to build multidimensional diagrams.

Table 118:
Object

Tool

Symbol

Fact

Description
Group of measures related to aspects of the business and used
to carry out a decision support investigation. See Facts (PDM)
[page 241].

Dimension

Axis of investigation of a cube (time, product, geography). See

Dimensions (PDM) [page 243].

Attribute

[none]

[none]

Used to qualify a dimension. For example, attribute Year quali

fies the Date dimension. See Fact and Dimension Attributes
(PDM) [page 245].

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

237

Object

Tool

Symbol

Description

Measure

[none]

[none]

Variable linked to a fact, used as the focus of a decision support

investigation. See Measures (PDM) [page 242].

Hierarchy

[none]

[none]

Organizational structure that describes a traversal pattern

though a dimension. See Hierarchies (PDM) [page 247].

Association

Association that relates a fact to a dimension. See Associations

(PDM) [page 248].

1.4.2

Identifying Fact and Dimension Tables

When designing a data warehouse, you will need to identify which of your tables and views represent facts
(containing numerical values such as sales, revenue, or budget figures), and which dimensions (providing ways of
aggregating these figures, such as by region, date, customer, or product). PowerDesigner can retrieve the
multidimensional type of a table by analyzing the references attached to it, where child tables or views are
identified as candidate facts and parent tables or views are identified as candidate dimensions.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Multidimension
Retrieval Wizard.

RetrieveMultidimensional Objects

to open the Multidimensional Objects

2. Specify the objects to be retrieved. By default both Facts and Dimensions will be retrieved.

Note
If you are working with SAP IQ v12.0 or higher, you can also select to automatically rebuild join indexes
after retrieving multidimensional objects. For more information, see Join Indexes (IQ/Oracle) [page 577].
3. [optional] Click the Selection tab to specify which tables to consider as candidates for fact or dimension
tables. By default, all tables except those that have their Dimensional type set to Exclude are selected (see
Table Properties [page 87]).
4. Click OK to retrieve the multidimensional objects.

238

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

The selected tables are assigned a multidimensional type, and a type icon is displayed in the upper left corner
of each table's symbol:
Table 119:
Fact table

Dimension table

5. [optional] Review the types identified by PowerDesigner and, if necessary, modify them by changing the value
of the Dimensional type field on the General tab of the table or view property sheet.

1.4.3

Generating Cubes

PowerDesigner can generate facts and dimensions from your operational tables to create a multidimensional
diagram representing a cube. The generation will create mappings between your operational and warehouse
objects as the basis for extraction scripts or in preparation for generating a BusinessObjects universe.

Context
You can prepare and preview the multidimensional types of your operational tables and views before launching
this wizard either manually by setting the Dimensional type value (see Table Properties [page 87]) or have
PowerDesigner retrieve them (see Identifying Fact and Dimension Tables [page 238]). You can generate a
BusinessObjects universe at any time (see Generating an SAP BusinessObjects Universe [page 315]).

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Multidimensional Objects

Generate Cube

to open the wizard.

2. Select the package where you want to create the multidimensional diagram, and then click Next. For DBMSs,
such as SAP HANA, which require that you create your multidimensional objects in a package,
PowerDesigner will force the creation of a new package if none exist.
3. Select the operational tables from which to build your facts and dimensions, and then click Next. By default,
PowerDesigner selects all the tables in your model.
4. Select the operational tables from which to build your facts, and then click Next. By default, PowerDesigner
selects tables with only outgoing references as facts.
5. Select the operational tables from which to build dimensions around each of your facts, and then click Next.
By default, PowerDesigner selects all the tables with direct or indirect references from your fact tables and
will merge second and higher order references into the dimensions created from first order references.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

239

6. Select fact table columns as measures or attributes of your facts, and then click Next. By default,
PowerDesigner selects non-key numeric columns as measures and all other columns as attributes. You can
drag and drop columns between the Candidates, Measures, and Attributes trees as necessary
7. Review the list of facts that will be generated, and click Finish to begin the generation.
The Generate Cubes Wizard creates a multidimensional object containing facts and dimensions to represent
your cubes:

1.4.3.1

Modifying Cubes

PowerDesigner can update your facts and dimensions in a multidimensional diagram representing a cube to
reflect changes made to your operational tables or simply to add or remove dimensions, measures, or attributes.

Procedure
1. Select the cube fact in the multidimensional diagram you want to update, and then select
Cube

Tools

Modify

to open the wizard.

2. Select the operational tables from which to build dimensions around your facts, and then click Next. By
default, PowerDesigner selects only those tables that you have previously selected as dimensions.
3. Select fact table columns as measures or attributes of your facts, and then click Next. By default,
PowerDesigner reproduces your previous choices and you can drag and drop columns between the
Candidates, Measures, and Attributes trees as necessary.
4. Review the objects that will be generated, and click Finish to begin the generation.
The wizard updates your multidimensional diagram to reflect your new choices.

240

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.4.4

Facts (PDM)

Facts define the focus of the data to be analyzed and how it is calculated. Examples of facts are sales, costs,
employee hours, revenue, budget. Facts contain a list of measures, which represent the actual numerical data,
and are surrounded by dimensions, which control how that data will be analyzed.

1.4.4.1

Creating a Fact

Facts are generally generated from operational database tables or views. You can also manually create facts from
the Toolbox, Browser, or Model menu.
Use the Fact tool in the Toolbox.
Select

Model

Facts

to access the List of Facts, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Fact .

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.4.4.2

Fact Properties

To view or edit a fact's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property sheet
tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 120:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

241

Property

Description

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Mapped to

Specifies the operational database table or view to which the fact is mapped. Click the Properties tool
to open the source table property sheet. To map a manually-created fact to its source, open the Map
ping Editor and drag and drop the table or view from the Source pane onto the fact in the Target pane
(see Operational to Warehouse Data Mappings [page 249]).

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Attributes - specifies attributes that are used by the fact for joins to dimensions or as the basis of calculated
measures (see Fact and Dimension Attributes (PDM) [page 245]).
Measures - lists the measures manipulated by the fact (see Measures (PDM) [page 242]).
Dimensions - lists the dimensions linked to the fact in the cube (see Dimensions (PDM) [page 243]).
Mapping - specifies the mapping between the fact and the source operational database table or view (see
Operational to Warehouse Data Mappings [page 249]).

1.4.4.3

Measures (PDM)

Measures are mapped to numerical columns in fact tables and aggregate the values in the columns along the
selected dimensions. For example, when a user chooses to view the sales in Texas in 2012 Q1, the calculation is
performed via the Sales measure using a Sum aggregation. Measures can also be based on operations or
calculations or derived from other measures.

Creating a Measure
Measures are generally generated from numerical columns in operational database tables. You can also manually
create measures from the property sheet of, or in the Browser under, a fact.
Open the Measures tab in the property sheet of a fact, and click the Add a Row tool.
Right-click a fact in the Browser, and select

New

Measure .

Measure Properties
To view or edit a measure's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.

242

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

The General tab contains the following properties:

Table 121:
Property

Description

Parent

Specifies the parent fact of the measure. Click the Properties tool to open the fact property sheet.

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,

Comment

while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Type

Specifies how the value of the measure is determined. In each case, specify the aggregation function
to be applied to values and then choose from:

Standard - the measure is mapped to the operational table column specified in the Mapped to
field. To map a manually-created measure to its source, open the Mapping Editor and drag and
drop the column from the Source pane onto the measure in the Target pane (see Operational to
Warehouse Data Mappings [page 249]).

Calculated - the measure is calculated from an expression specified in the Formula

expression field. Enter the expression directly or click the Edit with SQL Editor tool (see Writing
SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page 295]).

Restricted - the measure is derived from the measure specified in the Base measure field,
and constrained by the values specified for each of the fact or dimension attributes added to the
list.

Hidden

Specifies that the measure will not be visible to business users consulting the cube.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

1.4.5

Dimensions (PDM)

A dimension is an axis of analysis in a multidimensional structure. Typical dimensions for a sales database include
time, region, department, and product.
A dimension is made of an ordered list of attributes that share a common semantic meaning in the domain being
modeled. For example a Time dimension often contains attributes that allow you to analyze data by year, quarter,
month, and week:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

243

A dimension may have one or more hierarchies representing different ways of traversing the list of attributes.

1.4.5.1

Creating a Dimension

Dimensions are generally generated from operational database tables or views. You can also manually create a
dimension from the Toolbox, Browser, or Model menu.
Use the Dimension tool in the Toolbox.
Select

Model

Dimensions

to access the List of Dimensions, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Dimension .

For general information about creating objects, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects.

1.4.5.2

Dimension Properties

To view or edit a dimension's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 122:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add ster
eotypes to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Mapped to

Specifies the operational database table or view to which the dimension is mapped. Click the
Properties tool to open the source table property sheet. To map a manually-created dimension to
its source, open the Mapping Editor and drag and drop the table or view from the Source pane
onto the dimension in the Target pane (see Operational to Warehouse Data Mappings [page
249]).

Default Hierarchy

Specifies the dimension hierarchy used by default for a cube to perform its consolidation calcula
tions. The hierarchy used by the cube is defined on the cube dimension association

244

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Property

Description

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Attributes - lists the attributes that qualify the dimension (see Fact and Dimension Attributes (PDM) [page
245]).
Hierarchies - lists the hierarchies used to organize the dimension attributes (see Hierarchies (PDM) [page
247]).
Mapping - defines the mapping between the current dimension and a table or a view in a data source.

1.4.5.3

Fact and Dimension Attributes (PDM)

Fact attributes are used by the fact for joins to dimensions or as the basis of calculated measures. Dimension
attributes provide data points around which the data in a fact can be interrogated.

Creating an Attribute
Fact and dimension attributes are generally generated from operational database table columns. You can also
manually create attributes as follows:
Open the Attributes tab in the property sheet of a fact or dimension, and click the Add a Row or Insert a Row
tool. The Add Attributes tool allows you to reuse an attribute from another fact or dimension.
Right-click a fact or dimension in the Browser, and select

New

Attribute .

Attribute Properties
To view or edit an attribute's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 123:
Property

Description

Parent

Specifies the parent fact or dimension of the attribute.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

245

Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add ster
eotypes to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Type

Specifies how the value of the attribute is determined:

Standard - the attribute is mapped to the operational table column specified in the Mapped
to field. To map a manually-created attribute to its source, open the Mapping Editor and drag
and drop the column from the Source pane onto the attribute in the Target pane (see Opera
tional to Warehouse Data Mappings [page 249]).

Calculated - the attribute is calculated from an expression specified in the Formula

expression field. Enter the expression directly or click the Edit with SQL Editor tool (see Writ
ing SQL Code in PowerDesigner [page 295]).

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

Dimension attributes include the following tab:

Detail Attributes - Lists other dimension attributes that are use to further define the attribute. Click the Add
Detail Attributes tool to select attributes defined on the current dimension to further define the attribute.
In the following example, attributes Cust_Name and Cust_Address are used as detail attributes for
Cust_ID:

246

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.4.5.4

Hierarchies (PDM)

A hierarchy defines a path for navigating through the attributes in a dimension when drilling down or rolling up
through the data. For example, a time dimension with the attributes Year, Quarter, Month, Week, Day may have a
default hierarchy listing all these periods in order and a second hierarchy which includes only Year, Month, and
Week.

Creating a Hierarchy
You can create a hierarchy from the property sheet of, or in the Browser under, a dimension.
Open the Attributes tab in the property sheet of a dimension, select the attributes you want to include in your
dimension and then click the Create Hierarchy tool.
Open the Hierarchies tab in the property sheet of a dimension, click the Add a Row tool, then click the
Properties tool and add your attributes manually.
Right-click a dimension in the Browser, and select

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

New

Hierarchy .

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

247

Hierarchy Properties
To view or edit a hierarchy's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 124:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add ster
eotypes to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Dimension

Specifies the parent dimension of the hierarchy.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Attributes - lists the attributes associated with the hierarchy in ascending order of specificity (see Fact and
Dimension Attributes (PDM) [page 245]).

1.4.6

Associations (PDM)

An association connects a fact to the dimension that defines it.

For example, the Sale fact is linked to the Time dimension by the Sale - Time association to analyze sales
through the time dimension.

There can be only one association between a fact and a dimension.

248

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Creating an Association
Associations are generally generated from operational database references. You can manually create
associations from the Toolbox, Browser, or Model menu.
Use the Association tool in the Toolbox.
Select

Model

Associations

to access the List of Associations, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Association .

Association Properties
To view or edit an association's properties, double-click its diagram symbol or Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 125:
Property

Description

Fact

Specifies the fact at the origin of the association. Use the tools to the right of the list to create, browse
for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Dimension

Specifies the destination dimension of the association. Use the tools to the right of the list to create,
browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Reference

Specifies the reference upon which the association is based. Click the Properties tool to view the prop
erties of the selected reference.

Hierarchy

Specifies the default hierarchy used by the cube for the consolidation calculation. Click the Properties
tool to view the properties of the selected hierarchy.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

1.4.7

Operational to Warehouse Data Mappings

Data warehousing requires the extraction, transformation, and loading of data from operational systems to a data
warehouse database. You can create mappings between operational and data warehouse data and from the data
warehouse data and OLAP cubes. To review or edit these mappings, open your multidimensional diagram, and
then select

Tools

Mapping Editor .

You can model operational and data warehouse data structures in PDMs, and specify mappings between the
operational data sources and the data warehouse to generate extraction scripts to populate the data warehouse

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

249

with operational data. In this kind of relational-to-relational mapping, operational tables are mapped to data
warehouse tables with a type of fact or dimension, and operational columns are mapped to warehouse columns.
The Generate Cube wizard automatically creates mappings between source tables and facts and dimensions and
you can modify these or manually create mappings between these objects:

The Select sub-tab displays the SQL statement used to select data in the data source. The Generate Cube Data
wizard uses this SQL statement to fill the text files used to populate cubes in an OLAP database.

250

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.4.8

Generating Data Warehouse Extraction Scripts

You can model operational and data warehouse data structures in PDMs, and specify mappings between the
operational data sources and the data warehouse to generate extraction scripts to populate the data warehouse
with operational data.

Context
In this kind of relational-to-relational mapping, operational tables are mapped to data warehouse tables with a
type of fact or dimension, and operational columns are mapped to warehouse columns.You can generate a script
file for each data source, you can also select the tables in the data source which select orders will be generated
in the script file. The extraction scripts list all the select orders defined in the table mappings.

Procedure
1. In the Physical Diagram, select

Database

Generate Extraction Scripts :

2. Specify a destination directory for the generated file, and select the Check Model option if you want to verify
the PDM syntax before generation.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

251

3. [optional] Click the Options tab and specify any appropriate options:
Table 126:
Option

Description

Title

Specifies to insert the database header and the name of the tables before each select query.

Encoding

Specifies the encoding format. You should select the format that supports the language used in your
model and the database encoding format.

Character Case

Specifies the case to use in the generated file.

No Accent

Specifies to remove any accents from generated characters.

4. [optional] Click the Selection tab, and select the tables for which you want to generate extraction scripts.
5. Click OK to generate the script files in the specified directory. The name of the script is identical to the name
of the data source.

1.4.9

Generating Cube Data

You can map physical tables (including those of type dimension or fact) to cube dimensions or cube measures in
OLAP databases, and use these mappings to generate cube data in text files to be loaded by OLAP engines. When
you use the Rebuild Cubes command to create cubes and dimensions from fact and dimension tables, mappings
between source tables and OLAP objects are automatically created.

Context
In a PDM multidimensional diagram, each fact is associated with a query. There is one fact per mapping and per
data source. The query defined on a fact is used to extract data from a data warehouse or operational database to
populate the cubes in the OLAP database. The link between the data warehouse database and the OLAP database
is a relational to multidimensional mapping.

Procedure
1. In the multidimensional diagram, select

252

Tools

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Generate Cube Data .

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2. Specify a destination directory for the generated file, and select any appropriate options in the Options tab:
Table 127:
Option

Description

Header

Specifies to include the name of the attribute at the beginning of the generated text file

Extension

Specifies the extension of the generated text file.You can choose either .txt and .csv.

Separator

Specifies the separator to use between columns. The default is , (comma).

Delimiter

Specifies the character to delimit string values. The default is " (double-quote).

Encoding

Specifies the encoding format. You should select the format that supports the language used in your
model and the database encoding format.

Character Case

Specifies the case to use in the generated file.

No Accent

Specifies to remove any accents from generated characters.

3. Select the facts and data sources for which you want to generate a file from the sub-tabs in the Selection tab.
4. Click OK.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

253

The generated files are stored in the destination directory you have defined. PowerDesigner produces one file
for each selected fact and each selected data source, named by concatenating the names of the fact and the
data source, and containing the following fields:
Table 128:

1.5

Field

Details

Dimension

Lists the attributes of the cube

Member

Lists the attribute values

Data fields

Contains the values stored in the fact measures

Checking a Data Model

The data model is a very flexible tool, which allows you quickly to develop your model without constraints. You can
check the validity of your Data Model at any time.
A valid Data Model conforms to the following kinds of rules:
Each object name in a data model must be unique
Each entity in a CDM must have at least one attribute
Each relationship in a LDM must be attached to at least one entity
Each index in a PDM must have a column

Note
We recommend that you check your data model before generating another model or a database from it . If the
check encounters errors, generation will be stopped. The Check model option is enabled by default in the
Generation dialog box.
You can check your model in any of the following ways:
Press F4, or
Select

Tools

Check Model , or

Right-click the diagram background and select Check Model from the contextual menu
The Check Model Parameters dialog opens, allowing you to specify the kinds of checks to perform, and the
objects to apply them to. The following sections document the Data Model-specific checks available by default.
For information about checks made on generic objects available in all model types and for detailed information
about using the Check Model Parameters dialog, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Objects > Checking Models.

254

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.5.1

Abstract Data Type Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of abstract data types.
Table 129:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Abstract Data Type

code maximum length

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The code of the ADT is longer than the maximum allowed by the DBMS.

Manual correction: Reduce the length of the code

Automatic correction: Reduces the code to a permissible length

Instantiable object type If an abstract data type of type Object (or SQLJ Object) is instantiable (Abstract option not checked),
must have attributes
and no abstract proce
dures

then it must have attributes and no abstract procedure.

Manual correction: Define at least one attribute in the ADT Attributes tab and clear the Abstract
option in the procedures property sheet

Automatic correction: None

Abstract object type

If an abstract data type of type Object (or SQLJ Object) is not instantiable (Abstract option checked),

must not have tables

then it must not have tables based on it.

based on it

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Set the Based on property to <None> in the tables property sheet

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

255

1.5.2

Abstract Data Type Procedure Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of abstract data type procedures.
Table 130:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Abstract Data Type

procedure code maxi
mum length

Procedure cannot have

the same name as an
attribute

Abstract data type pro

cedure definition
empty

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The code of the ADT procedure is longer than the maximum allowed by the DBMS.

Manual correction: Reduce the length of the code

Automatic correction: Reduces the code to a permissible length

An abstract data type procedure cannot have the same name as an attribute.

Manual correction: Change the name of the ADT procedure

Automatic correction: None

An abstract data type procedure must have a definition.

Manual correction: Create an ADT procedure definition in the Definition tab of the ADT proce
dure property sheet

Automatic correction: None

Inconsistent return

If the abstract data type procedure is a function, a map or an order, you should define a return data

type

type for the function, map or order.

256

Manual correction: Select a return data type in the Return data type list

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.5.3

Association Checks (CDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of associations.

Table 131:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Number of links >= 2

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

An association is isolated and therefore does not define a relationship between entities.

Manual correction: Define at least two links between the isolated association and one or several
entities.

Automatic correction: None.

Number of links = 2

An identifier link introduces a dependency between two entities. An association with this type of link

with an identifier link

must be binary.

Manual correction: Delete the unnecessary links or clear the Identifier check box for a link.

Automatic correction: None.

Number of identifier

An identifier link introduces a dependency between two entities. There can only be one identifier link

links <= 1

between two entities otherwise a circular dependency is created.

Absence of properties
with identifier links

Manual correction: Clear the Identifier check box for one of the links.

Automatic correction: None.

An association with an identifier link cannot have any properties.

Manual correction: Move the association properties into the dependent entity (the one linked to
the association with an identifier link).

Automatic correction: None.

Bijective association

There are bijective associations between two entities when a two-way one to one association be

between two entities

tween the entities exist. This is equivalent to a merge of two entities.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Merge the entities or modify the cardinality links.

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

257

Check

Description and Correction

Maximal cardinality

An association with more than two links can only have links with a maximum cardinality greater than

links

one.

Manual correction: Change the maximum cardinality of such links to be greater than 1.

Automatic correction: None.

Reflexive identifier links An identifier link introduces a dependency between two entities. An association with this type of link
cannot therefore be reflexive.

Manual correction: Change the relationship between the entities or clear the Identifier check box
for a link.

Name uniqueness con

straint between manyto-many associations
and entities

1.5.4

Automatic correction: None.

A many-to-many association and an entity cannot have the same name or code.

Manual correction: Change the name or code of the many-to-many association or the name or
code of the entity. If you do not, PDM generation will rename the generated table.

Automatic correction: None.

Association Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of associations.

Table 132:
Check

Description and Correction

Existence of hierarchy

An association must have a hierarchy specified in order to perform the consolidation calculation.

1.5.5

Manual correction: Select a hierarchy in the Hierarchy list in the association property sheet

Automatic correction: None

Column Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of columns.

Table 133:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

258

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

Column code maxi

The column code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS definition (MaxLen

mum length

entry, in the

Objects

Column

category) or in the naming conventions of the model options.

Manual correction: Modify the column code length to meet this requirement
Automatic correction: Truncates the code length to the maximum length specified in the DBMS
definition

Domain divergence

Divergence is verified between columns, domains, and data types. Various checks and attributes are
also examined. One or more of the Enforce non divergence model options must be selected.

Manual correction: Select one or more of the Enforce non divergence model options to enforce
non divergence

Automatic correction: Restores divergent attributes from domain to column (domain values
overwrite column values)

Column mandatory

In some DBMS, the columns included in a key or a unique index should be mandatory.

Manual correction: Select the Mandatory check box in the column property sheet

Automatic correction: Makes the column mandatory

Detect inconsistencies

The values entered in the check parameters tab are inconsistent for numeric and string data types:

between check param

default does not respect minimum and maximum values, or default does not belong to list of values,

eters

or values in list are not included in minimum and maximum values, or minimum is greater than maxi
mum value. Check parameters must be defined consistently.

Manual correction: Modify default, minimum, maximum or list of values in the check parameters
tab

Automatic correction: None

Precision > Maximum

The data type precision should not be greater than the length. Note that some DBMS accept a preci

length

sion higher than the length.

Undefined data type

Manual correction: Make the data type length greater than the precision

Automatic correction: None

A model should not contain columns with undefined data type, all columns should have a defined
data type.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Select a data type in the column property sheet

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

259

Check

Description and Correction

Foreign key column

Primary/alternate and foreign key columns involved in a join should have consistent data types and

data type and con

constraint parameters.

straint parameters di
vergence

Manual correction: Modify foreign key data types and constraint parameters to make them con
sistent

Automatic correction: Parent column overwrites existing data type and constraint parameters
in the foreign key column

Column with sequence

Since a sequence is used to initialize a key, it should be attached to a column that is part of a key.

not in a key

This applies to those DBMS that support sequences.

Auto-incremented col
umn with data type not
numeric

Auto-incremented col
umn is foreign key

Missing computed col

umn expression

Manual correction: Attach the sequence to a column that is part of a key

Automatic correction: None

An auto-incremented column must have a numeric data type.

Manual correction: Change the column data type

Automatic correction: Changes data type to numeric data type

A foreign key column should not be auto-incremented.

Manual correction: Deselect the Indentity check box in the column property sheet

Automatic correction: None

A computed column should have a computed expression defined.

Manual correction: Add a computed expression to the column in the Details tab of the column
property sheet

Automatic correction: None

Invalid mapping from

A column in a table managed by a lifecycle policy in which the first phase is associated with an exter

source column

nal database must not be mapped to more than one column in the corresponding table in the exter
nal database.

Manual correction: Remove the additional mappings.

Automatic correction: None

Data type compatibility

A column in a table managed by a lifecycle policy in which the first phase is associated with an exter

of mapped columns

nal database must be mapped to a column with the same data type in the corresponding table in the
external database.

Existence of mapping

Manual correction: Harmonize the data types in the source and target columns.

Automatic correction: None

A mandatory column in a table managed by a lifecycle policy in which the first phase is associated

for mandatory columns with an external database must be mapped to a column in the corresponding table in the external
database.

260

Manual correction: Map the mandatory column to a column in the external database.

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.5.6

Cube Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of cubes.

Table 134:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of associa
tion

Existence of fact

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

A cube must have at least one association with a dimension.

Manual correction: Create an association between the cube and a dimension

Automatic correction: None

A cube must be associated to a fact.

Manual correction: Click the Ellipsis button beside the Fact box in the cube property sheet, and

Automatic correction: None

select a fact from the List of Facts

Duplicated association
with the same dimen
sion

1.5.7

A cube cannot have more than one association with the same dimension.

Manual correction: Delete one of the associations

Automatic correction: None

Database Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of databases.

Table 135:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

261

Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Database code maxi

mum length

Database not used

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The code of the database is longer than the maximum allowed by the DBMS.

Manual correction: Reduce the length of the code

Automatic correction: Reduces the code to a permissible length

The database you have created is not used in the model.

Manual correction: Delete the database or apply the database as a physical option to a table, an
index, a key, a column, a storage, a tablespace or a view (Options tab of the object property
sheet)

1.5.8

Automatic correction: None

Database Package Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of database packages.
Table 136:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

262

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Database package

The database package name and code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the

name and code maxi

DBMS definition and in the naming conventions of the model options.

mum length

Manual correction: Modify the name/code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the name/code length to the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition (at

Existence of package
<sub-object>

Objects

DB Package

MaxLen

A database package must have a number of sub-objects defined in order to be correctly modeled.

Manual correction: Create one or more of the relevant object on the appropriate tab of the data
base package property sheet:

Procedures (or use existing stored procedures and duplicate them in the database pack
age)

1.5.9

Cursors

Variables

Types

Exceptions

Automatic correction: None

Database Package Sub-Object Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of database package cursors, exceptions,
procedures, types, and variables.
Table 137:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains terms

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the

not in glossary

glossary.

Name/Code contains syno

nyms of glossary terms

Name/Code uniqueness

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

263

Check

Description and Correction

Package <sub-object> defi [cursors, procedures, types] These sub-objects must have a definition.
nition empty

Manual correction: Create the definition in the Definition tab of the sub-object's property
sheet

Check for undefined return

types

Existence of parameter

Automatic correction: None

[cursors, procedures] These sub-objects must have a return data type.

Manual correction: Select a return data type in the subobject's property sheet

Automatic correction: None

[cursors, procedures] These sub-objects must contain parameters for input values.

Manual correction: Create one or several parameters in the Parameters tab of the subobject's property sheet

Undefined data type

Automatic correction: None

[variables] Variables must have a data type.

Manual correction: Select a data type in the variable property sheet

Automatic correction: None

1.5.10 Data Format Checks (CDM/LDM/PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of data formats.
Table 138:
Check

Description and Correction

Empty expression

Data formats must have a value entered in the Expression field.

264

Manual correction: Specify an expression for the data format.

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.5.11

Data Item Checks (CDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of data items.
Table 139:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Data item not used

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

There are unused data items. These are useless for PDM generation.

Manual correction: To use a data item, add it to an entity. If you do not need an unused data

Automatic correction: None.

item, delete it to allow PDM generation.

Data item used multiple There are entities using the same data items. This can be tolerated if you defined this check as a
times

warning.

Manual correction: Take care to ensure consistency when defining data item properties.

Automatic correction: None.

Detect differences be

There is a divergence between data items and associated domains. This can be tolerated if you de

tween data item and

fined this check as a warning.

associated domain

Manual correction: Ensure consistency when defining data item properties

Automatic correction: Restores divergent attributes from domain to data items (domain values
overwrite data item values).

Detect inconsistencies

The values entered in the check parameters page are inconsistent for numeric and string data types:

between check param

default does not respect minimum and maximum values, or default does not belong to list of values,

eters

or values in list are not included in minimum and maximum values, or minimum is greater than maxi
mum value. Check parameters must be defined consistently.

Manual correction: Modify default, minimum, maximum or list of values in the check parameters
page

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

265

Check

Description and Correction

Precision > maximum

The data type precision should not be greater than or equal to the length.

length

Undefined data type

Manual correction: Make the data type length greater than or equal to the precision.

Automatic correction: None.

Undefined data types for data items exist. To be complete, a model should have all its data items
data types defined.

Manual correction: While undefined data types are tolerated, you must select data types for cur
rently undefined data types before you can generate a PDM.

Invalid data type

Automatic correction: None.

Invalid data types for data items exist. To be complete, a model should have all its data types for data
items correctly defined.

Manual correction: While tolerated, you must select valid data types for currently non-valid data
types to generate the PDM.

1.5.12

Automatic correction: None.

Data Source Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of data sources.
Table 140:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of physical
data model

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

A data source must contain at least one physical data model in its definition.

Manual correction: Add a physical data model from the Models tab of the property sheet of the
data source.

266

Automatic correction: Deletes data source without physical data model.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Data source containing

The models in a data source should share the same DBMS since they represent a single database.

models differing DBMS

types

Manual correction: Delete models with different DBMS or modify the DBMS of models in the
data source.

Automatic correction: None

Unsupported source

Each lifecycle policy can only manage one external database, so any data sources defined (and the

models

models they reference) must all point to the same database.

1.5.13

Manual correction: Remove any data sources pointing to other databases.

Automatic correction: None

Default Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of defaults.

Table 141:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

Default code maximum

The default code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS definition (MaxLen

length

entry, in the

Objects

Default

category).

Manual correction: Modify the default code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the default code length to the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition

Default value empty

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

You must type a value for the default, this value is used during generation.

Manual correction: Type a value in the Value box of the default property sheet

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

267

Check

Description and Correction

Several defaults with

A model should not contain several defaults with identical value.

same value

1.5.14

Manual correction: Modify default value or delete defaults with identical value

Automatic correction: None

Dimension Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of dimensions.

Table 142:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of attribute

Existence of hierarchy

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

A dimension must have at least one attribute.

Manual correction: Create an attribute in the Attributes tab of the dimension property sheet

Automatic correction: None

A dimension must use at least one hierarchy.

Manual correction: Create a hierarchy in the Hierarchies tab of the dimension property sheet

Automatic correction: None

Dimension have dupli

Dimensions should not have duplicated hierarchies, that is to say hierarchies organizing identical at

cated hierarchies

tributes.

Dimension without a
default hierarchy

Manual correction: Remove one of the duplicated hierarchies

Automatic correction: None

A dimension should have a default hierarchy.

Manual correction: Select a hierarchy in the Default Hierarchy list of the dimension property
sheet

268

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Dimension mapping

A dimension should be mapped to tables or views in an operational model in order to be populated

not defined

by data from this model.

Manual correction: Map the dimension to a table or a view. You may need to create a data
source before you can create the mapping

Automatic correction: Destroys the mapping for the dimension. This removes the data source
from the Mapping list in the dimension Mapping tab

Attribute mapping not

defined

Attributes must be mapped to columns in the data source tables or views.

Manual correction: Map the attributes to columns in the data source

Automatic correction: None

Incomplete dimension

All attributes, detail attributes and hierarchies of the dimension must be mapped to tables and col

mapping for multidi

umns. You must map the dimension objects before generation.

mensional generation

1.5.15

Manual correction: Map dimension objects to tables and columns

Automatic correction: None

Domain Checks (CDM/LDM/PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of domains.

Table 143:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

269

Check

Description and Correction

Domain code maxi

[PDM only] The domain code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS defini

mum length

tion (MaxLen entry, in the

Objects

Domain

category) or in the naming conventions of the

model options.

Manual correction: Modify the domain code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the domain code length to the maximum length specified in
the DBMS definition

Detect Inconsistencies

The values entered in the Check Parameters tab are inconsistent for numeric and string data types.

between check param

Default does not respect minimum and maximum values, or default does not belong to list of values,

eters

or values in list are not included in minimum and maximum values, or minimum is greater than maxi
mum value. Check parameters must be defined consistently.

Manual correction: Modify default, minimum, maximum or list of values in the check parameters
tab

Precision > maximum

length

Undefined data type

Automatic correction: None

The data type precision should not be greater than the length.

Manual correction: Make the data type length greater than the precision

Automatic correction: None

A model should not contain domains with undefined data type, all domains should have a defined
data type.

Invalid data type

Manual correction: Select a data type from the domain property sheet

Automatic correction: None

[CDM/LDM only] Invalid data types for domains exist. To be complete, a model should have all its
domain data types correctly defined.

Manual correction: While tolerated, you must select valid data types for currently non-valid data
types to generate the PDM.

1.5.16

Automatic correction: None.

Entity Attribute Checks (CDM/LDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of entity attributes.
Table 144:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

270

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

Detect differences be

[LDM only] There is a divergence between attributes and associated domains. This can be tolerated

tween attribute and as

if you defined this check as a warning.

sociated domain

Manual correction: Ensure consistency when defining attribute properties

Automatic correction: Restores divergent attributes from domain to attributes (domain values
overwrite attribute values).

Detect inconsistencies

[LDM only] The values entered in the Check Parameters page are inconsistent for numeric and string

between check param

data types. Default does not respect minimum and maximum values, or default does not belong to

eters

list of values, or values in list are not included in minimum and maximum values, or minimum is
greater than maximum value. Check parameters must be defined consistently.

Manual correction: Modify default, minimum, maximum or list of values in the check parameters
page

Precision > maximum

length

Undefined data type

Automatic correction: None.

[LDM only] The data type precision should not be greater than or equal to the length.

Manual correction: Make the data type length greater than or equal to the precision.

Automatic correction: None.

[LDM only] Undefined data types for attributes exist. To be complete, a model should have all its at
tributes data types defined.

Manual correction: While undefined data types are tolerated, you must select data types for cur
rently undefined data types before you can generate a PDM.

Invalid data type

Automatic correction: None.

[LDM only] Invalid data types for attributes exist. To be complete, a model should have all its data
types for attributes correctly defined.

Manual correction: While tolerated, you must select valid data types for currently non-valid data
types to generate the PDM.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

271

1.5.17

Entity Identifier Checks (CDM/LDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of entity identifiers.
Table 145:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of entity at
tribute

Identifier inclusion

Primary identifier in
child entity

1.5.18

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

At least one attribute must exist for an entity identifier.

Manual correction: Add an attribute to the entity identifier or delete the identifier.

Automatic correction: None.

An identifier cannot include another one.

Manual correction: Delete the identifier that includes an existing identifier.

Automatic correction: None.

[Barker notation] Primary identifiers are no permitted in child entities

Manual correction: Move the primary identifier to the parent entity.

Automatic correction: None

Entity Checks (CDM/LDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of entities.

Table 146:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

272

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

Entity name and code

The entity name and code length is limited to a maximum length of 254 characters specified in the

maximum length

naming conventions of the model options.

Manual correction: Modify the entity name/code length to meet this requirement.

Automatic correction: Truncates the entity name/code length to the maximum length specified
in the naming conventions.

Existence of attributes

An entity must always contain at least one attribute.

Manual correction: Add an attribute to the entity or delete the entity.

Automatic correction: None.

Number of serial types

An entity cannot have more than one serial type attribute. Serial types are automatically calculated

>1

values.

Manual correction: Change the types of the appropriate entity attributes to have only one serial
type attribute.

Existence of identifiers

Existence of relation
ship or association link

Redundant inheritance

Automatic correction: None.

An entity must contain at least one identifier.

Manual correction: Add an identifier to the entity or delete the entity.

Automatic correction: None.

An entity must have at least one relationship or association link.

Manual correction: Add a relationship or an association link to the entity or delete the entity.

Automatic correction: None.

An entity inherits from another entity more than once. This is redundant and adds nothing to the
model.

Multiple inheritance

Manual correction: Delete redundant inheritances

Automatic correction: None.

An entity has multiple inheritance. This is unusual but can be tolerated if you defined this check as a
warning.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Make sure that the multiple inheritance is necessary in your model.

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

273

Check

Description and Correction

Parent of several inher

An entity is the parent of multiple inheritances. This is unusual but can be tolerated if you defined

itances

this check as a warning.

Redefined primary
identifier

Manual correction: Verify if the multiple inheritances could not be merged.

Automatic correction: None.

Primary identifiers in child entities must be the same as those in their parents.

Manual correction: Delete those primary identifiers in the child entities that are not in the parent
entity.

1.5.19

Automatic correction: None.

Fact Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of facts.

Table 147:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of measure

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

A fact must have at least one measure.

Manual correction: Create a measure in the Measures tab of the fact property sheet

Automatic correction: None

Fact mapping not de

A fact must be mapped to tables or views in an operational model in order to be populated by data

fined

from this model.

Manual correction: Map the fact to tables or views. You may need to create a data source before
you can create the mapping

Automatic correction: Destroys the mapping for the fact. This removes the data source from the
Mapping list in the fact Mapping tab

274

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Measure mapping not

Fact measures must be mapped to columns in the data source tables or views.

defined

Manual correction: Map the fact measure to columns in the data source

Automatic correction: Destroys the mapping for the measure. This removes the measures that
are not mapped to any object in the Measures Mapping tab of the fact Mapping tab

1.5.20 Fact Measure, Dimension Hierarchy, and Attribute

Checks (PDM)
PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of fact measures, dimension hierarchies, and
fact and dimension attributes.
Table 148:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of attribute

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

[hierarchies only] A dimension hierarchy must have at least one attribute.

Manual correction: Add an attribute to the hierarchy from the Attributes tab of the hierarchy

Automatic correction: None

property sheet

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

275

1.5.21

Horizontal and Vertical Partitioning and Table

Collapsing Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of horizontal and vertical partitioning and table
collapsing objects.
Table 149:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of partition

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

[horizontal and vertical partitionings] A partitioning object cannot be empty, it must contain at least
one partition.

Manual correction: Delete the partitioning object or create at least one partition in its property
sheet

Existence of target ta
ble

Automatic correction: Deletes empty horizontal partitioning object

[collapsings] A table collapsing must have a table as result of the collapsing.

Manual correction: Delete the table collapsing object

Automatic correction: None

Unavailable target table A partition or collapsing object requires a table to act upon.

276

Manual correction: Delete the partitioning or collapsing with no corresponding table

Automatic correction: Deletes the partitioning or collapsing with no corresponding table

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.5.22 Index and View Index Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of indexes and view indexes.
Table 150:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

Index code maximum

The index code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS definition (MaxLen

length

entry, in the

Objects

Index

category) or in the naming conventions of the model options.

Manual correction: Modify the index code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the index code length to the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition

Existence of index col

umn

An index must have at least one index column.

Manual correction: Add an index column from the Column tab of the index property sheet or de

Automatic correction: Deletes the index without column

lete the index

Undefined index type

Index column count

[indexes] An index type must be specified.

Manual correction: Specify a type in the index property sheet or delete the index with no type

Automatic correction: None

The current DBMS does not support more than the number of index columns specified in the MaxCo
lIndex entry of the current DBMS.

Manual correction: Delete one or more columns in the index property sheet. You can create ad
ditional indexes for these columns

Uniqueness forbidden
for HNG index type

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Automatic correction: None

[indexes] An index of HNG (HighNonGroup) type cannot be unique.

Manual correction: Change the index type or set the index as non unique

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

277

Check

Description and Correction

Index inclusion

An index should not include another index.

Manual correction: Delete the index that includes an existing index

Automatic correction: None

1.5.23 Inheritance Checks (CDM/LDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of inheritances.
Table 151:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of inheri
tance link

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

An inheritance must have at least one inheritance link, from the inheritance to the parent entity.

Manual correction: Define the inheritance link or delete the inheritance.

Automatic correction: None.

Incomplete inheritance

[LDM only] If an inheritance is incomplete, the parent should be generated because you can lose in

with ungenerated an

formation.

cestor

278

Manual correction: Generate parent entity or define the inheritance as complete.

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.5.24 Join Index Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of join indexes and bitmap join indexes.
Table 152:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of base table

Reference without pa
rent key

Join Index tables own

ers

Join index references

connection

Duplicated join indexes

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

Join index must have a base table.

Manual correction: Select a base table in the join index property sheet

Automatic correction: None

Each reference associated with a join index must have a parent key.

Manual correction: Set the parent key on the Joins tab of the reference property sheet.

Automatic correction: None

The tables associated to a join index must have the same owner.

Manual correction: Modify the join index owner or the table owner

Automatic correction: None

Join index references must be connected to selected table on a linear axis.

Manual correction: Delete or replace references in the join index

Automatic correction: None

Join indexes cannot have the same set of references.

Manual correction: Delete one of the duplicated join indexes

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

279

1.5.25 Key Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of keys.
Table 153:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Key code length

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The key code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS definition (MaxCons
tLen entry, in the

Object

Key

category).

Manual correction: Modify the key code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the key code length to the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition

Key column exists

Key inclusion

Each key must have at least one column.

Manual correction: Add a column to the key from the Column tab of the key property sheet

Automatic correction: Deletes key without column

A key cannot include another key (on some columns, regardless of their order).

Manual correction: Delete the key that includes an existing key

Automatic correction: None

Multi-column key has

Since the column initialized by a sequence is already a key, it should not be included in a multi-col

sequence column

umn key.

Manual correction: Detach the sequence from a column that is already part of a multi-column
key

280

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.5.26 Lifecycle and Lifecycle Phase Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of lifecycles and phases.
Table 154:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Existence of phases

Incorrect total reten

tion setting

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

[lifecycle] A lifecycle must contain phases.

Manual correction: Add phases to the lifecycle (on the Phases tab)

Automatic correction: None

[lifecycle] The total retention for the lifecycle must equal the retentions of all the phases.

Manual correction: Adjust the total retention or the retentions of individual phases as appropri
ate.

Invalid partition range

setting

Automatic correction: Adjust the total retention to equal the retentions of all the phases.

[lifecycle] The partition range must be no longer than the shortest phase retention.

Manual correction: Reduce the partition range so that it is equal to the shortest phase retention.

Automatic correction: Reduces the partition range so that it is equal to the shortest phase reten
tion.

Existence of tablespace [phase] Specified tablespace does not exist.

Invalid tablespace set

ting

Phase tablespace
uniqueness

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Specify another tablespace.

Automatic correction: None

[phase] The tablespace cannot be a catalog store.

Manual correction: Deselect the catalog store property on the tablespace property sheet.

Automatic correction: Deselects the catalog store property.

[phase] Each phase must be associated with a different tablespace.

Manual correction: Move one or more phases to another tablespace.

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

281

Check

Description and Correction

Consistency of cost

[phase] The same currency must be used for all tablespaces.

currency setting

Manual correction: Harmonize the currency settings.

Automatic correction: Applies the currency specified in the model options to all tablespaces.

Invalid retention setting [phase] Age-based lifecyle phases must have a retention period greater than 0.

Invalid idle period set

ting

Existence of data
source

Manual correction: Set the retention period to greater than 0.

Automatic correction: Sets the retention period to 1.

[phase] Access-based lifecyle phases must have an idle period greater than 0.

Manual correction: Set the idle period to greater than 0.

Automatic correction: Sets the idle period to 1.

[phase] A lifecycle phase associated with an external database must have a data source specified.

Manual correction: Specify a data source for the phase.

Automatic correction: None

Invalid lifecycle man

[phase] Only the first phase in a lifecycle can have an external source. Subsequent phases must have

agement scope

the source set to the current database.

Manual correction: Set the phase source to the current database.

Automatic correction: None

1.5.27 Package Checks (CDM/LDM/PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of packages.
Table 155:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

282

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Circular references

[PDM only] A circular reference occurs when a table refers to another table, and so on until a loop is
created between tables. A package cannot contain circular references.

Manual correction: Resolve the circular reference by correcting the reference, deleting its
source, or clearing the Mandatory parent or Check on commit option

Automatic correction: None

Constraint name

[PDM only] A constraint name is a unique identifier for the constraint definition of tables, columns,

uniqueness

primary and foreign keys in the database. You define the constraint name in the following tabs:

Check tab of the table property sheet

Additional Check tab of the column property sheet

General tab of the key property sheet

A constraint name must be unique in a model.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicated constraint name in the corresponding tab
Automatic correction: Modifies the duplicated constraint name of a selected object by append
ing a number to its current name

Constraint name maxi

[PDM only] The constraint name length cannot be longer than the length specified in the DBMS defi

mum length

nition: either in the MaxConstLen entry, in the Object category, or in each object category.

Manual correction: Modify the constraint name to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the constraint name to the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition

Circular dependencies

[PDM only] Traceability links of type <<DBCreateAfter>> can be used to define a generation or
der for stored procedures and views. These links should not introduce circular dependencies in the
model.

Circular dependency

Manual correction: Remove the link.

Automatic correction: None

[CDM/LDM only] A circular dependency occurs when an entity depends on another and so on until a
dependency loop is created between entities. A package cannot contain circular dependencies.

Manual correction: Clear the Dependent check box for the link or delete an inheritance link.

Automatic correction: None.

Circularity with manda

[CDM/LDM only] A circular dependency occurs when an entity depends on another and so on until a

tory links

dependency loop is created between entities through mandatory links.

Manual correction: Clear the Mandatory parent check box or delete a dependency on a relation
ship.

Shortcut code unique

ness

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Automatic correction: None.

Shortcuts codes must be unique in a namespace.

Manual correction: Change the code of one of the shortcuts

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

283

Check

Description and Correction

Shortcut potentially

[CDM/LDM only] The package should not contain associations or relationships with an external

generated as child ta

shortcut as child entity. Although this can be tolerated in the CDM, the association or relationship will

ble of a reference

not be generated in a PDM if the external shortcut is generated as a shortcut.

Manual correction: Modify the design of your model in order to create the association or rela
tionship in the package where the child entity is defined.

Automatic correction: None.

1.5.28 Procedure Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of procedures.
Table 156:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

Procedure code maxi

The procedure code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS definition (Max

mum length

Len entry, in the

Objects

Procedure

category).

Manual correction: Modify the procedure code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the procedure code length to the maximum length specified in
the DBMS definition

Procedure definition
body empty

A procedure definition should have a body to specify its functionality.

Manual correction: Specify a procedure body from the Definition tab of the procedure property
sheet

Existence of permis
sion

284

Automatic correction: None

Permissions are usage restrictions set on a procedure for a particular user, group or role.

Manual correction: Define permissions on the procedure for users, groups and roles

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.5.29 Reference and View Reference Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of references and view references.
Table 157:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

Reflexive and manda

[references only] A reflexive reference exists should not have a mandatory parent which could lead

tory reference

to inconsistent joins.

Existence of reference
join

Manual correction: Correct the reference by clearing the Mandatory parent check box

Automatic correction: None

A reference must have at least one reference join.

Manual correction: Create a reference join for the reference or delete the reference

Automatic correction: Deletes reference without join

Reference code maxi

[references only] The reference code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS

mum length

definition (MaxConstLen entry, in the

Object

Reference

category) or in the naming conven

tions of the model options.

Manual correction: Modify the reference code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the reference code length to the maximum length specified in
the DBMS definition

Incomplete join

Join order

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

[references only] Joins must be complete.

Manual correction: Select a foreign key column or activate the primary key column migration

Automatic correction: None

[references only] The join order must be the same as the key column order for some DBMS.

Manual correction: If required, change the join order to reflect the key column order

Automatic correction: The join order is changed to match the key column order

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

285

1.5.30 Relationship Checks (CDM/LDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of relationships.
Table 158:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Reflexive dependency

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

A dependency means that one entity is defined through a relationship with another. A dependent re
lationship cannot therefore be reflexive.

Reflexive mandatory

Manual correction: Change or delete the reflexive dependency.

Automatic correction: None.

A reflexive mandatory relationship exists.

Manual correction: Deselect the Mandatory check boxes for the relationship to be non-manda
tory.

Automatic correction: None.

Bijective relationship

There is a bijective relationship between two entities when there is a two-way one to one relationship

between two entities

between the entities. This is equivalent to a merge of two entities.

Name uniqueness con

straint between manyto-many relationships
and entities

Consistency between
dominant and depend
ent relationships

Manual correction: Merge the entities or modify the relationship.

Automatic correction: None.

A many-to-many relationship and an entity cannot have the same name or code.

code of the entity. If you do not, PDM generation will rename the generated table.

Automatic correction: None.

A dependent relationship between entities cannot also be a dominant relationship.

Manual correction: Select the Dominant check box on the other (correct) side of the relation
ship.

286

Manual correction: Change the name or code of the many-to-many relationship or the name or

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Identifier link from child [Barker notation CDM only] A child entity may not be dependant on any entity other than its parents.
entity

'Many-many' relation
ships

Manual correction: Remove the dependant relationship with the non-parent.

Automatic correction: None

[LDM only] 'Many-to-many' relationships are not permitted.

Manual correction: Create an intermediary entity, which contains the primary identifiers of the

Automatic correction: None.

previous 'many-to-many' entities.

1.5.31

Sequence Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of sequences.

Table 159:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Sequence code maxi

mum length

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The code of the sequence is longer than the maximum allowed by the DBMS.

Manual correction: Reduce the length of the code

Automatic correction: Reduces the code to a permissible length

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

287

1.5.32 Synonym Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of synonyms.
Table 160:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Synonym name and

code maximum length

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The synonym name and code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS defini
tion (MaxLen entry, in the

Objects

Synonym

category) and in the naming conventions of the

model options.

Manual correction: Modify the name/code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the name/code length to the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition

Existence of the base

A synonym must correspond to a model object. By default, when you create synonyms from the List

object

of Synonyms using the Add a Row tool, they are not attached to any base object.

Manual correction: Select a base object from the synonym property sheet

Automatic correction: Deletes the synonym

1.5.33 Table and View Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of tables and views.
Table 161:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

288

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Name and code length

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The table and view name and code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS
definition (MaxLen entry, in the

Objects

Table

and View categories) and in the naming con

ventions of the model options.

Manual correction: Modify the name/code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the name/code length to the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition

Constraint name con

flicts with index name

Existence of column,
reference, index, key

[tables only] A constraint name of the table cannot be the same as an index name.

Manual correction: Change the name of the table constraint

Automatic correction: None

[tables only] A table should contain at least one column, one index, one key, and one reference.

Manual correction: Add missing item to the definition of the table

Automatic correction: None

Number of auto-incre

[tables only] Auto-incremented columns contain automatically calculated values. A table cannot

mented columns

contain more than one auto-incremented column.

Manual correction: Delete all but one auto-incremented column

Automatic correction: None

Table index definition

[tables only] Identical indexes are indexes with the same columns, order and type. A table cannot

uniqueness

have identical indexes.

Manual correction: Delete index or change its properties

Automatic correction: None

Table mapping not de

[tables only] When a table belongs to a model containing one or several data sources, it must be

fined

mapped to tables or views in the data source in order to establish a relational to relational mapping.

Manual correction: Map the current table to one or several tables or views in the model belong
ing to the data source

Automatic correction: Destroys the mapping for the table. This removes the data source from
the Mapping list in the table Mapping tab

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

289

Check

Description and Correction

Column mapping not

[tables only] When a column belong to a table in a model containing one or several data sources, it

defined

should be mapped to columns in the data source in order to establish a relational to relational map
ping.

Manual correction: Map the current column to one or several columns in the models belonging
to the data source

Automatic correction: Destroys the mapping for the column. This removes the columns that are
not mapped to any object in the Columns Mapping tab of the table Mapping tab

Existence of permis
sion

Permissions are usage restrictions set on a table or view for a particular user, group or role.

Manual correction: Define permissions on the table or view for users, groups and roles

Automatic correction: None

Existence of partition

[tables only] A table managed by an age-based lifecycle policy must have a column specified as its

key

partition key.

Manual correction: Specify a column as the partition key.

Automatic correction: None

Invalid start date set

[tables only] A table managed by an age-based lifecycle policy must not have a start date earlier than

ting

the start date of the lifecycle.

Manual correction: Change one or other date so that the table start date is equal to or later than
the lifecycle start date.

Missing lifecycle policy

Automatic correction: Changes the table start date to the lifecycle start date.

[tables only] A table managed by a lifecyle must not reference tables not managed by a lifecycle.

Manual correction: Add the referenced tables to the lifecycle.

Automatic correction: None

Invalid mapping from

[tables only] In a lifecycle where the first phase references an external database, each archive table

source table

must be mapped to exactly one external table.

Manual correction: Remove the additional mappings.

Automatic correction: None

Partial column map

[tables only] In a lifecycle where the first phase references an external database, all columns in each

ping of source table

source table must be mapped to columns in the same archive table.

Manual correction: Create the missing mappings.

Automatic correction: None

Existence of partition

[tables only] In a lifecycle where the first phase references an external database, the partition key

key mapping

column in the archive table must be mapped to a column in the source table.

290

Manual correction: Create the missing mapping.

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Tablespace outside life [tables only] A table managed by a lifecycle must be assigned to a tablespace associated with the
cycle

lifecycle.

Manual correction: Assign the table to a tablespace associated with the lifecycle.

Automatic correction: If the table is not assigned to any tablespace it will be assigned to the ta
blespace associated with the first phase of the lifecycle.

1.5.34 Tablespace and Storage Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of tablespaces and storages.
Table 162:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Code maximum length

Not used

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The code of the tablespace or storage is longer than the maximum allowed by the DBMS.

Manual correction: Reduce the length of the code

Automatic correction: Reduces the code to a permissible length

The tablespace or storage you have created is not used in the model.

Manual correction: Delete the tablespace or storage or apply it as a physical option to a table, an
index, a key, a column, a storage or a view (Options tab of the object property sheet)

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Automatic correction: None

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

291

1.5.35 Trigger and DBMS Trigger Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of triggers and DBMS triggers.
Table 163:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code unique

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

ness

Trigger code maximum

length

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The trigger code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS definition (MaxLen).

Manual correction: Modify the trigger code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the trigger code length to the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition

Invalid event

The event specified in the DBMS trigger definition must be available in its chosen scope.

Manual correction: Modify the trigger code to reference an event in the chosen scope.

Automatic correction: None

1.5.36 User, Group, and Role Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of users, groups, and roles.
Table 164:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

292

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Check

Description and Correction

Code maximum length

The code length is limited by the maximum length specified in the DBMS definition (MaxLen entry, in
the

Objects

User

and Group categories).

Manual correction: Modify the code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the code length to the maximum length specified in the DBMS
definition

Existence of user

[groups, roles] A group is created to factorize privilege and permission granting to users. A group
without user members is useless.

Password empty

Manual correction: Add users to group or delete group

Automatic correction: Deletes unassigned group

[users, groups] Users and groups must have a password to be able to connect to the database.

Manual correction: Define a password for the user or group

Automatic correction: None

1.5.37 View Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of views.
Table 165:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

View code maximum

length

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

The view code length is limited by the maximum length specified for the table code length.

Manual correction: Modify the view code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the view code length to the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

293

Check

Description and Correction

Existence of permis

Permissions are usage restrictions set on a view for a particular user, group or role.

sion

Manual correction: Define permissions on the view for users, groups and roles

Automatic correction: None

1.5.38 Web Service and Web Operation Checks (PDM)

PowerDesigner provides default model checks to verify the validity of Web services and Web operations.
Table 166:
Check

Description and Correction

Name/Code contains

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must contain only approved terms drawn from the glossary.

terms not in glossary

Name/Code contains
synonyms of glossary
terms

Name/Code unique
ness

Code maximum length

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: None.

[if glossary enabled] Names and codes must not contain synonyms of glossary terms.

Manual correction: Modify the name or code to contain only glossary terms.

Automatic correction: Replaces synonyms with their associated glossary terms.

Object names must be unique in the namespace.

Manual correction: Modify the duplicate name or code.

Automatic correction: Appends a number to the duplicate name or code.

Web service and Web operation code lengths are limited by the maximum length specified in the
DBMS definition (Maxlen entry, in the

Objects

Web Service

and Web Operation categories).

Manual correction: Modify the code length to meet this requirement

Automatic correction: Truncates the code length to the maximum length specified in the DBMS
definition

294

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.6

Generating and Reverse-Engineering Databases

PowerDesigner provides full support for round trip generation and reverse-engineering between a PDM and a
database.

1.6.1

Writing SQL Code in PowerDesigner

The objects that you create in your model display the SQL code that will be generated for them on the Preview tab
of their property sheets. Certain objects provide editors on other tabs to allow you to modify the SQL statements.
For example, you may need to write SQL code in order to:
Specify a view query (see View Queries [page 129]).
Write a procedure or trigger (see Triggers (PDM) [page 134]).
Define a computed column (see Creating a Computed Column [page 116]).
Insert scripts at the beginning and/or end of database or table creation (see Customizing Creation
Statements [page 314]).
The following tools are available in the PowerDesigner SQL editors:
Table 167:
Tool

Description
Add Trigger Item From Model / DBMS - [triggers and trigger templates only] Opens a dialog box to
list trigger template items defined in the model or in the DBMS definition file for insertion in the trig
ger definition (see Trigger Template Items [page 144]).
Operators / Functions - List logical operators and group, number, string, date, conversion and other
functions for insertion in the SQL code. Operators and functions are DBMS-specific and these lists
are populated from entries in the Script\Sql\Keywords category (see Customizing and Ex
tending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files > Script/Sql Category).
Macros / Variables - List PDM macros and variables for insertion in the SQL code (see Customizing
and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files > PDM Variables and Macros). You can also
use formatting variables to force values to lower-case or upper-case or to truncate the length of val
ues characters.
Edit with SQL Editor - Opens the full SQL Editor dialog which gives access to model objects for inser
tion in the SQL code.
SQL/XML Wizard - Opens the SQL/XML Wizard to build a SQL/XML query from a table or a view for
insertion in the SQL code (see Creating SQL/XML Queries with the Wizard [page 148]).
Insert SQL/XML Macro - Opens a dialog box to select a global element from an XML model open in
the workspace (and which must have the SQL/XML extension file attached) for insertion in the SQL
code.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

295

In addition to these tools, the pop-out SQL Editor lists PDM object types in the upper left pane and the available
objects of the selected type in the upper right pane. Double-click an object to insert it into your code in the lower
pane:

You can use the PowerDesigner Generation Template Language (GTL) and PDM variables and macros to
reference objects and object properties and iterate over collections when writing SQL statements. While you can
perform many tasks using the PDM variables and macros, GTL is more powerful, as it allows you to access any
information about any object in the model.
In the following example, a trigger is written using the PDM variables and macros and attached to the Example
table, to write the contents of any insertion to HistoryTable.

296

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

The same trigger can be written using GTL:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

297

In each case, the trigger code to be generated is the same, and can be viewed by clicking the Preview tab:

For detailed information about working with GTL, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > Customizing
Generation with GTL . For lists of the available variables and macros, see Customizing and Extending
PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files > PDM Variables and Macros.

1.6.2

Previewing SQL Statements

Click the Preview tab in the property sheet of the model, packages, tables, and various other model objects in
order to view the code that will be generated for it.

298

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

The text in the script preview is color coded as follows:

Table 168:
Text color

Represents

Blue

SQL reserved word

Black

Statement body

Red

Variable

Green

Comment

The following tools are available on the Preview tab toolbar:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

299

Table 169:
Tools

Description
Editor Menu [Shift+F11] - Contains the following commands:

New [Ctrl+N] - Reinitializes the field by removing all the existing content.

Open... [Ctrl+O] - Replaces the content of the field with the content of the selected file.

Insert... [Ctrl+I] - Inserts the content of the selected file at the cursor.

Save [Ctrl+S] - Saves the content of the field to the specified file.

Save As... - Saves the content of the field to a new file.

Select All [Ctrl+A] - Selects all the content of the field.

Find... [Ctrl+F] - Opens a dialog to search for text in the field.

Find Next... [F3] - Finds the next occurence of the searched for text.

Find Previous... [Shift+F3] - Finds the previous occurence of the searched for text.

Replace... [Ctrl+H] - Opens a dialog to replace text in the field.

Go To Line... [Ctrl+G] - Opens a dialog to go to the specified line.

Toggle Bookmark [Ctrl+F2] Inserts or removes a bookmark (a blue box) at the cursor position. Note
that bookmarks are not printable and are lost if you refresh the tab, or use the Show Generation
Options tool

Next Bookmark [F2] - Jumps to the next bookmark.

Previous Bookmark [Shift+F2] - Jumps to the previous bookmark.

Edit With [Ctrl+E] - Opens the previewed code in an external editor. Click the down arrow to select a particu
lar editor or Choose Program to specify a new editor. Editors specified here are added to the list of editors
available at

Tools

General Options

Editors

Save [Ctrl+S] - Saves the content of the field to the specified file.
Print [Ctrl+P] - Prints the content of the field.
Find [Ctrl+F] - Opens a dialog to search for text.
Cut [Ctrl+X], Copy [Ctrl+C], and Paste [Ctrl+V] - Perform the standard clipboard actions.
Undo [Ctrl+Z] and Redo [Ctrl+Y] - Move backward or forward through edits.
Refresh [F5] - Refreshes the Preview tab.
You can debug the GTL templates that generate the code shown in the Preview tab. To do so, open the tar
get or extension resource file, select the Enable Trace Mode option, and click OK to return to your model.
You may need to click the Refresh tool to display the templates.
Select Generation Targets [Ctrl+F6] - Lets you select additional generation targets (defined in extensions),
and adds a sub-tab for each selected target. For information about generation targets, see Customizing and
Extending PowerDesigner > Extension Files > Generated Files (Profile) > Generating Your Files in a Standard
or Extended Generation.
Show Generation Options [Ctrl+W] - Opens the Generation Options dialog, allowing you to modify the gen
eration options and to see the impact on the code.

300

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Tools

Description
Ignore Generation Options [Ctrl+D] - Ignores changes to the generation options made with the Show
Generation Options tool.

Ignore Generation Options

If you click the Ignore Generation Options tool, the preview ignores generation options selected by using the
Change generation options tool but uses a predefined set of options.
Table 170:
Selected tool

Effect on generation options

Effect on preview

Change generation options

You can select generation options

Visible in Preview if options are ap

plicable

Ignore generation options

Generation options currently selected

Only predefined options are visible

are overridden by predefined set of op in Preview

tions
Change generation options + Ignore genera

You can select generation options

Changes ignored in Preview

tion options

The predefined set of generation options selects these items:

Table 171:
Generation Option Tab

Selected items

Tables and Views

All items except drop options

Keys and Indexes

All items except options represented differently in some DBMS. For example,
if a database is auto indexed, the index options corresponding to the keys are
not selected

Database

All items except drop options

Options

All user-defined options are used

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

301

1.6.3

Connecting to a Database

PowerDesigner provides various methods for connecting to your database.

Context
Before connecting to your database for the first time, you will have to configure a PowerDesigner connection
profile. Your choice will depend on the interface that you have installed:
Table 172:
You have

Configure a connection of type:

ODBC driver

ODBC machine or file data source

DBMS client

Native connection profile

JDBC driver

JDBC connection profile

For detailed information about creating, configuring, and using connection profiles, see Core Features Guide >
Modeling with PowerDesigner > Getting Started with PowerDesigner > Connecting to a Database.

Procedure
1. Select

302

Database

Connect

to open the Connect to a Data Source window:

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2. Select one of the following radio buttons, depending on your chosen method for connecting to your database:
ODBC machine data source
ODBC file data source
Connection profile (for native, JDBC, ADO.NET, OLE DB or DirectConnect connections)
You can use the tools to the right of the data source field to browse to a new connection profile file or
directory, and the Modify and Configure buttons to modify or configure your data source connection.
3. Enter your user ID and password, and then click Connect. If prompted by your database, you may need to
enter additional connection parameters.
You stay connected until you disconnect or terminate the shell session.
You can display information about your connection at any time by selecting

Database

Connection

Information . The amount of information available depends on your DBMS and your connection profile.
To disconnect from a database, select

1.6.3.1

Database

Disconnect .

Executing SQL Queries

You can send SQL queries to a database and display the results.

Procedure
1. Select

Database

Execute SQL .

If you are not already connected to a database, the Connect to Data Source window will open. Choose your
connection profile and click Connect to proceed to the Execute SQL Query dialog.
2. Type one or more SQL statements in the window, and click Run to apply them to the database.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

303

The query results are displayed in the Results window.

1.6.4

Generating a Database from a PDM

PowerDesigner can generate sophisticated SQL scripts as files or for direct execution via a live database
connection.

Context
Note
To generate to a SAP HANA database, use the HANA wizard (see Exporting Objects to the HANA Repository
[page 538]).

Procedure
1. Select

304

Database

Generate Database

to open the Database Generation dialog box.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Note
To load a pre-configured selection or settings set (see Quick Launch Selection and Settings Sets [page
313]), select it in the appropriate list in the Quick launch group box.
2. Enter a destination Directory and File Name for the script file.
3. Specify the type of generation (script or live database connection) to perform:
Script generation - generate a script to be executed on a DBMS at a later time. Optionally select One file
only to create the generation script as a single file. By default, a separate script file is created for each
table.
Direct generation generate a script and execute it on a live database connection. Optionally select Edit
generation script to open the script in an editor for review or editing before execution.
4. [optional] Select the following options as appropriate:
Table 173:
Option

Description

Check model

Specifies that a model check is performed before script generation.

Automatic archive

Creates an archive version of the PDM after generation to use to determine changes
during your next database modification (see Archive PDMs [page 341]).

5. [optional] To change the default generation options, click the Options tab (see Database Generation Dialog
Options Tab [page 308]).

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

305

6. [optional] To change the format of your script, click the Format tab (see Database Generation Dialog Format
Tab [page 311]).
7. [optional] To control which database objects will be generated, click the Selection tab:

You can save your selection via the Selection bar at the bottom of the tab (see Quick Launch Selection and
Settings Sets [page 313]).
8. [optional] Click the Summary tab to view the summary of your settings and selections. The summary is not
editable, but you can search, save, print, and copy its contents.

306

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

9. [optional] Click the Preview tab to preview the SQL script to be generated. The script is not editable, but you
can search, save, print, and copy its contents.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

307

10. Click OK to begin the generation.

If you are generating a database script, the Output window shows the progress of the generation process, and
gives instructions for running the script. When generation is complete, the Generated Files dialog opens listing
the paths to the generated script files. Click Edit to open the script in a text editor or Close to close the Result
box.

Note
For information about the additional steps required to generate for MS Access, see Generating a Microsoft
Access Database [page 612]).
If you are generating a database directly, and are not currently connected to a database, a dialog box asks you
to identify a data source and connection parameters (see Connecting to a Database [page 302]).

Results
Note
Advanced users can further customize database generation by, for example, changing the order in which
objects are generated, adding scripts to run before or after generation, and generating additional objects. For
information about these and other advanced topics, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS
Definition Files.

1.6.4.1

Database Generation Dialog Options Tab

The Options tab allows you to specify what script elements to generate for each object type.
By default, there is an entry in the left-hand pane under the meta-category "All Objects" for each object type
present in your model, and all the possible options are displayed in the right-hand pane. If you click on an object
type in the left-hand pane, then the options are restricted to that object type.

308

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Depending on the objects present in your model, some or all of the following options will be available.
Table 174:
Parameter

Description

Create <object>

Generates the object.

When generating primary, alternate, or foreign keys or indexes, you can choose between:

Inside Table keys or indexes are generated during table creation

Outside - keys or indexes are generated with a separate SQL command, generally using an AL
TER command after the creation of the table

The generation of keys or indexes outside the table is possible only if the Create entry exists in the
Pkey, Key, Reference, and/or Index categories of your DBMS.
Drop <object>

Deletes an existing object, before recreating it.

Note that when generating defaults, if the Create and Drop check boxes are selected, the default ob
jects will be created/dropped before domains and tables. For more information on the default gener
ation statement, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files.

Begin script

Inserts a customized script before creation of the object.

End script

Inserts a customized script after creation of the object.

Physical options

Generates physical options for the object.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

309

Parameter

Description

Comment

Generates a comment for the object.

Privilege

[users, groups, and roles] Generates privileges for the user, group, or role.

Permission

Generates the permission statement for a given user during creation of the object.

Check

[domains, tables, and columns] Generates check parameters and validation rules for domains, ta
bles, and columns.
For table and columns, if this option is selected you can choose between:

Inside Table - checks are generated during table creation

Outside - checks are generated with a separate SQL command, generally using an ALTER com
mand after the creation of the table

The generation of checks outside the table is possible only if the AddTableCheck entry exists in the
Table category of your DBMS.
Open database

[databases] Opens the database.

Close database

[databases] Closes the database.

Default value

[domains and columns] Specifies a default value for the domain or column.

Install JAVA class

[abstract data types] Installs a Java class, which is stored on a server.

Remove JAVA class

[abstract data types] Deletes an existing Java class, before installing a new Java class.

User-defined type

[columns] Generates a user-defined data type for the column.

Decl. Integrity

[foreign keys] Generates declarative referential integrity for references specified to be Declarative in
their property sheets. You can specify any or all of the following:

Index Filter

310

Update constraint restrict

Update constraint cascade

Update constraint set null

Update constraint set default

Delete constraint restrict

Delete constraint cascade

Delete constraint set null

Delete constraint set default

[indexes] You can specify from none to all of:

Primary key - Generates primary key indexes

Foreign key - Generates foreign key indexes

Alternate key - Generates alternate key indexes

Cluster - Generates cluster indexes

Others - Generates indexes for all key columns with a defined index

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Parameter

Description

Trigger Filter

[triggers] You can specify the creation of triggers:

Synonym Filter

Force column list

For insert

For update

For delete

[synonyms] You can specify from none to all of:

Table - Generates table synonyms

View - Generates view synonyms

Procedure - Generates procedure synonyms

Synonym - Generates synonym synonyms

Database Package - Generates database package synonyms

Sequence - Generates sequence synonyms

[views] Generates a view with a list of columns, even if this list is identical to the corresponding col
umns in the SQL order. Allows you to generate the list of view columns with the view creation order.
By default, the list of view columns is generated only if it is different from the list of columns of the
view query. For example, in the following view query:

select a, b from Table1

columns a and b are view columns by default. The default generation statement is:

create view V1 as select a, b from Table1

If you select the Force column list option, the generation statement will become:

create view V1(a,b) as select a, b from Table1

You can save your option settings via the Settings set bar at the bottom of the tab. For more information, see
Quick Launch Selection and Settings Sets [page 313].

1.6.4.2

Database Generation Dialog Format Tab

The options on the Format tab allow you to control the format of database generation scripts.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

311

Some of the following options may not be available, depending on your target database.
You can save your format settings via the Settings set bar at the bottom of the tab. For more information, see
Quick Launch Selection and Settings Sets [page 313].
Table 175:
Option

Result of selection

Database prefix

Table and view names in the script are prefixed by the database name.

Identifier delimiter

Specifies the characters used to delimit identifiers (for example, table and view names). Most
DBMSs require a double-quote character ("), but some permit other forms of delimiter.

Owner prefix

Table and view names in the script are prefixed by their owner names. For those DBMSs that support
sequence owners, this option will also prefix sequence names by their owner names.

Title

Each section of the script includes commentary in the form of titles (for example,
Database Name: TUTORIAL
).

Generate name in

For those DBMSs that support comments, this option allows to generate the name in the comment

empty comment

when the comment box is empty. This option applies to tables, columns, and views. The comment
generated using the object name will be reversed as a comment.

Encoding

Specifies an encoding format. You should select a format that supports the language used in your
model and the database encoding format.

312

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Option

Result of selection

Character case

Specifies the case to use in the script. You can choose between:

No accent

1.6.4.3

Upper - all uppercase characters

Lower - all lowercase characters

Mixed - lowercase and uppercase characters

Non-accented characters replace accented characters in script

Quick Launch Selection and Settings Sets

The Quick Launch groupbox at the bottom of the Database Generation dialog General tab allows you to load preconfigured selections and settings sets for use when generating the database.
Selection - the ensemble of selections of database objects made on the Selection tab. To save a selection,
enter a name in the Selection bar at the bottom of the Selection tab and then click the Save tool. The selection
is saved as part of the model file.
Settings Set - the ensemble of generation options (see Database Generation Dialog Options Tab [page 308])
and format options (see Database Generation Dialog Format Tab [page 311])
To save a settings set, enter a name in the Settings set bar at the bottom of the Options or Format tab and
then click the Save tool, specify whether you want to save the settings set inside the model or as an external
file, and click OK.
To review your settings sets, click the Settings Set Manager tool to the right of the field on the Options or
Format tab:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

313

The following tools are available:

Table 176:
Icon

Use
Browse to the settings set directory.

Delete the selected settings set. Only available when an internally-saved settings set is selected. You can
only delete a settings set saved to an external file through Windows Explorer.

Export the selected settings sets to an external file. Only available when an internally-saved settings set is
selected.

Import the selected settings sets to inside the model. Only available when an externally-saved settings set is
selected.

Note
Settings sets should not be copied and renamed outside of PowerDesigner. If you want to create a variant
of an existing settings set, then you should load it, make the necessary changes, and then save it under a
different name.

1.6.4.4

Customizing Creation Statements

You can insert custom scripts at the beginning and end of the database and individual table and tablespace
creation statements directly from their property sheets. For example, access rights can be added under a table
creation script. You can modify the standard creation statements for these and other objects by editing the DBMS
definition file.

Context
Open the property sheet of the database (see Creating a Database in the Model [page 13]), table (see Table
Properties [page 87]), or tablespace (see Tablespace and Storage Properties [page 222]) for which you want to
specify a script, and click the Script tab: To open the script in your preferred editor (see Core Features Guide >
Modeling with PowerDesigner > Customizing Your Modeling Environment > General Options > Text Editors), press
Ctrl+E or click the Edit With tool.
The following variables are commonly used in begin and end scripts:

314

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Table 177:
Variable

Description

%DATABASE%, %DBMSNAME%

Name of the database and of the DBMS definition file.

%NAMESCRIPT%, %PATHSCRIPT Filename or path of script file

%
%STARTCMD%

Command that runs the script

%AUTHOR%, %DATE%

Author of the current model, and date of script generation.

%TABLESPACE%

Code of the tablespace.

%TABLE%

Name or code of table (based on display preferences).

%TNAME%, %TCODE%, %TLABL%

Name, code, or label of the table.

%OWNER%, %OWNERPREFIX%

Owner or owner prefix of the table or tablespace.

%COLNLIST%

List of the table's columns.

%OPTIONS%

Physical options defined on the object.

The begin and end scripts are placed directly before and after the create statement. The SQL snippet below
shows where the BeforeCreate, Header, Footer, and AfterCreate scripts that you can define in the DBMS
file for these and other objects are placed around the create statement:
This is my BeforeCreate script.
/*==============================================================*/
/* Table: TABLE_1
*/
/*==============================================================*/
This is my Header script.
This is my Begin script
create table TABLE_1
(
COLUMN_1
CHAR(10),
COLUMN_2
CHAR(10),
COLUMN_3
CHAR(10),
constraint PK_TABLE_1 primary key ()
);
This is my End script
This is my Footer script.
This is my AfterCreate script.
For detailed information about editing DBMS definition files, including using the PDM variables, see Customizing
and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files.

1.6.5

Generating an SAP BusinessObjects Universe

PowerDesigner can generate an SAP BusinessObjects universe from your PDM for editing in the
BusinessObjects Universe Design or Information Design tools, or for direct consumption by the Web Intelligence

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

315

rich client. Generating a universe from your PDM gives you access to table, view, and column names and
comments and more reliable cardinality information than if you create a universe directly from your database.

Context

Note
To generate universes, you must have SAP BusinessObjects SBOP BI Platform Clients 4.0 SP04 Patch 3
(v14.0.4.819) or higher installed on your workstation. On Windows Vista or Windows 7 machines, if
PowerDesigner fails to recognize a valid BusinessObjects installation, it may be necessary separately to launch
the Universe Design tool one time with administrator privileges to enable the BusinessObjects SDK.
For information about reverse-engineering universes, see Reverse-Engineering an SAP BusinessObjects Universe
[page 339].

Procedure
1. [optional] Optimize your PDM for generation of a universe in the following ways:
Specify auto-incrementing primary keys (see Creating Primary Keys [page 120]) together with one or
more human-readable alternative keys (see Creating Alternate Keys [page 121]) to uniquely identify
dimension rows.
Identify fact and dimension tables either manually or by retrieval (see Identifying Fact and Dimension
Tables [page 238]) and review the choices that PowerDesigner has made:

[optional] To completely control the format of your multidimensional objects, retrieve facts and
dimensions in a multidimensional diagram (see Generating Cubes [page 239]), and edit them as
necessary:

316

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2. Select

Tools

SAP BusinessObjects

Generate BusinessObjects Universe .

3. [optional] Click the Connect button to connect to the BusinessObjects CMS.

4. Select a data connection to allow BusinessObjects to connect to your database. If you have not connected to
the CMS, you can use an existing local connection from the BusinessObjects connection list; otherwise
choose from the list of secured connections. You can, alternatively, click the Create button to create a new
connection with the BusinessObjects New Connection wizard.

Note
The user that you specify in this connection must have sufficient privileges and permissions to read all of
the database objects contained in the PDM you are creating your universe from.
5. Click Next to select the objects to generate from your model. PowerDesigner will propose objects to generate
as follows:
If facts and dimensions are present in your model, the facts are proposed for generation.
If no facts are present, but one or more tables have been specified as fact tables, then these will be
proposed for generation.
If no facts or fact tables are present, then PowerDesigner will evaluate all the tables in the model and
propose those which could serve as fact tables for generation.

Note
By default, tables that have no links to other tables are excluded from the list. Select the Include isolated
tables option to add them for selection.
6. [when facts are not present] Click Next to select any appropriate generation options:
Table 178:
Option

Description

Expand fact date columns

as time dimensions

[selected by default] Creates a time dimension with the standard Year, Quarter, and Month
attributes for each date column in each fact table.

Add Large Object dimen

sion details

[deselected by default] Specifies that dimension attributes are created for columns of type
blob (which commonly contain images, audio, or other binary data). If this option is dese
lected, these columns will still appear in the data foundation, but will not be visible in the busi
ness layer.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

317

Option

Description

Use primary keys as di

mension identifiers

Specifies whether dimension identifiers can or must be generated from the primary keys of
their source tables. You can choose from the following settings:

Force - Dimension identifiers must be generated from the primary keys of their source
tables.

Allow - [default] PowerDesigner chooses the first available columns in the following list
to use as dimension identifiers:

The first alternative key (all associated columns concatenated).

The first unique index not identified as a primary key.

The first column with a string data type, including primary keys with a string data
type.

The first non-key column.

The first key column.

Disallow - Same as allow, but dimension identifiers cannot be generated from primary
keys even if they have a string data type (for example a primary key containing a GUID).

7. Click Next to review your choices and then click Finish to begin the universe generation.
When the universe is generated, you can:
Open it in the Universe Design tool or import it into the Information Design tool (select

File

Convert

UNV Universe ) for further editing.

Table 179:
PowerDesigner generates a universe comprising a con
nection, data foundation, and business layer. The busi
ness layer has one folder for each fact containing:

318

A dimension for each dimension associated with the

fact in PowerDesigner. Dimension series, such as the
Product dimension in our example are grouped
within their own subfolder. Dimensions with more
than one attribute list each attribute beneath them.

A measure for every numeric column in the fact.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

After the import is complete, open the data foundation view and select Actions Refresh Structure
to obtain access to the richer selection of data types available in the Information Design tool.
[if you are connected to the CMS] Import it into the CMS for editing or consumption.
Consume it directly in the Web Intelligence rich client:

1.6.6

Generating Test Data to a Database

PowerDesigner can generate sample data to your database tables to verify performance or to help in estimating
the amount of memory that the database will require. You can generate test data for some or all of the tables in
your PDM to an empty or existing database.

Context

Note
The following objects are not taken into account when you generate test data:
Alternate keys
Foreign keys
Business and validation rules
Binary, sequential, OLE, text or image data types
Trigger contents

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

319

Procedure
1. [optional] Specify one or more test data profiles to define the range of data to be generated or to draw data
from a file or other database (see Populating Columns with Test Data [page 111]). If you do not define profiles,
PowerDesigner will generate random data that is appropriate to each data type.

Note
The format in which date and time data is generated with or without profiles can be controlled by DBMS
items in the Script/Sql/Format category (see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS
Definition Files > Script/Sql Category.
2. Select

Database

Generate Test Data

to open the Test Data Generation dialog.

3. On the General tab, enter or select the appropriate parameters:

Table 180:
Option

Description

Directory

Specifies the directory in which the file will be saved.

File name

Specifies the name of the test data file to generate. Select the One file only checkbox to spec
ify that a single file should be generated.

Generation type

Specifies how the test data will be generated:

Script generation

Direct generation to a live database connection.

Note
As triggers are not needed in this context and can block insertions and considerably
increase the time required to generate the database, we recommend that you do not
implement triggers or remove them from your test database.

Commit mode

Data file format

Data file as a set of values in a file.

Specifies when the data will be committed:

Auto - during script generation

At end - after script generation

By packet - at defined intervals during script generation

Specifies the format when generating a data file:

CSV comma-separated values

Custom delimiter specify a custom delimiter

Delete old data

Deletes existing data before generating new data.

Check model

Checks the PDM before generating the test database or script, and stops generation if an er
ror is found.

Automatic archive

320

Creates an archive of any previous test data.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Option

Description

Default number of rows

Specifies the default number of rows to generate for tables. This number can be overrridden
for individual tables on the Number of Rows tab.

Default number/ charac

Specifies the default test data profiles (see Populating Columns with Test Data [page 111]) to

ter/ date profile

use to generate data. We recommend that you create test data profiles to accurately model
your data and associate them with each of your columns and domains as appropriate, but if
you have not done so, then these default profiles are used.

4. [optional] Click the Number of Rows tab to change the number of rows to be generated for each table.
By default, PowerDesigner generates the number of rows that is specified in the Number property in the table
property sheet (see Table Properties [page 87]) or, if no number is specified, the default number specified on
the General tab of this Test Data Generation dialog.
5. [optional] Click the Format tab and modify the script formatting options as appropriate:
Table 181:
Option

Result of selection

Owner prefix

Specifies that an owner prefix is added.

Titles

Specifies that each section of the script includes commentary in the form of titles.

Encoding

Specifies the encoding format to use for test data generation. You should select the encoding
format that supports the language used in your model and the database encoding format.

Character case

Specifies the character case to use. The following settings are available:

No accent

Upper - all uppercase characters

Lower - all lowercase characters

Mixed - both uppercase and lowercase characters

Non-accented characters replace accented characters in script.

6. [optional] Click the Selection tab and select which tables you want to generate test data for. By default all
tables are selected.
7. Click OK to start the generation.
If you are generating test data to a live database connection, then the Connect to a Data Source dialog box
opens. Select a data source, and then click Connect. If you are generating a test data script, then a Result
dialog box asks you if you want to Edit or Close the newly generated file.
A message in the Output window indicates that the test data generation is completed.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

321

1.6.7

Estimating Database Size

You can estimate the size of a database for all or some of the tables and other objects in your model. You can
estimate the initial size of the database or project its growth over a number of years.

Context
The estimate is based on the following elements:
Estimated number of records in tables - Specify the number of rows (and their annual projected growth rate)
in a table in the Number and Row growth rate fields on the General tab of its property sheet (see Table
Properties [page 87]).
Table columns and their sizes - Specify the average size for variable length columns in the Average length field
on the Detail tab of its property sheet (see Column Properties [page 104]). If you do not specify an average
length for variable length columns, then the maximum length is used. It is particularly important to specify an
average length for strings or long binary data types, as a Binary Long OBject (BLOB), such as a picture, can
represent the largest portion of the space actually taken by a table.

Note
To specify values for multiple tables or columns, select Model Tables or Model Columns . If
you do not see the appropriate property column, then add it using the Customize Columns and Filter tool.
Indexes in the model - including primary, alternate, and foreign key indexes (if supported) and databasespecific indexes such as IQ join indexes.
Tablespaces in the model - the size of a tablespace is estimated as a total of all the tables and all the indexes
in the tablespace.
DBMS and its storage options.

Note
The default estimation algorithms can be overridden in the DBMS definition file (see Customizing and Extending
PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files > Profile Category > Modifying the Estimate Database Size Mechanism).

Procedure
1. Select

Database

Estimate Database Size

to open the Database Size Estimation dialog.

2. Select the tables for which you want to estimate the size.

322

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

3. [optional] Click the Options tab and specify the number of years of growth that you want to include in your
estimate. By default, only the initial size of the database is calculated, without allowing for any growth.
4. Click OK to begin the estimation.
Size estimates are generated to both the Result List and Output windows. The Database Size tab of the Result
List provides a list of objects which can be double-clicked to open their property sheets, while the Database
Size tab of the Output window prints a textual list of objects with sizes and a total for the database:
Estimate of the size of the Database "Project Management"...
Number
Estimated size
Object
-----------------------------------------------------1,000,000
136,224 KB
Table 'Customer'
Index 'Primary' (4,880 KB)
1,000
48 KB
Table 'Division'
10,000
696 KB
Table 'Employee'
Index 'Primary' (48 KB)
5,000
312 KB
Table 'Material'
10,000
96 KB
Table 'Member'
10,000
392 KB
Table 'Participate'
10,000
640 KB
Table 'Project'
Index 'Primary' (48 KB)
10,000
464 KB
Table 'Task'
1,000
80 KB
Table 'Team'
10,000
96 KB
Table 'Used'
-----------------------------------------------------139,048 KB
Total estimated space
Database size estimation completed.
The number of records was not defined for 1 table(s).
A warning is given if any tables in the model do not have a number of a records defined.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

323

1.6.8

Modifying a Database

You can modify an existing database schema by to reflect changes in your model. The PDM (source model) and
the existing database schema (target model) are merged using a database synchronization window, which allows
you to choose which objects are added, deleted, or updated in the target.

Context
Note
To update a HANA database, use the HANA wizard (see Exporting Objects to the HANA Repository [page
538]).

Procedure
1. Select

324

Database

Apply Model Changes to Database

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Note
To load a pre-configured settings set (see Quick Launch Selection and Settings Sets [page 313]), select it in
the list at the bottom of the dialog.
2. Enter a destination Directory and File Name for the script file.
3. Specify the type of generation (script or live database connection) to perform:
Script generation - generate a script to be executed on a DBMS at a later time. Optionally select One file
only to create the generation script as a single file. By default, a separate script file is created for each
table.
Direct generation generate a script and execute it on a live database connection. Optionally select Edit
generation script to open the script in an editor for review or editing before execution.
4. Specify how PowerDesigner will determine the changes to apply. You can choose to compare your model
against:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

325

 Archive model Click the button to the right to browse to the archived model (see Archive PDMs [page
341]).
Data source Click the button to the right to connect to your data source.
Script file Select a script from the list or click the button to the right to browse to the script.
Model from repository Select a model from the list and optionally click the button to the right to browse
to a version of it.
5. [optional] Select the following options as appropriate:
Table 182:
Option

Description

Always use create statements/

Specify whether create statements should always be used to modify database tables, or

Use alter statements when pos

whether alter statements should be used where possible.

sible
Backup tables

Specifies that any existing table will be copied to a temporary backup during the modifi
cation, and then restored to the updated tables. If this option is not selected, then all ex
isting data will be erased. If you select this option then you can also specify to :

Drop temporary tables - Specifies that the temporary backup tables are removed
after script execution.

Use physical options for temporary tables - Specifies that the temporary backup ta
bles are generated with their physical options.

Check model

Specifies that a model check is performed before script generation.

Automatic archive

Creates an archive version of the PDM after generation to use to determine changes
during your next database modification (see Archive PDMs [page 341]).

6. [optional] To change the default generation options, click the Options tab (see Database Generation Dialog
Options Tab [page 308]).
7. [optional] To change the format of your script, click the Format tab (see Database Generation Dialog Format
Tab [page 311]).
8. [optional] To control which database objects will be modified, click the Selection tab.
You can save your selection via the Selection bar at the bottom of the tab (see Quick Launch Selection and
Settings Sets [page 313]).
9. Click OK to begin the update. If you are using a live database connection, then the Reverse Engineering
window will open, allowing you to select or clear check boxes in the target model for objects that you want to
include or remove from the source model. Make your selections and then click OK to continue.
10. The Database Synchronization window will open. Select or clear check boxes in the target model for objects
that you want to include or remove from the model, and then click OK to continue.
For more information about comparing and merging models, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with
PowerDesigner > Comparing and Merging Models.

326

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

 If you are generating a script, a result box opens listing the file path of the generated file. To open the
script in a text editor, select the file in the result box and click the Edit button.
If you are generating a database directly, a Data Source connection box is displayed. Type your
connection details and click the Connect button. A message box shows the progress of the generation
process. At the end of generation click OK to close the box.

1.6.9

Displaying Data from a Database

You can connect to a database and display the data that corresponds to a PDM table, view, or reference.

Procedure
1. Right-click a table, view, or reference and select View Data.
If you are not already connected to a database, the Connect to Data Source window will open. Choose your
connection profile and click Connect to proceed.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

327

2. A Query Results windows list all the database records corresponding to the selected table, view, or reference.

1.6.10 Reverse Engineering a Database into a PDM

Reverse engineering is the process of generating a PDM (or certain PDM objects) from an existing database
schema. You can reverse engineer into a new PDM or an existing PDM from one or more script files or from a live
database.

Context
Note
The database user that PowerDesigner uses to connect to the database must have public access to catalog
views, which is generally granted by default when creating users.

Note
To reverse-engineer from a HANA database, use the HANA wizard (see Importing Objects from the HANA
Repository [page 542]).

1.6.10.1

Reverse Engineering from Scripts

PowerDesigner can reverse engineer a PDM for one or more SQL script files. The script will normally be the script
used to generate the database but can also include other scripts.

Context
Caution
In general, only statements that create objects are reverse-engineered and alter statements, except for those
that add columns to a table, are not supported.

Procedure
1. To reverse engineer a script into an existing PDM, select

Database

Update Model from Database .

or

328

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

To reverse engineer a script and create a new PDM, select File Reverse Engineer Database to open
the New Physical Data Model dialog. Specify a model name, choose a DBMS from the list, and then click OK.
or
When working with the PowerDesigner Eclipse plug-in, select any SQL file in the Navigator, right-click it and
select Reverse Engineer from SQL File. You are given the option to reverse into an existing or new PDM.

Note
To reverse-engineer an MS Access database, you must first prepare a .dat file (see Reverse Engineering a
Microsoft Access Database [page 613]).
2. When the Database Reverse Engineering Options dialog opens, select Using script files:

The following tools are provided to help with script selection:

Table 183:
Tool

Description
Add Files Opens a dialog box to allow you to browse for scripts files. You can add as many files as neces
sary.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

329

Tool

Description
Move Up Moves the selected file(s) up one row. This tool is grayed if the selected file(s) are at the top of
the list.

Move Down - Moves the selected file(s) down one row. This tool is grayed if the selected file(s) are at the
bottom of the list.

Clear All - Deletes all files from the list.

Note
You can add as many script files as necessary to the list. If you are reversing more than one script file, the
order in which the files are reversed must respect any dependencies among objects (for example, trigger
creation scripts must come after table creation scripts, and grant permission scripts must come after both
table and user creation scripts.
3. [optional] Click the Options tab to specify any reverse engineering options (see Reverse Engineering Options
Tab [page 333]).

Note
References and primary keys are not rebuilt by default. To enable rebuilding, select the appropriate options
on the Options tab.
4. [optional] Click the Target Models tab to specify any external shortcuts (see Reverse Engineering Target
Models Tab [page 336]).
5. Click OK to begin reverse engineering.
If you are reverse engineering to an existing PDM, then the Merge Models dialog box opens to allow you to
control the merging of the new objects into your PDM (see Core Features Guide > Modeling with
PowerDesigner > Comparing and Merging Models). When the process is complete, a confirmation message is
given in the Output window.

330

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.6.10.2 Reverse Engineering from a Live Database

PowerDesigner can reverse engineer a PDM from a live database connection. You must specify a data source and
connection information. You can select to use administrator permissions in order to be able to select the system
tables that are reserved to a database administrator.

Procedure
1. To reverse engineer from a live database connection into an existing PDM, select

Database

Update Model

from Database .
or
To reverse engineer from a live database connection and create a new PDM, select

File

Reverse Engineer

Database to open the New Physical Data Model dialog. Specify a model name, choose a DBMS from the
list, and then click OK.
2. In the Database Reverse Engineering Options dialog, select Using a data source:

Note
A data source might be predefined, or you can enter the name of an existing data source. In both cases, if
you need to specify additional connection parameters, a database connection dialog box opens when you

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

331

click OK. Enter the necessary parameters and click Connect to open the Database Reverse Engineering
dialog.
3. Select your data source. You can either accept the selected data source (if one is present) or click the
Connect to a Data Source tool to select or define one. For detailed information about working with data
sources, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Getting Started with PowerDesigner >
Connecting to a Database.
4. [optional] To reverse engineer tables reserved to the database administrator, select Reverse using
administrator's permissions.
5. [optional] Click the Options tab to specify any reverse engineering options (see Reverse Engineering Options
Tab [page 333]).

Note
References and primary keys are not rebuilt by default. To enable rebuilding, select the appropriate options
on the Options tab.
6. [optional] Click the Target Models tab to specify any external shortcuts (see Reverse Engineering Target
Models Tab [page 336]).
7. Click OK to open the Database Reverse Engineering dialog, which allows you to specify the objects to reverse
engineer (see Database Reverse Engineering Selection Window [page 335]). Only tables and triggers are
selected by default.

8. Click OK to begin reverse engineering.

If you are reverse engineering to an existing PDM, then the Merge Models dialog box opens to allow you to
control the merging of the new objects into your PDM (see Core Features Guide > Modeling with
PowerDesigner > Comparing and Merging Models). When the process is complete, a confirmation message is
given in the Output window.

332

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.6.10.3 Reverse Engineering Options Tab

When you reverse engineer a database schema using script files or a data source, you can define rebuild options
after reverse engineering.
The rebuild options automatically perform the following tasks after reverse engineering:
Table 184:
Option

Description

Automatically rebuild references

Rebuilds references (see Rebuilding References [page 203]) when no references are re

when no reference is reversed

verse engineered. A reference is created between each column belonging to a primary

key and a column, with identical name and data type, that does not belong to a primary or
a foreign key in another table.

Automatically rebuild primary keys

Rebuilds primary keys (see Rebuilding Primary Keys [page 120]) using unique indexes

from unique indexes when tables

when tables have no key and only one unique index.

have no key and only one unique

index
Automatically reverse tables refer

Reverse engineers the parents of the selected child tables in order to complement the

enced by selected tables

definition of these child tables.

Create symbols

Creates a symbol for each reversed object in the diagram. If this option is not selected,
reversed objects are visible only in the browser.
Where there are a large number of objects with complex interactions, PowerDesigner
may create synonyms of objects to improve diagram readability. For example, if a table
has a large number of references, PowerDesigner may create a synonym of the table in
another location in the diagram to reduce the length required for references.

Apply code to name conversion to

Applies the code to name conversion script specified in the model options (see Core Fea

reversed objects

tures Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Objects > Naming Conventions).

File encoding

Specifies the default file encoding of the files to reverse engineer. Click the ellipsis to the
right of the option to change the encoding (see Reverse Engineering Encoding Format
[page 334]).

Block/ Command terminator

Specify the end of block and end of command characters for the reversed script. By de
fault, these value are defined in the DBMS definition file at Script\SQL\Syntax, and
modifications made here are saved in the Registry for reuse in other models. To restore
the DBMS value, click the Restore from DBMS tool.

Case sensitive database

Specifies that the database is case sensitive and enables the case sensitive option in the
model.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

333

1.6.10.3.1

Reverse Engineering Encoding Format

If the code you want to reverse engineer is written with Unicode or MBCS (Multibyte character set), you should
use the encoding parameters provided to you in the File Encoding box.
If you want to change these parameters because you know which encoding is used within the sources, you can
select the appropriate encoding parameter by clicking the Ellipsis button beside the File Encoding box. This opens
the Text Input Encoding Format dialog box in which you can select the encoding format of your choice.

The Text Input Encoding Format dialog box includes the following options:
Table 185:
Option

Description

Encoding hint

Encoding format to be used as hint when reversing the file.

Detection mode

Indicates whether text encoding detection is to be attempted and specifies how much of each
file should be analyzed. When enabled, PowerDesigner analyzes a portion of the text, and uses
an heuristic based on illegal bytes sequences and/or the presence of encoding-specific tags in
order to detect the appropriate encoding that should be used for reading the text.
The following settings are available:

No detection - for use when you know what the encoding format is

Quick detection - analyzes a small part of the file. For use when you think that the encoding
format will be easy to detect

Full detection analyzes the whole file. For use when you think that the number of charac
ters that determine the encoding format is very small

On ambiguous detection

Specifies what action should be taken in case of ambiguity. The following settings are available:

Use encoding hint and display warning - the encoding hint format is used and a warning
message is displayed.

Abort on character loss

Use encoding hint - the encoding hint format is used but no warning message is displayed.

Use detected encoding - the encoding format detected by PowerDesigner is used

Allows you to stop reverse engineering if characters cannot be identified and are to be lost in
current encoding

334

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Here is an example on how to read encoding formats from the list:

1.6.10.4 Database Reverse Engineering Selection Window

When you reverse engineer a database from a live database connection, you can choose to populate your PDM
with a subset of the available objects by selecting them in the Database Reverse Engineering Selection window.

Click the subtabs to view the different types of objects. Certain object types have attributes, or options, that
appear below the object lists. Options that are not available for the selected object type or DBMS are grayed.
When you select tables containing triggers on the Table tab, the triggers are selected on the Trigger tab.
You can restrict database objects to reverse engineer in the top area of the window by selecting to filter by:
Qualifier - such as a database or a partition that contains one or more tables. For example, the DB2 DBMS
authorizes the use of the qualifier field to select which databases are to be reverse engineered from a list.
Owner - normally the creator of a database object. To reverse engineer objects from multiple owners, select
All users. Only users that have creation rights are reverse engineered.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

335

Note
If the selected qualifier contains a large number of table owners, it may be faster to click the Select Qualifier
and Owner tool and enter a qualifier and/or owner in the dialog box, as opening the Owner list may take a
very long time.

You can save your selections for re-use by entering a selection name in the list at the bottom of the window and
clicking the Save tool to the right of the list. Selections are saved with a .sel file extension, and are added to the
list for subsequent use. You can change the folder in which the files are saved by clicking the folder tool to the
right of the list.

1.6.10.5

Reverse Engineering Target Models Tab

External shortcuts depend on their corresponding target objects located in different models. When you need
several models to design a single database, you can use shortcuts to share objects between models. The Target
Models tab displays the list of detected target models containing target objects for shortcuts in the current model
to reverse.
This tab is always visible, even if the model does not contain shortcuts, so that you can add target models and
create shortcuts instead of duplicating objects.
The following tools are available on this tab:
Table 186:
Tool

Description
Change Target Model - Displays a standard Open dialog box to let you select another file as target model

Open Model - Opens selected target model in current workspace

Add Models - Opens a selection list with the models opened in the current workspace. This tool is particu
larly useful when you reverse engineer into a new model where the target models are not defined

336

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Tool

Description
Delete - Deletes the target model and the shortcuts in the current model that reference the deleted target
model

When you reverse engineer a model, any target models should be open in your workspace. If not, the following
confirmation dialog box is displayed to let you open the target models:

If you are reverse engineering from a:

Script - All the create statements in the script create objects, provided the script contains a full definition of
the object. When the script only uses an object and does not define it, this object is sought among the target
objects in the target models and an external shortcut is created in the reversed model.
Live data source - External shortcuts are created for all selected objects that already exist in another target
model. These existing objects are deselected by default in the Selection tab of the Reverse Engineering dialog
box, except for target objects corresponding to shortcuts already existing in the reversed model.

1.6.10.6 Optimizing Live Database Reverse Engineering

Queries
Live database reverse engineering has been optimized in order to improve performance. All queries run according
to an optimization process rule.
This process uses the following registry keys:
RevOdbcMinCount defines a number of selected objects for reverse engineering. The default number is 100
RevOdbcMinPerct defines a percentage of selected objects for reverse engineering. The default percentage
is 10
These keys do not exist by default, you have to create and edit them in the Registry under:
Current User \Software\Sybase\PowerDesigner <version>\FolderOptions\Physical Objects
During reverse engineering, PowerDesigner compares the total number of current objects for reverse engineering
to the value of RevOdbcMinCount, and if the total number of listed items is:
lower than RevOdbcMinCount - then a global reverse query is executed.
higher than RevOdbcMinCount - then the process uses key RevOdbcMinPerct, and if the percentage of
reversed items is :

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

337

 lower than RevOdbcMinPerct - then the same query is executed for each object.
higher than RevOdbcMinPerct - then a global query is executed.

1.6.10.7

Reverse Engineering Database Statistics

You can reverse engineer statistics for an existing database, such as the number of distinct or null values in a
column or the average length of a character field. These can provide helpful information when optimizing a design.

Context
You can reverse engineer the statistics as part of the general reverse engineering process by selecting the
Statistics checkbox in the Database Reverse Engineering window (see Reverse Engineering from a Live Database
[page 331]), or update them at any other time, using the dedicated Update Statistics window.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Update Statistics to open the Update Statistics window (if PowerDesigner is not presently
connected to a database via a live database connection, you will be required to connect):

2. On the General tab, select or clear the checkboxes to specify whether you want to update statistics for tables
and/or columns.

338

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

3. [optional] Click the Selection tab and select or clear checkboxes to specify for which tables you want to
update statistics:

4. Click OK to begin the update. Progress appears in the Output window. For large updates, a progress dialog
box opens, allowing you to cancel the update at any time.
When the process is complete, you can view the updated statistics in the property sheets of your tables and
columns.

1.6.11

Reverse-Engineering an SAP BusinessObjects Universe

PowerDesigner can reverse-engineer a SAP BusinessObjects universe to a PDM for analysis and editing.

Context

Note
To reverse-engineer universes, you must have SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform 4.1
Support Package 2 Client Tools or higher installed on your workstation, and you must have selected to install
the SAP BusinessObjects Semantic Layer Java SDK.
For information about generating universes, see Generating an SAP BusinessObjects Universe [page 315].

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

339

Procedure
1. To prepare your universe for reverse-engineering, connect to your BusinessObjects server, right-click the
universe in the Repository Resources browser, select Retrieve Universe, and specify a local project to retrieve
it to.
2. To reverse-engineer the universe into an existing PDM, select

Tools

SAP BusinessObjects

Reverse

BusinessObjects Universe .
or
To reverse-engineer the universe and create a new PDM, select

File

Reverse Engineer

SAP

BusinessObjects Universe to open the New Physical Data Model dialog. Specify a model name, choose a
DBMS from the list, and then click OK.
3. Navigate to and select the universe file in your BusinessObjects workspace, and then select from the following
options as appropriate:
Table 187:
Option

Description

Reverse universe busi

ness layer

Deselect this option to reverse only the data foundation to produce a physical diagram. If this
option is selected, you can select the following:

Allow the creation of multiple facts - Instructs PowerDesigner to create multiple facts,
each in its own multidimensional diagram if the universe contains various measures
based on different table,

Name columns from universe attributes - Instructs PowerDesigner to modify the names
of database table columns if their associated dimension attributes are more human-read
able. Column codes are not changed.

Create dimensions from folder structure - Instructs PowerDesigner to build a dimension

for each folder in the universe and add every item under it in this dimension.

Enrich data foundation

from source database

Reverse-engineers the tables, indexes and references that are selected in the data foundation
from its associated database in order to obtain more information such as physical data type,
additional columns, missing references, and physical options, to augment the information
contained in the universe. Selecting this option will open a database connection dialog to allow
you to connect to the database.

Show Merge Dialog

[when reversing into an existing PDM] Specifies to display the Merge dialog even if there are
no conflicts between the model and the server. By default the Merge dialog is displayed only if
one or more objects contains conflicting changes on the BusinessObjects server and in the
model.

4. Click Finish. PowerDesigner requests your BusinessObjects server username and password to open the
universe for reverse-engineering.
PowerDesigner creates tables, references, facts, and dimensions as appropriate in your model. Tables and
references are displayed in a physical diagram, and each cube is displayed in its own multidimensional
diagram, surrounded by its associated dimensions.

340

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

1.6.12

Archive PDMs

Archive PDMs provide a snapshot of the structure of your database at a point in time to allow you to determine
model changes since that time when updating your database. When comparing your model directly with a
database or script (and not with an archive PDM), some differences (particularly around renamed objects) can be
lost, leading to more drop/creates in place of alter statements.
Archives are created by default when you generate or update your database (using the Automatic Archive option),
and can be created manually at any time by clicking
Archived PDM (xml) in the Save As Type list.

1.7

File

Save As , and selecting Archived PDM (bin) or

Generating Other Models from a Data Model

You can generate various types of PowerDesigner models from CDMs, LDMs, and PDMs.

Context
Table 188:
Data Model

CDM

LDM

PDM

OOM

CDM

LDM

PDM

XSM

Procedure
1. Select Tools, and then one of the following to open the appropriate Model Generation Options Window:
Generate Conceptual Data Model... Ctrl+Shift+C
Generate Logical Data Model... Ctrl+Shift+L
Generate Physical Data Model... Ctrl+Shift+P
Generate Object-Oriented Model... Ctrl+Shift+O
Generate XML Model... Ctrl+Shift+M
2. On the General tab, select a radio button to generate a new or update an existing model, and complete the
appropriate options.
3. [optional PDM-PDM generation only] Click the DBMS Preserve Options tab and set any appropriate options.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

341

Note
For detailed information about the options available on the various tabs of the Generation window, see
Core Features Guide > Linking and Synchronizing Models > Generating Models and Model Objects.
4. [optional] Click the Detail tab and set any appropriate options. We recommend that you select the Check
model checkbox to check the model for errors and warnings before generation.
5. [optional] Click the Target Models tab and specify the target models for any generated shortcuts.
6. [optional] Click the Selection tab and select objects to generate.
7. Click OK to begin generation.

Results

1.7.1

Generating Other Models from a CDM

You can generate CDM objects to other model objects.

Table 189:
CDM

OOM

PDM

Entity

Class - All entities with the Generate

Table - If the entity is involved in an inheritance,

property selected are generated as per

the inheritance Generation Mode setting (see In

sistent classes with the Generate

heritance Properties [page 80]) affects whether

table persistence mode. If an entity's

parents and children are generated.

Generate property is not selected, the

generated class has the Migrate

columns persistence mode.

Entity attribute

Attribute

Table column

Note
Two columns in the same table cannot have
the same name. If column names conflict due
to foreign key migration, PowerDesigner auto
matically renames the migrated columns to
the first three letters of the original entity
name followed by the code of the attribute.

Primary identifier

Primary or foreign key depending on independ

ent or dependent relationship

342

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

CDM

OOM

PDM

Identifier

Alternate key

Association

Relationship or association

Binary association with attrib

Association class

Inheritance

Generalization

Relationship

Reference

utes

1.7.1.1

Generating PDM Table Keys from CDM Entity

Identifiers

The type of key that is generated in the PDM depends on the cardinality and type of dependency defined for a
relationship in the CDM. Primary identifiers generate primary and foreign keys. Other identifiers that are not
primary identifiers generate alternate keys:
A primary key is a column or columns whose values uniquely identify a row in a table.
A foreign key is a column or columns that depend on and migrate from a primary key column in another table.
An alternate key is a column or columns whose values uniquely identify a row in a table, and is not a primary
key.

Independent One-to-many Relationships

In independent one-to-many relationships, the primary identifier of the entity on the one side of the relationship is
generated as a:
Primary key in the table generated by the entity on the one side of the relationship
Foreign key in the table generated by the entity on the many side of the relationship
The following CDM shows an independent relationship. Each division contains one or more employees:

The following PDM will be generated:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

343

Table 190:
Table

Primary key

Foreign key

Division

Division number

Employee

Employee number

Division number

Dependent One-to-many Relationships

In dependent relationships, the primary identifier of the nondependent entity is generated as a primary/foreign
key in the table generated by the dependent entity. The migrated column is integrated into the primary key if it
already exists.
The following CDM shows a dependent relationship. Each task must have a project number.

The following PDM will be generated:

Table 191:
Table

Primary key

Foreign key

Project

Project number

Task

Project number/Task number

Project number

344

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Independent Many-to-many Relationships

In independent many-to-many relationships, the primary identifiers of both entities migrate to a join table as
primary/foreign keys. The CDM below shows an independent relationship. Each employee can be a member of
one or more teams, and each team can have one or more employees as members.

The following PDM will be generated:

Table 192:
Table

Primary key

Foreign key

Team

Team number

Employee

Employee number

Member

Team number/Employee number

Team number/Employee number

Independent One-to-one Relationships

In independent one-to-one relationships, the primary identifier of one entity migrates to the other generated table
as a foreign key.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

345

1.7.2

Generating Other Models from an LDM

You can generate LDM objects to other model objects.

Table 193:
LDM

CDM

PDM

Business rule

Business rule

Business rule

Domain

Domain

Domain

Entity

Entity

Table

Identifier

Identifier

Key

Entity attribute

Entity attribute

Column table

Inheritance

Inheritance

References

Relationship

Relationship

Reference

1.7.3

Generating Other Models from a PDM

You can generate PDM objects to other model objects.

Table 194:
PDM

CDM

LDM

OOM

XSM

Domain

Domain

Domain

Domain

Simple Type

Table

Entity

Entity

Class

Element

Table column

Entity attribute

Entity attribute

Attribute

Attribute or element

Primary key

Primary identifier

Primary identifier

Primary identifier

Alternate key

Identifier

Identifier

Identifier

Foreign key

Keyref constraint

Stored-Procedures

Operation

View

Element

View column

Attribute

Index

Unique

Abstract data type

Complex type

346

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

PDM

CDM

LDM

OOM

XSM

Reference

Relationship

Relationship

Association

Note
If the code of the generated XML model objects does not correspond to the target language naming
conventions, you can define a code naming convention script to convert object names into codes. For more
information on conversion scripts, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Objects > Naming
Conventions.

XML Specifics
Generation of column as attribute or element is controlled by generation option
Foreign keys - When a foreign key is not a composition, it is generated as a KeyRef constraint

Oracle 8 and Interbase Sequence Translation

When a CDM is generated from a PDM, the data type of the table column attached to a sequence is translated to a
serial data type in the CDM with the format NO%n, where %n is the length of the data type (see Sequences (PDM)
[page 190]).

OOM Specifics
All tables are generated as persistent classes with the "Generate table" persistence mode.
All abstract data types are generated as persistent classes with the "Generate ADT" persistence mode.
Table - Class. The cardinality of a class is translated from the number of estimated records in a table
Table with migrated keys from only two other tables - Class linked with an association class between the two
classes generated by the two parent tables
Stored-Procedures and stored functions attached to selected table - If the parent table is generated as a class, the
stored procedure or the stored function is generated as an operation attached to the class

Note
If the code of the generated OOM objects does not correspond to the target language naming conventions, you
can define a code naming convention script to convert object names into codes. For more information, see
Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Objects > Naming Conventions.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

347

1.7.3.1

Customizing Data Type Mappings

When generating another PDM from your PDM, PowerDesigner maps the existing column datatypes to
appropriate data types in the new model. If the standard mappings are not sufficient for you, you can use the
Enhance Data Type Mapping extension to specify alternative mappings, including on a column-by-column
basis.

Context
To review the conversions that PowerDesigner makes by default between the data types of a database or other
modeling target and its standard conceptual types (which are also used in the CDM), select
<Type> , select the appropriate file in the list and click the Properties tool. Expand the
(for DBMSs) or Settings DataType
described in their Comment field):

348

Tools
Script

Resources
DataType

(for other resource files), and review each of the entries (which are

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Procedure
1. Select Tools Generate Physical Data Model , enter the appropriate generation options (see Core
Features Guide > Linking and Synchronizing Models > Generating Models and Model Objects).
2. On the Detail tab, click the Enable Transformations button to display the Extensions tab, and select the
Enhance Data Type Mapping extension.
3. Click OK to start the generation. The Data Type Mappings dialog appears, with the existing data types present
in the model listed in the Original type column, and those that PowerDesigner proposes in the new DBMS in
the Target data type column:

4. You can change data type mappings in two ways:

To change the mapping for all columns of a certain data type, select the desired new data type from the
list in the Target data type column.
To change the mapping for one column only, click the Add Specific Column Mapping button, select the
column from the tree, click OK, choose the new data type for the column, and click OK to add this
mapping to the list.
5. When you have modified all the necessary data types, click Close and the generation will continue, using your
custom mappings where appropriate.

Note
You can also customize data type mappings when changing the DBMS of your model with the
Change Current DBMS

Database

command. To do so, you must first attach the Enhance Data Type Mapping

extension, by selecting Model Extensions , clicking the Attach an Extension tool, select the extension,
and clicking OK to attach it to your model.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

349

For more information about data types, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition
Files > Script/Data Type Category and Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > Object, Process, and XML
Language Definition Files > Settings Category: Object Language.

1.7.3.2

Customizing XSM Generation for Individual Objects

When generating an XSM from a PDM or OOM, you can specify global generation options to generate tables/
classes as elements with or without complex types and columns/attributes as elements or attributes. You can
override these options for individual objects by attaching the PDM XML Generation or OOM XML Generation
extension to your source model and selecting from their XML generation options.

Context
Note
The extension provides new property sheet tabs for setting generation options for individual objects, but you
can also set these options with or without the extension by selecting

Model

<objects>

to open the

appropriate object list, clicking the Customize Columns and Filter tool, and selecting to display the XML
Generation Mode column.
For example, if you want to generate the majority of your table columns to an XSM as XML attributes, but want to
generate certain columns as elements, you should:
Modify the XML generation options for those columns that you want to generate as elements.
Select to generate columns as attributes on the Model Generation Options Detail tab.

Procedure
1. Select

Model

Extensions

to open the List of Extensions, and click the Attach an Extension tool.

2. On the General Purpose tab, select PDM XML Generation or OOM XML Generation and click OK to attach
the extension to your model and OK to close the List of Extensions.
These extension files enable the display of the XML tab in all table and column or class and attribute property
sheets.
3. Open the property sheet of the table, column, class, or attribute whose generation you want to customize, and
click the XML tab.
4. Use the radio buttons to specify how you want to generate the object in an XSM.
For tables and classes, you can specify to generate them as:
Elements - the table/class is generated as an untyped element directly linked to its columns/
attributes generated as attributes or sub-elements.
Elements with complex types - the table/class is generated as an element typed by a complex type,
generated in parallel, to contain the columns/attributes.

350

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

 Default - generation of the table/class is controlled by the option selected in the XML Generation
group box on the Model Generation Options Detail tab.
For tables, you can additionally specify to generate keys as:
Key - [default] The primary
key columns are generated and also KEY and KEYREF wherever the table is referenced.
ID attribute - The primary key columns are not generated and an ID attribute, id, is generated
to replace them.
Wherever the table is referenced, an IDREF attribute is generated to reference the appropriate eleme
nt. If the reference role name is assigned, this attribute is given this
name. Otherwise, the referenced table name is used and the standard renaming mechanism is enforc
ed.
Key and ID attribute - In many cases the primary
key columns have significant data and you may want to generate them, as well as an ID attribute.
In this case an ID attribute is generated for the element and IDREF is used systematically
for any reference to the table:
The following rules apply to the generation of keys:
If a Table generates an ID, all its child tables will generate an ID attribute.
If a Table generates Key columns, all its child tables will generate Key columns.
If a child table is flagged to generate PK only, ID Attribute will be automatically generated.
If a table generates ID attribute, No Key nor KeyRef will be generated, and ALL references will generat
e IDREF attribute.. (Even if the table generates also Key Columns)
If a table generates ID attribute ONLY, All Foreign Key Columns referencing its Key columns will be sy
stematically removed and replaced by an IDREF attribute
For columns and attributes, you can specify to generate them as:
Elements - [default] the column/attribute is generated as an sub-element of its table/class element
or complex type.
Attributes - the column/attribute is generated as an attribute of its table/class element or complex
type.
Default - generation of the column/attribute is controlled by the option selected in the XML
Generation group box on the Model Generation Options Detail tab.
5. Modify the XML generation options for any other objects that you want to generate in a different manner.
6. Select Tools Generate XML Model , ensure that the appropriate options are set in the XML Generation
group box on the Model Generation Options Detail tab, and start your generation.

1.7.3.3

Configuring the Generated Model Options

When you configure the options of a CDM to generate, you may define options diverging from the PDM options.
To avoid conflicts, PowerDesigner applies the following rule for default values of CDM options: an option defined
for the generated CDM should respect the equivalent option of the PDM.
Equivalent Enforce non-divergence model options are available in both the PDM and CDM.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

351

Table 195:
PDM option

CDM option

Result in generated CDM

Enforce non-diver

Enforce non-divergence in model according to PDM options. Data items

gence

and attributes attached to the domain cannot have divergent definitions

Enforce non-diver

Enforce non-divergence in model according to CDM options defined using

gence

the Configure Model Options feature

Relationships Unique Code

(CDM) Unique Code for relationships is not selected by default in the CDM options. However, if you select Unique
Code for relationships in the CDM options, relationships are renamed during the generation of a PDM to a CDM.
Options with no equivalent, like Enforce Profile in the PDM without any corresponding option in a CDM, are
generated using default values found in the registry.

Options with No Equivalent in the Models

(OOM) Options with no equivalent, like Enforce Profile in the PDM without any corresponding option in an OOM,
are generated using default values found in the registry.

1.8

Migrating from ERwin to PowerDesigner

You can easily import a model built with ERwin into PowerDesigner with no loss of metadata. PowerDesigner
allows complete flexibility through reliable linking and synchronization between conceptual, physical and objectoriented model approaches, providing outstanding model clarity and flexibility.
PowerDesigner supports the import of the following ERwin v3.x and higher model files, though v4.x or higher files
are recommended, as they contain more metadata:
ERwin v3.x (.erx)
ERwin v4.x (.xml)
ERwin v7.x, v8.x, v9.x (.xml) the ERwin model must be saved as Standard XML Format, and you must
uncheck Only save minimum amount of information in the ERwin Save as XML File dialog box.

Note
Before importing, we recommend that you review your ERwin model to see if any model object names are
duplicated. It is good practice to avoid using duplicate names, and PowerDesigner will automatically attach a
suffix to any duplicate objects that it encounters during the import process.
An ERwin logical model can be imported into either a PowerDesigner conceptual or logical model (CDM or LDM),
while an ERwin Physical Model is imported into a PowerDesigner physical data model (PDM).

352

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

PowerDesigner cannot import the following ERwin objects:

ERwin triggers and stored procedures (not directly possible, but see the process in Post-Import [page 356])
ERwin reports
ER1 files
ERwin data sources
ERwin target clients
While PowerDesigner can import all your object display preferences and will retain color and font information, it
does not support multiple colors for columns in a single table. The default column color will be used during the
import.

1.8.1

Importing Individual ERwin Files

PowerDesigner provides a wizard to help you import individual ERwin files.

Procedure
1. Select

File

Import

ERwin File .

2. Browse to the directory that contains the ERwin file, select it, and then click Open.
3. If the ERwin file contains only a physical model, you will be prompted to choose whether to import references
as triggers. Select Yes or No to begin the import.
Alternatively, if the ERwin file contains a logical model or a combined logical and physical model, the ERwin
model import dialog box opens:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

353

The options available depend on the type of ERwin model that you are importing. PowerDesigner supports
data modeling at the conceptual, logical, and physical levels. The full set of options is as follows:
A conceptual data model can be created when you are importing an ERwin logical model. It provides a
platform-independent representation of a system, giving an abstract view of its static data structures,
and permitting real normalized data structures with many-to-many and inheritance relationships.
A logical data model can be created when you are importing an ERwin logical model. It allows you to
resolve many-to-many and super/sub-type relationships, de-normalize your data structures, and define
indexes, without specifying a particular RDBMS.
A physical data model can be created when you are importing an ERwin physical model. It is a
representation of a real database and associated objects running on a server with complete information
on the structure of the physical objects, such as tables, columns, references, triggers, stored procedures,
views, and indexes.
Select the checkbox for each type of model that you want to create.
4. If your ERwin model contains a logical model, and you want to create a conceptual data model, then you can
choose to merge identical data items. This is a powerful metadata management technique that is not
available in the ERwin environment.
For example, your ERwin logical model may contain multiple entities that contain an attribute "address". By
default, PowerDesigner will create a separate data item for each of these entity attributes. However if you
select the Merge identical data items checkbox, then a single data item will be created, and adjustments to it
will automatically cascade down to all the associated entity attributes.
5. If your ERwin model contains a physical model, then you can choose whether to Implement referential
integrity by triggers.
6. Click OK to begin the import. When the process is complete, the imported models will appear in the Browser.

1.8.2

Importing Multiple ERwin Files

PowerDesigner provides a wizard to help you import multiple ERwin files.

Procedure
1. Select

354

File

Import

Multiple ERwin Files

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

to open the ERwin model import dialog:

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2. Use the Add Directory or Open Files tools to add .xml or .erx files to import to the list.
3. Use the following checkbox columns (or the equivalent options at the bottom of the dialog) to specify import
options for the files.
[C]onceptual Data Model - import the file as a CDM
[M]erge identical data items - [CDMs only] create a single data item for all entity attributes with the same
name (eg "address")
[L]ogical Data Model - import the file as an LDM
[P]hysical Data Model - import the file as a PDM
[I]mplement referential integrity by triggers - [PDMs only]
You can select to import a single ERwin file as multiple model types. To select multiple files and set the same
options for them, click and hold while dragging your cursor over the far-left numbered column.
4. Specify a Destination Folder in which to create the PowerDesigner models.
5. Click OK to begin the import.
PowerDesigner will import each model and add it to your workspace. Note that to avoid problems of memory
allocation when importing many models, the PowerDesigner models are closed by default. To open a model,
simply double-click it.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

355

1.8.3

Post-Import

You should perform a certain number of checks after import, and also be prepared for certain differences in your
models.
We recommend that you perform the following post-import checks:
Import triggers - Triggers cannot be directly imported from ERwin. There are, however, two methods for
transferring your constraint trigger information to PowerDesigner:
Automatically generate triggers - Select Tools Rebuild Objects Rebuild Triggers . Creating triggers
in this way ensures that they will be synchronized automatically by PowerDesigner, but the actual code
may be different from that which you are used to in ERwin.
Reverse engineer triggers - Generate the triggers from ERwin, and then reverse engineer them into
PowerDesigner. Creating triggers in this way ensures that they use exactly the same code as before, but
they will not be automatically synchronized by PowerDesigner.
Import procedures: Procedures cannot be directly imported from ERwin. You can, however transfer them by
generating the triggers from ERwin, and then reverse engineering them into PowerDesigner.
Set up object naming conventions - Select Tools Model Options , expand the Naming Convention
category and select the object entry (see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Objects >
Naming Conventions).
Select other model options - Select Tools Model Options , and select the Model Settings category or one
of its children (see Setting CDM/LDM Model Options [page 15] and Setting PDM Model Options [page 18])
The following are some differences that are commonly encountered when working with a newly imported ERwin
model:
Why do I see errors in Check Model when my ERwin model was clean? - PowerDesigner performs stricter
checks than ERwin. For example, duplicate objects are not permitted in PowerDesigner, and the existence of
orphaned items will generate a warning.
Why do some of my object symbols appear with numeric suffixes? - If an object is required to appear more
than once in a diagram (for, example, to improve readability), PowerDesigner will create a graphical synonym
to represent it. Thus, if the table "Purchase" is displayed twice in a diagram, the two symbols will be labeled as
"Purchase: 1" and "Purchase: 2".

1.8.4

PowerDesigner vs ERwin Terminology

PowerDesigner and ERwin use different terms to describe certain model objects.
The import process converts general model objects as follows:
Table 196:
ERwin

PowerDesigner

Model

Model

Stored display, subject area

Diagram

356

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

ERwin

PowerDesigner

Business rule

Business rule

Domain

Domain

Symbols (including symbol size and position)

Symbols ( including symbol size and position)

Description

Description

Notes

Annotation

Text block

Text symbol

IE notation

Entity/Relationship notation

IDEF1X notation

IDEF1X notation

User-defined properties

Imported as extended attributes stored in an extension file called

Imported Attributes and embedded in the model. For information

about working with extension files, see Customizing and Extending Power
Designer > Extension Files.

The import process converts ERwin logical model objects into conceptual data model (CDM) objects as follows:
Table 197:
ERwin logical model

PowerDesigner CDM

Attribute

Data item, entity attribute

Key group

Identifier

Entity

Entity

Relationship

Relationship

Subtype relationship

Inheritance link

Subtype category

Inheritance

The import process translates ERwin physical model objects into physical data model (PDM) objects as follows:
Table 198:
ERwin physical model

PowerDesigner PDM

Column

Column

Key

Key

Table

Table

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

357

ERwin physical model

PowerDesigner PDM

Relationship

Reference

Index

Index

View table

View

Fact, dimension, outrigger

Table

Target database

Current DBMS

Valid value

Check parameter

Tablespace

Tablespace

Segment

Storage

1.8.5

Getting Started Using PowerDesigner for Former ERwin

Users

This section lists some common tasks that former ERwin users will want to perform with PowerDesigner.

Objects
How do I find objects? All the objects in the model are listed, organized by type, in the Browser. PowerDesigner
provides various methods for locating your objects:
To find the symbol for an object in the Browser: Right-click the object in the Browser and select Find in
Diagram.
To find the browser entry for an object symbol: Right-click the symbol in the diagram and select Find in
Browser.
To search for an object: Type CTRL+F to open the Find Objects dialog box. Enter the text to search for (you
can use the asterisk as a wild card) and click Find Now. Right-click any of the results choose whether to find it
in the Browser or Diagram.
How do I edit objects? You can edit the name of an object by selecting its symbol in the diagram and typing F2. To
edit other object properties, double-click the symbol or the object entry in the Browser and enter the necessary
information in its property sheet.
How do I share objects? You can share objects between packages and models using shortcuts and replications
(see Core Features Guide > Linking and Synchronizing Models > Shortcuts and Replicas).

358

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

Packages/Subject Areas
How do I create subject areas? In PowerDesigner, you can create multiple views of your model by adding
additional diagrams. You can also divide your model into smaller subdivisions using packages.
To add a diagram to your model: Right-click the diagram background and select
[Diagram Type]

Diagram

New Diagram

To convert a diagram into a package: Right-click the diagram background and select

Diagram

Convert to

Package . The Convert Diagram to Package wizard will open, permitting you to name the package and select
objects to move into it. The package will appear in the Browser with its own diagram and associated objects.
For more information about packages, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > The
Browser > Packages.

Reports
How do I create a report? PowerDesigner provides wizards to create two different types of report:
To create a report about a specific type of object: Select
instructions.

Report

List Report Wizard

To create a report about multiple object types or the whole model: Select
follow the wizard instructions.

Report

and follow the wizard

Report Wizard

and

For more information about PowerDesigner reports, see Core Features Guide > Storing, Sharing and Reporting on
Models > Reports

Databases
How do I create or update a model from a database? Select File Reverse Engineer Database and complete
the dialog. When updating a model, a Merge dialog will open to allow you to verify the changes to be made before
committing them. For more information, see Reverse Engineering a Database into a PDM [page 328].
How do I generate a database from my model? Select Database Generate Database
dialog. For more information, see Generating a Database from a PDM [page 304].

and complete the

How do I update a database from my model? Select Database Apply Model Changes to Database and
complete the dialog. A Database Synchronization window will open to allow you to verify the changes to be made
before committing them. For more information, see Modifying a Database [page 324].

Models
How do I compare or merge models? Select Tools Compare Models or Tools Merge Model . For more
information, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Comparing and Merging Models.

Data Modeling
Building Data Models

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

359

DBMS Definition Reference

The chapters in this part provide information specific to the DBMSs supported by PowerDesigner.

2.1

Hadoop Hive

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the Hadoop Hive DBMS family, select the appropriate
version in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in
the Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
When working with PowerDesigner and Hadoop Hive, please bear in mind the following limitations:
Since Hadoop Hive is not a relational database, and does not support such concepts as primary and foreign
keys, many of PowerDesigner's typical modeling features have no relevance when modeling Hive
databases.
Hive has no system catalog, which limits PowerDesigner's reverse-engineering possibilities to the
capabilities of your ODBC driver, and round-trip reverse-engineering and generation may not be possible.

Abstract Data Types

The following extensions are available on the General tab when you select Map in the Type box:
Table 199:
Name

Description

Value Data Type

Specifies the data type of the mapped value.

Scripting name: MappedDttpAttr

360

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Columns
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 200:
Name

Description

Partitioning column

Specifies if the column defines a partition.

Scripting name: PartitionColumn

Users (Databases)
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 201:
Name

Description

HdfsPath

Specifies the path of database files.

Scripting name: HdfsPath

Database properties

Specifies the database properties.

Scripting name: DatabaseOptions

Views
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 202:
Name

Description

Scope

Specifies if the view is available for all or only local session. Note: The local and global key
words are present for SQL standard compatibility, but have no effect in the database.
Scripting name: TemporaryScope

View properties

[N/A for Table As view] Specifies the view properties.

Scripting name: VTblProperties

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

361

The following extensions are available on the Options tab if you select the <<Table As>> stereotype on the General
tab:
Table 203:
Name

Description

Block size

Specifies the size, in bytes, for each block in a table. The value must be between 8192 and
2097152 bytes, and be a multiple of 8192.
Scripting name: BlockSize

Append only

Specifies if the table must be created as an append-only table (TRUE) or as a regular heap-stor
age table (FALSE).
Scripting name: AppendOnly

OIDs

Specifies whether to assign object identifiers to rows. This box is unchecked by default.
Scripting name: OIds

Fill factor

Specifies the percentage that determines how full the index method will try to pack index pages.
Scripting name: FillFactor

Compression type

Specifies ZLIB (default) or QUICKLZ compression type.

Scripting name: CompressType

Level

For zlib compression of append-only tables, specifies a value between 1 (fastest compression) to
9 (highest compression ratio).
Scripting name: CompressLevel

Orientation

Set to column for column-oriented storage, or row (the default) for row-oriented storage.
Scripting name: Orientation

On commit

Specifies the behavior of temporary tables at the end of a transaction block.

Scripting name: OnCommit

Distributed by

Specifies the distribution policy for a table.

Scripting name: DistributedByColumns

2.1.1

Partitions and Partition Values (Hadoop Hive)

PowerDesigner supports Hadoop Hive partitions and partition values as extended sub-objects with stereotypes of
<<Partition>> and <<PartitionValues>> respectively.
To create a partition, use the tools on the Partitions tab of the table property sheet. To create a partition value, use
the tools on the General tab of the partition property sheet.

362

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Partition Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a partition property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry in the Partitions folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 204:
Name

Description

Set

Specifies if the partition has its column collection correctly filled and fixes it if possible.
Scripting name: IsOK

Location

Specifies the directory where the data files for the partition reside.
Scripting name: PartLocation

Specification

Specifies the partition definition.

Scripting name: PartitionSpec

Partition Value Properties

The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 205:
Name

Description

Column

Specifies the column which value will be compared with the threshold.
Scripting name: Column

Value

Specifies the value that determines if row can be stored in this partition.
Scripting name: Value

2.2

HP Neoview

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the HP Neoview DBMS family, select the appropriate version
in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

The following sections list the extensions provided for HP Neoview.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

363

Note
We do not provide documentation for the properties on the Physical Options and certain other tabs, though
minimal information is available for them in the Resource Editor. For information about these properties,
consult your DBMS reference documentation.

Tables
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 206:
Name

Description

Set

Specifies that the table is a SET table, and thus discards duplicate rows.
Scripting name: Set

Volatile

Specifies that indexes associated with the table have lifespans limited to the SQL session in which
the index is created and are dropped when the session ends.
Scripting name: Volatile

Columns
The following extensions are available on the Neoview tab:
Table 207:
Name

Description

Identity

Specifies that the column is an identity column.

Scripting name: Identity

Type

Specifies the type of identity column. You can choose between:

by default - allows both user-supplied and system-generated column values for the identity
column

always - provides system-generated unique values and does not allow user-supplied identity
column values.

Scripting name: IdentityType

Start with

Specifies the start value of the cycle range for the identity column.
Scripting name: StartWith

364

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Increment

Specifies the value by which each value is incremented to obtain the next value.
Scripting name: Increment

Minimum

Specifies the minimum value of the data type of the identity column starting the cycle range.
Scripting name: MinValue

Maximum

Specifies the maximum value of the data type of the identity column starting the cycle range.
Scripting name: MaxValue

Cycle

Specifies that when the maximum value is reached for the identity column, the values are re
started from the minimum. If this option is not selected, and error will be raised.
Scripting name: Cycle

Unsigned

Specify that the column is unsigned. By default, columns are signed.

Scripting name: Unsigned

Character set

[character columns] Specifies the character set to use.

Scripting name: Charset

Upshift

[character columns] Specifies that the contents are stored as uppercase.

Scripting name: Upshift

Mandatory

Specifies that the column must not contain a null value.

Scripting name: Mandatory

Constraint name

Specifies the name of the not null column constraint.

Scripting name: MandConstName

Indexes
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 208:
Name

Description

Volatile

Specifies that the index has a lifespan limited to the SQL session in which it is created and is drop
ped when the session ends.
Scripting name: Volatile

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

365

Name

Description

Unique

Specifies that the index is a unique index.

Scripting name: Unique

No populate

Specifies that the index is not to be populated when it is created. The indexes are created, but no
data is written to the index, and it is marked offline.
Scripting name: NoPopulate

Partition

Specifies the partitioning columns. If you do not specify the partitioning columns, the default is the
same partitioning column or columns as the base table for a non-unique index, and all the columns
in the index for a unique index.
Scripting name: HashPartitionColumns

References
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 209:
Name

Description

Enforced

Specifies that the reference is checked.

Scripting name: Enforced

Materialized Views
The following extensions are available on the Neoview tab:
Table 210:
Name

Description

Refresh type

Specifies the method that will be used to update the materialized view.
Scripting name: RefreshType

Ignore

[on request only] Instructs the refresh operation of a materialized view over several base tables to
ignore the changes to the listed base tables.
Scripting name: IgnoreChangesOn

366

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Initialize

Specifies when the materialized view gets its initial content, either upon creation or at the time of
its first refresh.
Scripting name: Initialize

Clustering columns

Specifies the order of rows within the physical file that holds the table, determines the physical
organization of the table, and the ways you can partition the table.
Scripting name: Clustering

Partition

Specifies hash partitioning, which is the only partitioning scheme supported for materialized
views.
Scripting name: HashPartition

Partitioning keys

Specifies the the partitioning keys of the materialized view.

Scripting name: PartitionColumnList

Commit each

Specifies the number of rows that refresh processes from the log before committing a transaction
and starting another one.
Scripting name: MVAttribute

Text

Provides a textual view of the materialized view options. This field auto-updates as you select op
tions, and you edits you make here are reflected in the options.
Scripting name: ViewOption

2.2.1

Materialized View Groups (Neoview)

Materialized view groups allow you to collect together materialized views (views with the Type property set to
Materialized view) that should be refreshed together. PowerDesigner models materialized view groups as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<MVGroup>>.

Creating a Materialized View Group

You can create a materialized view group in any of the following ways:
Select Model
Add a Row tool.

Materialized View Groups

to access the List of Materialized View Groups, and click the

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

New

Materialized View Group .

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

367

Materialized View Group Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a materialized view group property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Materialized View Groups folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the Neoview tab:
Table 211:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the group's owner.

Scripting name: Owner

The following tabs are also available:

Materialized Views - lists the materialized views contained within the group.

2.3

IBM DB2 for z/OS (formerly OS/390)

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the IBM DB2 for z/OS DBMS family, select the appropriate
version in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in
the Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMS definition file for IBM DB2 v8 for OS/390 is deprecated.
The following table lists DB2 objects and their equivalents in PowerDesigner:
Table 212:
DB2

PowerDesigner

Bufferpool

Storage

Database Partition Group

Extended Object <<DatabasePartitionGroup>>

Distinct Type

Domain

Function

Procedure of "Function" type

Index Extension

Extended Object <<IndexExtension>>

Method

Abstract Data Type Procedure

Type

Abstract Data Type

SuperView

SubView of a View

368

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following sections list the extensions provided for DB2 for z/OS.

Note
We do not provide documentation for the properties on the Physical Options and certain other tabs, though
minimal information is available for them in the Resource Editor. For information about these properties,
consult your DBMS reference documentation.

Columns
The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 213:
Name

Description

Field procedure

Defines the procedure that will be used as generator/cryptor of values.

name

Character subtype

Scripting name: ExtFieldProcName

[v6.x and higher] Specifies a subtype for a character string column.
Scripting name: ExtSubtypeData
[up to v6.x] Specifies a subtype for a character string column (column with a CHAR,VARCHAR,or LONG
VARCHAR data type). The subtype can proceed from the list defined in extended attribute type T_For
Data.
Scripting name: ExtData

Generated value

[v7.x and higher] Indicates that DB2 generates values for the column using the computed column func
tion. If you select Always, the server will send an error message if you try to type a value in the column. If
you select By Default, the server uses the computed column value or the value typed for the column.
Scripting name: ExtGeneratedAs

Implicitly hidden

[v9.x and higher] Specifies that the column is not visible in the result for SQL statements unless you ex
plicitly refer to the column by name.
Scripting name: ImplicitlyHidden

As security label

[v8 and higher] Specifies that the column will contain security label values. This also indicates that the
table is defined with multi-level security with row level granularity.
Scripting name: SecurityLabel

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

369

Domains
The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 214:
Name

Description

Character Subtype

[v6.x and higher] Specifies a subtype for a character string column.

Scripting name: ExtSubtypeData

References
The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 215:
Name

Description

Enforced

[v8 and higher] Indicates whether or not the referential constraint is enforced by the database manager
during normal operations, such as insert, update, or delete.
Scripting name: Enforced

Sequences
The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 216:
Name

Description

Datatype

Specifies a computed value for "As" option. Allows to select a data type in a list.
Scripting name: AsDatatype

Length

Specifies the length of the data type

Scripting name: AsDatatypeLength

Start with

Specifies the first value for the sequence.

Scripting name: InitialStartWith

Increment by

Specifies the interval between consecutive values of the sequence.

Scripting name: InitialIncrementBy

370

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Cache

Specifies the numerical value of the cache option.

Scripting name: CacheValue

No Cache

Specifies a computed boolean value for order option.

Scripting name: NoCacheBool

Cycle

Specifies a computed boolean value for cycle opion.

Scripting name: CycleBool

Order

Specifies a computed boolean value for order option.

Scripting name: OrderBool

Minimum value

Specifies the numerical value of the minvalue option.

Scripting name: LimitsMinvalueValue

Maximum value

Specifies the numerical value of the maxvalue option.

Scripting name: LimitsMaxvalueValue

No minimum

Specifies a computed boolean value for no minvalue option.

Scripting name: NoMinLimit

No maximum

Specifies a computed boolean value for no maxvalue option.

Scripting name: NoMaxLimit

2.3.1

Trusted Contexts (DB2)

Using a trusted context in an application can improve security by placing accountability at the middle-tier,
reducing over granting of privileges, and auditing of end-user's activities.
Trusted contexts are supported for DB2 for z/OS v9.x and higher and DB2 for Common Server v9.5 and higher.
PowerDesigner models trusted contexts as extended objects with a stereotype of <<TrustedContext>>.

Creating a Trusted Context

You can create a trusted context in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Trusted Contexts

to access the List of Trusted Contexts, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

New

Trusted Context .

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

371

Trusted Context Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a trusted context property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Trusted Contexts folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 217:
Name

Description

Enable

Specifies that the trusted context is created in the enabled state.

Scripting name: Enable

Authorization

Specifies that the context is a connection that is established by the authorization ID that is specified
by authorization-name.
Scripting name: Authorization

Default role

Specifies the default role that is assigned to a user in a trusted connection when the user does not
have a role in the trusted context.
If empty, then a No Default Role is assumed.
Scripting name: DefaultRole

As object owner

[DB2 for z/OS only] Specifies that the role is treated as the owner of the objects that are created
using a trusted connection based on the trusted context.
Scripting name: WithRoleAsObjectOwner

Default security label

[DB2 for z/OS only] Specifies the default security label for a trusted connection based on the trusted
context.
Scripting name: DefaultSecurityLabel

Attributes

Specifies one or more connection trust attributes that are used to define the trusted context.
Scripting name: Attributes

With use for

Specifies who can use a trusted connection that is based on the trusted context.
Scripting name: WithUseFor

2.3.2

Auxiliary Tables (DB2)

Auxiliary tables are used to store large object (LOB) data, such as graphics, video, etc, or to store rarely-accessed
data in order to improve the performance of the base table.
Auxiliary tables are supported for IBM DB2 for z/OS v9.x and higher. PowerDesigner models auxiliary tables as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<Auxiliary Table>>.

372

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Creating an Auxiliary Table

You can create an auxiliary table in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Auxiliary Table

to access the List of Auxiliary Tables, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Auxiliary Table .

Auxiliary Table Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an auxiliary table property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Auxiliary Tables folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 218:
Name

Description

Database

Specifies the database in which the LOB data will be stored.

Scripting name: Database

Tablespace

Specifies the table space in which the auxiliary table is created.

Scripting name: Tablespace

Table

Specifies the table that owns the LOB column.

Scripting name: Table

Column

Specifies the name of the LOB column in the auxiliary table.

Scripting name: Column

Partition

Specifies the partition of the base table for which the auxiliary table is to store the specified column.
Scripting name: Partition

2.3.3

Tablespace Prefix (DB2)

In IBM databases for z/OS, the physical options for a table can specify the tablespace in which a table resides, as
well as the database name.
You declare a tablespace in a database and assign a table to a tablespace on the Physical Options (Common) tabs
of their property sheets.
If the tablespace is not declared in any database, then the tablespace is not prefixed by any database name.
When you preview your table creation code, you can verify that the tablespace is prefixed by the name of the
database.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

373

2.3.4

Materialized Query Tables (DB2)

Materialized query tables are supported for IBM DB2 for z/OS 10 and higher. PowerDesigner models materialized
query tables as views with a stereotype of <<Materialized query table>>.

Creating a Materialized Query Table

You can create a materialized query table in any of the following ways:
Select Model
Add a Row tool.

Materialized Query Tables

to access the List of Materialized Query Tables, and click the

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

374

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Materialized Query Table .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Materialized Query Table Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a materialized query table property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Materialized Query Tables folder.
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 219:
Name

Description

Result table

Specifies whether the materialized view is a query table or result table.

Scripting name: WithNoData

Maintained by

[Query table] Specifies how the data in the materialized query table is maintained.
Scripting name: MaintainedBy

Query optimization

[Query table] Specifies whether this materialized query table can be used for optimization.
Scripting name: QueryOptimization

Column default

[Result table] Specifies whether or not to copy column defaults.

Scripting name: ColumnDefault

Identity

[Result table] Specifies whether or not to copy identity column attributes.

Scripting name: Identity

The following tabs are also available:

Partitions - lists the partitions contained within the materialized query table

2.3.5

Masks (DB2)

Masks are supported for IBM DB2 for z/OS 10 and higher. PowerDesigner models masks as extended objects with
a stereotype of <<Mask>>.

Creating a Mask
You can create a mask in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Masks

to access the List of Masks, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

New

Mask .

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

375

Mask Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a mask property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry in the Masks folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 220:
Name

Description

Column

Specifies the column to which the mask applies. A mask must not already exist for the column.
Scripting name: MaskColumn

Enabled

Specifies if the column mask is to be enabled for column access control.

Scripting name: MaskEnabled

The following extended attributes are available on the Expression tab:

Table 221:
Name

Description

Table correlation name

Specifies a correlation name that can be used within CASE expression to designate the table.
Scripting name: TableCorrelation

Case expression

Specifies a CASE expression that determines the value that is returned for the column. The result
of the CASE expression is returned in place of the column value in a row.
Scripting name: CaseExpression

2.3.6

Row Permissions (DB2)

Auxiliary tables are supported for IBM DB2 for z/OS 10 and higher. PowerDesigner models row permissions as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<Row permission>>.

Creating a Mask
You can create a row permission in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Row Permissions

to access the List of Row Permissions, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

376

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Row Permission .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Row Permission Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a row permission property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Row Permissions folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 222:
Name

Description

Table

Specifies the table on which the row permission is created.

Scripting name: Table

Enabled

Specifies that the row permission is to be enabled or disabled for row access control.
Scripting name: RowPermissionEnabled

The following extended attributes are available on the Search condition tab:
Table 223:
Name

Description

Correlation name

Specifies a correlation name that can be used within search-condition to designate the table.
Scripting name: TableCorrelation

Search condition

Specifies a condition that can be true, false, or unknown for a row of the table. Search condition
follows the same rules used by the search condition in a WHERE clause of a subselect.
Scripting name: SearchCondition

2.4

IBM DB2 for Common Server

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the IBM DB2 for Common Server DBMS family, select the
appropriate version in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner
metamodel in the Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMS definition file for IBM DB2 v8.x Common Server is deprecated.
For a list of DB2 objects and their equivalents in PowerDesigner, see IBM DB2 for z/OS (formerly OS/390) [page
368].
The following sections list the extensions provided for DB2 for Common Server.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

377

Note
We do not provide documentation for the properties on the Physical Options and certain other tabs, though
minimal information is available for them in the Resource Editor. For information about these properties,
consult your DBMS reference documentation.

Tables
The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 224:
Name

Description

Ptcfree

Indicates what percentage of each tab to leave as free space during load or reorganization.
Scripting name: ExtTablePctFree

Data

Identifies the tablespace in which the table will be created.

Scripting name: In

Cycle

Specifies whether or not the number of data partitions with no explicit tablespace can exceed the num
ber of specified data partitions.
Scripting name: DisplayCycle

Long

Identifies the table space in which the values of any long columns (LONG VARCHAR, LONG VAR
GRAPHIC, LOB data types, distinct types with any of these as source types, or any columns defined with
user-defined structured types with values that cannot be stored inline) will be stored.
Scripting name: InLongIn

Index

Identifies the tablespace in which any indexes on the table will be created.
Scripting name: InIndexIn

Columns
The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 225:
Name

Description

Lob option

[up to v8.x] Specifies options for LOB data type columns.

Scripting name: ExtLobOption

378

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

For bit data

Specifies that the content of the column is to be treated as bit (binary) data. This is only applicable on
columns with a character datatype.
Scripting name: ExtForBitData

Always Generate

When set to True (generated always), indicates that DB2 will always generate a value for the column

value

when a row is inserted into the table or whenever the result value of the generation expression may
change.
When set to False (generated by default), indicates that DB2 will generate a value for the column when a
row is inserted into the table, unless a value is specified.
Scripting name: ExtGenAlways

As row change

[v9.5 and higher] Specifies that the column is a timestamp column for the table. A value is generated for

timestamp

the column in each row that is inserted, and for any row in which any column is updated.
Scripting name: AsRowChangeTimestampClause

Expression

Specifies that the definition of the column is based on an expression.

Scripting name: ExtGenExpr (up to v9.0: ExtGenExpr)

Compact

Specifies COMPACT options for LOB data type columns.

Scripting name: Compact

Logged

Specifies LOGGED options for LOB data type columns.

Scripting name: Logged

Inline length

This option is only valid for a column defined using a structured type and indicates the maximum byte
size of an instance of a structured type to store inline with the rest of the values in the row.
Scripting name: InlineLength

Compress

Specifies that system default values (that is, the default values used for the data types when no specific
values are specified) are to be stored using minimal space. If the VALUE COMPRESSION clause is not
specified, a warning is returned and system default values are not stored using minimal space.
Scripting name: CompressSystemDefault

Hidden

Specifies whether or not the column is to be defined as hidden. The hidden attribute determines whether
the column is included in an implicit reference to the table, or whether it can be explicitly referenced in
SQL statements.
Scripting name: HiddenBool

Security label

Identifies a security label that exists for the security policy that is associated with the table.
Scripting name: SecurityLabel

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

379

References
The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab (v8.0 and higher):
Table 226:
Name

Description

Enforced

Indicates whether or not the referential constraint is enforced by the database manager during normal
operations, such as insert, update, or delete.
Scripting name: Enforced

Enable query opti

mization

Specifies whether the constraint can be used for query optimization under appropriate circumstances.
Scripting name: QueryOptimization

Views
The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab (v9.x and higher):
Table 227:
Name

Description

View is based on a

Specifies that the columns of the view are based on the attributes of the structured type identified by

type

type-name.
Scripting name: ADTView

Structured type

Specifies the abstract data type that the view is based on.
Scripting name: ViewType

Super view

Specifies the view that the current view is a subview of. The superview must be an existing view and must
be defined using a structured type that is the immediate supertype of the current view type.
Scripting name: SuperView

Identifier column

Defines the object identifier column for the typed view.

Scripting name: OIDColumn

Unchecked

Defines the object identifier column of the typed view definition to assume uniqueness even though the
system cannot prove this uniqueness.
Scripting name: Unchecked

Additional options

Defines additional options that apply to columns of a typed view.

Scripting name: RootViewOptions

380

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

With row move

Specifies that an updated row is to be moved to the appropriate underlying table, even if it violates a

ment

check constraint on that table.

Scripting name: WithRowMovement

Check option

Specifies the constraint that every row that is inserted or updated through the view must conform to the
definition of the view.
Scripting name: CheckOption

Tablespaces
The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 228:
Name

Description

Type

Specifies the tablespace type, as defined in the extended attribute type ExtTablespaceTypeList.
Scripting name: ExtTablespaceType

Abstract Data Types

The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab (v9.x and higher):
Table 229:
Name

Description

Inline length

Indicates the maximum size (in bytes) of a structured type column instance to store inline with the rest
of the values in the row of a table. Instances of a structured type or its subtypes, that are larger than the
specified inline length, are stored separately from the base table row, similar to the way that LOB values
are handled.
Scripting name: InlineLength

Without compari
son

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Indicates that there are no comparison functions supported for instances of the structured type.
Scripting name: WithoutComparison

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

381

Name

Description

Cast (ref as source) Defines the name of the system-generated function that casts a reference type value for this structured
function

type to the data type representation type. A schema name must not be specified as part of function
name (SQLSTATE 42601). The cast function is created in the same schema as the structured type. If the
clause is not specified, the default value for function name is the name of the representation type.
Scripting name: RefAsSourceCastFunction

Cast (source as ref) Defines the name of the system-generated function that casts a value with the data type representation
function

type to the reference type of this structured type. A schema name must not be specified as part of the
function name (SQLSTATE 42601). The cast function is created in the same schema as the structured
type. If the clause is not specified, the default value for function name is the structured type name. A
matching function signature must not already exist in the same schema (SQLSTATE 42710).
Scripting name: SourceAsRefCastFunction

With function ac

Indicates that all methods of this type and its subtypes, including methods created in the future, can be

cess

accessed using functional notation. This clause can be specified only for the root type of a structured
type hierarchy (the UNDER clause is not specified) (SQLSTATE 42613). This clause is provided to allow
the use of functional notation for those applications that prefer this form of notation over method invo
cation notation.
Scripting name: WithFunctionAccess

Ref using

Defines the built-in data type used as the representation (underlying data type) for the reference type of
this structured type and all its subtypes. This clause can only be specified for the root type of a struc
tured type hierarchy (UNDER clause is not specified) (SQLSTATE 42613). The type cannot be a LONG
VARCHAR, LONG VARGRAPHIC, BLOB, CLOB, DBCLOB, DATALINK, or structured type, and must have
a length less than or equal to 32 672 bytes (SQLSTATE 42613). If this clause is not specified for the root
type of a structured type hierarchy, then REF USING VARCHAR(16) FOR BIT DATA is assumed.
Scripting name: RepType

Length/ precision

Specifies the precision for representation type.

Scripting name: RepPrecision

Abstract Data Type Attributes

The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab (v9.x and higher) with the LOB data type:
Table 230:
Name

Description

Compact

Specifies COMPACT options for LOB data type columns.

Scripting name: Compact

382

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Logged

Specifies LOGGED options for LOB data type columns.

Scripting name: Logged

Abstract Data Type Procedures

The following extensions are available on the DB2 tab (v9.x and higher):
Table 231:
Name

Description

Inherit isolation

Specifies whether or not a lock request can be associated with the isolation-clause of the statement

level

when the method inherits the isolation level of the statement that invokes the method. The default is IN
HERIT ISOLATION LEVEL WITHOUT LOCK REQUEST.
Scripting name: IsolationLevel

Method is external

Indicates that the CREATE METHOD statement is being used to register a method, based on code writ
ten in an external programming language.
Scripting name: ExternalMethod

External name

Identifies the name of the user-written code which implements the method being defined.
Scripting name: ExternalName

Transform group

Indicates the transform group that is used for user-defined structured type transformations when invok
ing the method. A transform is required since the method definition includes a user-defined structured
type.
Scripting name: TransformGroup

2.4.1

Database Partition Groups (DB2)

Database partition groups are supported for DB2 for Common Server v9.x and higher.
A partition group is a logical layer that provides for the grouping of one or more database partitions. A partition
can belong to more than one partition group. When a database is created, DB2 creates three default partition
groups, which cannot be dropped.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

383

Creating a Database Partition Group

You can create a database partition group in any of the following ways:
Select Model
Add a Row tool.

Database Partition Groups

to access the List of Database Partition Groups, and click the

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Database Partition Group .

Database Partition Group Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a database partition group property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Database Partition Groups folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 232:
Property

Description

Database partitions Specifies the database partitions that are in the partition group.
When empty, the group includes all database partitions defined in the database at the time of its crea
tion.
Scripting name: DBPartitionNumList

2.4.2

Index Extensions (DB2)

Index extensions are supported for DB2 for Common Server v9.x and higher, and are used with indexes on tables
that have columns of a structured or distinct type.
The following options are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 233:
Property

Description

Owner

Specifies the index extension schema.

Scripting name: Owner

Parameters

Specifies a list of parameters (with data types) that is passed to the index extension at CREATE INDEX
time to define the actual behavior of this index extension.
Scripting name: IndexExtensionParameters

Source key param

eters

384

Specifies the parameter (and its data type) that is associated with the source key column.
Scripting name: SourceKeyParameters

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Property

Description

Key generation

Specifies how the index key is generated using a user-defined table function. Multiple index entries may

function

be generated for a single source key data value.

Scripting name: KeyGenerationFunction

Parameter

Specifies parameters for the key generation function.

Scripting name: KeyGenerationFunctionParameters

Target key parame Specifies the target key parameters that are the output of the key generation function specified on the
ters

GENERATE KEY USING clause.

Scripting name: TargetKeyParameters

Search methods

Specifies the list of method details of the index search. Each detail consists of a method name, the
search arguments, a range producing function, and an optional index filter function.
Scripting name: SearchMethods

2.4.3

Security Policies (DB2)

Security policies define criteria that determine who has write and/or read access to individual rows and columns
of tables.
Every protected table must have exactly one security policy associated with it. Rows and columns in that table can
only be protected with security labels that are part of that security policy and all access of protected data follows
the rules of that policy. You can have multiple security policies in a single database but you cannot have more than
one security policy protecting any given table.
Security policies are supported for DB2 for Common Server v9.5 and higher. PowerDesigner models security
policies as extended objects with a stereotype of <<SecurityPolicy>>.

Creating a Security Policy

You can create a security policy in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Security Policies

to access the List of Security Policies, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Security Policy .

Security Policy Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a security policy property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Security Policies folder.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

385

The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:

Table 234:
Property

Description

Use group authori

Specifies that security labels and exemptions granted directly or indirectly to groups are considered for

zation

any access attempt.

Scripting name: GroupAuthorization

Use role authoriza

Specifies that security labels and exemptions granted directly or indirectly to roles are considered for

tion

any access attempt.

Scripting name: RoleAuthorization

Restrict Not Au

Specifies the action that is to be taken when a user is not authorized to write the explicitly specified se

thorized Write Se

curity label that is provided in the INSERT or UPDATE statement issued against a table that is protected

curity Label

with this security policy. A user's security label and exemption credentials determine the user's authori
zation to write an explicitly provided security label.
Scripting name: Restrict

The following tabs are also available:

Components - lists the security label components associated with the security policy

2.4.3.1

Security Labels (DB2)

Security labels are database objects that describe a set of security criteria, and which are granted to users to
allow them to access protected data.
Every security label is part of exactly one security policy and includes one value for each component in that
security policy.
Security labels are supported for DB2 for Common Server v9.5 and higher. PowerDesigner models security labels
as extended objects with a stereotype of <<SecurityLabel>>.

Creating a Security Label

You can create a security label in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Security Labels

to access the List of Security Labels, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

386

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Security Label .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Security Label Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a security label property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Security Labels folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the DB2 tab:
Table 235:
Property

Description

Policy

Specifies the security policy with which the label is associated.

Scripting name: Policy

The following tabs are also available:

Components - lists the security label components associated with the security label.

2.4.3.2

Security Label Components (DB2)

Security label components are database objects that model your organization's security structure.
A security label component represents a criteria to decide if a user should have access to a given piece of data,
such as how well trusted the user is, what department she is in, or whether she is involved in a particular project.
Security label components are supported for DB2 for Common Server v9.5 and higher. PowerDesigner models
security label components as extended objects with a stereotype of <<SecurityLabelComponent>>.

Creating a Security Label Component

You can create a security label component in any of the following ways:
Select Model Security Label Components
the Add a Row tool.

to access the List of Security Label Components, and click

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Security Label Component .

Security Label Component Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a security label component property
sheet, double-click its Browser entry in the Security Label Components folder.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

387

The following extended attributes are available on the DB2 tab:

Table 236:
Property

Description

Component type

Specifies the type of component. You can choose between:

TREE: Each element represents a node in a tree structure

ARRAY: Each element represents a point on a linear scale

SET: Each element represents one member of a set

Scripting name: Type

Constant list

Specifies one or more string constant values that make up the set of valid values for the component. The
order in which the array elements appear is significant, with the first element ranking higher than the
second element, and so on.
Scripting name: List

2.4.4

Event Monitors (DB2)

Event monitors show activity from start to finish, and often consist of both a start and end event record. The most
common uses for event monitors are for connections, locks, and statements. PowerDesigner models event
monitors as extended objects with a stereotype of <<EventMonitor>>.

Creating an Event Monitor

You can create an event monitor in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Event Monitors

to access the List of Event Monitors, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

Event Monitor .

Event Monitor Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an event monitor property sheet, doubleclick its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Event Monitors folder.

388

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:

Table 237:
Name

Description

Workload management

Specifies that the event monitor is used for workload management. Selecting this option affects

event monitor

the types that are available in the Type field.

Scripting name: WlmEventMonitor

Type

Specifies the type of event to record. Click the button to the right of the field to select multiple
types.
Scripting name: Type

Event condition

[connections, transactions, or statements type] Defines a filter that determines which connections
cause a CONNECTION, STATEMENT or TRANSACTION event to occur.
Scripting name: EventCondition

Details

[deadlock type] Specifies that the event monitor is to generate a more detailed deadlock connec
tion event for each application that is involved in a deadlock.
Scripting name: DeadlocksDetails

The following extended attributes are available on the DB2 tab:

Table 238:
Name

Description

Write to

Specifies the location where the event monitor will record its information.
If you are writing to a table, you can additionally associate the event monitor with one or more
event monitor groups on the EVMGroup tab. Event monitor groups identify the logical data group
for which a target table is being defined, and PowerDesigner models them as extended sub-objects
with a stereotype of <<EventMonitor>>.
Scripting name: WriteToObject

Blocked

[table, file] Specifies that each agent that generates an event should wait for an event buffer to be
written out to disk if the agent determines that both event buffers are full. This option should be
selected to guarantee no event data loss.
Scripting name: Blocked

Buffer size

[table, file] Specifies the size of the event monitor buffers (in units of 4K pages). All event monitor
file I/O is buffered to improve the performance of the event monitors.
Scripting name: BufferSize

Path

[file] The name of the directory in which the event monitor should write the event files data. The
path must be known at the server.
Scripting name: Path

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

389

Name

Description

Max files

[file] Specifies that there is a limit on the number of event monitor files that will exist for a particu
lar event monitor at any time.
Scripting name: MaxFiles

Maximum file size

[file] Specifies that there is a limit to the size of each event monitor file.
Scripting name: MaxFileSize

Append

[file] Specifies that if event data files already exist when the event monitor is turned on, then the
event monitor will append the new event data to the existing stream of data files.
Scripting name: Append

Pipe name

[pipe] The name of the pipe to which the event monitor will write the data. The naming rules for
pipes are platform specific.
Scripting name: PipeName

Start

Specifies that the event monitor must be activated manually or is to be automatically activated
whenever the database partition on which the event monitor runs is activated.
Scripting name: Start

Scope

Either the event monitor reports on all database partitions (global) or only on the database parti
tion that is running (local).
Scripting name: Scope

Database partition

[pipe, file] Specifies the database partition on which the event monitor is to run.
Scripting name: DBPartitionNum

Event Monitor Group Properties

You can create and manage event monitor groups from the EVMGroup tab of an event monitor. PowerDesigner
models event monitor groups as extended sub-objects with a stereotype of <<EVMGroup>>.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 239:
Name

Description

Group

Identifies the logical data group for which a target table is being defined.
Scripting name: Group

390

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Table

Specifies the name of the target table.

Scripting name: Table

PCTDeactivate

If a table is being created in a DMS table space, the PCTDEACTIVATE parameter specifies how full
the table space must be before the event monitor automatically deactivates.
Scripting name: PCTDeactivate

Tablespace

Defines the table space in which the table is to be created

Scripting name: Tablespace

Trunc

Specifies that the STMT_TEXT and STMT_VALUE_DATA columns are defined as VARCHAR(n),
where n is the largest size that can fit into the table row.
Scripting name: Trunc

Inclusion criteria

Specifies which elements will be included in the table.

Scripting name: Elements

Elements

Identifies a monitor element that will be included in or excluded from monitoring

Scripting name: ElementList

2.4.5

Federated Systems (DB2)

A federated system consists of a DB2 instance that operates as a federated server, a database that acts as the
federated database, one or more data sources, and clients (users and applications) that access the database and
data sources. PowerDesigner provides support for federated servers for DB2 for Common Server v9.0 and higher
through nicknames, servers, wrappers, and user mappings.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

391

2.4.5.1

Nicknames (DB2)

A nickname is an identifier that an application uses to reference a data source object, such as a table or view. In a
federated system, you use can nicknames to access data source objects and improve the performance of queries
on remote data sources. Nicknames are supported for DB2 for Common Server v9.7 and higher.

Creating a Nickname
You can create a nickname in any of the following ways:
Right-click the model node in the Browser and select New Nickname for External Table. In the dialog, select a
table from a PDM open in the workspace and click OK. PowerDesigner will create a shortcut to the external
table along with the necessary nickname and server objects.
Select

Model

Nicknames

to access the List of Nicknames, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Nickname .

Nickname Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a nickname property sheet, double-click
its Browser entry in the Nicknames folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 240:
Property

Description

Server

Specifies the server that contains the table the nickname is refering to (see Servers (DB2) [page
394]). Use the tools to the right of the list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the cur
rently selected object.
Scripting name: Server

Remote schema

Specifies the schema to which the table or view belongs. If left empty, the server authorization name
is used.
Scripting name: RemoteSchema

Remote table

Specifies the remote table name.

Scripting name: RemoteTable

Relational definition

Selecting Yes displays the Relational Definition tab, which contains a field to allow you to specify an
appropriate definition in SQL.
Scripting name: RemoteTable

392

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following extended attributes are available on the Options tab:

Table 241:
Property

Description

Code page

Specifies the code page of the file at the data source. This option is valid only for federated data
bases that use Unicode.
Scripting name: CODEPAGE

Column delimiter

Specifies a single character to use as the delimiter that separates columns in the table-structured
file.
Scripting name: COLUMN_DELIMITER

Data source

Specifies the name of the script to invoke.

Scripting name: DATASOURCE

File path

Specifies the fully qualified directory path and file name of the Excel spreadsheet to access.
Scripting name: FILE_PATH

Key column

Specifies the name of the column on which the file is sorted.

Scripting name: KEY_COLUMN

Namespaces

Specifies the namespaces that are associated with the namespace prefixes that are used in the
XPATH and TEMPLATE options for each column.
Scripting name: NAMESPACES

No empty string

Specifies whether the remote data source server can contain empty strings.
Scripting name: NO_EMPTY_STRING

Numeric string

Specifies how to treat numeric strings. When set to Y for a column, the query optimizer recognizes
that the column contains no blanks that could interfere with the sorting of the data in the column.
Scripting name: NUMERIC_STRING

Range

Specifies the range of Excel cells to use.

Scripting name: RANGE

Remote object

Specifies the name of the BioRS databank that is associated with the nickname. This name deter
mines the schema and the BioRS databank for the nickname.
Scripting name: REMOTE_OBJECT

SOAP action

Specifies the URI SOAPACTION attribute from the Web Services Description Language (WSDL) for
mat.
Scripting name: SOAPACTION

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

393

Property

Description

Sorted

Specifies whether the file at the data source is or is not sorted in ascending order.
Scripting name: SORTED

Streaming

Specifies whether the source document should be separated into logical fragments for processing.
Scripting name: STREAMING

Template

Specifies the nickname template fragment to use to construct a SOAP request.

Scripting name: TEMPLATE

Timeout

Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, to wait for a response from the data source server.
Scripting name: TIMEOUT

Validate

Specifies whether the source document is validated to ensure that it conforms to an XML schema or
document type definition (DTD) before data is extracted from it.
Scripting name: VALIDATE

Validate data file

For sorted files, this option specifies whether the wrapper verifies that the key column is sorted in
ascending order and checks for null keys.
Scripting name: VALIDATE_DATA_FILE

XPath

Specifies the XPath expression that identifies the XML elements that represent individual tuples.
Scripting name: XPATH

XML root

Specifies the XML root element to add to the values of an XML column that references an XML se
quence.
Scripting name: XML_ROOT

Additional options

Can be used to specify any additional options.

Scripting name: OtherOptions

2.4.5.2

Servers (DB2)

The instance owner supplies a name to identify the data source, along with the type and version of the data
source, the database name for the data source (RDBMS only), and metadata that is specific to the data source.
This information is called a server definition. Data sources answer requests for data and are servers in their own
right. Servers are supported for DB2 for Common Server v9.7 and higher.

394

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Creating a Server

Note
A server can be created automatically when you create a nickname (see Nicknames (DB2) [page 392]) using
the New Nickname for External Table command.
You can manually create a server in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Servers

to access the List of Servers, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Server .

Use the Create tool next to the Server field on the General tab of a nickname or user mapping property sheet
(see Servers (DB2) [page 394]).

Server Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a server property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry in the Servers folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 242:
Property

Description

Authorization / Pass

Required only for DB2 family data sources. Specify the authorization ID and password under which

word

any necessary actions are performed at the data source when the CREATE SERVER statement is
processed. This authorization ID is not used when establishing subsequent connections to the
server.
Scripting name: Authorization, Password

Type / Version

Specify the type and version of the data source.

Scripting name: Type, Version

Wrapper

Specifies the wrapper (see Wrappers (DB2) [page 398]) that the DB2 federated server uses to inter
act with the server object. Use the tools to the right of the list to create, browse for, or view the prop
erties of the currently selected object.
Scripting name: Wrapper

Model

Specifies the PDM containing the structure of the database on the server being referenced. Use the
tools to the right of the list to browse for an object or view the properties of the currently selected
object.
Scripting name: Model

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

395

The following extended attributes are available on the Options tab:

Table 243:
Property

Description

Fold login / Fold pass

Specify the case of user IDs and passwords that the DB2 federated server sends to the data source

word

server for authentication, and whether they can be null.

Scripting name: FOLD_ID, FOLD_PW

Enable plan hints

Specifies whether plan hints, which are statement fragments that provide extra information for data
source optimizers to help decide whether to use an index, which index to use, or which table join se
quence to use. This information can, for certain query types, improve query performance.
Scripting name: PLAN_HINTS

Ignore user data types

Specifies whether the DB2 federated server should determine the built-in type that underlies a UDT
without strong typing.
Scripting name: IGNORE_UDT

Push down

Specifies whether the DB2 federated server will consider letting the data source evaluate operations.
Scripting name: PUSHDOWN

Collating sequence

Specifies whether the data source uses the same default collating sequence as the DB2 federated
server, based on the NLS code set and the country information.
Scripting name: COLLATING_SEQUENCE

Date compatibility

Specifies whether the DATE compatibility semantics associated with the TIMESTAMP(0) data type
are applied to the connected database.
Scripting name: DATE_COMPAT

No trailing blanks

Specifies whether data sources which have variable character data types pad the length with trailing
blanks.
Scripting name: VARCHAR_NO_TRAILING_BLANKS

Enforce savepoint

Specifies whether the DB2 federated server should enforce detecting or building of application save
point statements.
Scripting name: IUD_APP_SVPT_ENFORCE

CPU ratio / IO ratio

Indicate how much faster or slower a data source's CPU and I/O system runs than those of the the
DB2 federated server.
Scripting name: CPU_RATIO, IO_RATIO

Packet size

Specifies the packet size of the Sybase interface file in bytes. If the data source does not support the
specified packet size, the connection will fail. Increasing the packet size when each record is very
large (for example, when inserting rows into large tables) significantly increases performance.
Scripting name: PACKET_SIZE

396

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Property

Description

Timeout

Specifies the number of seconds the DB2 federated server will wait for a response from Sybase
Open Client for any SQL statement. The value of seconds is a positive whole number in DB2 Univer
sal Database's integer range.The timeout value that you specify depends on which wrapper you are
using. The default behavior of the TIMEOUT option for the Sybase wrappers is 0, which causes DB2
to wait indefinitely for a response.
Scripting name: TIMEOUT

Login timeout

Specifies the number of seconds for the DB2 federated server to wait for a response from Sybase
Open Client to the login request.
Scripting name: LOGIN_TIMOUT

Communication rate

Specifies the communication rate between the DB2 federated server and the data source server in
megabytes per second.
Scripting name: COMM_RATE

Database name

Specifies the database that you want the the DB2 federated server to access on the data source. For
DB2, this value corresponds to a specific database within an instance or, with DB2 for z/OS or OS/
390, the database LOCATION value.
Not required for Oracle instances, which contain only one database.
Scripting name: DBNAME

Sybase OCI path

Specifies the path and name of the Sybase Open Client interfaces file. On Windows NT servers, the
default is %DB2PATH%\interfaces.
Scripting name: IFILE

Node

Specifies the name by which the data source is defined as an instance to its RDBMS.
Scripting name: NODE

Additional options

Can be used to specify any additional options.

Scripting name: OtherOptions

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

397

2.4.5.3

Wrappers (DB2)

Wrappers are mechanisms by which the federated server interacts with data sources. The federated server uses
routines stored in a library called a wrapper module to implement a wrapper. Wrappers are supported for DB2 for
Common Server v9.7 and higher.

Creating a Wrapper
You can create a wrapper in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Wrappers

to access the List of Wrappers, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Wrapper .

Use the Create tool next to the Wrapper field on the General tab of a server property sheet (see Servers (DB2)
[page 394]).

Wrapper Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a wrapper property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry in the Wrappers folder. The following extended attributes are available on the Options tab:
Table 244:
Property

Description

Library

Specifies the name of the file that contains the wrapper library module.
Scripting name: Library

Fenced

Specifies that the wrapper is fenced or trusted by DB2. A fenced wrapper operates under some re
strictions.
Scripting name: DB2_FENCED

Language / Class or li
brary

Specify the language and implementation of the user mapping plug-in. Valid languages are Java (de
fault) and C.
For a plug-in written in Java, you must specify a case-sensitive string for the class name that corre
sponds to the user mapping repository class. For example, UserMappingRepositoryLDAP.
For a plug-in written in C, you must specify any valid C library name.
Scripting name: DB2_UM_PLUGIN_LANG, DB2_UM_PLUGIN

Additional options

Can be used to specify any additional options.

Scripting name: OtherOptions

398

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.4.5.4

User Mappings (DB2)

A user mapping is an association between an authorization ID on the federated server and the information that is
required to connect to the remote data source. User mappings are supported for DB2 for Common Server v9.7
and higher.

Creating a User Mapping

You can create a user mapping in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

User Mappings

to access the List of User Mappings, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

User Mapping .

User Mapping Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a user mapping property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the User Mappings folder.
The following extended attribute is available on the General tab:
Table 245:
Property

Description

Server

Specifies the name of the server object (see Servers (DB2) [page 394]) for the data source that the
authorization-name can access. The server name is the local name for the remote server that is reg
istered with the federated database.
Scripting name: Server

The following extended attributes are available on the Options tab:

Table 246:
Property

Description

Accounting string

Specifies a DRDA accounting string. Valid values include any string that has 255 characters or fewer.
Scripting name: ACCOUNTING_STRING

Remote user ID / pass

Specify the remote user ID to which the local user ID is mapped, and its password in the remote sys

word

tem. If you do not specify a password, the password used to connect to the federated database is
used.
Scripting name: REMOTE_AUTHID, REMOTE_PASSWORD

Use trusted context

Specifies whether the user mapping is trusted.

Scripting name: USE_TRUSTED_CONTEXT

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

399

Property

Description

Additional options

Can be used to specify any additional options.

Scripting name: OtherOptions

2.5

Greenplum

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the Greenplum DBMS family, select the appropriate version
in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Abstract Data Types

The following extensions are available on the Parameters tab:
Table 247:
Name

Description

Input function1

Specifies the name of a function that converts data from the type's external textual form to its internal
form.
Scripting name: Input

Receive function

Specifies the name of a function that converts data from the type's external binary form to its internal
form.
Scripting name: Receive

Compression type

Specifies the type of compression.

Scripting name: Compresstype

Default

Specifies the default value for the data type.

Scripting name: Default

Element

Specifies that the type being created is an array; this specifies the type of the array elements.
Scripting name: Element

Block size

Specifies the size of block. The value must be a multiple of 8192.

Scripting name: Blocksize

400

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Passed by value

Specifies that values of this data type are passed by value, rather than by reference.
Scripting name: Passedbyvalue

Output function

Specifies the name of a function that converts data from the type's internal form to its external textual
form.
Scripting name: Output

Send function

Specifies the name of a function that converts data from the type's internal form to its external binary
form.
Scripting name: Send

Compression level

Specifies the level of compression.

Scripting name: Compresslevel

Delimiter

Specifies the delimiter character to be used between values in arrays made of this type.
Scripting name: delimiter character to be used between values in arrays

made of this type.

Internal length

Specifies a numeric constant that specifies the length in bytes of the new type's internal representa
tion. The default assumption is that it is variable-length.
Scripting name: Internallength

Alignment

Specifies the storage alignment requirement of the data type.

Scripting name: Alignment

Storage strategy

Specifies the storage strategy for the data type.

Scripting name: Storage

Databases
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 248:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the name of the database user who will own the new database, or DEFAULT to use the
default owner (the user executing the command).
Scripting name: Owner

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

401

The following extensions are available on the Greenplum tab:

Table 249:
Name

Description

Tablespace

Specifies the name of the tablespace that will be associated with the new database, or DEFAULT
to use the template database tablespace. This tablespace will be the default tablespace used for
objects created in this database.
Scripting name: Tablespace

Template

Specifies the name of the template from which to create the new database, or DEFAULT to use
the default template.
Scripting name: Template

Encoding

Specifies the character set encoding to use in the new database. Specify a string constant (e.g.,
'SQL_ASCII'), or an integer encoding number, or DEFAULT to use the default encoding.
Scripting name: Encoding

Connection limit

Specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections possible. The default of -1 means there
is no limitation
Scripting name: ConnectionLimit
Specifies an hidden attribute to bear object options.

SQL

Scripting name: DatabaseOptions

Domains
The following extensions are available on the Additional Checks tab:
Table 250:
Name

Description

Constraint name

Specifies the name of the domain constraint .

Scripting name: DomnConstName

N/A

In the Check expression preview subtab the domain code is replaced withe Greenplum keyword

value.
Scripting name: ConstraintDefn

402

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Materialized Views
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 251:
Name

Description

Scope

Specify if the materialized view is available for all or only local session. Note: These keywords are
present for SQL standard compatibility, but have no effect in Greenplum Database.
Scripting name: TemporaryScope

The following extensions are available on the Options tab:

Table 252:
Name

Description

Block size

Specifies the size, in bytes, for each block in a table. The value must be between 8192 and
2097152 bytes, and be a multiple of 8192.
Scripting name: BlockSize

Append only

Specifies if the table must be created as an append-only table (TRUE) or as a regular heap-stor
age table (FALSE).
Scripting name: AppendOnly

OIDs

Specifies whether to assign object identifiers to rows. This box is unchecked by default. Green
plum strongly recommends that you do not enable OIDS when creating a table.
Scripting name: OIds

Orientation

Set to column for column-oriented storage, or row (the default) for row-oriented storage.
Scripting name: Orientation

On commit

Specifies the behavior of temporary tables at the end of a transaction block.

Scripting name: OnCommit

Fill factor

Specifies the percentage that determines how full the index method will try to pack index pages.
Scripting name: FillFactor

Compression type

Specifies ZLIB (default) or QUICKLZ compression type.

Scripting name: CompressType

Level

For zlib compression of append-only tables, specifies a value between 1 (fastest compression) to
9 (highest compression ratio).
Scripting name: CompressLevel

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

403

References
The following extensions are available on the Greenplum tab:
Table 253:
Name

Description

Deferrable

Specifies whether the constraint can be deferred. A constraint that is not deferrable will be
checked immediately after every command. Checking of constraints that are deferrable may be
postponed until the end of the transaction. Only foreign key constraints currently accept this
clause. All other constraint types are not deferrable.
Scripting name: Deferrable

Foreign key constraint de If a constraint is deferrable, specifies the default time to check the constraint. False means the
ferred

constraint is INITIALLY IMMEDIATE, it is checked after each statement. This is the default.
True means the constraint is INITIALLY DEFERRED, it is checked only at the end of the trans
action.
Scripting name: ForeignKeyConstraintDeferred

Sequences
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 254:
Name

Description

Column

Causes the sequence to be associated with a specific table column, such that if that column (or its
whole table) is dropped, the sequence will be automatically dropped as well.
Scripting name: Column

Temporary

If specified, the sequence object is created only for this session, and is automatically dropped on
session exit.
Scripting name: Temporary

The following extensions are available on the Options tab:

Table 255:
Name

Description

Start value

Allows the sequence to begin anywhere. The default starting value is Minvalue for ascending se
quences and Maxvalue for descending ones.
Scripting name: Startvalue

404

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Minimum value

Specifies the minimum value a sequence can generate.

Scripting name: Minvalue

Maximum value

Specifies the the maximum value for the sequence.

Scripting name: Maxvalue

Cache

Specifies how many sequence numbers are to be preallocated and stored in memory for faster ac
cess. The minimum (and default) value is 1 (no cache).
Scripting name: Cache

Increment

Specifies which value is added to the current sequence value to create a new value. A positive
value will make an ascending sequence, a negative one a descending sequence. The default value
is 1.
Scripting name: Increment

Cycle

Allows the sequence to wrap around when the Maxvalue (for ascending) or Minvalue (for de
scending) has been reached.
Scripting name: Cycle

SQL

Specifies the SQL text of the sequence options.

Scripting name: SqncOptions

Tables
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 256:
Name

Description

Like table

The LIKE clause specifies a table from which the new table automatically copies all column names,
their data types, and their not-null constraints.
Scripting name: LikeTable

Writable

[External table type only] Specifies the type of external table, readable being the default. Read
able external tables are used for loading data into Greenplum Database. Writable external tables
are used for unloading data.
Scripting name: Writable

Web

[External table type only] Creates a web external table definition in Greenplum Database.
Scripting name: ExternalWeb

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

405

Name

Description

Scope

[Temporary table type only] Specifies if the table is available for all or only local session. Note:
The local and global keywords are present for SQL standard compatibility, but have no effect
in Greenplum Database.
Scripting name: TemporaryScope

Tablespaces
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 257:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the name of the user who will own the tablespace. If omitted, defaults to the user execut
ing the command.
Scripting name: Owner

Filespace

Specifies the name of a Greenplum Database filespace that was defined using the file space man
agement utility.
Scripting name: Filespace

Triggers
The following extensions are available on the Definition tab:
Table 258:
Name

Description

For each

Specifies whether the trigger procedure should be fired once for every row affected by the trigger
event, or just once per SQL statement.
Scripting name: ForEach

406

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Users, Groups and Roles

The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 259:
Name

Description

Encrypted

Specifies whether the password is stored encrypted in the system catalogs.

Scripting name: EncryptedPassword

The following extensions are available on the Options tab:

Table 260:
Name

Description

Super user

If SUPERUSER is specified, the role being defined will be a superuser, who can override all access
restrictions within the database. Superuser status is dangerous and should be used only when
really needed.
Scripting name: SuperUser

Inherit

If specified, INHERIT (the default) allows the role to use whatever database privileges have been
granted to all roles it is directly or indirectly a member of. With NOINHERIT, membership in an
other role only grants the ability to SET ROLE to that other role.
Scripting name: Inherit

Login

If specified, LOGIN allows a role to log in to a database. A role having the LOGIN attribute can be
thought of as a user. Roles with NOLOGIN (the default) are useful for managing database privi
leges, and can be thought of as groups.
Scripting name: Login

Create DB

Specifies if the role being defined will be allowed to create new databases. NOCREATEDB (the de
fault) will deny a role the ability to create databases.
Scripting name: CreateDB

Create role

Specifies if the role being defined will be allowed to create new roles, alter other roles, and drop
other roles. NOCREATEROLE (the default) will deny a role the ability to create roles or modify
roles other than their own.
Scripting name: CreateRole

Create user

If TRUE, the user is allowed to create new users. This option also turns the user into a superuser
who can override all access restrictions.
Scripting name: CreateUser

Create external table

[Roles only] Specifies if the role is allowed to create external tables.

Scripting name: CreateExtTable

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

407

Name

Description

Connection limit

[Roles only] Specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections possible. The default of -1
means there is no limitation.
Scripting name: ConnectionLimit

Resource queue

Specifies the resource queue.

Scripting name: ResourceQueue

Valid until

Specifies a date and time after which the role's password is no longer valid. If this clause is omitted
the password will never expire.
Scripting name: ValidUntil

Deny point / to

[Roles only] Specifies time-based constraints that are enforced at login.

Scripting name: DenyPointStart, DenyPointEnd

Options

Gets or sets user options.

Scripting name: UserOptions

Views
The following extensions are available on the General tab if you select Temporary in the Type box:
Table 261:
Name

Description

Scope

Specifies if the view is available for all or only local session. Note: The local and global key
words are present for SQL standard compatibility, but have no effect in Greenplum Database.
Scripting name: TemporaryScope

408

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.5.1

Conversions (Greenplum)

PowerDesigner models Greenplum conversions between character set encodings as extended objects with a
stereotype of <<Conversion>>.

Creating a Conversion
You can create a conversion in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Conversions

to access the List of Conversions, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

Conversion .

Conversion Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an conversion property sheet, double-click
its Browser entry in the Conversions folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the Greenplum tab:
Table 262:
Name

Description

Source encoding

Specifies the source encoding name.

Scripting name: For

Destination encoding

Specifies the destination encoding name.

Scripting name: To

Function name

Specifies the function used to perform the conversion.

Scripting name: From

Options

Specifies the conversion options.

Scripting name: ConversionOptions

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

409

2.5.2

Aggregates (Greenplum)

PowerDesigner models user-defined Greenplum aggregate functions as extended objects with a stereotype of
<<Aggregate>>.

Creating an Aggregate
You can create an aggregate in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Aggregates

to access the List of Aggregates, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

Aggregate .

Aggregate Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an aggregate property sheet, double-click
its Browser entry in the Aggregates folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 263:
Name

Description

Name

Specifies the name of the aggregate function.

Scripting name: AggregateName

Input data types

Specifies the input data type on which this aggregate function operates. To create a zero-argu
ment aggregate function, write * in place of the list of input data types. An example of such an ag
gregate is count(*).
Scripting name: InputTypeList

Owner

Specifies the owner of the aggregate.

Scripting name: Owner

Ordered

Specifies that the created aggregate function is ordered.

Scripting name: Ordered

410

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following extensions are available on the Greenplum tab:

Table 264:
Name

Description

Final function

Specifies the name of the final function called to compute the aggregate's result after all input
rows have been traversed. The function must take a single argument of type

state_data_type. The return data type of the aggregate is defined as the return type of this
function. If a final function is not specified, then the ending state value is used as the aggregate's
result, and the return type is state_data_type.
Scripting name: FinalFunc
Initial condition

Specifies the initial setting for the state value. This must be a string constant in the form accepted
for the data type state_data_type. If not specified, the state value starts out null.
Scripting name: InitCond

Preliminary aggregation

Specifies the name of a preliminary aggregation function. This is a function of two arguments,

function

both of type state_data_type. It must return a value of state_data_type. A preliminary

function takes two transition state values and returns a new transition state value representing
the combined aggregation. In Greenplum, if the result of the aggregate function is computed in a
segmented fashion, the preliminary aggregation function is invoked on the individual internal
states in order to combine them into an ending internal state.
Scripting name: PreFunc

State transition function

Specifies the name of the state transition function to be called for each input row. For an N-argu
ment aggregate function, the function must take N+1 arguments, the first being of type

state_data_type and the rest matching the declared input data type(s) of the aggregate. The
function must return a value of type state_data_type. This function takes the current state
value and the current input data value(s), and returns the next state value.
Scripting name: SFunc
Sort operator

Specifies the associated sort operator for a MIN- or MAX-like aggregate. This is just an operator
name (possibly schema-qualified). The operator is assumed to have the same input data types as
the aggregate (which must be a single-argument aggregate).
Scripting name: SortOp

State data type

Specifies the data type for the aggregate's state value.

Scripting name: SType

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

411

2.5.3

Rules (Greenplum)

PowerDesigner models Greenplum rules (which allow you to define alternate actions to be performed as well or
instead of insertions, updates, or deletions), as extended objects with a stereotype of <<Rule>>.

Creating a Rule
You can create a rule in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Rules

to access the List of Rules, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

Rule .

Rule Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an rule property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry in the Rules folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 265:
Name

Description

Table

Specifies the table or view the rule applies to.

Scripting name: RTable

Action

INSTEAD indicates that the commands should be executed instead of the original command.
ALSO indicates that the commands should be executed in addition to the original command.
Scripting name: RAction

Event

Specifies the event that raises the rule.

Scripting name: REvent

The following extended attributes are available on the Greenplum tab:

Table 266:
Name

Description

Condition

Specifies any SQL conditional expression (returning boolean). The condition expression may not
refer to any tables except NEW and OLD, and may not contain aggregate functions.
Scripting name: RCondition

412

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Command(s)

Specifies the command or commands that make up the rule action. Valid commands are

SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE.

Scripting name: RCommand

2.5.4

Resource Queues (Greenplum)

PowerDesigner models Greenplumn resource queues as extended objects with a stereotype of

<<ResourceQueue>>.

Creating a Resource Queue

You can create a resource queue in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Resource Queues

to access the List of Resource Queues, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

Resource Queue .

Resource Queue Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an resource queue property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Resource Queues folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the Greenplum tab:
Table 267:
Name

Description

Active statement

Specifies the number of active queries that are allowed to run at the same time.
Scripting name: ActiveStatement

Max cost

Specifies the maximum limit on the total cost of queries that can be executed by roles assigned to
that queue.
Scripting name: MaxCost

Cost overcommit

Specifies if a query that exceeds the allowed cost threshold will be allowed to run but only when
the system is idle.
Scripting name: CostOverCommit

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

413

Name

Description

Memory limit

Specifies the total memory quota for all statements submitted from users in this resource queue.
Scripting name: MemoryLimit

Min cost

Specifies the minimum query cost limit of what is considered a small query.
Scripting name: MinCost

Priority

Specifies the priority of queries associated with a resource queue.

Scripting name: Priority

2.6

Microsoft SQL Server

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the MS SQL Server DBMS family, select the appropriate
version in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in
the Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMS definition files for SQL Server v7.x and SQL Server 2000 are deprecated.
The following sections list the extensions provided for MS SQL Server.

Note
In addition to the extensions listed below, PowerDesigner supports the following features for SQL Server 2005
and higher:
User Schemas Use the schema stereotype to specify that a user is actually a schema, belonging to
another user (the "principal").
WithOption Use the withoptions type to enable access to additional physical options when working with
views.
Support for multiple databases during live database reverse engineering.

414

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Abstract Data Types

The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 268:
Name

Description

Assembly

Specifies the assembly to bind with the abstract data type.

Scripting name: Assembly

Abstract Data Type Attributes

The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 269:
Name

Description

Nullable

Specifies that the type column allows null value.

Scripting name: Nullable

Computed

Specifies that the type column is computed.

Scripting name: Specifies that the type column is computed.

Identity

Specifies that the new column is an identity column.

Scripting name: Identity

Expression

Specifies an expression that defines the value of a computed column.

Scripting name: Expression

Persisted

Specifies that the SQL Server Database Engine will physically store the computed values in the table,
and update the values when any other columns on which the computed column depends are up
dated.
Scripting name: Persisted

Seed

Specifies the value used for the very first row loaded into the table.
Scripting name: Seed

Increment

Specifies the incremental value added to the identity value of the previous row loaded.
Scripting name: Increment

Default

Specifies the value provided for the column when a value is not explicitly supplied during an insert.
Scripting name: Default

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

415

Name

Description

Row GUID

Specifies that the new column is a row GUID column

Scripting name: RowGuidCol

Collation

Specifies the collation for the column.

Scripting name: Collate

Columns
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 270:
Name

Description

Row global unique iden [v2000 and higher] Indicates that the new column is a row global unique identifier column. Only one
tifier

unique identifier column per table can be designated as the ROWGUIDCOL column.
Scripting name: ExtRowGuidCol

Sparse

[v2008 and higher] Specifies that the column is a sparse column. The storage of sparse columns is
optimized for null values. Sparse columns cannot be designated as NOT NULL.
Scripting name: Sparse

Filestream

[v2008 and higher] Specifies that when the FILESTREAM storage attribute is specified for a col
umn, all values for that column are stored in a FILESTREAM data container on the file system
Scripting name: Filestream

Do not validate check

Specifies that "NOT FOR REPLICATION" keywords are used to prevent the CHECK constraint from

constraints during rep

being enforced during the distribution process used by replication.

lication

Scripting name: ExtCkcNotForReplication

Default constraint

Contains the name of the constraint that is used to apply a default value to the column. If empty, the

name

"constraint" keyword is not generated.

Scripting name: ExtDeftConstName

Not null constraint

Contains the name of the constraint that is used to apply a mandatory property of the column. If

name

empty, the "constraint" keyword is not generated.

Scripting name: ExtNullConstName

Collation name

[v2005 and higher] A single string that specifies the collation name for a SQL collation.
Scripting name: ExtCollation

416

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Identity seed and incre Is a string composed of two integer values separated by a comma.
ment

First value is the seed value of the identity column, meaning the value to be assigned to the first row
in the table.
Second value is the increment to add to the seed value for successive rows in the table.
Scripting name: ExtIdentitySeedInc

Identity value not repli

Indicates that the IDENTITY property should not be enforced when a replication login inserts data

cated

into the table.

Scripting name: ExtIdtNotForReplication

XML schema collection

[v2000 and higher] Applies only to the XML data type for associating an XML schema collection with
the type.
Scripting name: XMLSchemaCollection

Content type

[v2005 and higher] - CONTENT:

Specifies that each instance of the XML data type in column_name can contain multiple top-level ele
ments. CONTENT applies only to the XML data type and can be specified only if xml_schema_collec
tion is also specified. If not specified, CONTENT is the default behavior.
- DOCUMENT:
Specifies that each instance of the XML data type in column_name can contain only one top-level
element. DOCUMENT applies only to the XML data type and can be specified only if xml_schema_col
lection is also specified.
Scripting name: ContentType

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

417

Cubes
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 271:
Name

Description

Options

[v2000] You can choose between the following:

PASSTHROUGH: causes the SELECT clause to be passed directly to the source database without modifi
cation by PivotTable Service. If PASSTHROUGH is not specified, PivotTable Service parses the query and
formulates a set of queries equivalent to the original that is optimized for the source database and index
structures. This set of queries is often more efficient than the specified.

DEFER_DATA: causes the query to be parsed locally and executed only when necessary to retrieve data
to satisfy a user request. DEFER_DATA is used to specify that a local cube has to be defined in the

ROLAP storage mode.

ATTEMPT_DEFER: causes PivotTable Service to attempt to parse the query and defer data loading if
successful, or, if the query cannot be parsed, to process the specified query immediately as if

PASSTHROUGH had been specified.

ATTEMPT_ANALYSIS: causes PivotTable Service to attempt to parse the query and formulate an opti
mized set of queries. If the query cannot be parsed, PivotTable Services processes the query immedi
ately as if PASSTHROUGH had been specified.

Scripting name: Options

Storage mode

[v2005 and higher] Specifies the storage mode for the cube.
Scripting name: StorageMode

Visible

[v2005 and higher] Determines the visibility of the Cube.

Scripting name: Visible

Dimensions
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 272:
Name

Description

Hidden

[v2000] Indicates whether the dimension is hidden from clients.

Scripting name: IsHidden

418

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Options

[v2000] Dimension options to manage member uniqueness and specify their storage. You can choose be
tween:

UNIQUE_NAME: Member names are unique within the dimension.

UNIQUE_KEY: Member keys are unique within the dimension.

NOTRELATEDTOFACTTABLE: Indicates that non-leaf members cannot be associated with fact table
data.

ALLOWSIBLINGSWITHSAMENAME: Determines whether children of a single member in a hierarchy

can have identical names.

Scripting name: Options

Subtype

[v2000] Indicates the subtype of a dimension. You can choose between:

PARENT_CHILD:Indicates that the dimension is a parent-child dimension.

LINKED: Indicates that the cube is linked to another cube on a remote Analysis server.

MINING: Indicates that the dimension is based on the content of an OLAP data-mining model that has
been processed for a cube.

Scripting name: SubType

Template

[v2000] Contains a template string that is used to generate captions for system-generated data members.
Scripting name: Template

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

419

Name

Description

Time

[v2000] Indicates that a dimension refers to time (year, month, week, day, and so on). You can choose be
tween:

TIME: Year, month, week, day, and so on. The only valid levels in a time dimension are those defined in
the LevelTypes enumeration.

The following values post-fixed by an asterisk (*) are additional values that can be used by the add-in but
do not exist in the MDX syntax. You can choose between a dimension that contains:

ACCOUNT: (*) an account structure with parent-child relationships.

BILLOFMATERIALS (*): a material/component breakdown. The parent-child relationship implies a

parent composed of its children.

CHANNEL (*): a distribution channel.

CURRENCY (*): currency information.

CUSTOMERS (*): customer information. The lowest level represents individual customers.

GEOGRAPHY (*): a geographic hierarchy.

ORGANIZATION (*): the reporting structure of an organization.

PRODUCTS (*): product information. The lowest level represents individual products.

PROMOTION (*): marketing and advertising promotions.

QUANTITATIVE (*): quantitative elements (such as example, income level, number of children, and
so on).

RATES (*): different types of rates (for example, buy, sell, discounted. and so on).

SCENARIO (*): different business scenarios.

Scripting name: TimeDef

Type

[v2005 and higher] Provides information about the contents of the dimension.
Scripting name: Type

Storage mode

[v2005 and higher] Determines the storage mode for the parent element.
Scripting name: StorageMode

AttributeAll
MemberName

WriteEnabled

[v2005 and higher] Contains the caption, in the default language, for the All member of the dimension.
Scripting name: AttributeAllMemberName
[v2005 and higher] Indicates whether dimension writebacks are available (subject to security permis
sions).
Scripting name: WriteEnabled

420

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Dimension Attributes
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 273:
Name

Description

Rollup expres

[v2000] Contains a Multidimensional Expressions (MDX) expression used to override the default roll-up

sion

mode.
Scripting name: CustomRollupExpr

Format key

[v2000] Name of the column or expression that contains member keys.

Scripting name: FormatKey

Format name

[v2000] Name of the column or expression that contains member names.

Scripting name: FormatName

Hide values

[v2000] Options to hide level members. You can choose between:

BLANK_NAME: Hides a level member with an empty name.

PARENT_NAME: Hides a level member when the member name is identical to the name of its parent.

ONLY_CHILD_AND_BLANK_NAME: Hides a level member when it is the only child of its parent and
its name is null or an empty string.

ONLY_CHILD_AND_PARENT_NAME: Hides a level member when it is the only child of its parent and
is identical to the name of its parent.

Scripting name: HideValues

Hidden

[v2000] Indicates whether the level is hidden from client applications.

Scripting name: IsHidden

Options

[v2000] Options about member uniqueness, ordering and data source. You can choose between:

UNIQUE: Indicates that the members of a level are unique.

UNIQUE_NAME: Indicates that their member name columns uniquely identify the level members.

UNIQUE_KEY: Indicates that their member key columns uniquely identify the level members.

NOTRELATEDTOFACTTABLE: Indicates that the level members cannot be associated with fact table
data.

SORTBYNAME: Indicates that level members are ordered by their names.

SORTBYKEY: Indicates that level members are ordered by their keys.

SORTBYPROPERTY <property names>: Indicates that members are ordered by their property <prop
erty names>.

Scripting name: Options

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

421

Name

Description

Root values

[v2000] Determines how the root member or members of a parent-child hierarchy are identified. You can
choose between:

ROOT_IF_PARENT_IS_BLANK: Only members with a null, a zero, or an empty string in their parent
key column are treated as root members.

ROOT_IF_PARENT_IS_MISSING: Only members with parents that cannot be found are treated as
root members.

ROOT_IF_PARENT_IS_SELF: Only members having themselves as parents are treated as root

ROOT_IF_PARENT_IS_BLANK _OR_SELF_OR_MISSING: Members are treated as root mem

members.
bers if they meet one or more of the conditions specified by ROOT_IF_PARENT_IS_BLANK,
ROOT_IF_PARENT_IS_SELF, or ROOT_IF_PARENT_IS_MISSING.
Scripting name: RootValues
Type

[v2000 and higher] Identifies the specific type of level. You can choose between:

ALL: Indicates the top (All) level of a dimension (the one that precalculates all the members of all

YEAR: a level that refers to years (Time dimension only).

QUARTER: a level that refers to (calendar) quarters (Time dimension only).

MONTH: a level that refers to months (Time dimension only).

WEEK: a level that refers to weeks (Time dimension only).

DAY: a level that refers to days (Time dimension only).

DAYOFWEEK: a level that refers to days of the week (Time dimension only).

DATE: a level that refers to dates (Time dimension only).

HOUR: a level that refers to hours (Time dimension only).

MINUTE: a level that refers to minutes (Time dimension only).

SECOND: Indicates that a level refers to seconds (Time dimension only).

lower levels).

Scripting name: Type

MembersWith

[v2005 and higher] Determines whether to display data members for non-leaf members in the parent at

Data

tribute.
Scripting name: MembersWithData

OrderBy

[v2005 and higher] Describes how to order the members contained in the attribute.
Scripting name: OrderBy

MemberName
sUnique

IsAggregatable

[v2005 and higher] Determines whether member names under the parent element must be unique.
Scripting name: MemberNamesUnique
[v2005 and higher] Specifies whether the values of the DimensionAttribute element can be aggregated.
Scripting name: IsAggregatable

422

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

AttributeHier

[v2005 and higher] Determines whether an attribute hierarchy is enabled for the attribute.

archyEnabled

AttributeHier
archyVisible

Scripting name: AttributeHierarchyEnabled

[v2005 and higher] Determines whether the attribute hierarchy is visible to client applications.
Scripting name: AttributeHierarchyVisible

Databases
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 274:
Name

Description

Primary

Specifies that the associated file specification list defines the primary file.
Scripting name: Primary

File

Gets or sets the file specification.

Scripting name: FileListFileSpec

Filegroup

Gets or sets the first filegroup name.

Scripting name: FilelistFilegroup

File (filegroup)

Gets or sets the Filegroup specification.

Scripting name: FileGroupFileSpec

Log on

Gets or sets the log file specification.

Scripting name: LogOnFileSpec

Collation name

[v2000 and higher] Specifies the default collation for the database. Collation name can be either a
Windows collation name or a SQL collation name.
Scripting name: Collate

Attach

Specifies that a database is attached from an existing set of operating system files.
Scripting name: ForAttach

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

423

Name

Description

With

[v2005 and higher] Controls Service Broker options on the database.

Service Broker options can only be specified when the FOR ATTACH clause is used.

ENABLE_BROKER: Specifies that Service Broker is enabled for the specified database.

NEW_BROKER: Creates a new service_broker_guid value in both sys.databases and the restored
database and ends all conversation endpoints with clean up. The broker is enabled, but no mes
sage is sent to the remote conversation endpoints.

ERROR_BROKER_CONVERSATIONS: Ends all conversations with an error stating that the data
base is attached or restored. The broker is disabled until this operation is completed and then en
abled.

Scripting name: ForAttachWith

Attach rebuild log

[v2005 and higher] Specifies that the database is created by attaching an existing set of operating
system files.
Scripting name: ForAttachRebuildLog

Database chaining

[v2005 and higher] When ON is specified, the database can be the source or target of a cross data
base ownership chain.
When OFF, the database cannot participate in cross database ownership chaining. The default is OFF.
Scripting name: WithDbChaining

Trust worthy

[v2005 and higher] When ON is specified, database modules (for example, views, user-defined func
tions, or stored procedures) that use an impersonation context can access resources outside the da
tabase.
When OFF, database modules in an impersonation context cannot access resources outside the data
base. The default is OFF.
Scripting name: WithTrustworthy

Snapshot of

[v2005 and higher] Specifies the name of the new database snapshot.
Scripting name: AsSnapshotOf

Load

[up to v2000] Indicates that the database is created with the "dbo use only" database option turned
on, and the status is set to loading.
Scripting name: ForLoad

For information about the extended attributes available on the Mirroring tab, see Database Mirroring (SQL Server)
[page 451].

424

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Data Sources
The following extensions are available on the OLE DB tab:
Table 275:
Name

Description

Data provider

Specifies the data provider. You can choose between:

.NET Framework Data Provider for Microsoft SQL Server

.NET Framework Data Provider for Oracle

Native Data Provider for OLE DB

Scripting name: DataProvider

Connection string

Specifies the connection string.

Scripting name: ConnectionString

The following extensions are available on the Configuration tab:

Table 276:
Name

Description

Server name

Specifies the server name.

Scripting name: ServerName

Authentication

[only for SQL Server] Specifies the Windows Authentication and SQL Server Authentication types.
Scripting name: AuthenticationType

User name

Specifies the user name.

Scripting name: UserName

Password

Specifies the password.

Scripting name: Password

Initial catalog

[only for SQL Server and OLE DB] Specifies the Initial catalog.
Scripting name: InitialCatalog

Database File

[only for SQL Server] Specifies a Microsoft SQL Server database file if you select an MSSQL connec
tion.
Scripting name: MSSQLDatabaseFile

Logical name

[only for SQL Server] Specifies the logical name of the selected database file.
Scripting name: LogicalName

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

425

Name

Description

Data providers

[only for OLE DB] Specifies the data provider.

Scripting name: DataProvider

Location

[only for OLE DB] Specifies the location for OLEDB.

Scripting name: Location

Persist security info

[only for OLE DB] Specifies that security information be persistent.

Scripting name: PersistSecurityInfo

Use Windows NT Inte

grated Security

[only for OLE DB] Specifies whether to use windows NT Integrated Security or not.
Scripting name: UseNTIntegratedSecurity

Dimension Hierarchies
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 277:
Name

Description

Hidden

[v2000] Indicates whether the hierarchy is hidden from client applications.

Scripting name: IsHidden

AllMemberName

[v2005 and higher] Contains the caption in the default language for the All member of a Hierarchy ele
ment.
Scripting name: AllMemberName

MemberNamesUni
que

[v2005 and higher] Determines whether member names under the parent element must be unique.
Scripting name: MemberNamesUnique

AllowDuplicateNames

[v2005 and higher] Determines whether duplicate names are allowed in a Hierarchy element.
Scripting name: AllowDuplicateNames

426

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Fact Measures
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 278:
Name

Description

Format

[v2000] Format used to display the values of the cube measure.

Scripting name: Format

Cube measure function

type

[v2000] A value corresponding to the type of aggregate function used by the cube measure.
Scripting name: Function

Hidden

[v2000] Indicates whether the measure is visible to the client.

Scripting name: IsHidden

Member calculating order

[v2000] Order in which the calculated member will be solved when calculated members intersect
each other.
Scripting name: SolveOrder

Source column data type

[v2000] Returns an OLE DB enumeration constant that identifies the SourceColumn (in the fact
table) data type.
Scripting name: Type

AggregateFunction

[v2005 and higher] Defines the common prefix to be used for aggregation names throughout the
associated parent element.
Scripting name: AggregateFunction

BindingType

[v2005 and higher] Defines the binding type for the measure.
Scripting name: BindingType

Visible

[v2005 and higher] Determines the visibility of the fact measure.

Scripting name: Visible

FormatString

[v2005 and higher] Describes the display format for a CalculationProperty or a Measure element.
Scripting name: FormatString

Indexes
Note
For additional information about special SQL Server index types, see XML Indexes (SQL Server) [page 448]
and Spatial Indexes (SQL Server) [page 446].

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

427

The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:

Table 279:
Name

Description

Filegroup

Specifies the name of the filegroup.

Scripting name: FileGroup

Partition scheme

[v2005 and higher] Specifies the name of the partition scheme.

Scripting name: PartitionScheme

Column

[v2005 and higher] Specifies the partitioned column.

Scripting name: PartitionSchemeColumn

Fill factor

Specifies a percentage that indicates how full the Database Engine should make the leaf level of
each index page during index creation or rebuild.
Scripting name: FillFactor

Max degree of parallelism

[v2005 and higher] Overrides the max degree of parallelism configuration option for the duration
of the index operation. Use MAXDOP to limit the number of processors used in a parallel plan exe
cution. The maximum is 64 processors.
Scripting name: MaxDop

Pad index

Specifies index padding.

Scripting name: PadIndex

Statistics no recompute

Specifies whether distribution statistics are recomputed.

Scripting name: StatisticsNoRecompute

Drop existing

Specifies that the named, preexisting clustered, nonclustered, or XML index is dropped and re
built.
Scripting name: DropExisting

Online

[v2005 and higher] Specifies whether underlying tables and associated indexes are available for
queries and data modification during the index operation.
Scripting name: Online

Sort in temporary data

base

[v2005 and higher] Specifies whether to store temporary sort results in tempdb.
Scripting name: SortInTempDB

Allow row locks

[v2005 and higher] Specifies whether row locks are allowed.

Scripting name: AllowRowLocks

Allow page locks

[v2005 and higher] Specifies whether page locks are allowed.

Scripting name: AllowPageLocks

428

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Ignore dup key

Specifies the error response to duplicate key values in a multiple row insert operation on a unique
clustered or unique nonclustered index.
Scripting name: IgnoreDupKey

If the index is not a cluster index, then the Include tab is displayed, allowing you to specify the columns with which
it is associated.

Keys
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 280:
Name

Description

Filegroup

Specifies the name of the filegroup.

Scripting name: FileGroup

Fill Factor

Specifies how full SQL Server should make each index page used to store the index data.
Scripting name: FillFactor

References
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 281:
Name

Description

Do not validate foreign

Specifies that "NOT FOR REPLICATION" keywords are used to prevent the FOREIGN KEY con

key constraint during rep

straint from being enforced during the distribution process used by replication.

lication

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Scripting name: ExtFkNotForReplication

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

429

Storages
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 282:
Name

Description

Contains filestream

Specifies that the filegroup stores FILESTREAM binary large objects (BLOBs) in the file system.
Scripting name: FileStream

Tables
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 283:
Name

Description

Do not validate check

Specifies that "NOT FOR REPLICATION" keywords are used to prevent the TABLE CHECK con

constraints during replica straint from being enforced during the distribution process used by replication.
tion

Scripting name: ExtCktNotForReplication

Table is partitioned

Specifies that the table is partitioned.

Scripting name: PartitionedTable

Filegroup

[unpartitioned tables] Specifies the name of the filegroup.

Scripting name: FileGroup

Text/Image

[unpartitioned tables] Specifies the name of the filegroup where text and image are stored.
Scripting name: TextImageOn

Filestream

[unpartitioned tables] Specifies the name of the filegroup used for filestream.
Scripting name: FilestreamOnFilegroup

Compression

[unpartitioned tables] Specifies the compression type of the table (none, row or page).
Scripting name: TableCompression

Partition scheme

[partitioned tables, v2005 and higher] Specifies the name of the partition scheme. You must also
specify the name of the partitioned column
Scripting name: PartitionScheme, PartitionSchemeColumn

430

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Filestream partition

[partitioned tables, v2005 and higher] Specifies the name of the partition scheme.

scheme

Scripting name: FilestreamPartitionScheme,

FilestreamPartitionSchemeColumn
Compression

[partitioned tables] Specifies the partitions that use the compression.

Scripting name: DataCompression

Triggers
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 284:
Name

Description

Option

Is a concatenation of the WITH ENCRYPTION (which is illegal for CLR triggers, and which prevents
the trigger from being published) and EXECUTE AS (which specifies the security context under
which the trigger is executed) options.
Scripting name: Option

An additional property is available for CLR triggers (see CLR Procedures, Functions, and Triggers (SQL Server)
[page 438]).

Users
The following extensions are available on the General tab (v2005 and higher):
Table 285:
Name

Description

Implicit schema

Specifies that the stored procedure sp_grantdbaccess will be used instead of a create user
statement during database generation.
Scripting name: ImplicitSchema

Default schema

Specifies the first schema searched to resolve the names of objects for this user. If the Implicit
schema option is selected, then the default schema is initialized to the name of the user.
Scripting name: DefaultSchema

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

431

Views
The following extensions are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 286:
Name

Description

Encryption option

Defines the encryption option of the view, respecting the view creation syntax.
Scripting name: WithOption

2.6.1

Horizontal Partitioning (SQL Server)

MS SQL Server 2005 and higher supports horizontal partitioning, a method for making large tables and indexes
more manageable by dividing them horizontally and spreading them across more than one filegroup in a
database. PowerDesigner supports horizontal partitioning through the partition function and partition scheme
objects.
To partition a table or an index, specify a partition scheme and column on the Microsoft tab of its property sheet.

2.6.1.1

Partition Functions (SQL Server)

A partition function specifies how a table or index can be partitioned. PowerDesigner models partition functions as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<PartitionFunction>>.

Creating a Partition Function

You can create a partition function in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Partition Functions

to access the List of Partition Functions, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Partition Function .

Partition Function Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a partition function property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Partition Functions folder.

432

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:

Table 287:
Name

Description

Input Parameter Type

Specifies the data type of the column used for partitioning. All data types are valid, except
text, ntext, image, xml, timestamp, varchar(max), nvarchar(max), varbinary(max), alias data
types, or CLR user-defined data types.
Scripting name: InputParameterType

Length

Specifies the length of input parameter data type.

Scripting name: InputParameterLength

Precision

Specifies the precision of input parameter data type

Scripting name: InputParameterPrec

Interval Side

Specifies to which side of each boundary value interval the boundary_value [,...n ] belongs.
You can choose between:

left [default]

right

Interval values are sorted by the database engine in ascending order from left to right.
Scripting name: IntervalSide
Boundary Values

Specifies the boundary values for each partition of a partitioned table or index. All values must
be separated by commas.
Scripting name: BoundaryValues

2.6.1.2

Partition Schemes (SQL Server)

A partition scheme maps the partitions produced by a partition function to a set of user-defined filegroups.
PowerDesigner models partition schemes as extended objects with a stereotype of <<PartitionScheme>>.

Creating a Partition Scheme

You can create a partition scheme in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Partition Schemes

to access the List of Partition Schemes, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

New

Partition Scheme .

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

433

Partition Scheme Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a partition scheme property sheet, doubleclick its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Partition Schemes folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 288:
Name

Description

Partition Function

Specifies the partition function using the scheme. Partitions created by the partition function
are mapped to the filegroups specified in the partition scheme.
Scripting name: PartitionFunction

All Partitions

Specifies that all partitions map to the filegroup specified by the File Groups property.
Scripting name: AllPartitions

File Groups

Specifies the names of the filegroups to hold the partitions specified by the partition function.
If [PRIMARY] is specified, the partition is stored on the primary filegroup. If ALL is specified,
only one filegroup name can be specified.
Scripting name: Filegroups

2.6.2

Common Language Runtime (CLR) Integration (SQL

Server)

CLR integration (for SQL Server 2005 and higher) means that stored procedures, triggers, and user-defined
types, functions, and aggregate functions can be written for SQL Server in any .NET language, such as VB .NET or
C#.
PowerDesigner supports CLR integration with assemblies, aggregate functions, CLR types, procedures, functions,
and triggers.

2.6.2.1

CLR Assemblies (SQL Server)

An assembly is a DLL file used to deploy functions, stored procedures, triggers, user-defined aggregates, and
user-defined types that are written in one of the managed code languages hosted by the Microsoft .NET
Framework common language runtime (CLR), instead of in Transact-SQL. PowerDesigner models assemblies as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<Assembly>>.

Creating an Assembly
You can create an assembly in any of the following ways:

434

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

 Select

Model

Assemblies

to access the List of Assemblies, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Assembly .

Assembly Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an assembly property sheet, double-click
its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Assemblies folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 289:
Name

Description

Authorization

Specifies the name of a user or role as the owner of the assembly.

Scripting name: Authorization

File name

Specifies the local path or network location where the assembly that is being uploaded is lo
cated, and also the manifest file name that corresponds to the assembly. Can be entered as a
fixed string or an expression evaluating to a fixed string.
Scripting name: FileName

Permission set

Specifies a set of code access permissions that are granted to the assembly when it is ac
cessed by SQL Server. You can choose between:

SAFE

UNSAFE

EXTERNAL_ACCESS

Scripting name: PermissionSet

Visibility

Specifies that the assembly is visible for creating common language runtime (CLR) func
tions, stored procedures, triggers, user-defined types, and user-defined aggregate functions
against it. You can choose between:

On

Off

Scripting name: Visibility

Unchecked data

By default, ALTER ASSEMBLY fails if it must verify the consistency of individual table rows.
This option allows postponing the checks until a later time by using DBCC CHECKTABLE.
Scripting name: UncheckedData

2.6.2.2

CLR Aggregate Functions (SQL Server)

An aggregate function performs a calculation on a set of values and returns a single value. Traditionally, Microsoft
SQL Server has supported only built-in aggregate functions, such as SUM or MAX, that operate on a set of input

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

435

scalar values and generate a single aggregate value from that set. SQL Server integration with the Microsoft .NET
Framework common language runtime (CLR) now allows developers to create custom aggregate functions in
managed code, and to make these functions accessible to Transact-SQL or other managed code. PowerDesigner
models aggregate functions as extended objects with a stereotype of <<Aggregate>>.

Creating an Aggregate Function

You can create an aggregate function in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Aggregates

to access the List of Aggregates, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Aggregate .

Aggregate Function Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an aggregate function property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Aggregates folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 290:
Name

Description

Schema

Specifies the name of a schema as the owner of the aggregate function.

Scripting name: Owner

Assembly

Specifies the assembly to bind with the aggregate function.

Scripting name: Assembly

Class name

Specifies the name of the class in the assembly that implements the aggregate function.
If the class name is not specified, SQL Server assumes it is the same as the aggregate name.
Scripting name: Class

Parameter name

[v2005] Specifies the name of the input parameter.

Scripting name: InputParameterName

Type

[v2005] Specifies the type of the input parameter. All scalar data types or CLR user-defined
types can be used, except text, ntext, and image.
Scripting name: InputParameterType

Return type

Specifies the return type of the aggregate function. All scalar data types or CLR user-defined
types can be used as return type, except text, ntext, and image.
Scripting name: ReturnType

436

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Length

Specifies the length of return data type.

Scripting name: ReturnTypeLength

Precision

Specifies the precision of return data type.

Scripting name: ReturnTypePrec

For v2008 and higher, the Parameters tab allows you to list the name, type, length, and precision of any
parameters.

2.6.2.3

CLR User-Defined Types (SQL Server)

The introduction of user-defined types (UDTs) in SQL Server 2005 allows you to extend the scalar type system of
the server, enabling storage of CLR objects in a SQL Server database. UDTs can contain multiple elements and
can have behaviors, differentiating them from the traditional alias data types which consist of a single SQL Server
system data type.
Since UDTs are accessed by the system as a whole, their use for complex data types may negatively impact
performance, and complex data is generally best modeled using traditional rows and tables. UDTs in SQL Server
are well suited to date, time, currency, and extended numeric types, geospatial applications, and encoded or
encrypted data
PowerDesigner models user-defined types as abstract data types.

Creating a User-Defined Type

To create a user-defined type, you must have already created an assembly, and have an OOM containing an
appropriate class open in the workspace, in order to specify the supertype:
1. Select

Model

Abstract Data Types

to access the List of Abstract Data Types, and click the Add a Row

tool (or right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

Abstract Data Type .

2. On the General tab of its property sheet, select CLR from the list of Types.
3. Click the Select Object tool to the right of the Class field, in order to specify a supertype.
4. Click the Microsoft tab and select an assembly from the list to bind to the type.

User-Defined Type Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a user-defined type property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Abstract Data Types folder.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

437

In addition to the standard abstract data type properties, a user-defined type has the following additional
properties available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 291:
Name

Description

Assembly

Specifies the assembly to bind with the abstract data type.

Scripting name: Assembly

Mandatory

Specifies whether the type can hold a null value.

Scripting name: Mandatory

2.6.2.4

CLR Procedures, Functions, and Triggers (SQL

Server)

In Microsoft SQL Server 2005, you can write user-defined procedures, functions, and triggers in any
Microsoft .NET Framework programming language. PowerDesigner models these objects as standard procedures
and triggers that use a CLR template, and are linked to a method from an associated OOM.

Creating a CLR Procedure, Function, or Trigger

To create a CLR procedure, function, or trigger you must have already created an assembly, and you must have
an OOM open in the workspace, in order to specify an associated class method:
1. Create a standard procedure or function and, on the Definition tab of its property sheet, select CLR
Procedure, CLR Function, or CLR Trigger from the template list. A Class method field will be displayed to the
right of the template list.
2. Click the Select Method tool to the right of the Class method field, in order to specify the associated method.
3. Click the Microsoft tab and select an assembly from the list to bind to the procedure or function.

CLR Procedure, Function, and Trigger Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a CLR procedure, function, or trigger
property sheet, double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Procedures or Triggers folder.

438

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:

Table 292:
Name

Description

Assembly

Specifies the assembly where the class method is defined.

Scripting name: Assembly

2.6.3

Encryption (SQL Server)

SQL Server 2005 and higher provide a security infrastructure that supports hierarchical encryption and key
management.
PowerDesigner supports encryption with certificates and asymmetric and symmetric keys.

2.6.3.1

Certificates (SQL Server)

A public key certificate, usually just called a certificate, is a digitally-signed statement that binds the value of a
public key to the identity of the person, device, or service that holds the corresponding private key. Certificates
are issued and signed by a certification authority (CA). The entity that receives a certificate from a CA is the
subject of that certificate. PowerDesigner models certificates as extended objects with a stereotype of
<<Certificate>>.

Creating a Certificate
You can create a certificate in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Certificates

to access the List of Certificates, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Certificate .

Certificate Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a certificate property sheet, double-click
its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Certificates folder.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

439

The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:

Table 293:
Name

Description

Authorization

[v2005] Specifies the name of a user as the owner of the certificate.

Scripting name: Authorization

Assembly

[v2005] Specifies a signed assembly that has already been loaded into the database.
Scripting name: Assembly

Assembly File

[v2005] Specifies the complete path, including file name, to a DER encoded file that contains
the certificate. The path name can be a local path or a UNC path to a network location. The
file will be accessed in the security context of the SQL Server service account. This account
must have the required file system permissions.
Scripting name: AssemblyFile

Executable

[v2005] If the EXECUTABLE option is used, the file is a DLL that has been signed by the cer
tificate.
Scripting name: Executable

File

Specifies the complete path, including file name, to the private key. The private key path
name can be a local path or a UNC path to a network location. The file will be accessed in the
security context of the SQL Server service account. This account must have the necessary
file system permissions.
Scripting name: PrivateKeyFile

Encryption password (private

key)

Specifies the password that will be used to encrypt the private key.
Scripting name: PrivateKeyEncryptionPassword

Decryption password

Specifies the password required to decrypt a private key that is retrieved from a file.
Scripting name: PrivateKeyDecryptionPassword

Subject

Specifies the value of the subject field in the metadata of the certificate as defined in the X.
509 standard.
Scripting name: Subject

Encryption password

[v2005] Use this option only if you want to encrypt the certificate with a password.
Scripting name: EncryptionPassword

Start date

Specifies the date on which the certificate becomes valid. If not specified, StartDate will be
set equal to the current date.
Scripting name: StartDate

440

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Expiry date

Specifies the date on which the certificate expires. If not specified, ExpiryDate will be set to a
date one year after StartDate.
Scripting name: ExpiryDate

Active for begin dialog

Specifies that the certificate is available to the initiator of a Service Broker dialog conversa
tion.
Scripting name: ActiveForBeginDialog

2.6.3.2

Asymmetric Keys (SQL Server)

An asymmetric key is made up of a private key and the corresponding public key. Each key can decrypt data
encrypted by the other. Asymmetric encryption and decryption are relatively resource-intensive, but they provide
a higher level of security than symmetric encryption. An asymmetric key can be used to encrypt a symmetric key
for storage in a database. PowerDesigner models asymmetric keys as extended objects with a stereotype of
<<AsymmetricKey>>.

Creating an Asymmetric Key

You can create an asymmetric key in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Asymmetric Keys

to access the List of Asymmetric Keys, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Asymmetric Key .

Asymmetric Key Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an asymmetric key property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Asymmetric Keys folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 294:
Name

Description

Authorization

Specifies the name of a user as the owner of the asymmetric key.

Scripting name: Authorization

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

441

Name

Description

Source type

[v2008 and higher] Specifies the type of source (File, Executable file, Assembly or Provider)
Scripting name: Source

Assembly

Specifies the name of an assembly from which to load the public key.
Scripting name: Assembly

Assembly file

Specifies the path of a file from which to load the key.

Scripting name: AssemblyFile

Provider

[v2008 and higher] Specifies the name of the EKM (Extensible Key Management) provider.
Scripting name: Provider

Executable

[v2005] If the EXECUTABLE option is used, the file attribute specifies an assembly file from which to
load the public key, otherwise the file attribute specifies the path of a strong name file from which to
load the key pair.
Scripting name: Executable

Algorithm

Specifies the algorithm used to encrypt the key.

Scripting name: Algorithm

Create disposition

[v2008 and higher] Creates a new key or use an existing one.

Scripting name: CreateDisposition

Provider key name

[v2008 and higher] Specifies the key name from the external provider.
Scripting name: ProviderKeyName

Encryption password

Specifies the password with which to encrypt the private key. If this clause is not present, the private
key will be encrypted with the database master key.
Scripting name: EncryptionPassword

442

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.6.3.3

Symmetric Keys (SQL Server)

A symmetric key is one key that is used for both encryption and decryption. Encryption and decryption by using a
symmetric key is fast, and suitable for routine use with sensitive data in the database. PowerDesigner models
symmetric keys as extended objects with a stereotype of <<SymmetricKey>>.

Creating a Symmetric Key

You can create a symmetric key in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Symmetric Keys

to access the List of Symmetric Keys, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Symmetric Key .

Symmetric Key Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a symmetric key property sheet, doubleclick its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Symmetric Keys folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 295:
Name

Description

Authorization

Specifies the name of a user or role as the owner of the key.

Scripting name: Authorization

Certificate

Specifies the name of the certificate that will be used to encrypt the symmetric key.
Scripting name: Certificate

Password

Specifies a password from which to derive a TRIPLE_DES key with which to secure the symmet
ric key. Password complexity will be checked. You should always use strong passwords.
Scripting name: Password

Symmetric key

Specifies a symmetric key to be used to encrypt the key that is being created.
Scripting name: SymmetricKey

Asymmetric key

Specifies an asymmetric key to be used to encrypt the key that is being created.
Scripting name: AsymmetricKey

Key source

Specifies a pass phrase from which to derive the key.

Scripting name: KeySource

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

443

Name

Description

Algorithm

Specifies the algorithm used to encrypt the key

Scripting name: Algorithm

Identity value

Specifies an identity phrase from which to generate a GUID for tagging data that is encrypted
with a temporary key.
Scripting name: IdentityValue

2.6.4

Full Text Search (SQL Server)

SQL Server 2005 and higher supports full-text queries against a table's plain character data. PowerDesigner
supports this feature through the full text catalog and full text index objects.

2.6.4.1

Full-Text Catalogs (SQL Server)

A full-text catalog contains zero or more full-text indexes. PowerDesigner models full-text catalogs as extended
objects with a stereotype of <<FullTextCatalog>>.

Creating a Full-Text Catalog

You can create a full-text catalog in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Full-Text Catalogs

to access the List of Full Text Catalogs, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Full-Text Catalog .

Full-Text Catalog Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a full-text catalog property sheet, doubleclick its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Full Text Catalogs folder.

444

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:

Table 296:
Name

Description

Authorization

Specifies the name of a user or role as the owner of the full text catalog.
Scripting name: Authorization

File group

Specifies the name of the SQL Server filegroup (or storage) of which the new catalog will be part.
Scripting name: FileGroup

Path

Specifies the root directory for the catalog.

Scripting name: Path

Accent sensitivity

Specifies whether the catalog is accent sensitive for full text indexing.
Scripting name: AccentSensitivity

Default

Specifies that the catalog is the default catalog.

Scripting name: Default

2.6.4.2

Full-Text Indexes (SQL Server)

A full-text index stores information about significant words and their location within a given column. This
information is used to quickly compute full-text queries that search for rows with particular words or
combinations of words. PowerDesigner models full-text indexes as table indexes with an index type set to "Full
Text".

Creating a Full-Text Index

To create a full-text index, you must have already created a catalog:
1. Create a standard index and, on the General tab, select FULLTEXT in the Type field.
2. Click the Microsoft tab and select a catalog from the list and then specify the type of change tracking required.

Full-Text Index Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a full-text index property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

445

In addition to the standard index properties, a full-text index has the following additional properties available on
the Microsoft tab:
Table 297:
Name

Description

Catalog

Specifies the full text catalog where the full text index is defined.
Scripting name: FullTextCatalog

Change tracking

Specifies whether or not SQL Server maintains a list of all changes to the indexed data. You can choose
between:

manual

auto

off

off, no population

Scripting name: ChangeTracking

2.6.5

Spatial Indexes (SQL Server)

SQL Server 2008 and higher supports spatial data types and indexes. PowerDesigner supports these new
features through table indexes with the type set to SPATIAL.

Creating a Spatial Index

To create a spatial index:
1. Create a table containing a column of type geography or geometry.
2. Create a standard index and, on the General tab, select SPATIAL in the Type field. The Columns tab is
renamed to Spatial Options.
3. Click the Spatial Options tab, select your spatial column in the Indexed column field, and complete the
remaining properties.

446

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Spatial Index Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a spatial index property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry. The following extended attributes are available on the Spatial Options tab:
Table 298:
Name

Description

Indexed column

Specifies the spatial column on which the index is based

Scripting name: IndexedColumn

Tessellation scheme

Specifies the tessellation scheme for the spatial index.

Scripting name: TesselationType

Bounding box

Specifies a numeric four-tuple that defines the four coordinates of the bounding box: the x-min
and y-min coordinates of the lower, left corner, and the x-max and y-max coordinates of the up
per right corner.
Scripting name: BoundingBoxDefn

Cells per object

Specifies the number of tessellation cells (any integer between 1 and 8192, inclusive) per object
that can be used for a single spatial object in the index by the tessellation process.
Scripting name: CellsPerObject

Grids

Specifies the density of the grid at each level of a tessellation scheme.

Scripting name: GridsDefn

Fill factor

Specifies a percentage that indicates how full the Database Engine should make the leaf level of
each index page during index creation or rebuild.
Scripting name: FillFactor

Index padding

Specifies index padding.

Scripting name: PadIndex

Max degree of parallelism

Overrides the max degree of parallelism configuration option for the duration of the index opera
tion. Use MAXDOP to limit the number of processors (up to 64) used in a parallel plan execution.
Scripting name: MaxDop

Allow row locks

Specifies whether row locks are allowed.

Scripting name: AllowRowLocks

Allow page locks

Specifies whether page locks are allowed.

Scripting name: AllowPageLocks

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

447

Name

Description

Store sort result

Specifies to store temporary sort results in tempdb.

Scripting name: SortInTempDB

Do not recompute statis

tics

Specifies to recompute distribution statistics.

Scripting name: StatisticsNoRecompute

Drop if exist

Specifies that the named, preexisting clustered, nonclustered, or XML index is dropped and re
built.
Scripting name: DropExisting

2.6.6

XML Indexes (SQL Server)

SQL Server 2005 provides improvements in indexing XML data. PowerDesigner supports these new features
through table indexes with the type set to XML.

Creating an XML Index

To create an XML index:
1. Create a standard index and, on the General tab, select XML in the Type field.
2. Click the Microsoft tab and specify any appropriate additional options.

XML Index Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an XML index property sheet, double-click
its Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 299:
Name

Description

Primary

Specifies that this is the primary XML index.

Scripting name: XMLPrimary

Primary index

Specifies the primary XML index to use in creating a secondary XML index.
Scripting name: PrimaryXMLIndex

448

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Secondary XML index type

Specifies the type of the secondary XML index.

Scripting name: SecondaryXMLIndexType

Fill factor

Specifies a percentage that indicates how full the database engine should make the leaf level of
each index page during index creation or rebuild.
Scripting name: FillFactor

Max degree of parallelism

Overrides the max degree of parallelism configuration option for the duration of the index opera
tion. Use MAXDOP to limit the number of processors used in a parallel plan execution. The maxi
mum is 64 processors.
Scripting name: MaxDop

Pad index

Specifies index padding.

Scripting name: PadIndex

Statistics no recompute

Specifies whether distribution statistics are recomputed.

Scripting name: StatisticsNoRecompute

Drop existing

Specifies that the named, preexisting clustered, nonclustered, or XML index is dropped and re
built.
Scripting name: DropExisting

Sort in temporary database Specifies whether to store temporary sort results in tempdb.
Scripting name: SortInTempDB
Allow row locks

Specifies whether row locks are allowed.

Scripting name: AllowRowLocks

Allow page locks

Specifies whether page locks are allowed.

Scripting name: AllowPageLocks

2.6.7

XML Data Types (SQL Server)

SQL Server 2005 and higher allows you to store XML documents and fragments in a database. PowerDesigner
supports this feature through new column properties and the XML schema collection object.

Using an XML Data Type in a Table Column

To specify a column for storing XML, you must have already created an XML schema collection:

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

449

1. Create a standard column and, on the General tab, select XML in the Data type field.
2. Click the Microsoft tab, select an XML schema collection and content type.

XML Table Column Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an XML table column property sheet,
double-click its Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 300:
Name

Description

XML schema collection

Specifies an XML schema collection for the type.

Scripting name: XMLSchemaCollection

Content type

Specifies the nature of the content to be stored in the column. You can choose between:

CONTENT [default] the data can contain multiple top-level elements.

DOCUMENT the data can contain only one top-level element.

Scripting name: ContentType

2.6.7.1

XML Schema Collections (SQL Server)

An XML schema collection provides validation of and data type information about the XML to be stored in the
column. PowerDesigner models XML schema collections as extended objects with a stereotype of
<<XMLSchemaCollection>>.
Schemas provide information about the types of attributes and elements in the XML data type instance, and the
type information provides more precise operational semantics to the values. For example, decimal arithmetic
operations can be performed on a decimal value, but not on a string value. Because of this, typed XML storage can
be made significantly more compact than untyped XML.

Creating an XML Schema Collection

You can create a XML schema collection in any of the following ways:
Select Model
a Row tool.

XML Schema Collections

to access the List of XML Schema Collections, and click the Add

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

450

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

XML Schema Collection .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

XML Schema Collection Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a XML schema collection property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the XML Schema Collections folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 301:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the name of a user, role, or schema as the owner of the schema collection.
Scripting name: Owner

XML model

Specifies a PowerDesigner XML model to link to the schema.

Scripting name: XMLModel

Content

Specifies the content of the xml schema. By default this field contains the %xmlModelCon
tent% template, which represents the content of the linked XML model.
Scripting name: Content

2.6.8

Database Mirroring (SQL Server)

SQL Server 2005 and higher supports database mirroring, in which the principal server sends, in real-time, blocks
of its database log records to the mirror instance which, in the event of failover, can be made available within a few
seconds.
PowerDesigner supports database mirroring with endpoints and extensions on the database object.

Creating a Database for Mirroring

To create a database to model database mirroring:
1. Right-click the model in the Browser and select Properties.
2. On the General tab, click the Create tool to the right of the Database field.
3. Click the Mirroring tab and specify any appropriate properties.

Mirroring Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a database property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

451

The following extended attributes are available on the Mirroring tab:

Table 302:
Name

Description

Enable mirroring

Enables mirroring for the database.

Scripting name: EnableMirroring

Partner/ Witness

Specifies the role that the database will play in the mirroring relationship. You can choose be
tween:

Partner the database is either a principal or mirror database.

Witness the database acts as a witness to a mirroring relationship. A SET WITNESS

clause affects both copies of the database, but can only be specified on the principal
server. If a witness is set for a session, a quorum is required to serve the database, re
gardless of the SAFETY setting.

Scripting names: Partner, Witness

Options

Specifies mirroring options for the database. You can choose between:

<None>

server

off

failover

force_service_allow_data_loss

resume

safety full

safety off

suspend

timeout

Scripting name: MirrorOptions

Server

For partner mirroring, specifies the server network address of an instance of SQL Server to act
as a failover partner in a new database mirroring session.
For witness mirroring, specifies an instance of the Database Engine to act as the witness
server for a database mirroring session.
Scripting name: MirrorServer

Time-out

[if partner is selected] Specifies the time-out period in seconds. The time-out period is the
maximum time that a server instance waits to receive a PING message from another instance
in the mirroring session before considering that other instance to be disconnected.
Scripting name: TimeOut

452

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.6.8.1

End Points (SQL Server)

An end point encapsulates a transport protocol and a port number, and enables SQL Server to communicate over
the network. PowerDesigner models end points as extended objects with a stereotype of <<EndPoint>>.

Creating an End Point

You can create an end point in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

End Points

to access the List of End Points, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

End Point .

End Point Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an end point property sheet, double-click
its Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 303:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the owner of the endpoint.

Scripting name: Owner

State

Specifies the state of the endpoint at creation. You can choose between:

started

stopped

disabled

Scripting name: State

Protocol: Name

Specifies the transport protocol to be used by the endpoint. You can choose between:

http

tcp

Scripting name: Protocol

Protocol: Argument

Allows you to enter arguments for the chosen protocol.

Scripting name: ProtocolArgument

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

453

Name

Description

Language: Name

Specifies the type of content to be sent. You can choose between:

soap

tsql

service_broker

database_mirroring

Scripting name: Language

Language: Argument

Allows you to enter arguments for the chosen language.

Scripting name: LanguageArgument

2.6.9

Service Broker (SQL Server)

SQL Server 2005 and higher provides the service broker, which manages a queue of services. Applications that
use Service Broker communicate by sending messages to one another as part of a conversation. The participants
in a conversation must agree on the name and content of each message.
PowerDesigner supports service broker through the following objects:
Message types - define the type of data that a message can contain.
Contracts - define which message types an application uses to accomplish a particular task.
Queues - store messages.
Event notifications - execute in response to a DDL statements and SQL Trace events by sending information
about these events to a Service Broker service.
Services - are specific tasks or sets of tasks.

2.6.9.1

Message Types (SQL Server)

Message types define the type of data that a message can contain. You create identical message types in each
database that participates in a conversation.
Message types specify the type of XML validation that SQL Server performs for messages of that type. For
arbitrary or binary data, the message type can specify that SQL Server performs no validation. PowerDesigner
models message types as extended objects with a stereotype of <<MessageType>>.

Creating a Message Type

You can create a message type in any of the following ways:
Select

454

Model

Message Types

to access the List of Message Types, and click the Add a Row tool.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

 Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Message Type .

Message Type Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a message type property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 304:
Name

Description

Authorization

Specifies a database user or role as the owner of the message type. If the current user is dbo
or sa, this may be the name of any valid user or role. Otherwise, it must be the name of the
current user, a user that the current user has IMPERSONATE permission for, or a role to which
the current user belongs. By default, the message type belongs to the current user.
Scripting name: Owner

Validation

Specifies how the Service Broker validates the message body for messages of this type. You
can choose between:

none [default] no validation performed

empty message must contain no data

well_formed_xml message must contain well-formed XML

valid_xml with schema collection message must conform to the specified

XML schema

Scripting name: Validation

Schema

Specifies the name of the schema to be used for validating the message contents.
Scripting name: SchemaCollectionName

2.6.9.2

Contracts (SQL Server)

Contracts define the message types used in a Service Broker conversation and also determine which side of the
conversation can send messages of that type. Each conversation follows a contract. The initiating service
specifies the contract for the conversation when the conversation begins. The target service specifies the
contracts that the target service accepts conversations for. PowerDesigner models contracts as extended objects
with a stereotype of <<Contract>>.
You create an identical contract in each database that participates in a conversation.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

455

Creating a Contract
You can create a contract in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Contracts

to access the List of Contracts, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Contract .

Contract Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a contract property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 305:
Name

Description

Authorization

Specifies a database user or role as the owner of the contract. If the current user is dbo or sa,
this may be the name of any valid user or role. Otherwise, it must be the name of the current
user, a user that the current user has IMPERSONATE permission for, or a role to which the
current user belongs. By default, the contract belongs to the current user.
Scripting name: Owner

The MessageTypes tab lists the message types included in the contract via intermediary "message contract"
objects. You can reuse an existing message contract or create a new one, using the tools on this tab.
Once you have added or created a message contract, double-click its entry to open its property sheet.

2.6.9.3

Message Contracts (SQL Server)

Message contracts are intermediary objects that are used to include a single message in multiple contracts.
Message contracts are modeled as extended objects with a stereotype of <<MessageContract>>.

Creating a Message Contract

You can create a message contract in any of the following ways:
Use the tools on the MessageTypes tab of a contract property sheet (see Contracts (SQL Server) [page
455]).
Select

Model

Message Contracts

to access the List of Message Contracts, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

456

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Message Contract .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Message Contract Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a message contract property sheet,
double-click its Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 306:
Name

Description

Sent by

Specifies which endpoint can send a message of the indicated message type. Contracts docu
ment the messages that services can use to have specific conversations. Each conversation
has two endpoints: the initiator endpoint, the service that started the conversation, and the
target endpoint, the service that the initiator is contacting.
Scripting name: Sender

Message type

Specifies the message type of the contract.

Scripting name: MessageType

2.6.9.4

Queues (SQL Server)

When a message arrives for a service, Service Broker places the message on the queue associated with the
service. PowerDesigner models queues as extended objects with a stereotype of <<Queue>>.

Creating a Queue
You can create a queue in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Queues

to access the List of Queues, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Queue .

Queue Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a queue property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

457

The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:

Table 307:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the owner of the queue.

Scripting name: Owner

Status

Specifies that the queue is available. This is the default.

If a queue is unavailable, no messages can be added to or removed from it. If you create a
queue as unavailable, then no messages can be added to it until it is made available with an
ALTER QUEUE statement.
Scripting name: Status

Retention

Specifies that all messages sent or received on conversations using this queue are retained
in the queue until the conversations have ended. This allows you to retain messages for au
diting purposes, or to perform compensating transactions if an error occurs.
The default is to not retain messages in the queue in this way.
Scripting name: Retention

Activation

Specifies that a stored procedure is required to activate message processing for the queue.
Scripting name: Activation

Status (activation)

Specifies that Service Broker activates the associated stored procedure when the number of
procedures currently running is less than MAX_QUEUE_READERS and when messages arrive
on the queue faster than the stored procedures receive messages.
This is the default.
Scripting name: ActivationStatus

Procedure

Specifies the name of the stored procedure to activate to process messages in this queue.
Scripting name: ActivationProcedureName

MaxQueueReaders

Specifies the maximum number of instances of the activation stored procedure that the
queue can start at the same time. Must be set to between 0 and 32767.
Scripting name: ActivationMaxQueueReaders

Execute as

Specifies the user under which the activation stored procedure runs. SQL Server must be
able to check the permissions for this user at the time that the queue activates the stored
procedure. You can choose between:

SELF - the stored procedure executes as the current user. (The database principal exe
cuting this CREATE QUEUE statement.)

OWNER - the stored procedure executes as the owner of the queue.

Scripting name: ActivationExecuteAs

458

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

File group

Specifies the SQL Server filegroup on which to create the queue.

Scripting name: FileGroup

2.6.9.5

Event Notifications (SQL Server)

An event notification sends information about a database or server event to a service broker service. Event
notifications are created only by using Transact-SQL statements. PowerDesigner models event notifications as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<EventNotification>>.

Creating an Event Notification

You can create an event notification in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Event Notifications

to access the List of Event Notifications, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Event Notification .

Event Notification Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an event notification property sheet,
double-click its Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 308:
Name

Description

Applies on

Specifies the scope of the event notification. You can choose between:

database the notification fires whenever the specified event in the FOR clause occurs

server - the notification fires whenever the specified event in the FOR clause occurs in

queue - the notification fires whenever the specified event in the FOR clause occurs in

anywhere in the instance of SQL Server.

the current database.
the current queue. Can be specified only if FOR QUEUE_ACTIVATION or FOR
BROKER_QUEUE_DISABLED is also specified.
Scripting name: AppliesOn

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

459

Name

Description

Queue

Specifies the queue to which the event notification applies. Available only if Applies on is set to
"queue".
Scripting name: Queue

With fan in

Instructs SQL Server to send only one message per event to any specified service for all event
notifications that:

are created on the same event.

are created by the same principal (as identified by SID).

specify the same service and broker_instance_specifier.

specify WITH FAN_IN.

Scripting name: WithFanIn

Events

Specifies the name of the event type that causes the event notification to execute. Can be a
Transact-SQL DDL, SQL Trace, or Service Broker event type.
Scripting name: Events

Service

Specifies the target service that receives the event instance data. SQL Server opens one or
more conversations to the target service for the event notification. This service must honor
the same SQL Server Events message type and contract that is used to send the message.
See Services (SQL Server) [page 460].
Scripting name: Service

Instance

Specifies a service broker instance against which broker_service is resolved. Use 'current da
tabase' to specify the service broker instance in the current database.
Scripting name: Instance

2.6.9.6

Services (SQL Server)

Services are specific tasks or set of tasks. Service Broker uses the name of the service to route messages, deliver
messages to the correct queue within a database, and enforce the contract for a conversation. PowerDesigner
models services as extended objects with a stereotype of <<Service>>.

Creating a Service
You can create a service in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Services

to access the List of Services, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

460

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Service .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Service Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a service property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 309:
Name

Description

Authorization

Specifies the owner of the service.

Scripting name: Owner

Queue

Specifies the queue that receives messages for the service. The queue must exist in the same
database as the service.
Scripting name: Queue

The Contracts tab lists the contracts with which the service is associated.

2.6.9.7

Routes (SQL Server)

Routes appear in the routing table for the database. For outgoing messages, Service Broker determines routing
by checking the routing table in the local database. For messages on conversations that originate in another
instance, including messages to be forwarded, Service Broker checks the routes in msdb. PowerDesigner models
routes as extended objects with a stereotype of <<Route>>.

Creating a Route
You can create a route in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Routes

to access the List of Routes, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Route .

Route Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a route property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

461

The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:

Table 310:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the owner of the route.

Scripting name: Owner

Remote service

[v2005] Specifies the name of the remote service to which the route points.
Scripting name: Service

Broker instance

Specifies the database that hosts the target service.

Scripting name: BrokerInstance

Lifetime

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that SQL Server retains the route in the routing ta
ble.
Scripting name: Lifetime

Address

Specifies the network address for the route. The next_hop_address specifies a TCP/IP ad
dress in the following format:
TCP://{ dns_name | netbios_name | ip_address } : port_number
Scripting name: Address

Mirror address

Specifies the network address for a mirrored database with one mirrored database hosted at
the next_hop_address. The next_hop_mirror_address specifies a TCP/IP address in the fol
lowing format:
TCP://{ dns_name | netbios_name | ip_address } : port_number
Scripting name: MirrorAddress

2.6.9.8

Remote Service Bindings (SQL Server)

Remote service bindings create a binding that defines the security credentials to use to initiate a conversation
with a remote service. PowerDesigner models remote service bindings as extended objects with a stereotype of
<<RemoteServiceBinding>>.

Creating a Remote Service Binding

You can create a remote service binding in any of the following ways:
Select Model
a Row tool.

462

Remote Service Bindings

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

to access the List of Remote Service Bindings, and click the Add

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

 Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Remote Service Binding .

Remote Service Binding Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a remote service binding property sheet,
double-click its Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 311:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the owner of the binding.

Scripting name: Owner

Remote service

Specifies the remote service to bind to the user identified in the WITH USER clause.
Scripting name: RemoteService

User

Specifies the database principal that owns the certificate associated with the remote service
identified by the TO SERVICE clause.
Scripting name: User

Anonymous

Specifies that anonymous authentication is used when communicating with the remote serv
ice.
Scripting name: Anonymous

2.6.10 Resource Governor (SQL Server)

Resource Governor, available in SQL Server 2008 and higher, lets you limit resource requests by workloads for
CPU time and memory to optimize their allocation.
PowerDesigner supports Resource Governor through the following objects:
Workload groups are containers for sets of similar session requests.
Resource pools represent the physical resources of the server.

2.6.10.1 Workload Groups (SQL Server)

A workload group serves as a container for session requests that are similar, to allow the aggregate monitoring of
resource consumption and the application of a uniform policy to all the requests in the group. A group defines the

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

463

policies for its members. PowerDesigner models workload group sas extended objects with a stereotype of
<<WorkloadGroup>>.

Creating a Workload Group

You can create a workload group binding in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Workload groups

to access the List of Workload Groups, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Workload Group .

Workload Group Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a workload group property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 312:
Name

Description

Importance

Specifies the relative importance of a request in the workload group.

Scripting name: Importance

Request maximum memory

Specifies the maximum amount of memory that a single request can take from the pool.
Scripting name: RequestMaxMemoryGrantPercent

Request maximum CPU

Specifies the maximum amount of CPU time, in seconds, that a request can use.
Scripting name: RequestMaxCpuTimeSec

Memory grant request time

Specifies the maximum time, in seconds, that a query can wait for a memory grant (work buf

out

fer memory) to become available.

Scripting name: RequestMemoryGrantTimeoutSec

Maximum degree of parallel

ism

Specifies the maximum degree of parallelism (DOP) for parallel requests.

Scripting name: MaxDop

Maximum requests

Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous requests that are allowed to execute in the
workload group.
Scripting name: GroupMaxRequests

Resource pool

Associates the workload group with the specified resource pool.

Scripting name: ResourcePool

464

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.6.10.2 Resource Pools (SQL Server)

A resource pool represents the physical resources of the server. PowerDesigner models resource pools as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<ResourcePool>>.

Creating a Resource Pool

You can create a resource pool in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Resource Pools

to access the List of Resource pools, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Resource Pool .

Resource Pool Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a resource pool property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry.
The following extended attributes are available on the Microsoft tab:
Table 313:
Name

Description

CPU percent Min

Specifies the guaranteed average CPU bandwidth for all requests in the resource pool when
there is CPU contention. The value is an integer, with a default setting of 0.
Scripting name: MinCpuPercent

CPU percent Max

Specifies the maximum average CPU bandwidth that all requests in resource pool will receive
when there is CPU contention. The value is an integer, with a default setting of 100.
Scripting name: MaxCpuPercent

Memory percent Min

Specifies the minimum amount of memory reserved for this resource pool that can not be
shared with other resource pools. The value is an integer, with a default setting of 0.
Scripting name: MinMemoryPercent

Memory percent Max

Specifies the total server memory that can be used by requests in this resource pool. The
value is an integer, with a default setting of 100.
Scripting name: MaxMemoryPercent

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

465

2.6.11

Schemas (SQL Server)

For SQL Server 2005 and higher, schemas are distinct namespaces, separate from the users who created them,
and can be transferred between users. PowerDesigner models schemas as users with a stereotype of
<<Schema>>.

Creating a Schema
You can create a schema in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Users and Roles

Schemas

to access the List of Schemas, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Schema .

Schema Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a schema property sheet, double-click its
diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Schemas folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 314:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the name of the database-level principal user that owns the schema. This user may
own other schemas, any of which may be his default schema.
Scripting name: SchemaOwner

2.6.12 Synonyms (SQL Server)

PowerDesigner supports synonyms for SQL Server 2005 and higher through the standard synonym object.
Synonyms can be created for the following types of objects:
Assembly (CLR) Stored Procedure
Assembly (CLR) Table-valued Function
Assembly (CLR) Scalar Function
Assembly Aggregate (CLR) Aggregate Functions
Replication-filter-procedure
Extended Stored Procedure
SQL Scalar Function
SQL Table-valued Function

466

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

 SQL Inline-table-valued Function

SQL Stored Procedure
View
Table
For general information about synonyms, see Synonyms (PDM) [page 178].

2.6.13 Analysis Services (SQL Server)

PowerDesigner allows you to retrieve and generate Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Analysis Server (SSAS) cubes
using the Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Analysis Services add-in. You must have installed the SQL Server 2005
Management Tools client component.
To enable analysis services in PowerDesigner, select Tools General Options , click the Add-ins category,
select the Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Analysis Services add-in (PowerDesigner.AddIn.Pdm.SQLServer.dll), and
then click OK to install it and return to the model.

2.6.13.1

Specifying a Data Source for Cubes

Before generating cubes, you must define a data source with an OLE DB connection that will specify from where
the cubes will be populated.

Procedure
1. Create a data source in your PDM from the List of data sources or by right-clicking the model in the browser
and selecting

New

Data Source

from the contextual menu.

2. Select the OLE DB tab and specify the kind of data provider.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

467

3. Click the Ellipsis tool to the right of the connection string field to open the provider-specific configuration
dialog.

468

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

4. Complete the parameters appropriately, click Apply to Connection String, and then Test Connection. Then
click OK to return to the data source property sheet.
5. Click OK to return to your model.

Results
When you have created the appropriate data sources, you can proceed with generating your cubes.

2.6.13.2 Generating Cubes for Microsoft SQL Server 2005

The Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Analysis Services add-in enables the generation of cubes.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Analysis Services

Generate Cubes

to open the wizard.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

469

Click Next to continue.

2. Enter a server name, and select the database you want to generate to:

470

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Click Next to continue.

3. The Select Cubes page lists the cubes available in the model, along with whether they currently exist in the
database. Select the cubes you want to generate:

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

471

Click Next to continue.

4. The Generate Cubes page lists the cubes to be generated:

472

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Click Finish to begin generation. Progress is displayed in the wizard, which will close automatically after
successful completion.
If a cube already exists in the database, it is dropped and recreated. If a related dimension already exists, it is
reused. To fully generate a cube, your model must include a complete mapping to a table.

2.6.13.3 Reverse Engineering Microsoft SQL Server 2005

Cubes
The Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Analysis Services add-in enables the reverse engineering of cubes.

Context
Before reverse-engineering cubes, you should create one or more PDMs to model the tables which provide its
data. As part of the reverse-engineering process, PowerDesigner will create links from the reversed cubes to
these tables.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

473

Procedure
1. Select Tools
wizard.

Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Analysis Services

Reverse Engineer Cubes

to open the

Click Next to continue.

2. Enter a server name, and select the database you want to reverse from:

474

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Click Next to continue.

3. The Select Cubes page lists the available cubes. Select the cubes you want to reverse engineer and then click
Next to continue:

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

475

4. The Configure Data Sources page lists the data sources that are required to populate the selected cubes. For
each source, select the Physical Data Model in which the tables are modeled, and then click Next to continue:

476

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

5. The Reverse Engineer Cubes page lists the cubes to be reversed:

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

477

Click Finish to begin reverse-engineering. Progress is displayed in the wizard, which will close automatically
after successful completion.

2.7

Netezza

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the Netezza DBMS family, select the appropriate version in
the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

The following sections list the extensions provided for Netezza.

478

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Columns (v5.0 and higher)

The following extensions are available on the Standard Checks tab:
Table 315:
Name

Description

Default constraint name

Specifies the constraint name for default constraint

Scripting name: DefaultConstName

Not null constraint name

Specifies the constraint name for not null constraint.

Scripting name: NotNullConstName

Tables
The following extensions are available on the Options tab:
Table 316:
Name

Description

Distribution type

Specifies the type of row distribution. You can choose between None, hash, and random (on
General tab for v4.5).
Scripting name: Distribution

Columns

[hash or random distribution] Specifies the hash distribution columns (on General tab for v4.5).
Scripting name: DistributeOnExplicitColumnList

Organize on

Specifies whether or not the table is organized.

Scripting name: Organized

Columns

[organized table] Specifies the list of columns.

Scripting name: OrganizedColumnList

Options

Displays the options defined for the table.

Scripting name: TableOption

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

479

Databases (v5.0 and higher)

The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 317:
Name

Description

Character set

Specifies the default character set and collation. The default and only supported value is Latin9.
Scripting name: Charset

Collation

The collation is binary. You cannot specify other values.

Scripting name: Collation

Users/Groups (v5.0 and higher)

The following extensions are available on the Options tab:
Table 318:
Name

Description

SysId

Specifies the SYSID clause to choose the group ID of the new user/group.
Scripting name: SysId

Owner

The user that created this user/group.

Scripting name: Owner

Rowset limit

Specifies the maximum number of rows any query run by this user (or group) can return.
Scripting name: RowsetLimit

Query timeout

Specifies the amount of time a query can run before the system sends the administrator a mes
sage.
Scripting name: QueryTimeout

Session idle timeout

Specifies the amount of time a session can be idle before the system terminates it.
Scripting name: SessionTimeout

Session priority

[group only] Specifies the default priority for the group.

Scripting name: DefPriority

Default priority

[user only] Specifies the default priority for the user.

Scripting name: DefPriority

480

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Maximum priority

Specifies the maximum priority for the user/group.

Scripting name: MaxPriority

Minimum resource

[group only] Specifies the minimum percentage of the system that a resource group will use when
it has jobs.
Scripting name: ResourceMinimum

Maximum resource

[group only] Specifies the maximum percentage of the system that a resource group can use.
Scripting name: ResourceMaximum

Job maximum

[group only] Specifies the maximum number of concurrent jobs that a single resource group can
run.
Scripting name: JobMaximum

Password

[user only] Specifies the password used for database connection.

Scripting name: PasswordDisplay

Valid until

[user only] Specifies the password validity.

Scripting name: ValidUntil

Expire

[user only] Specify is the password expires on next connection.

Scripting name: ExpirePassword

Authentication

[user only] Overrides the authentication for the user to LOCAL if specified. DEFAULT is the con
nection setting or whatever authentication is set.
Scripting name: Authentication

Sequences (v5.0 and higher)

The following extensions are available on the Options tab:
Table 319:
Name

Description

Datatype

Specifies the data type. The value can be any exact integer type such as byteint, smallint, integer,
or bigint.
Scripting name: As

Start with

Specifies the starting value.

Scripting name: StartWith

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

481

Name

Description

Increment

Specifies the increment value. The integer value can be any positive or negative integer, but it can
not be zero.
Scripting name: IncrementBy

Minimum

Specifies the minimum value of the sequence.

Scripting name: Minvalue

No min value

Results in a value of 1.
Scripting name: NoMinvalue

Maximum

Specifies the maximum value of the sequence.

Scripting name: Maxvalue

No max value

Results in the largest value for the specified datatype.

Scripting name: NoMaxvalue

Cycle

Specifies whether the sequence continues to generate values after reaching either its maximum
value (in an ascending sequence) or its minimum value (in a descending sequence).
Scripting name: Cycle

2.7.1

History Configurations (Netezza)

History configurations provide support for query history logging. PowerDesigner models history configurations as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<HistoryConfiguration>>.

Creating an History Configuration

You can create an history configuration in any of the following ways:
Select Model
Row tool.

History Configurations

to access the List of history configurations, and click the Add a

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

History Configuration .

History Configuration Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an history configuration property sheet,
double-click its Browser entry in the History Configurations folder.

482

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following extended attributes are available on the Options tab:

Table 320:
Name

Description

History type

Specifies the type of the database to create, which can be QUERY or NONE. Specify NONE to disa
ble history collection. This is a required option which does not have a default value.
Scripting name: Histtype

Data to collect

Specifies the history data to collect. Specify multiple values using comma-separated values, or
click the Select tool to the right of the field to select them.
Scripting name: Collect

Database / User / Pass

Specifies the history database to which the captured data will be written, along with the user and

word

password to use for accessing and inserting data.

Scripting name: Database, User, Password

Load interval

Specifies the number of minutes to wait before checking the staged area for history data to trans
fer to the loading area.
Scripting name: Loadinterval

Load retry

Specifies the number of times that the load operation will be retried. The valid values are 0 (no re
try), 1 or 2.
Scripting name: Loadretry

Minimum / Maximum

Specify the minimum and maximum amounts of history data in MB to collect before transferring

threshold

the staged batch files to the loading area. Values of 0 disable these threshold checks.
Scripting name: Loadminthreshold, Loadmaxthreshold

Disk full threshold

This option is reserved for future use. Any value you specify will be ignored. The default value is 0.
Scripting name: Diskfullthreshold

Storage limit

Specifies the maximum size of the history data staging area in MB.
Scripting name: Storagelimit

Enable history

Specifies to log information about queries to the query history database.

Scripting name: Enablehist

Enable system

Specifies to log information about system queries. A system queries accesses at least one system
table but no user tables.
Scripting name: Enablesystem

Version

Specifies the query history schema version of the configuration. The version must match the ver
sion number specified in the nzhistcreatedb command; otherwise, the loader process will fail.
Scripting name: Version

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

483

Name

Description

Definition

Specifies the attribute that stores the object definition.

Scripting name: ObjectDefn

2.8

Oracle

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the Oracle DBMS family, select the appropriate version in
the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
When working with Oracle v11gR2, use the Oracle v11g DBMS definition file. Support for Oracle v8-9 is
deprecated.
When working with Oracle triggers, you can use the TRGBODY and TRGDESC variables. For information about
working with variables, see Customizing and Extending PowerDesigner > DBMS Definition Files > PDM Variables
and Macros.
The following table lists Oracle dimension objects and their equivalents in PowerDesigner:
Table 321:
Oracle object

PowerDesigner object

Dimension

Dimension (see Dimensions (PDM) [page 243])

Hierarchy

Dimension hierarchy (see Hierarchies (PDM) [page 247])

Level

Dimension attribute used in a hierarchy (see Fact and Dimension Attributes (PDM) [page
245])

Attribute

Dimension attribute used as detail attribute (seeFact and Dimension Attributes (PDM) [page
245])

The following sections list the extensions provided for Oracle.

Note
We do not provide documentation for the properties on the Physical Options and certain other tabs, though
minimal information is available for them in the Resource Editor. For information about these properties,
consult your DBMS reference documentation.

484

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Note
In Oracle, the storage composite physical option is used as a template to define all the storage values in a
storage entry to avoid having to set values independently each time you need to re-use them same values in a
storage clause. For this reason, the Oracle physical option does not include the storage name (%s).

Abstract Data Types and Attributes

The following extensions are available on the General tab of abstract data types:
Table 322:
Name

Description

Editionable

[12c and higher] Specifies that the type is an editioned object (if editioning is enabled for the schema
object type TYPE in schema). This applies to both type specification and body.
Scripting name: Editionable

The following extensions are available on the Oracle tab for attributes of abstract data types of type OBJECT or
SQLJ_OBJECT:
Table 323:
Name

Description

Declare REF

Generates a REF modifier on attribute to declare references, which hold pointers to objects.
Scripting name: RefAttribute

Columns
The following extensions are available on the Oracle tab:
Table 324:
Name

Description

Check constraint

[v11g and higher] You can specify the following options:

Deferrable - Specifies that in subsequent transactions you can use the SET CONSTRAINT
clause to defer checking of this constraint until after the transaction is committed.

Initially deferred - Specifies that Oracle should check this constraint at the end of subsequent
transactions.

Scripting name: CheckDeferrable, NotNullDeferrable,

CheckInitiallyDeferred, NotNullInitiallyDeferred

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

485

Name

Description

Deferred option of

[up to v10gR2] Defines the deferred option of a column constraint check. It is used in the definition or

check constraint

create and add items statements.

Scripting name: ExtColumnDeferOption

Mandatory columns

You can specify the following options:

Constraint name/Name of not null constraint - Defines the name of the not null constraint for a
column.

[v11g and higher] Deferrable - Specifies that in subsequent transactions you can use the SET
CONSTRAINT clause to defer checking of this constraint until after the transaction is commit
ted.

[v11g and higher] Initially deferred - Specifies that Oracle should check this constraint at the end
of subsequent transactions.

[up to v10gR2] Deferred option of not null constraint - Defines the deferred option of a column
not null constraint. An empty value means "Not deferrable".

Scripting name: ExtNotNullConstraintName, ExtNotNullDeferOption

Encrypted

[v10gR2 and higher] Specifies that column is encrypted. You can specify the following options:

Algorithm - Specifies the algorithm used for encryption.

With salt - Specifies that the encryption adds salt to encoded data.

Identified by Password - Provides the password for encrypting the column

Scripting name: Encrypted, Algorithm, EncryptionWithSalt,

IdentifiedByPassword
Identity

[v12c and higher] Specifies that the column stores a number incrementing with each insertion. You
can specify the following options:

Generated - Specifies when the identity clause applies to the column.

Start -Specifies the value to begin the sequence with.

Increment - Specifies the interval between the sequence numbers.

Cycle - Specifies that the sequence continues to generate values after reaching either its maxi
mum or minimum value. If this option is not selected the sequence cannot generate more values
after reaching its maximum or minimum value.

Order - Specifies that sequence numbers must be generated in order of request.

Cache - Specifies that values of the sequence are preallocated. You can additionally specify how
many values of the sequence the database preallocates and keeps in memory for faster access.

Minvalue, Maxvalue - Specify that the sequence has a minimum and/or maximum value, which
you specify in the fields to the right of the options.

Scripting name: Identity, Generated, StartWith, IncrementBy, Cycle,

Order, HasCache, CacheValue, HasMinvalue, Minvalue, HasMaxvalue,

Maxvalue

486

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Options

[v12c and higher] You can specify the following options:

Invisible - Specifies that the column is a hidden column. To display or assign a value to an INVIS

Default on null - Specifies that Oracle assigns the DEFAULT column value when a subsequent

IBLE column, you must specify its name explicitly.

INSERT statement attempts to assign a value that evaluates to NULL.
Scripting name: Invisible, DefaultOnNull

XML Virtual Columns

If the table type is set to XML, the Columns tab is replaced by the XML Virtual Columns tab.The following
extensions are available on the General tab of XML virtual columns:
Table 325:
Name

Description

Expression

Specifies the SQL expression used to compute virtual column value.

Scripting name: Expression

Database Packages
The following extensions are available on the Oracle tab:
Table 326:
Name

Description

Add serially_reusable pragma on

Specifies that the pragma serially_reusable clause must be applied on the database

package specification

package specification.
Scripting name: IsSpecPragma

Add serially_reusable pragma on

Specifies that the pragma serially_reusable clause must be applied on the database

package body

package body declaration.

Scripting name: IsPragma

Editionable

[12c and higher] Specifies that the package is an editioned object (if editioning is enabled
for the schema object type PACKAGE in schema). This applies to both package specifica
tion and body.
Scripting name: Editionable

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

487

Models
The following extensions are available on the Oracle tab:
Table 327:
Name

Description

Password Encryption

[v10gR2 and higher] Specifies the master key for encoding and decoding encrypted data.
Scripting name: PasswordEncryption

References
The following extensions are available on the Oracle tab:
Table 328:
Name

Description

Deferred option

Defines the deferred option of a reference. It is used in the definition of create and add
items statements.
Scripting name: ExtReferenceDeferOption

Exceptions into

Specifies a table into which Oracle places the ROWIDs of all rows violating the constraint.
Scripting name: ExceptionsInto

Rely

Specifies whether an enabled constraint is to be enforced.

Specify RELY to enable an existing constraint without enforcement.
Specify NORELY to enable and enforce an existing constraint.
Scripting name: Rely

Disable

Disables the integrity constraint.

Scripting name: Disable

Validate

Checks that all old data also obeys the constraint.

Scripting name: Validate

488

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Tables
The following extensions are available on the Oracle tab:
Table 329:
Name

Description

Materialized view log

Specifies the materialized view log associated with the table.

Scripting name: MaterializedViewLog

The following extensions are available on the XML Properties tab (for v11g and higher) when the table type is set to
XML:
Table 330:
Name

Description

Definition

Specifies that the properties of object tables are essentially the same as those of relational tables.
However, instead of specifying columns, you specify attributes of the object.
Scripting name: XmlTypeObjProperty

Storage type

Specifies that XMLType columns can be stored in LOB, object-relational, or binary XML columns.
Scripting name: XMLTypeStorage

Basic file

Use this clause to specify the traditional LOB storage.

Scripting name: BasicFile

Secure file

Use this clause to specify high-performance LOB.

Scripting name: SecureFile

LOB segment name

Specify the name of the LOB data segment. You cannot use LOB_segname if you specify more than
one LOB_item.
Scripting name: LOBSegname

LOB parameters

Use this clause to specify various elements of LOB parameters.

Scripting name: LOBParameters

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

489

Tablespaces
The following extensions are available on the Oracle tab:
Table 331:
Name

Description

Size specification

[v10g and higher] Specifies whether the tablespace is a bigfile or smallfile tablespace. This clause
overrides any default tablespace type setting for the database. You can choose from the following
settings:

bigfile - contains only one datafile or tempfile. The maximum size of the single datafile or
tempfile is 128 terabytes (TB) for a tablespace with 32K blocks and 32TB for a tablespace with
8K blocks.

smallfile - a traditional Oracle tablespace.

Scripting name: SizeSpecification

Temporary tablespace

Use this option to create a locally managed temporary tablespace, which is an allocation of space in
the database that can contain transient data that persists only for the duration of a session. This
transient data cannot be recovered after process or instance failure.
Scripting name: Temporary

Undo tablespace

Use this option to create an undo tablespace. When you run the database in automatic undo man
agement mode, Oracle Database manages undo space using the undo tablespace instead of rollback
segments. This clause is useful if you are now running in automatic undo management mode but
your database was not created in automatic undo management mode.
Scripting name: Undo

Note
If you do not have a login "System", when reversing tablespaces via a live database connection, physical
options will not be reversed. If you want to cancel the reverse engineering of tablespace physical options, you
should clear the SqlAttrQuery query in the Tablespace category in the Oracle DBMS.

490

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Users
The following extensions are available on the General tab (for v9i and higher):
Table 332:
Name

Description

Identification type

Specifies how the user will be identified. You can choose between:

by - requires a password

externally - requires a distinguished name

globally - requires a distinguished name

Scripting name: Identification

Distinguished name

[external or global identification types] Specifies the user's distinguished name (DN) in the directory
or certificate.
Scripting name: DistinguishedName

Password

[by identification type] Specifies the user password.

Scripting name: ClearPassword

The following extensions are available on the Options tab:

Table 333:
Name

Description

Default tablespace

Specifies the default tablespace for objects that the user creates.
Scripting name: DefaultTablespace

Temporary tablespace

Specifies the tablespace or tablespace group for the user's temporary segments.
Scripting name: TemporaryTablespace

Quota definition

Specifies the maximum amount of space the user can allocate in the tablespace.
Scripting name: QuotaDefinition

Profile

Specifies the profile to assign to the user.

Scripting name: Profile

Password expire

Specifies that the user's password will expire.

Scripting name: PasswordExpire

Account lock

Select lock to lock the user's account and disable access or unlock to enable access to the account.
Scripting name: AccountLock

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

491

Views
The following extensions are available on the Oracle tab:
Table 334:
Name

Description

Super view object

Used in the UNDER clause to specify the superview the current object view is based on.
Scripting name: ExtObjSuperView

Object view key

Specifies the attributes of the object type that will be used as a key to identify each row in the object
view.
Scripting name: ExtObjOIDList

Object view type

Defines the type of the object view.

Scripting name: ExtObjViewType

Force

When set to TRUE, allows you to create the view regardless of the existence of the base tables or the
owner privileges on these tables.
Scripting name: ExtViewForce

Editioning

[v12c and higher] Specifies that the view is an editioning view, a single-table view that selects all rows
from the base table and displays a subset of the base table columns. You can specify that the view is:

editioning

editionable

editionable editioning

noneditionable

Scripting name: Editioning

Bequeath

[v12c and higher] Specifies whether functions referenced in the view are executed using the view in
voker's rights or the view definer's rights.
Scripting name: Bequeath

492

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Synonyms
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 335:
Name

Description

Editionable

[v12c and higher] Specify whether the synonym is an editioned or noneditioned object if editioning is
enabled for the schema object type SYNONYM in schema.
Scripting name: Editionable

2.8.1

Object and SQLJ Object Data Types (Oracle)

Oracle v8 and higher allows you to specify a table type of "Object", and to base the table on an object or SQLJ
object abstract data type, so that the table uses the properties of the ADT and the ADT attributes become table
columns.

Procedure
1. Select Model Abstract Data Types to open the List of Abstract Data Types, and click the Add a Row tool.
Enter a name for the new ADT, and click the Properties tool to open its property sheet.
2. Select OBJECT or SQLJ_OBJECT from the Type list to display additional Attributes and Procedures tabs.
3. Enter as many attributes and procedures as appropriate.
4. Click OK to close the property sheet and return to your model.
Once you have defined your data type, you can base a table on it by opening the table property sheet,
selecting Object in the Type field, and then selecting your new data type in the Based on field.

2.8.2

Bitmap Join Indexes (Oracle)

A bitmap join index is a bitmap index described through a join query. It is defined on a base table, and stores the
row ids from the base table along with the indexed columns from the joined tables. You can design a bitmap join

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

493

index either automatically or manually. For detailed information about bitmap join indexes, see your Oracle
documentation.

2.8.2.1

Automatically Creating Bitmap Join Indexes Through

Rebuilding

You can automatically generate a bitmap join index for each fact table and the dimension tables that it references.
Each generated bitmap join index consists of the references that link a fact table to all the dimension tables
located on a single axis proceeding from the fact table.

Context
A reference between two fact tables does not generate any bitmap join index. A bitmap join index is constrained
and can only be defined for tables that are organized in a connected tree.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Rebuild Objects Rebuild Join Indexes
select one of the following modes:

to open the Rebuild Join Indexes dialog box, and

Delete and Rebuild - all existing indexes are deleted before join index rebuild.
Preserve - preserves all existing join indexes in the PDM.
2. Click the Selection tab, select one or more fact tables in the list, and then click OK.
A confirmation box asks if you want to continue.
3. Click Yes to generate a bitmap join index for each fact table.

Note
Automatically generated bitmap join indexes appear in the list of join indexes. To display the list, select
Model

494

Join Indexes .

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.8.2.2

Manually Creating Bitmap Join Indexes

You can manually create bitmap join indexes from the list of join indexes or via the base table property sheet.

Procedure
1. Select Model Join Indexes to open the List of Join Indexes, click the Add a Row tool, enter a bitmap join
index name in the Name column, and then click the Properties tool to open the new bitmap join index property
sheet.
2. Select a base table on the General tab.

Note
You can, alternately, create a bitmap join index from a table property sheet by clicking the Add a Row tool.
In this case, the Base table field is set automatically.
3. Click the References tab, and then click the Add References tool to open a selection window, which lists the
available references depending on the selected base table. Select one or more references in the list, and then
click OK.
The selected reference is displayed in the References list.
4. Click the Columns tab, and then click the Add Columns tool to open a selection window, which lists the
available columns depending on the selected references. Select one or more columns in the list, and then click
OK.
The selected columns are displayed in the Columns list.
5. Click OK to complete the creation of the bitmap join index and return to the model.

2.8.2.3

Bitmap Join Index Properties

A bitmap join index has the following properties:

Table 336:
Property

Description

Name

The name of the item which should be clear and meaningful, and should convey the item's purpose
to non-technical users.

Code

The technical name of the item used for generating code or scripts, which may be abbreviated, and
should not generally include spaces.

Comment

Additional information about the bitmap join index.

Stereotype

Sub-classification among bitmap join indexes.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

495

Property

Description

Owner

Name of the user who created the bitmap join index.

Base table

Name of the table that stores the bitmap join index.

The following tabs are also available:

Columns - Lists the columns used for the index. These columns proceed from the different dimension tables
linked to the base table. When you create a bitmap join index manually, you have to select the columns to use.
When you create a bitmap join index by rebuilding, the list of columns is initialized with all columns of the
tables involved in the join except foreign keys.
References - Lists the references used for the index.
Physical Options - You can define physical options for bitmap join indexes generation. These options override
the default physical options defined in the model. You can choose to generate these options by selecting the
Physical Options check box in the Join Index groupbox in the Keys and Indexes tab of the Generation dialog
box.

2.8.3

Database Packages (Oracle)

In Oracle, packages encapsulate related procedures, functions, and associated cursors and variables together as
a unit in the database. Packages usually have two parts, a specification and a body. The specification is the
interface with your applications; it declares the types, variables, constants, exceptions, cursors, and subprograms
available for use. The body fully defines cursors and subprograms, and so implements the specification.
Packages provide advantages in the following areas:
Encapsulation of related procedures and variables in a single named, stored unit in the database. This
provides for better organization during the development process and makes privilege management easier.
Separation of public and private procedures, variables, constants, and cursors.
Improved performance since the entire package is loaded into memory when an object from the package is
called for the first time.
You can generate and reverse engineer database packages in the same way as other database objects (see
Generating and Reverse-Engineering Databases [page 295]). When you reverse engineer a database package, the
sub-objects (variable, procedure, cursor, exception, and type) are created from the specification and the body of
the database package.

Creating a Database Package

You can create a database package in any of the following ways:
Select
tool.

Model

Database Packages

to access the List of Database Packages, and click the Add a Row

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

496

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Database Package .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Database Package Properties

To view or edit a database package's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and
fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 337:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

Specifies the name of the database package owner, which you choose from the list of users.

Privilege

Lets you specify whether the functions and procedures in the database package execute with the
privileges and in the schema of the user who owns it (definer), or with the privileges and in the
schema of CURRENT_USER (invoker).

Table

Specifies the table with which the database package is associated.

Template

Specifies the template on which the database package is based (see Database Package Templates
[page 504]). If you use a template, then the remaining tabs of the property sheet will be completed
by the template. If you make any modifications to the other tabs, then the User-Defined button to the
right of the field is depressed and the package is detached from the template and will no longer be
automatically updated when you modify the definition of the table with which it is associated.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Procedures Lists the procedures associated with the database package (see Database Package Procedures
[page 498]).
Variables - Lists the variables associated with the database package (see Database Package Variables [page
499]).
Cursors - Lists the cursors associated with the database package (see Database Package Cursors [page
500]).
Exceptions Lists the exceptions associated with the database package (see Database Package Exceptions
[page 501]).
Types - Lists the types associated with the database package (see Database Package Types [page 502]).
Initialization - Lets you define initialization code for the database package body. Typically initialization holds
statements that initialize database package variables. Initialization takes place after database package
creation and compilation in the server.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

497

 Specification - [hidden by default] Contains the public specification of the database.

Preview - Displays the SQL code that will be generated for the database package.

2.8.3.1

Database Package Procedures

You create database package procedures on the Procedures tab of a database package using the Add a Row tool.
To copy a procedure from elsewhere in the model, use the Create from Procedure tool.

Note
To rebuild database package procedure dependencies (along with other procedure dependencies), select
Tools Rebuild Objects Rebuild Procedures Dependencies
Dependencies [page 164]).

(see Rebuilding Trigger and Procedure

To view or edit a database package procedure's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 338:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed informa
tion about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming
conventions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to re
lease the = button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add ster
eotypes to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

DB Package

Name of the database package to which the procedure belongs.

Type

Allows you to choose between procedure and function.

Return data type

Allows you to define the return data type of a function.

Pragma

Allows you to type a compiler directive, that is, a string for specifying compilation parameters for
the procedure.

Public

Allows you to declare the procedure in the package specification and to permit use from outside
the database package. A private procedure (check box deselected) is only defined in the package
body.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

498

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

 Parameters Lists the input and output parameters required by the procedure (see Database Package
Parameters [page 503]).
Definition tab - Lets you define package procedures. Package procedures are not built using the structure of
templates defined in the DBMS. You have to type the entire package procedure definition. To do so, you can
use operators and functions to insert script items into the cursor definition.
For example, the definition of the CREDIT package procedure is the following:
CREATE PROCEDURE credit (Account_number NUMBER, Amount IN NUMBER) AS
BEGIN
UPDATE accounts
SET balance = balance + amount
WHERE account_id = acc_no;
END;

2.8.3.2

Database Package Variables

Variables can be declared within a package, and can be used in a SQL or PL/SQL statement to capture or provide
a value when one is needed. For example, you can define the variable in_stock with a boolean data type to verify if
a product is available or not. You create database package variables on the Variables tab of a database package
using the Add a Row tool.
To view or edit a database package variable's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet
tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 339:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.

DB Package

Name of the database package to which the variable belongs.

Data Type

Data type of the variable. You can use the Question Mark button to display the list of Standard
Data Types.

Mandatory

If selected, indicates that the not null clause is set on the variable, thus making it mandatory.

Length

Allows you to define the variable length.

Precision

Number of places after the decimal point, for data values that can take a decimal point.

Default value

Default value of the variable.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

499

Property

Description

Constant

Indicates that the variable is a constant. A constant has a value assigned. For example:
Credit_Limit constant REAL := 500 000;

Public

Allows you to declare the variable in the package specification and to permit use from outside the
database package. A private variable (check box deselected) is only defined in the package body.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

2.8.3.3

Database Package Cursors

A cursor is a multi-row query, which lets you name a work area and access its stored information. You create
database package cursors on the Cursors tab of a database package using the Add a Row tool.
To view or edit a database package cursor's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet
tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 340:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
DB Package

Name of the database package to which the cursor belongs.

Return Data Type

Allows you to define the data type of a cursor result value.

Public

Allows you to declare the cursor in the package specification and to permit use from outside the da
tabase package. A private cursor (check box deselected) is only defined in the package body.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Parameters Lists the input and output parameters required by the cursor (see Database Package
Parameters [page 503]).
Definition - lets you define the cursor. You can use operators and functions to insert script items into the
cursor definition.

500

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

For example, the following cursor allows locating in table emp, the employee number, name, and function in a
given department and for a given employee number:
Select empno, empname, job FROM emp WHERE deptno=20 and empno = num ;

2.8.3.4

Database Package Exceptions

PL/SQL allows you to explicitly handle internal and user-defined error conditions, called exceptions, that arise
during processing of PL/SQL code. You create database package exceptions on the Exceptions tab of a database
package using the Add a Row tool.
To view or edit a database package exception's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

501

The General tab contains the following properties:

Table 341:
Properties

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
DB Package

Name of the database package to which the exception belongs.

Pragma

Allows you to type a compiler directive, that is, a string for specifying compilation parameters for the
exception.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

2.8.3.5

Database Package Types

A type is a user-defined composite datatype that encapsulates a data structure along with the functions and
procedures needed to manipulate the data. You create database package types on the Types tab of a database
package using the Add a Row tool.
To view or edit a database package type's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet
tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an
administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 342:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.

DB Package

Name of the database package to which the type belongs.

Type

Allows you to declare the type as type or subtype. A subtype contains all the attributes and methods
of the parent type, it can contain additional attributes and can override methods from the type.

502

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Property

Description

Public

Allows you to declare the type in the package specification and to permit use from outside the data
base package. A private type (check box deselected) is only defined in the package body.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.

The following tabs are also available:

Definition - Used to declare the type contents.
The following example defines the type bank_account:
CREATE TYPE Bank_Account AS OBJECT (
acct_number INTEGER(5),
balance REAL,
status VARCHAR2(10),
);

2.8.3.6

Database Package Parameters

Database package procedures and cursors can use input and output parameters. For example, in a CREDIT
procedure, you could define the parameters Account Number and Amount. You create database package
parameters on the Parameters tab of a database package procedure or cursor using the Add a Row or Insert a
Row tools.
To view or edit a database package parameter's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property
sheet tabs and fields listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or
an administrator.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 343:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not nor
mally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about
the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions
specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button
to the right of the Code field.
Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereo
types to the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Parent

Specifies the database package parent of the parameter. You can see the database package prop
erty sheet by clicking the Properties tool at the right of the field.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

503

Property

Description

Data type

Data type of the parameter. You can use the Question Mark button to display the list of Standard
Data Types.

Default Value

Default value of the parameter.

Parameter type

Type of the parameter.

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.

2.8.3.7

Database Package Templates

Instead of modeling each individual database package by hand, you can use a template and have PowerDesigner
generate packages specific to each table. Database packages defined through a template are updated
automatically when you make changes to the table definition, and you can quickly create packages for multiple
tables from the Rebuild Table Database Packages dialog.
Database package templates are written in the PowerDesigner Generation Template Language (GTL).
PowerDesigner provides a template for generating CRUD procedures, and you can create your own templates as
necessary.
To define a database package from a template, simply select the template on the General tab of the database
package property sheet.

Creating a Database Package Template

The available database package templates are defined in the DBMS resource file. Select

Database

Edit

Current Database , click the Database Package Templates tab. To create a database package template, click the
Add a Row tool

Database Package Template Properties

To open a template property sheet, select it in the list and click the Properties tool.

504

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The General tab contains the following properties:

Table 344:
Property

Description

Name/Code/Comment

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,
while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.

DBMS

Specifies the DBMS version.

The following tabs are also available:

Definition - Contains a GTL template, which will generate a database package creation script based on the
properties of the associated table. For detailed information about working with GTL, see Customizing and
Extending PowerDesigner > Customizing Generation with GTL .

2.8.3.7.1

Rebuilding Table Database Packages

Database packages defined through templates are automatically updated when you modify the definition of the
table with which they are associated. You can use the Rebuild Table Database Packages dialog to add database
packages to tables that lack them or to overwrite any modifications you have made to packages associated with a
template.

Procedure
1. Select Tools Rebuild Objects
Packages dialog.

Rebuild Table Database Packages

to open the Rebuild Table Database

2. Select a rebuild mode:

Delete and Rebuild - deletes all table database packages associated with templates (including those which
have been modified) and recreates them from the template
Add Missing Database Packages - preserves existing database packages and creates packages only for
those tables that lack them
3. Select the templates to use in the rebuild. You can select as many templates as necessary and the rebuild will
create a database package for each template for each table.
4. [optional] Click the Selection tab and select the tables for which you want to rebuild database packages. By
default all the tables in the model are selected.
5. Click OK to begin the rebuild.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

505

2.8.4

Transparent Data Encryption (Oracle)

Oracle 10gR2 provides Transparent Data Encryption (TDE), encryption that is transparent for the user.

Context
When encrypting a column, Oracle creates an encryption key for the parent table and encrypts text data in the
column with a user-specified encryption algorithm. The table key is encrypted using a master key and placed in
the data dictionary.
The master key is stored in a secure location called a wallet, which can be a file on the database server. When a
user enters data into an encrypted column, Oracle retrieves the master key from the wallet, decrypts the table key
from the data dictionary, and uses it to encrypt the new data.

Note
In order to access the master key used to encrypt the table keys, you must create a master password to open
the wallet. To do this, right-click the model in the Browser, and select Properties. Click the Oracle tab, and enter
your wallet password in the Password Encryption field. Click OK to return to the model. The password will be
used to create alter statements for opening and closing the wallet.
You can create one or more encrypted column in one or more tables. You can specify the encryption algorithm to
be used, but all columns in a particular table must use the same algorithm. If you create a second encrypted
column in a table, and specify a different algorithm, the last specified algorithm will be used for all columns in the
table.

Procedure
1. Create a column and open its property sheet.
2. On the General tab, specify any of the following types, which support encryption:
CHAR, NCHAR, VARCHAR2, and NVARCHAR2
DATE and TIMESTAMP
INTERVAL DAY TO SECOND and YEAR TO MONTH
NUMBER
RAW
3. Click the Oracle tab and select the Encryption checkbox.
4. Select an encryption algorithm from the list.
5. [optional] Select the With salt checkbox in order to add some random bits to the encryption key.
6. Click OK to complete the column definition.

506

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.8.5

Clusters (Oracle)

A cluster is a schema object that contains data from one or more tables, which have one or more columns in
common. Oracle Database stores together all the rows from all the tables that share the same cluster key.
PowerDesigner models clusters as extended objects with a stereotype of <<Cluster>>.

Note
Clusters in Oracle v10gR2 and earlier are modeled as indexes with the Cluster check box selected. To upgrade
such clusters to v11 or higher, you must generate a new PDM with the appropriate DBMS target from your
original model. Simply changing the target DBMS will result in the loss of any existing clusters

Creating a Cluster
You can create a cluster in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Clusters

to access the List of Clusters, and click the Add a Row tool

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Cluster

Cluster Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a cluster property sheet, double-click its
Browser in the Clusters folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 345:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the owner of the cluster

In addition, the following tabs are available:

Columns lists the columns associated with the cluster. You can can define the following extended attributes
for cluster columns:
Table 346:
Name

Description

Data type

Specifies the data type for the cluster index.

Scripting name: Datatype

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

507

Name

Description

Length

Specifies the length for the cluster index.

Scripting name: DatatypeLength

Precision

Specifies the precision for the cluster index.

Scripting name: DatatypePrec

Sort

This clause instructs Oracle Database to sort the rows of the cluster on this column before ap
plying the hash function.
Scripting name: RowSort

Indexes lists the indexes defined for the cluster. You can can define the following extended attributes for
cluster indexes:
Table 347:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the owner of the cluster index

Scripting name: Owner

Unique

Specifies whether the cluster index is unique.

Scripting name: Unique

Bitmap

Specifies if the index is to be created with a bitmap for each distinct key, rather than indexing
each row separately.
Scripting name: Bitmap

Sort

By default, Oracle Database sorts indexes in ascending order when it creates the index. You
can specify NOSORT to indicate to the database that the rows are already stored in the data
base in ascending order, so that Oracle Database does not have to sort the rows when creating
the index.
Scripting name: Sort

2.8.6

Database Links (Oracle)

A database link is a schema object in one database that enables you to access objects on another database.
Database links are supported for Oracle 11g and higher. PowerDesigner models database links as extended
objects with a stereotype of <<Database Link>>.

508

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Creating a Database Link

You can create a database link in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Database links

to access the List of Database links, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Database link .

Database Link Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a database link property sheet, doubleclick its Browser in the Database links folder.
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 348:
Name

Description

Public

Specifies whether the database link is available to all users. If False, then the database link is pri
vate and is available only to you.
Scripting name: Public

The following extended attributes are available on the Oracle tab:

Table 349:
Name

Description

Shared

Specifies the use of a single network connection to create a public database link that can be shared
among multiple users. If selected, you must also specify a user name and password for the target in
stance on the remote server.
Scripting names: Shared, AuthenticatedBy, AuthenticationPassword

Connect to

Specifies the user name and password used to connect to the remote database using a fixed user da
tabase link.You need to specify CURRENT_USER to create a current user database link. The current
user must be a global user with a valid account on the remote database. If you do not specify a value,
then the database link uses the user name and password of each user who is connected to the data
base.
Scripting names: Username, Password

Service name

Specifies the service name of a remote database. If you specify only the database name, then Oracle
Database implicitly appends the database domain to the connect string to create a complete service
name.
Scripting name: ServiceName

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

509

Name

Description

Physical data model

Specifies the PowerDesigner model that contains the objects of the remote database. Use the buttons
to the right of the field to create, delete, select, or view the property sheet of the model.
Scripting name: LinkModel

2.8.7

Materialized View Logs (Oracle)

When DML changes are made to master table data, Oracle Database stores rows describing those changes in the
materialized view log and then uses the materialized view log to refresh materialized views based on the master
table.
Materialized view logs are supported for Oracle 11g and higher. PowerDesigner models materialized view logs as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<Materialized view log>>.

Creating a Materialized View Log

You can create a materialized view log as follows:
Open the property sheet of the table to which you want to attach the log, select the Oracle tab, and click the
Create button in the Materialized view log groupbox.

Materialized View Log Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a materialized view log property sheet,
double-click its Browser entry or click the Properties button on its parent table Oracle tab.

510

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The General tab displays the master table name and the comment. The following properties are available on the
Partitions tab:
Table 350:
Name

Description

Type

Specifies the method for paritioning the table. You can choose between:

Range/Composite - Partitions the table on ranges of values from the column list.

Hash - Partitions the table using the hash method.

List - Partitions the table on lists of literal values from column.

Reference - Equipartitions the table being created (the child table) by a referential constraint to
an existing partitioned table (the parent table).

System - Partitions the table by the partitions specified.

When you select a type, additional options are displayed, to allow you to specify the appropriate pa
rameters.

2.8.8

Editions (Oracle)

Edition-based redefinition can be used to upgrade database components while an application is in use. Editions
are supported for Oracle 12c and higher. PowerDesigner models editions as extended objects with a stereotype of
<<Edition>>.

Creating an Edition
You can create an edition in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Editions

to access the List of Editions, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Edition .

Editions are used primarily in conjunction with materialized views. Open the property sheet of a materialized view,
select the Physical Options tab, and expand the tree to query_rewrite_clause/unusable_editions_clause
to specify editions that the materialized view is unusable before or after.

Edition Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an edition property sheet, double-click its
Browser in the Editions folder.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

511

The following extensions are available on the General tab:

Table 351:
Name

Description

Parent edition

Specifies that the edition is created as a child of this edition. If no parent is specified, the edition is
created as a child of the leaf edition. At the time of its creation, the new edition inherits all editioned
objects from its parent edition.
Scripting name: ParentEdition

2.9

SAP Business Suite

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the SAP Business Suite, select the DBMS on which your
installation is running in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog, click OK to create an empty PDM, and then select
Tools

SAP Business Suite

Import SAP Business Suite Data Dictionary . To view these extensions to the

PowerDesigner metamodel in the Resource Editor, select

Model

Extensions , select the SAP Business

Suite extension, click the Properties tool, and expand the Profile node.
PowerDesigner supports importing any recent version of SAP Business Suite.
The following sections list the extensions provided for SAP Business Suite.

Model
The following extensions are available on the Data Dictionary tab:
Table 352:
Name

Description

Host name

Specifies the host name or IP address of the server on which the Business Suite installation is run
ning.
Scripting name: HostName

User name

Specifies the user who connects to the Business Suite server.

Scripting name: UserName

512

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

ABAP Components
ABAP components are based on standard PowerDesigner packages with a ABAP Component stereotype. The
following extensions are available on the Data Dictionary tab:
Table 353:
Name

Description

Created by

Specifies the user who created the object and when the change was made.
Scripting name: CreatedBy, CreatedOnDate, CreatedOnTime

Changed by

Specifies the user who last changed the object and when the change was made.
Scripting name: ChangedBy, ChangedOnDate, ChangedOnTime

Parent

Specifies the ABAP component that is the parent of the present component.
Scripting name: Parent

Customized by / Release

Specify the users who customized the component and wrote the release notes for the customiza

notes by

tion.
Scripting name: CustomizingResponsible, ReleaseNoteResponsible

Released

Provides release information about the component.

Scripting name: Released

Support web / desktop

Specify that the component can be displayed in the SAP NetWeaver Portal and in the desktop Net
Weaver client.
Scripting name: SupportWeb, SupportDesktop

Visible

Specifies that the component should be visible to users.

Scripting name: Visible

ABAP Packages
ABAP packages are based on standard PowerDesigner packages with an ABAP Package stereotype. The
following extensions are available on the Data Dictionary tab:
Table 354:
Name

Description

Created by

Specifies the user who create the object and when it was created.
Scripting name: CreatedBy, CreatedOnDate, CreatedOnTime

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

513

Name

Description

Changed by

Specifies the user who last changed the object and when the change was made.
Scripting name: ChangedBy, ChangedOnDate

Parent

Specifies the ABAP component or package that is the parent of the package.
Scripting name: ApplicationComponent

Software component

Specifies the software component to which the package is a support package.

Scripting name: SoftwareComponent

Main package

Specifies whether the package is a:

<empty> - Development Package

X - Main Package, which does not contain any development elements itself; and provides a
structure for its children

S - Structure Package

Scripting name: MainPackage

Namespace

Specifies a deprecated method for organizing package structures.

Scripting name: Namespace

Owner

Specifies the user currently responsible for the package.

Scripting name: Owner

Tables/Structures
The following extensions are available on the Data Dictionary tab:
Table 355:
Name

Description

Changed by

Specifies the user who last changed the object and when the change was made.
Scripting name: ChangedBy, ChangedOnDate, ChangedOnTime

Parent package

Specifies the ABAP package that is the parent of the table or structure.
Scripting name: PackageCode

Physical table

Specifies the database table on which the table or structure is based.

Scripting name: PhysicalTableCode

514

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Is extended

Specifies that the table contains extensions.

Scripting name: IsExtended

Columns (Fields)
Business Suite fields are represented as columns in PowerDesigner. The following extensions are available on the
Data Dictionary tab:
Table 356:
Name

Description

Field type

Specifies whether the field is:

<Empty> - Built-in type

E - Data element

S - Structure

L - Table type

Scripting name: FieldType

Domain

Specifies the domain attached to the column.

Scripting name: Domain

ABAP data type

Specifies the data type used by the runtime environment:

B, S, I - 1-byte, 2-byte, or 4-byte integer

C, N, B, F, G - Character, numerical, binary, float, or string

D, T - Date, or time

X, Y - Fixed or variable length raw

Scripting name: ABAPDataType

Data dictionary data type

Specifies the data type used in the Dictionary.

Scripting name: DataDictionaryDataType

Data element

Specifies the data element attached to the field, if of type E.

Scripting name: DataElement

Include structure

Specifies the included structure attached to the field, if of type S.

Scripting name: IncludeStructure

Lookup table

Specifies that lookup table from which to draw key values, if of type T.
Scripting name: LookupTable

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

515

Name

Description

Reference field / table

For numerical or currency columns, specify the reference field and table.
Scripting name: ReferenceField, ReferenceTable

Input help

Specifies the origin of input help:

<empty> - No input help exists

X - Explicit search help attachment to field

P - Input help implemented with check table

D - Explicit search help attachment to data element

F - Input help with fixed values

T - Input help based on data type

Scripting name: InputHelp

Indexes
The following extensions are available on the Data Dictionary tab:
Table 357:
Name

Description

Changed by

Specifies the user who last changed the object and when the change was made.
Scripting name: ChangedBy, ChangedOnDate, ChangedOnTime

DB index name

Specifies the associated database index name.

Scripting name: DBIndexName

DB include exclude

Specifies that a list of database systems is used as:

I - List of inclusions: create index on these DB systems.

E - List of exclusions: do not create index on these DB systems.

Scripting name: DBIncludeExclude

List of database systems
1-4

Specify lists of database systems for inclusion or exclusion by the index.

Scripting name: DBSYSSEL1, DBSYSSEL2, DBSYSSEL3, DBSYSSEL4

Extension index

Specifies that the index is an extension index.

Scripting name: IsExtensionIndex

516

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Status

Specifies the status of the index in the database:

<empty> - Create on database.

O - Do not create on database.

D - Create on database depending on DB

Scripting name: Status

Data Elements
Data elements are based on PowerDesigner extended objects with a Data Element stereotype. The following
extensions are available on the Data Dictionary tab:
Table 358:
Name

Description

Changed by

Specifies the user who last changed the object and when the change was made.
Scripting name: ChangedBy, ChangedOnDate, ChangedOnTime

Package code

Specifies the package containing the data element.

Scripting name: PackageCode

Default name

Specifies the default name for components using the data element.
Scripting name: DefaultName

Original language

Specifies the language in which the data element was defined.

Scripting name: OriginalLanguage

Data dictionary data type

Specifies the data type of the column in terms of the ABAP Dictionary.
Scripting name: DataDictionaryDataType, DataType

Length / Output length

Specifies the supported number of characters and the number that can be displayed in ABAP
forms.
Scripting name: OutputLength, Length

Precision

Specifies the supported number of decimal places.

Scripting name: Precision

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

517

Name

Description

Reference kind

Specifies the category of dictionary type:

<empty> - Direct type

E - Elementary type

S - Structured type

L - Table type

R - Reference type

D - Domain

Scripting name: ReferenceKind

Conversion routine

Specifies function modules that are executed when values are input to and displayed in the ABAP
screen field.
Scripting name: ConversionRoutine

Value table

Specifies that the permitted values for the data element are PK values of the selected table.
Scripting name: ValueTable

Signed

Specifies that negative values are supported.

Scripting name: Signed

Lowercase

Specifies that lowercase letters are supported.

Scripting name: Lowercase

Fixed values

Specifies that permitted values are limited to those specified.

Scripting name: FixedValues

Domains
The following extensions are available on the Data Dictionary tab:
Table 359:
Name

Description

Changed by

Specifies the user who last changed the object and when the change was made.
Scripting name: ChangedBy, ChangedOnDate, ChangedOnTime

Package code

Specifies the package containing the domain.

Scripting name: PackageCode

518

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Data dictionary data type

Specifies the data type of the column in terms of the ABAP Dictionary.
Scripting name: DataDictionaryDataType

Base domain

Specifies the domain that the present domain extends.

Scripting name: BaseDomain

Value table

Specifies that the permitted values for the domain are PK values of the selected table.
Scripting name: ValueTable

Conversion routine

Specifies function modules that are executed when values are input to and displayed in the ABAP
screen field.
Scripting name: ConversionRoutine

Fixed values

Specifies that permitted values are limited to those specified.

Scripting name: FixedValues

Signed

Specifies that negative values are supported.

Scripting name: Signed

Views
The following extensions are available on the Data Dictionary tab:
Table 360:
Name

Description

Changed by

Specifies the user who last changed the object and when the change was made.
Scripting name: ChangedBy, ChangedOnDate, ChangedOnTime

Root table code

Specifies the primary table of an aggregate.

Scripting name: RootTableCode

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

519

Name

Description

View type

Specifies that the view is a:

H - Help view

D - Database view

P - Projection view

S - Structure view, data selection not possible

C - Maintenance view

E - Entity view (no longer supported)

V - View variant

A - Append view

Scripting name: ViewType

Delivery class

Specifies that the delivery class of the view is:

A - Application table

C - Customer table, maintained by customer

L - Table for storing temporary data

G - Customer table, SAP can add rows

E - Control table

S - System table, maintained by SAP

W - System table

Scripting name: DeliveryClass

Maintenance status

Specifies the maintenance status of the view:

<empty> - Modifiable

R - Read only

U - Read and change

M - Time dependent view

Scripting name: MaintenanceStatus

View Columns (View Fields)

The following extensions are available on the Data Dictionary tab:
Table 361:
Name

Description

ABAP form name

Specifies the field's name in ABAP forms.

Scripting name: ABAPFormName

520

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Base table / field

Specify the table and field from which the field are drawn.
Scripting name: BaseTable, BaseField

Data element

Specifies the data element attached to the field.

Scripting name: DataElement

Is key

Specifies that the field belongs to a key area.

Scripting name: IsKey

Lock mode

Specifies the lock mode for the field:

E - Write lock

S - Read lock

X - Exclusive lock

Scripting name: LockMode

Maintenance status

Specifies the maintenance status of the field:

<empty> - View is available as normal

R - View field can only be read

S - View field is used to form subsets

H - View field is not transferred to the maintenance screens

Scripting name: MaintenanceStatus

2.9.1

Importing an SAP Business Suite Data Dictionary

An SAP Business Suite installation is built on a complex database structure, which comprises many thousand
tables with often cryptic names, and may include large numbers of extensions. In certain environments, there may
be multiple servers, each with different extensions. PowerDesigner allows you to browse the application
component and packages in the hierarchy, and to import them and their supporting logical objects for analysis,
comparison, and merging of data dictionaries.

Procedure
1. Create a new PDM targeting the DBMS hosting your Business Suite server. For a server running SAP MaxDB,
use the SAP HANA DBMS.
2. Select Tools SAP Business Suite
click Next on the Welcome page.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Import SAP Business Suite Data Dictionary

to open the wizard, and

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

521

3. Enter your Business Suite connection parameters and then click Next to connect.
Use the tools to the right of the Connection name field to create a new connection profile, review the
properties of the existing profile, or delete it. Business Suite connection profiles are stored in the registry.

Note
The user you specify must have read access to the following tables:
Table 362:

DD01L

DD03L

DD07L

DD12L

DD25T

DD29L

TDEVC

DD01T

DD03T

DD07T

DD12T

DD26S

DF14L

TDEVCT

DD02L

DD04L

DD08L

DD17S

DD27S

DF14T

DD02T

DD04T

DD08T

DD25L

DD28S

TADIR

The schema name is optional but may, in some environments, provide the necessary read permissions.
4. Use the Browse and Search tabs to navigate in the component and package hierarchy, select components,
packages, tables, and views to import, and then click Next.
Browse - Expand the component and package hierarchy, and select application components and
packages in the left pane to add their tables and views to the import. When you select a component or
package to import, its supporting tables and views are added to the subtabs in the right pane, and the
total number of tables and views to be imported is updated. Tables are selected for import by default, but
views are not. You can select or deselect tables and views for import as necessary:

522

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

 Search - Choose whether to search for tables and/or views and whether to match whole words only, enter
one or more strings to search on (separated by commas or new lines), and click Search. You can filter on
your result set dynamically by entering a string in the filter field. Select tables and views from your results
to add them to the import:

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

523

Note
Since an ERP system can contain many thousands of tables, we recommend that you import only a limited
subset of components or packages at a time. You can relaunch the wizard and import additional
components or packages as many times as necessary.
5. Review the objects that will be imported and then click Finish.
The component and package structure is imported, with tables located in their appropriate package, and
global domains and data elements are listed at the root of the model.

524

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

PowerDesigner stores the technical name of each object in its Code field, and uses the more intuitive short
description of the object as its name. Thus, for example, the table identified as SCMATRANSACT in the data
dictionary is displayed as Schedule Manager: Registered SAP Transactions in PowerDesigner.
Each component and package contains a diagram which shows the objects it contains:

Note
Not all packages contain tables. To view the structure of only those components and packages with
diagrams that do contain tables, right-click the model in the Browser or a diagram background and select
View ABAP Diagrams Containing Tables. Select a diagram in the tree and click OK to open it.
6. Review the imported metadata as appropriate. Configurable and filterable lists of each type of object are
available from the Model menu. For example, to display the List of Data Elements, select

Model

Data

Elements :

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

525

Note
To view lists of global objects, such as domains and data elements, ensure that you are in the context of the
model root (by double-clicking the Top-Level Component Diagram) before opening the list. To view all the
components, packages, or tables in the model, ensure that you are at root, open the list, and click the
Include Sub-Packages tool in the list toolbar. For detailed information about working with object lists, see
Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Objects > Object Lists
7. [optional] Perform a new import to enrich your model. You can perform as many imports as necessary, and
delete components, packages, or other objects as appropriate, to simplify your model and focus on the areas
that interest you.
8. [optional] To compare two or more Business Suite installations, import each one into its own PDM, and select
Tools Compare Models . For detailed information about working in this dialog, see Core Features Guide
> Modeling with PowerDesigner > Comparing and Merging Models.
9. [optional] PowerDesigner supports the merging of Business Suite PDMs and their generation to HANA to
provide the basis for establishing a business intelligence environment for reporting on your Business Suite
transactional data (see Generating an SAP Business Suite Data Dictionary to HANA [page 527]).

526

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.9.2

Generating an SAP Business Suite Data Dictionary to

HANA

PowerDesigner can help you prepare a HANA table structure to allow consolidated reporting on one or more SAP
Business Suite installations.

Context

Procedure
1. Create a PDM for each SAP Business Suite installation, and import the logical tables that you want to define
warehouse reporting on (see Importing an SAP Business Suite Data Dictionary [page 521]).
2. Analyze and purify your models, deleting components, packages, tables, and columns that are not of interest
to your reporting project.

Note
You should not edit the properties of Business Suite objects (except for the Comment field or Notes tab) or
create new objects, in order to ensure the integrity of the metadata that will be generated to the HANA
schema.
3. Select a model to act as the core warehouse model, and then select Tools Merge Models and merge the
other models into it one after the other to create a superset of all the components, packages, tables, and
columns that you want to generate to HANA.
For detailed information about merging models, see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner >
Comparing and Merging Models.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

527

4. Select

Tools

SAP Business Suite

Generate HANA Physical Data Model .

5. Select whether you want to Preserve package hierarchy, which is the default mode, and will recreate the
Business Suite component and package structure to the HANA PDM. Note that this structure does not
represent HANA packages. Deselecting this option will suppress the creation of these packages and will
generate all your tables to the new PDM root. In both cases, your tables will all be exported to the HANA
catalog.
6. Click OK to begin the generation.
PowerDesigner generates a new PDM targeting the HANA DBMS.

Note
PowerDesigner generates the Business Suite component and package structure to the HANA PDM.
7. Export your tables to your HANA server (see Exporting Objects to the HANA Repository [page 538]).
Implement loading of your transactional data to your HANA warehouse using your standard ETL solution.

2.10 SAP HANA

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the SAP HANA DBMS family, select the appropriate version
in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

PowerDesigner supports round trip reverse-engineering and generation of SAP HANA v1.0 tables and analytic
and attribute views.
The following sections list the extensions provided for SAP HANA.

Model (for Extended Storage)

The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 363:
Name

Description

Extended storage

Specifies the extended storage for the HANA database (see Extended Storage/ Extended Tables
(HANA) [page 537]). Use the tools to the right of the field to create, delete, or open the property
sheet of the external storage.
Scripting name: ExtendedStorage

528

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Click the Properties button to the right of the Extended storage field to open the extended storage property sheet,
which contains the following properties:
The following extensions are available on the Partitions tab:

Tables
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 364:
Name

Description

Type

Specifies the table type. You can choose between:

Row - [default] If the majority of table access involves selecting a few records, with all attributes

Column - If the majority of table access will be through a large number of tuples, with only a few

History column - Creates a table with a session type HISTORY, to support time travel quer

Global temporary - The table definition is globally available while data is visible only to the

selected, ROW-based storage is preferable.

selected attributes, COLUMN-based storage should be used.
ies, which are queries against historical states of the database.
current session. The table is truncated at the end of the session.

Local temporary - The table definition and data is visible only to the current session. The
table is truncated at the end of the session.

Scripting name: FullType

The following extensions are available on the HANA tab:

Table 365:
Name

Description

Logging

Specifies whether table logging is activated. You can choose between:

logging - [default]

nologging - specifies that logging is deactivated. As a result, the definition of the table is per
sistent and globally available and data is temporary and global. The resource manager should
therefore explicitly drop a NOLOGGING table.

Scripting name: LoggingType

Retention period

[if nologging] Specifies the retention time in seconds of the table created as nologging.
Scripting name: Retention

Auto-Merge

Specifies that automatic delta merge is triggered.

Scripting name: AutoMerge

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

529

Name

Description

Unload priority

Specifies the priority for unloading the table from memory from 0 to 9.
Scripting name: UnloadPriority

Schema flexibility

Specifies that the table schema is flexible.

Scripting name: WithSchemaFlexibility

Location

Specifies that partitions will be created on the listed instances using round robin scheme.
Scripting name: PartitionLocation

Multiple

Specifies that the location targets multiple HANA instances.

Scripting name: HasMultipleLocations

Using extended stor

age

Creates an extended table using extended storage. When selected, you can additionally enable sup
port for Row-level versioning.
Scripting name: UseExtendedStorage, EnableDelta

Group options

Specifies the group options.

Scripting name: GroupOptionClause

Options text

Specifies the SQL text of the table options. Options entered here will be set in their relevant fields, and
changes to the fields are reflected here.
Scripting name: FullTableOptions

The following extensions are available on the Partitions tab:

Table 366:
Name

Description

Type

Specifies the partition scheme type:

Hash - Distributes rows to partitions equally for load balancing and to overcome the 2 billion row
limitation. Specify an Expression listing the columns to partition on and the Quantity of partitions
to create. You may specify a second scheme of type Hash or Range.

Range - Creates partitions for specific values or value ranges. Specify an Expression and Range
specifier.

RoundRobin - Distributes rows to partitions equally without specifying partitioning columns.

Specify the Quantity of partitions to create. You may specify a second scheme of type Range.

Scripting name: FirstPartitionElement, Hash1Expression, Hash1Quantity,

Range1Expression, Range1Spec, Round1Quantity, SecondPartitionElement,

Hash2Expression, Hash2Quantity, Range2Expression, Range2Spec

530

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Columns
The following extensions are available on the Detail tab:
Table 367:
Name

Description

Column stored data

Specifies the stored data type.

type

DDIC data type

Scripting name: StoreDataType

Specifies the application data type.
Scripting name: DDICDataType

Indexes
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 368:
Name

Description

Type

Specifies the type of the index, which can be:

<none> - [default] The server will choose the appropriate index type.

Cpbtree - Compressed Prefix B+-Tree, which can show better performance for larger keys for
character, string, binary string, or decimal column types, or when the constraint is a composite
key, or a non-unique constraint.

Btree - Maintains sorted data that performs efficient insertion, deletion and search of records.

Fulltext - Creates an additional data structure to enable text search features on a specific col
umn in a table. Enables the Full-Text tab (see below).

Scripting name: DescIndex

Descending

[btree only] Specifies that the index should be created in descending order.
Scripting name: DescIndex

The Full-Text tab is displayed when you select Fulltext in the Type list on the General tab:
Table 369:
Name

Description

Phrase index ratio

Specifies the percentage of the phrase index between 0.0 and 1.0.
Scripting Name: FTPhraseIndexRatio

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

531

Name

Description

Search only

Specifies whether the original document should be stored or only the search results. When selected,
the original document content is not stored.
Scripting Name: FTSearchOnly

Text analysis

Enables text analysis capabilities on the indexed column. Text analysis can extract entities such as
persons, products, or places from documents, which are stored in a new table.
Scripting Name: FTTextAnalysis

Configuration

Specifies the path to a custom configuration file for text analysis.

Scripting Name: FTConfiguration

Fast pre-process

Specifies that fast preprocessing is used, and that linguistic searches are not possible.
Scripting Name: FTFastPreprocess

Fuzzy search index

Specifies that a fuzzy search is performed with an additional index (faster search, but higher memory
consumption).
Scripting Name: FTFuzzySearchIndex

Change tracking

Specifies whether the index should be built in an asynchronous or synchronous manner.

Scripting Name: FTChangeTrackingElement

Flush every (mi

nutes) / Flush after
(documents)

Specify how frequently an asynchronous index should be update.

Scripting Name: FTFlushEvery, FTFlushAfter

Language detection /

Specify the set of languages to be considered during language detection and the column where the

Language column

language of a document is specified.

Scripting name: FTLanguageDetection, FTLanguageColumn

MIME type / Mime-

Specify the default MIME type used for preprocessing (for example cf

type column

M_TEXT_ANALYSIS_MIME_TYPES and the column where the MIME type of a document is speci
fied.
Scripting name: FTMimeType, FTMimeTypeColumn

Token separators

Specifies the set of ASCII characters used for token separation.

Scripting name: FTTokenSeparators

532

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Keys
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 370:
Name

Description

Key type

Specifies the key type.

Scripting name: KeyType

Roles
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 371:
Name

Description

Global visibility

Specifies that the role is available globally.

Scripting name: GlobalVisibility

Global ID

[if global visibility] Specifies the external role name for the global user.
Scripting name: GlobalID

References
The following extensions are available on the HANA tab:
Table 372:
Name

Description

Cardinality

Specifies the type of cardinality.

Scripting name: HANACardinality

Join type

Specifies the join type.

Scripting name: HANAJoinType

Language Column

Specifies the language column.

Scripting name: HANALanguageColumn

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

533

Users
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 373:
Name

Description

Identification

Specifies the type of identification (global, local or external).

Scripting name: Identification

Distinguished name

Specifies the user's distinguished name (DN) in the directory or certificate.

Scripting name: DistinguishedName

Password

Specifies the clear copy of the password.

Scripting name: CopyPassword

Implicit Schema

Specifie"s that the database generation will use the stored procedure sp_grantdbaccess instead
of a create user statement.
Scripting name: ImplicitSchema

Default Schema

Specifies the first schema searched to resolve the names of objects for this user.
Scripting name: DefaultSchema

Packages
The following extensions are available on the HANA tab of HANA packages:
Table 374:
Name

Description

Structure package

Specifies that the package is a structural package

Scripting name: Structural

Package

Specifies the HANA object name.

Scripting name: _ObjectName_

534

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Facts (Analytic Views) and Dimensions (Attribute Views)

The following extensions are available on the HANA tab:
Table 375:
Name

Description

Default Client / Member

Specify the HANA default client, and (dimension only) member.

Scripting name: DefaultClient, DefaultMember

Multidimensional report
ing

Package / Name / Ver

sion

Last Updated Date / at

[facts] Specifies that multidimensional reporting is enabled.

Scripting name: MultidimensionalReporting
Specifies the HANA package, object name, and version.
Scripting name: _ObjectPackage_, _ObjectName_, _ObjectVersion_
Specifies when the dimension or fact was last edited.
Scripting name: _LastUpdatedDate_, _LastUpdatedTime_

Dimension Attributes and Fact Attributes

The following extensions are available on the HANA tab:
Table 376:
Name

Description

Default Member / Info

Specify the HANA default member and info object.

Object

Drill Down Enabled

Scripting Name: DefaultMember, InfoObject

Specifies the drill down is enabled for the attribute.
Scripting Name: DrillDownEnabled

Hidden

Specifies that the attribute is hidden.

Scripting Name: IsHidden

Key Attribute / Attribute

[Dimension attribute only] Specify that the attribute is a key attribute and that the attribute hierar

Hierarchy Active

chy is active.
Scripting Name: KeyAttribute, AttributeHierarchyActive

Data Type / Length /

Scale

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Specify the data type, length and scale of the attribute.

Scripting Name: AttributeDataType, Length, AttributeScale

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

535

Fact Measures
The following extensions are available on the HANA tab:
Table 377:
Name

Description

Measure type

Specifies the type of the measure:

simple - a measurable analytical element that is derived from the data foundation.

amount - based on a combination of data from OLAP cubes, arithmetic operators, con
stants, and functions.

Calculated measure

quantity - count the recurrence of an attribute.

Specify the data type, length and scale of the measure.

Scripting Name: MeasureDataType, MeasureLength, MeasureScale

2.10.1 Smart Data Access/Remote Sources (HANA)

With SAP HANA Smart Data Access, data can be merged in heterogeneous EDW landscapes (data federation),
making it possible to access data in remote sources without having to replicate it to the SAP HANA database
beforehand. PowerDesigner models Smart Data Access remote sources as extended objects with a stereotype of
RemoteSource.

Creating a Remote Source

You can create a remote source in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Remote Sources

to access the List of Remote Sources, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Remote Source .

Remote Source Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a remote sources property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Remote Sources folder.

536

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following properties are available on the General tab:

Table 378:
Name

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while

Comment

the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally
include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the ob
ject. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in
the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right
of the Code field.
Scripting name: Name, Code, Comment

Adapter

Specifies the adapter, and the type of access method to be used by the SAP HANA database to access
the data.
Scripting name: RSAdapter

Configuration

Specifies the connection parameters for the adapter.

Scripting name: ESConfiguration

Credential type / Cre

dentials

Model

Specifies the type of credentials required (currently only password) and the credentials to use
Scripting name: ESCredentialType, ESCredentials
Specifies the PDM that contains the definition of the remote source.
Scripting name: RSPDM

Keywords

Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate them
with commas.
Scripting name: Keywords

2.10.2 Extended Storage/ Extended Tables (HANA)

You can define an extended storage for your HANA database, which is an external SAP IQ database automatically
used to transparently archive and query data stored in extended tables. Extended tables are physically located in
the SAP IQ server, but logically sit in HANA and can be used as if they were regular HANA tables.

Creating the Extended Storage

1. Open the model property sheet, and click the Create Extended Storage button to the right of the Extended
storage field.
2. Click the Properties button to open the extended storage property sheet.
3. Enter the following properties:

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

537

Table 379:
Name

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users,

Comment

while the code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not
normally include spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information
about the object. By default the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conven
tions specified in the model options. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the
= button to the right of the Code field.
Scripting name: Name, Code, Comment

Configuration

Specifies the connection parameters for the adapter.

Scripting name: ESConfiguration

Credential type /
Credentials

Keywords

Specifies the type of credentials required (currently only password) and the credentials to use
Scripting name: ESCredentialType, ESCredentials
Provide a way of loosely grouping objects through tagging. To enter multiple keywords, separate
them with commas.
Scripting name: Keywords

Modeling Extended Tables

To specify that a table should be located in the extended storage, simply check the Using extended storage option
on the HANA tab of the table property sheet.

2.10.3 Exporting Objects to the HANA Repository

While HANA tables are generated directly to the catalog, analytic and attribute views are exported to the HANA
repository from where they will be deployed. PowerDesigner provides a wizard to allow you to export your views
and tables to the HANA repository and catalog respectively in a single action.

Context
Note
This feature requires a 32-Bit Java installation.
In your PDM, the HANA catalog is represented by the root of the model, while the HANA repository is represented
by a structure of HANA packages. In order to generate your tables and views correctly, you must place your tables

538

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

at the root (or in standard PowerDesigner packages), and your facts (analytic views) and dimensions (analytic
views) in their appropriate HANA packages.
In the following example, the tables in the Sales Tables physical diagram are at the root of the model, and
appear as shortcuts inside the Sales Hana package, which contains the corresponding fact and dimensions:

Tables and analytic and attribute views imported from HANA are automatically placed at the root and in HANA
packages as appropriate. When generating cubes from tables in your model (see Generating Cubes [page 239]),
launch the wizard from within a HANA package. If you have generated cubes at the model root, drag the
multidimensional diagram into a HANA package to move its contents.

Procedure
1. Select Database
Welcome page.

Apply Model Changes to HANA Repository

to open the wizard, and click Next on the

The wizard checks your model for consistency and displays any errors which may compromise the
generation.
2. Enter your HANA repository connection parameters and then click Next to connect:
Table 380:
Parameter

Description

Connection Name

Select an existing connection from the list or use the tools to the right of the
Connection field to create a new connection profile, review the properties of the ex
isting profile, or delete it. HANA connection profiles are stored in the registry.

Host name

Specifies the network name of the HANA appliance.

Instance number

Specifies the HANA instance number.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

539

Parameter
Port number

Description
Specifies the port to connect to. This field is initialized to 3<nn>15 (where <nn>
equals the instance number), which is suitable for connecting to a single tenancy
HANA installation. For multi-tenancy environments, you must modify the port num
ber to 3<nn>13 to connect to the SYSTEM database or 3<nn><xx>, where <xx>
is a number greater than 40, allocated to your database by the system.

User name/ password

Specifies the credentials to connect with.

Note
The account with which you connect must have at least the CONTENT_ADMIN,

MODELING, and PUBLIC roles.

3. Select HANA packages in your model in the left pane to make their contents available to export. Select the
facts to export in the right pane, and then click Next.
When you select a fact to export, its supporting dimensions are automatically selected for import.

Note
If you have previously imported objects from HANA, the archive model helps to determine model changes
since that point (see Archive PDMs [page 341]).
4. Select the catalog tables to export, and then click Next.
PowerDesigner automatically selects any catalog tables required by the selected facts and dimensions.

540

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

5. Review the objects that will be exported and then click Finish to generate them to the HANA repository.

Note
If PowerDesigner detects conflicts between changes made in the model and changes to the same objects
on the server, then a merge dialog (see Core Features Guide > Modeling with PowerDesigner > Comparing
and Merging Models) will open to allow you to select, for each conflict, which of the conflicting changes will
prevail. The resolutions that you select will first be applied to the model, and then your changes will be
exported to the the server.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

541

2.10.4 Importing Objects from the HANA Repository

PowerDesigner provides a wizard to allow you to import analytic and attribute views from the HANA repository,
along with their supporting catalog tables.

Context
Note
This feature requires a 32-Bit Java installation.

Procedure
1. To import into an existing PDM, select

Database

Update Model from HANA Repository .

or
To import and create a new PDM, select
2. Select Database
Welcome page.

File

Reverse Engineer

Update Model from HANA Repository

SAP HANA Repository .

to open the wizard, and click Next on the

3. Enter your HANA repository connection parameters and then click Next to connect:
Table 381:
Parameter

Description

Connection Name

Select an existing connection from the list or use the tools to the right of the
Connection field to create a new connection profile, review the properties of the ex
isting profile, or delete it. HANA connection profiles are stored in the registry.

Host name

Specifies the network name of the HANA appliance.

Instance number

Specifies the HANA instance number.

Port number

Specifies the port to connect to. This field is initialized to 3<nn>15 (where <nn>
equals the instance number), which is suitable for connecting to a single tenancy
HANA installation. For multi-tenancy environments, you must modify the port num
ber to 3<nn>13 to connect to the SYSTEM database or 3<nn><xx>, where <xx>
is a number greater than 40, allocated to your database by the system.

User name/ password

Specifies the credentials to connect with.

Note
The account with which you connect must have at least the CONTENT_ADMIN,

MODELING, and PUBLIC roles.

4. Select packages in the repository in the left pane to make their contents available to import. Select the
analytic views to import in the right pane, and then click Next.

542

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

When you select an analytic view to import, its supporting attribute views are automatically selected for
import.

Note
The archive model retains a snapshot of the structure of your objects at import time to help in determining
model changes when re-exporting to HANA (see Archive PDMs [page 341]).
5. Select catalog tables to import from the list, and then click Next.
PowerDesigner automatically selects any catalog tables required by the selected analytic and attribute views.
Select additional schemas to make their tables available for selection.

6. Review the objects that will be imported and then click Finish.
7. If objects are already present in the model, a merge dialog will open (see Core Features Guide > Modeling with
PowerDesigner > Comparing and Merging Models) to allow you to review the specific changes that will be
make. Approve or reject the proposed changes, and then click OK to perfom the import.
PowerDesigner will import schemas, users, and tables to the root of the model and analytic and attribute
views to their appropriate HANA packages. When the import is complete, click Close to exit the wizard.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

543

2.11

SAP Adaptive Server Enterprise

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the SAP Adaptive Server Enterprise DBMS family, select
the appropriate version in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner
metamodel in the Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMS definition files for AS Enterprise v12.5.3 and v15.0 are deprecated.
The following sections list the extensions provided for ASE.

Note
We do not provide documentation for the properties on the Physical Options and certain other tabs, though
minimal information is available for them in the Resource Editor. For information about these properties,
consult your DBMS reference documentation.

Tables
The following extensions are available on the Partitions tab (v15.0 and higher):
Table 382:
Name

Description

Partition

Indicates how records are distributed on table partitions. You must choose between:

Range - partitioned according to specified ranges of values in the partitioning column or col
umns (Scripting name: PartitionByRange).

Hash - partitioned by a system-supplied hash function (Scripting name:

List - partitioned according to literal values specified in the named column (Scripting name:

PartitionByHash).
PartitionByList).

Round robin - partitioned in a sequential manner (Scripting name:

PartitionByRoundrobin).

Each of the partitioning methods enables a list of partitions for you to complete, except round
robin by partition number, which requires only that you specify the number of available partitions
on a particular storage.
Scripting name: Partition

544

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Columns

[Range and Hash] Specifies an ordered list of columns used to determine into which partition a
row belongs.
Scripting name: PartitionByRangeColumnListColumn,

PartitionByHashColumnListColumn
Column

[List] Specifies the column used to determine into which partition a row belongs.
Scripting name: PartitionByListColumnColumnName

List

[Round robin] Specifies the table partitions

Scripting name: PartitionByRoundrobinSegmentEnumOnAbsence

Partition number

[Round robin] Specifies the number of partitions for the table.

Scripting name: PartitionByRoundrobinSegmentEnumOnPresence

Quantity

[Round robin by partition number] Number of partitions for the table

Scripting name: PartitionByRoundrobinSegmentEnumPartitionNum

Storage (segment)

[Round robin by partition number] Specifies the name of the segment on which to place the
table partition.
Scripting name: PartitionByRoundrobinSegmentEnumOnSegmentName

[list of partitions]

[all but Round robin by partition number] Specifies the list of partitions to be used
Scripting name: PartitionByRangePartitionListPartitionDefinition,

PartitionByHashPartitionListPartitionDefinition,
PartitionByListPartitionListPartitionDefinition,PartitionByRoundro
binPartitionListPartitionDefinition

Columns
The following extensions are available on the AS Enterprise/Sybase tab:
Table 383:
Name

Description

Store Java-SQL col

[v12.0 and higher] Specifies whether a Java-SQL column is stored separate from the row (set to

umn in row

False) or in storage allocated directly in the row (set to True).

Scripting name: InRow

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

545

Name

Description

Computed column is

[v15.0 and higher] Specifies that the computed column is materialized.

materialized

Encrypted

Scripting name: Materialized

[v12.5.3a and higher] Specifies that the column is encrypted. Enabled only for columns with a data
type that supports encryption.
Scripting name: Encrypted

Encryption key

[v12.5.3a and higher] Specifies an encryption key. Use the tools to the create or select a key (see En
cryption Keys (ASE) [page 548]).
Scripting name: EncryptionKey

Default decrypt value

[v15.5.0 and higher] Specifies the default constant value that is returned to users who do not have de
crypt permissions.
Scripting name: DecryptDefault

Compressed

[v15.7 and higher] Specifies that the data in the column is compressed.
Scripting name: Compressed

Compression Level

[v15.7 and higher] Specifies the level of column data compression.

Scripting name: CompressionLevel

Databases
The following extensions are available on the General tab:
Table 384:
Name

Description

Encryption key

[v16 and higher] Specifies the key used to encrypt the whole database.
Scripting name: EncryptionKey

For cluster

[v15.5.0 and higher] Specifies that the database will support clustering.
Scripting name: ForCluster

Type

[v15.5.0 and higher] Specifies the whether the database is of type:

[for standard databases] inmemory, temporary, or inmemory temporary

[for cluster databases] temporary, global temporary, or system temporary

.
Scripting name: DatabaseType

546

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Keys
The following extensions are available on the AS Enterprise/Sybase tab:
Table 385:
Name

Description

Key index is descend

[v12.0 and higher] Specifies if the index created for a constraint is to be created in descending order

ing

for each column.

Scripting name: DescKey

Model
The following extensions are available on the Encryption tab (v12.5.3a and higher):
Table 386:
Name

Description

Encryption password

Global encryption password.

Scripting name: EncryptionPassword

Web Services
The following extensions are available on the AS Enterprise/Sybase tab (v15.0 and higher):
Table 387:
Name

Description

Port number

Specifies the web service port number.

Scripting name: PortNumber

Server name

Specifies the web service server name.

Scripting name: ServerName

Database name

Specifies the database name used in the URL to access the web service.
Scripting name: DatabaseName

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

547

Web Operations
The following extensions are available on the AS Enterprise/Sybase tab (v15.0 and higher):
Table 388:
Name

Description

Alias

Specifies the name of the user-defined database alias.

Scripting name: Alias

Secure

Security option. clear indicates that HTTP is used to access this Web service. ssl indicates HTTPS is
used to access this Web service
Scripting name: Secure

2.11.1

Proxy Tables (ASE)

SAP supports modeling for ASE proxy tables.

For more information, see Proxy Tables (ASE/SQL Anywhere) [page 590].

2.11.2

Encryption Keys (ASE)

Encryption keys are supported for ASE v12.5.3a and higher. PowerDesigner models encryption keys as extended
objects with a stereotype of <<EncryptionKey>>.
Adaptive Server authentication and access control mechanisms ensure that only properly identified and
authorized users can access data. You can encrypt data at the system, database level or at the column level, to
restrict your security measures to only sensitive data, and minimize processing overhead.
Encrypting columns in Adaptive Server is more straightforward than using encryption in the middle tier, or in the
client application. You use SQL statements to create the encryption keys and specify columns for encryption.
Adaptive Server handles key generation and storage. Encryption and decryption of data occurs automatically and
transparently as you write and read the data in encrypted columns. No application changes are required, and
there is no need to purchase third-party software.

Creating an Encryption Key

You can create an encryption key in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Encryption Keys

to access the List of Encryption Keys, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

548

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Encryption Key .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Encryption Key Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an encryption key property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Encryption Keys folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the AS Enterprise/Sybase tab:
Table 389:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the owner of the encryption key.

Scripting name: Owner

For database encryp

Specifies that the encryption key will encrypt the entire database, rather than individual columns. Se

tion

lecting this option sets the Key to master key with a length of 256, enables the Initialization vector
option and disables the Padding of datatypes option.
Scripting name: ForDatabaseEncryption

Key

Specifies the kind of key. You can choose between:

user password - Enables the Password field, in which you must enter an alphanumeric string
of up to 255 bytes in length that Adaptive Server uses to generate the KEK.

master key - To use the master key (defined on the database).

system key - To use the system_encr_passwd database key (defined on the model).

Scripting name: Passwd, PasswordPhrase

Algorithm

Specifies the algorithm used to generate the encryption key. Currently, Advanced Encryption Stand
ard (AES) is the only algorithm supported.
Scripting name: Algorithm

Key length

Specifies the size in bits of the key to be created. Valid key lengths for AES are 128, 192 and 256 bits.
Scripting name: KeyLength

Initialization vector

Controls the use of an initialization vector when encrypting. When an initialization vector is used by
the encryption algorithm, the ciphertext of two identical pieces of plaintext will be different, which
would prevent the cryptanalyst from detecting patterns of data but would render the data on disk use
less for indexing or matching without decryption.
This option is enforced when the For database encryption option is selected.
Scripting name: InitVector

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

549

Name

Description

Padding of datatypes

Specifies the use of padding for datatypes whose length is less than one block. Padding can be used
instead of an initialization vector to randomize the ciphertext. It is only suitable for columns whose
plaintext length is less than half the block length. For the default AES algorithm the block length is 16
bytes.
This option is disabled when the For database encryption option is selected.
Scripting name: Pad

Default encryption

Allows the System Security Officer to create a default key for use on all encrypted columns which do

key

not have a keyname specified in create table or alter table. This is a database specific default key for
use with tables in the same database. The default key is stored in the database sysencryptkeys table,
the same as non-default keys.
Scripting name: Default

Dual control

[v16.0 and higher] Specifies that the key must be encrypted using dual controls.
Scripting name: DualControls

Password phrase

[v15.0.2 to 15.7] Specifies a default key for use on all encrypted columns which do not have a keyname
specified in create table or alter table. This is a database specific default key for use with tables in the
same database. The default key is stored in the database sysencryptkeys table, the same as non-de
fault keys.
Scripting name: PasswordPhrase

The following tabs are also available:

Key Copies - [v15.0.2 and higher] ASE allows users to access encrypted columns using their copy of a single
key. A key copy is designated for an individual user with a private password known only to the user, ASE does
not save the passwords on disk, so that even the SA cannot access the protected data. PowerDesigner
models key copies as extended sub-objects with a <<KeyCopy>> stereotype, and the following extensions are
available on the AS Enterprise/Sybase tab of its property sheet:
User - identifies the user for whom the key copy is made.
Password - specifies the password used to encrypt the key copy.

2.12 SAP IQ
To create a PDM with support for features specific to the SAP IQ DBMS family, select the appropriate version in
the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMS definition files for IQ v12.x, v15.0, and v15.1 are deprecated.
The following sections list the extensions provided for IQ.

550

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Note
We do not provide documentation for the properties on the Physical Options and certain other tabs, though
minimal information is available for them in the Resource Editor. For information about these properties,
consult your DBMS reference documentation.

Tables
The following extensions are available on the SAP IQ/Sybase tab (v12.4.3 and higher):
Table 390:
Name

Description

DBSpace

[v15.0 and higher] Specifies the dbspace in which to create the table (see Dbspaces (IQ) [page
558]).
Scripting name: DBSpace

Global temporary table

[v12.4.3 to 15.2] Specifies that the table is a global temporary table.

Scripting name: ExtGlobalTemporaryTable

Scope

[v15.3 and higher] Specifies that the table is either a global or local temporary table.
Scripting name: TemporaryTableScope

On commit

[v15.0 and higher] Action on commit.

Scripting name: OnCommit

Not transactional

[v15.0 and higher] A table created using NOT TRANSACTIONAL is not affected by either COMMIT
or ROLLBACK.
Scripting name: NotTransactional

Remote location

[v15.0 and higher] Used to create a table at the remote location.

Scripting name: At

Partition key

[v15.0 and higher] Specifies the partition key column.

Scripting name: PartitionKey

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

551

Columns
The following extensions are available on the SAP IQ/Sybase tab (v12.4.3 and higher):
Table 391:
Name

Description

DBSpace

[v15.4 and higher] Specifies the database file (dbspace) in which to create the column (see Dbspa
ces (IQ) [page 558]).
Scripting name: DBSpace

Number of distinct value

(Iq unique)

Defines the cardinality of the column (to optimize the indexes internally).
Scripting name: ExtIqUnicity

In addition, from v15.0 and higher, the Partitions tab allows you to override the allocations of partitioned column
values to different dbspaces (see Table and Column Partitions (IQ) [page 560]).

Indexes
The following extensions are available on the SAP IQ/Sybase tab (v15.0 and higher):
Table 392:
Name

Description

With nulls not distinct

[v15.4 and higher, when Unique] Specifies that more than one null value is permitted despite the
index requiring unique values.
Scripting name: WithNullsNotDistinct

Tablespace

[Non-text indexes] Specifies the index dbspace (see Dbspaces (IQ) [page 558]).
Scripting name: In

Notify

[Non-text indexes] Gives notification messages after n records are successfully added for the in
dex.
Scripting name: Notify

Word length

[WD indexes] Specifies the maximum word length that is permitted in the WD index.
Scripting name: Limit

Delimited by

[WD indexes] Specifies separators to use in parsing a column string into the words to be stored in
that column's WD index.
Scripting name: DelimitedBy

552

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Configuration

[Text indexes] Specifies the text configuration (see Text Configurations (IQ/SQL Anywhere) [page
573]) to be used to control the building of the text index.
Scripting name: Configuration

Immediate refresh

[Text indexes v15.2 and higher] Specifies that the index is refreshed immediately each time data is
written to the table.
Scripting name: Refresh

Keys and References

The following extensions are available on the General tab (v15.0 and higher):
Table 393:
Name

Description

DBSpace

Specifies the DBSpace where the object is stored (see Dbspaces (IQ) [page 558]).
Scripting name: PortNumber

Data Sources
The following extensions are available on the Data Movement (Lifecycle) tab (v15.0 and higher), and are required
when the first phase of a lifecycle policy must manage data in an external database:
Table 394:
Name

Description

Remote server name

Specifies the name of the server where the remote database is located.
Scripting name: Server

Remote database name

Specifies the name of the remote database from which data must be loaded.
Scripting name: DatabaseName

Server class

Specifies the type of connection that must be made to the external database. Select the appropri
ate value from the list.
Scripting name: ServerClass

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

553

Name

Description

Connection string

Specifies the connection string used to connect to the external database in the format:

JDBC - <host>:<port>[/database name]

ODBC - <odbc name>

Scripting name: JDBCConnectionString/ODBCConnectionString

User/group

Specifies the user or group name with which to log into the external database.
Scripting name: ExternalLogin

Procedures
The following extensions are available on the SAP IQ/Sybase tab (v15.0 and higher):
Table 395:
Name

Description

Temporary

[standard functions] Specifies that the function is visible only by the connection that created it,
and that it is automatically dropped when the connection is dropped.
Scripting name: TempFunction

Return data type

Specifies the procedure return data type.

Scripting name: ReturnDttp

Routine characteristics

[standard functions] Transact-SQL-like error handling and deterministic options.

Scripting name: RoutineCharacteristics

Sql security

[standard functions] Defines whether the function is executed as the INVOKER, the user who is
calling the function, or as the DEFINER, the user who owns the function.
Scripting name: SqlSecurity

URL

[web functions] Specifies the URL of the web service.

Scripting name: URL

Type

[web functions] Specifies the format used when making the web service request.
Scripting name: URLType

Header

[HTTP web functions] When creating HTTP web service client functions, use this clause to add or
modify HTTP request header entries.
Scripting name: Header

554

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Soap header

[SOAP web functions] When declaring a SOAP web service as a function, use this clause to specify
one or more SOAP request header entries.
Scripting name: SoapHeader

Certificate

[web functions] To make a secure (HTTPS) request, a client must have access to the certificate
used by the HTTPS server. The necessary information is specified in a string of semicolon-sepa
rated key/value pairs.
Scripting name: Certificate

Client port

[HTTP web functions] Identifies the port number on which the HTTP client procedure communi
cates using TCP/IP.
Scripting name: ClientPort

Namespace

[SOAP web functions] Identifies the method namespace usually required for both SOAP:RPC and
SOAP:DOC requests.
Scripting name: Namespace

Proxy

[web functions] Specifies the URI of a proxy server.

Scripting name: Proxy

Users
The following extensions are available on the General tab (v15.0 and higher):
Table 396:
Name

Description

Force change

Controls whether the user must specify a new password when they log in. This setting overrides
the password_expiry_on_next_login option setting in the login policy.
Scripting name: ForcePasswordChange

Login policy

Specifies the login policy to assign to the user (see Login Policies (IQ/SQL Anywhere) [page
565]).
Scripting name: LoginPolicy

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

555

Web Services
The following extensions are available on the SAP IQ/Sybase tab (v12.6 and higher):
Table 397:
Name

Description

Port number

Specifies the web service port number.

Scripting name: PortNumber

Server name

Specifies the web service server name.

Scripting name: ServerName

Name prefix

[DISH service type] Specifies a name prefix. Only SOAP services whose names begin with this pre
fix are handled.
Scripting name: Prefix

Web Operations
The following extensions are available on the SAP IQ/Sybase tab (v12.6 and higher) when the service type is not
dish:
Table 398:
Name

Description

URL

Determines whether URI paths are accepted and, if so, how they are processed.
Scripting name: Url

2.12.1

Reference Architecture Modeling (IQ)

PowerDesigner provides a special EAM model to help you determine the architecture required to deploy an SAP
IQ data warehouse solution to meet your anticipated workload. An advisor wizard generates architectures based
on one or more hardware servers, and comparison tools help you choose the best architecture based on your
requirements for cost and speed.
For detailed information, see Enterprise Architecture Modeling > SAP IQ Reference Architecture Model.

2.12.2 Information Lifecycle Management (IQ)

SAP IQ v15.0 and higher provides data placement capabilities and supports hierarchical storage management
with relocation of less critical data to cheaper storage. PowerDesigner offers a simple modeling structure to cost

556

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

effectively manage "aging" of data inside the data center from 1st tier high performance storage for frequently
accessed data through 2nd tier near-line storage for data that is infrequently accessed to 3rd tier archive storage
for data that must remain available for regulatory audits.
For detailed information about using PowerDesigner to model your IQ information lifecycle management, see
Lifecycles (PDM) [page 211].

2.12.3 Events (IQ/SQL Anywhere)

IQ (v12.7 and higher) and SQL Anywhere (v10 and higher) support events, which allow you to automate and
schedule actions. PowerDesigner models events as extended objects with a stereotype of <<Event>>.

Creating an Event
You can create an event in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Events

to access the List of Events, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Event .

Event Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an event property sheet, double-click its
diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Events folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the SAP IQ/SQL Anywhere tab:
Table 399:
Name

Description

Event is scheduled

Specifies that the server carries out a set of actions according to a schedule of times.
If selected, this option disables the "Event is triggered" option.
Scripting name: ScheduledEvent

Schedule definition

Enter the schedule of event trigger times here. Click the New button to launch a dedicated editor win
dow.
Scripting name: SchedulesText

Event is triggered

Specifies that the server carries out a set of actions when a predefined type of system event occurs.
This option is the default and, if selected, disables the "Event is scheduled" option.
Scripting name: TypedEvent

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

557

Name

Description

Event type

The event-type is one of the listed set of system-defined event types. The event types are case insensi
tive. To specify the conditions under which this event-type triggers the event, use the WHERE clause.
Scripting name: EventType

Trigger condition

Determines the condition under which an event is fired. For example, to take an action when the disk
containing the transaction log becomes more than 80% full, use the following triggering condition:
WHERE event_condition( 'LogDiskSpacePercentFree' ) < 20
The argument to the event_condition function must be valid for the event type.
You can use multiple AND conditions to make up the WHERE clause, but you cannot use OR conditions
or other conditions.
Scripting name: TriggerCondition

Handler

Each event has one handler.

The actions of an event handler are committed if no error is detected during execution, and rolled back if
errors are detected.
Scripting name: Handler

Enable

By default, event handlers are enabled. When DISABLE is specified, the event handler does not execute
even when the scheduled time or triggering condition occurs. A TRIGGER EVENT statement does not
cause a disabled event handler to be executed.
Scripting name: Enable

At (databases)

If you want to execute events at remote or consolidated databases in a SQL Remote setup, you can use
this clause to restrict the databases at which the event is handled. By default, all databases execute the
event.
Scripting name: Database

2.12.4 Dbspaces (IQ)

IQ distributes user data across multiple disks at the application level by representing each device as a dbspace. A
dbspace can be an operating system file or a raw disk partition. Dbspaces can contain both user data and internal
database structures used for startup, recovery, backup, and transaction management.
PowerDesigner allows you to allocate tables and tables partitions, columns and column partitions, indexes, join
indexes, keys, and references to specific dbspaces from each object's property sheet.

558

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Creating a Dbspace
PowerDesigner models dbspaces as tablespaces with additional properties. You can create a dbspace in any of
the following ways:
Select

Model

Tablespaces

to access the List of Tablespaces, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Tablespace .

Dbspace Properties
PowerDesigner models dbspaces as tablespaces (see Tablespaces and Storages (PDM) [page 221]) with the
following additional properties on the General tab (v15.0 and higher):
Table 400:
Property

Description

Catalog store

Specifies that the dbspace is created for the catalog store and will contain a single dbfile. If you select
this option, you must specify a path to the file.
Scripting name: CatalogStoreDisplay

File path

Specifies a physical file path for the dbspace.

Scripting name: As

Online

Specifies that the dbspace is online.

Scripting name: Online

Read-only

Specifies that the online dbspace is read-only.

Scripting name: ReadOnly

Striping

Specifies that the dbspace is available for striping.

Scripting name: Striping

Stripe size (in kb)

Specifies the size of the stripes.

Scripting name: Stripesizekb

In addition, the following tabs are available:

Cost - allows you to specify the cost per GB of storage for the dbspace (see Tablespace and Storage
Properties [page 222]).
DBFiles - lists the dbfiles associated with the dbspace.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

559

DBSpace Files
PowerDesigner models dbspace files as extended objects with a stereotype of <<DBSpaceFile>> with the
following additional properties on the General tab (v15.0 and higher):
Table 401:
Property

Description

Path

Specifies the file path to the dbspace file.

Scripting name: FilePath

Read-only

Specifies that the resource is read-only.

Scripting name: ReadOnly

Size

Specifies that the size of the dbspace file.

Scripting name: Size, SizeUnit

Reserve

Specifies the size of space to reserve, so that the dbspace can be increased in size in the future.
Scripting name: Reserve, ReserveUnit

2.12.5 Table and Column Partitions (IQ)

A partition is a physical division of the contents of a database table, based on values in the column designated as
the partition key, and allocated to a particular dbspace. You can override the allocation of values in certain
columns by specifying column partitions.

Creating a Table Partition

In order to create table partitions, you must first select a column as the Partition key on the SAP IQ/Sybase tab of
the table property sheet (see SAP IQ [page 550]), in order to display the Partitions tab.
You can create as many partitions as necessary for the table on this tab using the Insert Row and Add a Row tools.

Note
Some PowerDesigner features automate the creation of partitions (see Denormalizing Tables and Columns
[page 90] and Modeling a Lifecycle [page 212]. If you associate a table with a lifecycle (see Lifecycles (PDM)
[page 211]), PowerDesigner will delete all existing table partitions in order to create the necessary partitions to
move data between lifecycle phases.

560

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Table Partition Properties

To view or edit a partition's properties, double-click its Browser or list entry. The property sheet tabs and fields
listed here are those available by default, before any customization of the interface by you or an administrator.
The following properties are available on the General tab:
Table 402:
Property

Description

Parent object

[read only] Specifies the table of which the partition forms a part.

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while the

Comment

code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally include
spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object. By de
fault the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the model op
tions. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes to
the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Values

Specifies the upper bound of the partition, based on the value of the column specified as the partition key.
The max keyword can only be set on the last partition.

DBSpace

Specifies the dbspace with which the partition is associated (see Dbspaces (IQ) [page 558]). Select a
dbspace from the list or click the tools to the right of this field to create, delete, or search for a dbspace, or
to open the property sheet of the selected dbspace.

Overriding Partition DBspaces for a Particular Column

You can override the allocation of values in a particular column from the table partition dbspace to an alternate
dbspace. The column will continue to be partitioned based on the same partition key ranges, but the column
values for each range will be allocated to the alternate dbspaces.
You create column partitions on the Partitions tab of the column property sheet. Click the Properties tool to
specify the following properties:
Table 403:
Property

Description

Parent object

[read only] Specifies the column to which the partition belongs.

Comment

Provides more detailed information about the object.

Partition

Specifies the table partition for which this partition will redirect column values to an alternate dbspace.

Dbspace

Specifies the dbspace (see Dbspaces (IQ) [page 558]) to which column values contained within this table
partition should be allocated.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

561

2.12.6 Logical Servers and Policies (IQ)

SAP IQ v16 and higher supports logical servers, which provide the only means to access the multiplex server
nodes. PowerDesigner models logical servers and logical server policies as extended objects with a stereotype of
<<LogicalServer>> and <<LogicalServerPolicy>> respectively.

Creating a Logical Server

You can create a logical server in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Logical Servers

to access the List of Logical Servers, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Logical Server .

Creating a Logical Server Policy

You can create a logical server policy in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Logical Server Policies

to access the List of Logical Policies, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Logical Server Policy .

Logical Server and Logical Server Policy Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a logical server or logical server policy
property sheet, double-click its Browser entry in the Logical Servers or Logical Server Policies folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 404:
Name

Description

With stop server

Automatically shuts down all servers in the logical server when the

TEMP_DATA_IN_SHARED_TEMP option is changed directly or indirectly.

Scripting name: WithStopServer

The following extended attributes are available on the SAP IQ tab of logical servers:

562

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Table 405:
Name

Description

Membership

Lists the multiplex nodes (see Multiplex Servers (IQ) [page 564]) of the logical server.
Select the Add for logical coordinator membership option to specifies a logical server membership to
the current coordinator.
Scripting name: Membership, MembershipForLogicalCoordinator

Policy

Specifies the logical server policy applied to the server.

Scripting name: Policy

The following extended attributes are available on the SAP IQ tab of logical server policies:
Table 406:
Name

Description

DQP enabled

Specifies how query processing is distributed:

0 - Not distributed

1 - [default] Distributed as long as a writable shared temporary file exists.

2 - Distributed over the network, and the shared temporary store is not used

Scripting name: DqpEnabled-disp

Allow coordinator as

[ROOT policy only] Specifies that the coordinator can be a member of any user-defined logical server.

member

Enabled by default.
Scripting name: AllowCoordinatorAsMember-disp

Login redirection

Enables login redirection for logical servers governed by specified login policy. By default, login redi
rection is disabled at the logical server level, allowing external connection management.
Scripting name: LoginRedirection-disp

Redirection waiters
threshold

Specifies how many connections can queue before IQ redirects a connection to this logical server to
another server.
Scripting name: RedirectionWaitersThreshold-disp

Temp data in shared

temp

Enables temporary table data and eligible scratch data writes to the shared temporary store, provided
that the shared temporary store has at least one read-write file added.
Scripting name: TempDataInSharedTemp-disp

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

563

2.12.7 Multiplex Servers (IQ)

IQ v15.0 and higher supports multiplex, a highly scalable shared disk grid technology that allows concurrent data
loads and queries via independent data processing nodes connected to a shared data source. PowerDesigner
models multiplex servers as extended objects with a stereotype of <<MultiplexServer>>.

Creating a Multiplex Server

You can create a multiplex server in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Multiplex Servers

to access the List of Multiplex Servers, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Multiplex Server .

Multiplex Server Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a multiplex server property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Multiplex Servers folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the SAP IQ/Sybase tab:
Table 407:
Name

Description

Database

Specifies the database file with which the server is associated.

Scripting name: Database

Host port list

Specifies the machine where the database engine will run.

Scripting name: HostPortList

Role

Specifies the server's role in the multiplex environment.

Scripting name: Role

Status

Specifies whether the server is included or excluded. If a multiplex secondary server will be shut down
for an extended period of time, that server should be excluded. Excluding the server allows the coordi
nator to ignore this server when performing version cleanup.
Scripting name: Status

Failover

Specifies that the server is a failover server.

Scripting name: Failover

564

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.12.8 Login Policies (IQ/SQL Anywhere)

IQ (v15.0 and higher) and SQL Anywhere (v12 and higher) define the rules to be followed when establishing a
users database connection in a database object called a login policy. PowerDesigner models login policies as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<LoginPolicy>>.

Creating a Login Policy

You can create a login policy in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Login Policies

to access the List of Login Policies, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Login Policy .

Login Policy Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a login policy property sheet, double-click
its Browser entry in the Login Policies folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the SAP IQ/SQL Anywhere tab (Sybase tab before v16):
Table 408:
Name

Description

Password life time

Specifies the maximum number of days before a password must be changed.

Scripting name: PasswordLifeTime

Password grace time

Specifies the number of days before password expiration during which login is allowed but the default
post_login procedure issues warnings.
Scripting name: PasswordGraceTime

Password expires

Specifies that the user's password will expire in the next login.
Scripting name: PasswordExpiryOnNextLogin

Locked

Specifies that users are prohibited from establishing new connections.

Scripting name: Locked

Maximum connec
tions

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections allowed for a user.

Scripting name: MaxConnections

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

565

Name

Description

Maximum failed logins Specifies the maximum number of failed attempts, since the last successful attempt, to login to the
user account before the account is locked.
Scripting name: MaxFailedLoginAttempts
Auto unlock time

[v16 and higher] Specifies the time period after which locked accounts not granted the MANAGE ANY
USER system privilege are automatically unlocked.
Scripting name: AutoUnlockTime

Maximum days since

Specifies the maximum number of days that can elapse between two successive logins by the same

login

user.
Scripting name: MaxDaysSinceLogin

Maximum non-dba

Specifies the maximum number of concurrent connections that a user without DBA authority can

connections

make. This option is only supported in the root login policy.

Scripting name: MaxNonDBAConnections

Change password
dual control

[v16 and higher] Specifies that two users, each granted the CHANGE PASSWORD system privilege,
are required to change the password of another user.
Scripting name: ChangePasswordDualControl

Default logical server

[v16 and higher] Specifies the server to which the user using this login policy connects when the con
nection string specifies no logical server.
Scripting name: DefaultLogicalServer_disp

Root auto unlock time

[v16 and higher] Specifies the time period after which locked accounts granted the MANAGE ANY
USER system privilege are automatically unlocked.
Scripting name: RootAutoUnlockTime

[v16 and higher] The following extended attributes are available on the LDAP tab:
Table 409:
Name

Description

Primary / Secondary

Specify the names of the primary and secondary LDAP servers (see LDAP Servers (IQ) [page 567]).

server

Scripting name: LDAPPrimaryServer, LDAPSecondaryServer

Auto fallback period

Specifies the time period, in minutes, after which automatic failback to the primary server is at
tempted.
Scripting name: LDAPAutoFailbackPeriod

566

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Failover to standard

Permits standard authentication when authentication via the LDAP server fails due to system resour

authentication

ces, network outage, connection timeouts, or similar system failures.

Scripting name: LDAPFailoverToStd

Record LDAP DN re

Updates the ldap_refresh_dn value in the system table with the current time, stored in Coordi

fresh time

nated Universal Time (UTC)

Scripting name: LDAPRefreshDN

2.12.9 LDAP Servers (IQ)

IQ v16 and higher supports delegating the authentication of users to LDAP servers. PowerDesigner models LDAP
servers as extended objects with a stereotype of <<LDAPServer>>.

Creating an LDAP Server

You can create an LDAP server in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

LDAP Servers

to access the List of LDAP Servers, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

LDAP Server .

LDAP Server Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an LDAP server property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the LDAP Servers folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 410:
Name

Description

Activate LDAP server

Activates the LDAP server configuration object for immediate use upon creation.

after creation

Scripting name: WithActivate

The following extended attributes are available on the SAP IQ tab:

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

567

Table 411:
Name

Description

Search DN

Specifies the host (by name or by IP address), port number, and the search to be performed for the
DN lookup for a given user ID, along with the user created in the LDAP server for use by IQ, the pass
word to use, and whether it is encrypted.
Scripting name: URL, AccessAccount, Password, Encrypted

Attributes

Specifies the host (by name or IP address) and the port number of the LDAP server to use for authen
tication of the user, the connection timeout and number of retries, and whether TLS or Secure LDAP
protocol is used for connections for both DN searches and authentication.
Scripting name: AuthenticationURL, ConnectionTimeout, ConnectionRetries,

TLS

2.12.10 Remote Servers (IQ)

IQ v15.0 and higher supports remote servers, which define where remote objects mapped to a local proxy table
are located. PowerDesigner models remote servers as extended objects with a stereotype of <<RemoteServer>>.

Creating a Remote Server

You can create a remote server in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Remote Servers

to access the List of Remote Servers, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Remote Server .

Remote Server Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a remote server property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Multiplex Servers folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 412:
Name

Description

Class

Specifies the remote server class.

Scripting name: Class

568

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Read-only

Specifies that the remote server is a read-only data source. Any update request is rejected by IQ.
Scripting name: ReadOnly

Connection

Specifies the connection string in the format <machine-name>:<port-number> [ /

<dbname> ] or as a data source name

Scripting name: ConnectionInfo

2.12.11 External Logins (IQ)

IQ v15.3 and higher supports external logins, which are alternate login names and passwords that are used when
communicating with a remote server. PowerDesigner models external logins as extended objects with a
stereotype of <<ExternLogin>>.

Creating an External Login

You can create an external login in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Extern Logins

to access the List of External Logins, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

External Login .

External Login Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an external login property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the External Logins folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 413:
Name

Description

Local login

Specifies the local login name to which the remote login is assigned.
Scripting name: LocalLogin

Remote server

Specifies the name of the remote server.

Scripting name: RemoteServer

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

569

Name

Description

Remote login

Specifies the user account on the remote server, which is associated with the local user login.
Scripting name: RemoteLogin

Remote password

Specifies the password for the remote login

Scripting name: RemotePassword

2.12.12 Spatial Data (IQ/SQL Anywhere)

IQ v15.4 and higher and SQL Anywhere v12 and higher can store spatial data (data that describes the position,
shape, and orientation of objects in a defined space) using spatial reference systems.

2.12.12.1 Spatial Reference Systems (IQ/SQL Anywhere)

IQ v15.4 and higher and SQL Anywhere v12 and higher support spatial reference systems, which define the space
in which geometries are described. PowerDesigner models spatial reference systems as extended objects with a
stereotype of <<SpatialReferenceSystem>>.

Creating a Spatial Reference System

You can create a spatial reference system in any of the following ways:
Select Model
Add a Row tool.

Spatial Reference Systems

to access the List of Spatial Reference Systems, and click the

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Spatial Reference System .

Spatial Reference System Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a spatial reference system property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Spatial Reference Systems folder.

570

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:

Table 414:
Name

Description

Spatial reference

Specifies the SRID (srs-id) for the spatial reference system.

system identifier

Organization

Scripting name: SRS_Id

Specifies the organization that created the spatial reference system that the new spatial reference sys
tem is based on.
Scripting name: Organization

Organization coor
dinate reference
system ID

Specifies the numeric identifier the organization uses to identify the spatial reference system.
Scripting name: OrganizationSRSId

The following extended attributes are available on the Definition tab:

Table 415:
Name

Description

Definition

Specifies default coordinate system settings. If any attribute is set in a clause other than the

DEFINITION clause, the value specified in the other clause is used regardless of what is specified in
the DEFINITION clause.
Scripting name: Definition
Type

Specifies whether the system is Projected, Geographic, or Engineering. If a definition is given, this attrib
ute is computed from the definition text.
Scripting name: SRSType

Transform defini
tion

Specify a description of the transform to use for the spatial reference system.
Scripting name: TransformDefinition

The following extended attributes are available on the Settings tab:

Table 416:
Name

Description

Line interpretation

Specifies how the SRS interprets lines between points.

Scripting name: LineInterpretation

Axis order

Specifies the order in which values are given for each axis.
Scripting name: AxisOrder

Polygon format

Specifies how polygons are interpreted.

Scripting name: PolygonFormat

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

571

Name

Description

Storage format

Specifies how data is stored.

Scripting name: StorageFormat

The following extended attributes are available on the Coordinate tab:

Table 417:
Name

Description

<Axis>/Bounded/

Specifies whether the axis is bounded or unbounded and, if it is bounded, the minimum and maximum

Unbounded

values.
Scripting name: BoundedCoordinate<Axis>, MinCoordinate<Axis>,

MaxCoordinate<Axis>
Ellipsoid axis length [round earth systems] Specifies the values to use for representing the Earth as an ellipsoid.
Scripting name: SemiMajorAxisLength, SemiMinorAxisLength, InverseFlattening
Grid Size

[planar systems] Specifies the size of the grid to use when performing calculations.
Scripting name: GridSize

Tolerance

[planar systems] Specifies the precision to use when comparing points.

Scripting name: Tolerance

Linear/Angular unit Specify the linear and angular units of measure for the spatial reference system.
of measure

Scripting name: LinearUnitOfMeasure, AngularUnitOfMeasure

2.12.12.2 Spatial Units of Measure (IQ/SQL Anywhere)

IQ v15.4 and higher and SQL Anywhere v12 and higher support spatial units of measure, which define the units in
which geographic coordinates are measured, and how these units are converted to radians or meters.
PowerDesigner models spatial units of measure as extended objects with a stereotype of <<SpatialUnitOf
Measure>>.

Creating a Spatial Unit of Measure

You can create a spatial unit of measure in any of the following ways:
Select Model
Row tool.

Spatial Units of Measure

to access the List of Spatial Units of Measure, and click the Add a

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

572

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Spatial Unit of Measure .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Spatial Unit of Measure Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a spatial unit of measure property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Spatial Units of Measure folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 418:
Name

Description

Type

Specifies the kind of unit. Linear units are used for distances and angular units are used for angles.
Scripting name: Type

Conversion factor

Specifies how to convert the defined units to the base unit of measure (radians or meters).
Scripting name: ConversionFactor

2.12.13 Full Text Searches (IQ/SQL Anywhere)

Full text search can quickly find all instances of a term (word) in a database without having to scan table rows and
without having to know which column a term is stored in. IQ (v15.2 and higher) and SQL Anywhere) support full
text searches through text configurations and text indexes, which store complete positional information for every
instance of every term in every indexed column.

2.12.13.1 Text Configurations (IQ/SQL Anywhere)

Text configuration objects are supported for IQ (v15.2 and higher) and SQL Anywhere (v12 and higher) to control
the creation of text indexes. PowerDesigner models text configurations as extended objects with a stereotype of
<<TextConfiguration>>.
Text configurations contain a set of configuration settings that control the characteristics of text index data such
as what terms to ignore, and the minimum and maximum length of terms to include in the index. Once you have
created a text configuration, you can select it to control a text index on the SAP IQ/SQL Anywhere/Sybase tab of
your text index property sheet (see Text Indexes (IQ/SQL Anywhere) [page 574]).

Creating a Text Configuration

You can create a text configuration in any of the following ways:
Select
tool.

Model

Text Configurations

to access the List of Text Configurations, and click the Add a Row

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

New

Text Configuration .

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

573

Text Configuration Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a text configuration property sheet,
double-click its Browser entry in the Text Configurations folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 419:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the owner of the text configuration. Use the tools to the right of the field to create or choose
an owner or to delete or inspect the properties of the current owner.
Scripting name: Owner

Template

Specifies a text configuration to use as the template for creating this one.
Scripting name: ParentConfiguration

The following extended attributes are available on the SAP IQ/SQL Anywhere/Sybase tab:
Table 420:
Name

Description

Minimum/Maximum

Specify the minimum and maximum length in characters of terms that will be included in the index.

Term Length

Text breaker

Scripting name: MinTermLength, MaxTermLength

Specifies the name of the algorithm to use for separating column values into terms.
Scripting name: TextBreaker

Stoplist

Specifies terms to ignore when building a text index.

Scripting name: StopList

2.12.13.2 Text Indexes (IQ/SQL Anywhere)

Text indexes are supported for IQ (v15.2 and higher) and SQL Anywhere (v12 and higher) to enable fast full text
searching.
You create a text index by creating a standard index (see Creating Standard, Key, or Function-Based Indexes
[page 124]), and selecting the type TEXT. For information about the properties specific to text indexes, see SAP IQ
[page 550].

574

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.12.14 Indexes (IQ)

Before creating IQ indexes, you should consider the implications of various types of indexes on the database
server memory and disk space. The set of indexes you define for any given column can have dramatic impact on
the speed of query processing.
There are four main criteria for choosing indexes:
Number of unique values
Types of queries
Disk space usage
Data types
You should consider all criteria in combination, rather than individually. Try to anticipate for the data in each
column, the number of unique and total values, the query results users will want, and whether the data will be
used in ad hoc joins or join indexes.
The following types of index are available:
HG HighGroup indexes are used for GROUP BY, COUNT(DISTINCT) and SELECT DISTINCT statements
when data has more than 1000 unique values
HNG HighNonGroup indexes make equality comparisons, SUM and AVG calculations very fast when data has
more than 1000 unique values. Nonequality comparisons can also be done
LF LowFast indexes are used for columns that have a very low number of unique values. This index also
facilitates join index processing (Join Indexes (IQ/Oracle) [page 577]). It is one of the two indexes allowed
for columns used in join relationships.
CMP Compare indexes are used for columns that store the binary comparison (<, >, or =) of any two distinct
columns with identical data types, precision, and scale.
TEXT Full text indexes (see Full Text Searches (IQ/SQL Anywhere) [page 573]).
WD Used to index keywords by treating the contents of a CHAR or VARCHAR column as a delimited list.
DATE, TIME, and DTTM For date and timestamp columns.
For detailed information about choosing index types, see your IQ documentation.

2.12.14.1 Rebuilding IQ Indexes

As you develop a PDM or modify an existing one, you may change data types, alter the percentage of distinct
values or change the number of values in tables. You must then rebuild the IQ indexes to reflect these changes.

Context
When you rebuild indexes, PowerDesigner determines the index type based on information contained from the
table statistics, using the number field, which indicates the estimated number of records per table, and the
percentage of distinct values to compute the number of unique values. If you have not specified a number of rows
for the table, PD assumes that the table will include at least 1 row of data.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

575

The rebuild process creates a FASTPROJECTION index for all columns, unless any of the following criteria apply:
Table 421:
Criteria

Index type

If no statistics are provided and the column has an undefined data type

No index is created

Low number of unique values in a column

LOWFAST

Column used in join predicate

High number of unique values in a column

HIGHNONGROUP

No COUNT DISTINCT, SELECT DISTINCT, or GROUP BY queries required

Column used in join predicate

HIGHGROUP

High number of unique values in a column (more that 1000)

Anticipate COUNT DISTINCT, SELECT DISTINCT, or GROUP BY queries
Column must enforce uniqueness
Column without numeric datatype

No index is created

Column with date type

DATE

Column with time type

TIME

Column with datetime or smalldatetime type

DTTM

For example (IQ v12.5, Table A contains 1500 rows)

Table 422:
Column

% Distinct values

Unique values

Rebuild indexes generates

Col_1 integer

100

1500

HG index

Col_2 integer

50

750

LF index

Col_3 integer

no index

Col_4 char (10)

100

1500

no index

Col_5 char (10)

50

750

LF index

Procedure
1. Select

576

Tools

Rebuild Objects

Rebuild Indexes

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

to open the Rebuild Indexes dialog box:

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2. Select a default name to generates IQ indexes. You can use the following variables:
%COLUMN% - Column name
%INDEXTYPE% - Type of index to be rebuilt
%TABLE% - Name or code of table (based on display preferences)
3. Specify a mode to use. You can choose between:
Delete and Rebuild - All existing indexes are deleted before index rebuild
Preserve Indexes - Preserves all existing indexes
4. [optional] Select the Include HNG and DATE/TIME indexes option to permit the creation of these specialized
indexes for appropriate columns. If you do not select this option then only HG and LF indexes will be created.
5. [optional] Select the Update statistics before rebuild option to update such statistics as the number of records
in a table and the number of distinct values in a column before performing the rebuild. Selecting this option
can help with optimizing the rebuild.
6. [optional] Click the Selection tab and select or clear checkboxes to specify for which tables you want to
rebuild indexes.
7. Click OK, and then Yes to confirm the rebuilding of your indexes.

2.12.15 Join Indexes (IQ/Oracle)

A join index is a special type of index, which represents a full outer join of two or more tables, where all rows from
both tables are included in the result (with NULL returned for any column with no matching value). The query
engine may use this full outer join as a starting point for queries that include left outer, right outer, and inner joins.
Join indexes are defined from references. You can create a join index for any set of columns that your users
commonly join to resolve queries.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

577

While some references are based on keys, IQ allows you to create user-defined references to include the exact join
required by your foreseen queries.

Creating a Join Index

You can create a join index in any of the following ways:
Open the property sheet of a table, click the Join Index tab, and click the Add a Row tool. The join index is
created with the selected table specified as the base table.
Select

Model

Join Indexes , and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

Join Index

Automatically, for each fact table and the dimension table it references by selecting
Objects

Rebuild Join Indexes

Tools

Rebuild

(see Automatically Creating Join Indexes Through Rebuilding [page 579]).

Join Index Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a join index property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry in the Join Indexes folder.
The General tab contains the following properties:
Table 423:
Property

Description

Name/Code/

Identify the object. The name should clearly convey the object's purpose to non-technical users, while the

Comment

code, which is used for generating code or scripts, may be abbreviated, and should not normally include
spaces. You can optionally add a comment to provide more detailed information about the object. By de
fault the code is generated from the name by applying the naming conventions specified in the model op
tions. To decouple name-code synchronization, click to release the = button to the right of the Code field.

Stereotype

Extends the semantics of the object. You can enter a stereotype directly in this field, or add stereotypes to
the list by specifying them in an extension file.

Owner

Specifies the user who is the owner of the join index (usually its creator). Use the tools to the right of the
list to create, browse for, or view the properties of the currently selected object.

Comment

Descriptive label for the join index.

Base table

Specifies the name of the table or materialized view that stores the join index.

DBSpace

[IQ only] Specifies the DBSpace that will contain the join index.

The following tabs are also available:

Columns - Lists the columns used for the join index.
References - Lists the references used for the join index.

578

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.12.15.1 Automatically Creating Join Indexes Through

Rebuilding
You can automatically generate a join index for each selected fact table and the dimension tables that it
references. Each rebuilt join index contains the references that link the fact table to all the dimension tables
located on a single axis proceeding from the fact table.

Context

A join index is constrained and can only be defined for tables that are organized in a connected tree. A reference
between two fact tables does not generate any join index.

Procedure
1. Select

Tools

Rebuild Objects

Rebuild Join Indexes

to open the Rebuild Join Indexes dialog.

2. On the General tab, select the appropriate mode to use:

Delete and Rebuild - all existing indexes are deleted before join index rebuild.
Preserve - preserves all existing join indexes
3. Click the Selection tab, and select one or more fact tables from the list:

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

579

4. Click OK, and then Yes to confirm the rebuild.

A join index is generated for each fact table. The generated join indexes are available in the list of join indexes
(select

Model

Join Indexes ).

2.12.15.2 Adding References to a Join Index

You can add a reference to any join index. You do this, for example, when you create a new reference that you
want to include in an existing join index.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of the join index and, if necessary, specify the appropriate base table and DBSpace
on the General tab.
2. Click the References tab, and click the Add References tool to open a selection box listing all the available
references in the PDM. Select the appropriate references in the list and click OK to add them to the join index.
3. Click OK to save your changes and return to the model.

580

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.12.16 IQ Data Movement Scripts

PowerDesigner can generate data movement scripts to populate your AS IQ data warehouse from other
databases. The script can generate a flat file for loading to the IQ data warehouse and create Insert Location
statements for use with a proxy database (for ASE and ASA only).

Context
To create a data movement script, you must:
[optional] Specify mappings between the tables in your data source and your AS IQ database
Generate the data movement script

Procedure
1. To enable the Data Movement extensions in your model, select Model Extensions , click the Attach an
Extension tool, select the Data Movement IQ (on the General Purpose tab), and click OK to attach it.
2. Right-click the model in the Browser and select Properties to open its property sheet, then click the Data
Movement tab and set the following properties as appropriate to control the files used during data movement:
Table 424:
Property

Description

Field / Row delimiter

Specify the delimiters to be used between fields and between rows in the dump file.

Fully delimited file

Specifies that each row ends with a field delimiter before the row delimiter.

Maximum image or

Specifies the maximum length of an image (or text) record, to which it will be truncated if neces

text size

sary.

Load file directory

Specifies the directory where the load file is located.

Note
You can override these global data movement options for a specific table (and specify a table-specific
dump file for importing) by opening its property sheet and enter table-specific values on the Data
Movement tab.

3. In your IQ warehouse PDM, right-click the model in the Browser and select New Data Source to create a
data source to populate your IQ Data Warehouse. Enter a name for the source and then click the Models tab,
click the Add Models tool, and select your source model.
4. Click the data source Database Connection tab, and select a data source, login, and password to connect to
your source database.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

581

5. Click the data source Data Movement tab, and enter the following properties as appropriate to access the
remote server:
Table 425:
Property

Description

Remote server name

Specifies the name of the remote server used in the interface file for IQ server.

Remote database

Specifies the name of the remote database.

name
Data source name

Specifies the label given to the data source in the sql.ini file.

Dump file directory

Specifies the directory where the 'dump' file (external flat file), that contains the data to be im
ported, will be created.

Local user name

6. [optional] Select
tables.

Specifies the database user name.

Tools

Mapping Editor

and create mappings between your source and warehouse

For detailed information about using the Mapping Editor, see Core Features Guide > Linking and Synchronizing
Models > Object Mappings.

2.12.16.1 Generating the Data Movement Script

You can generate the data movement script from the Tools menu.

Procedure
1. Select
files.

Tools

Extended Generation

, and specify a directory in which to generate your data movement

2. [optional] Click the Selection tab and specify for which tables and/or data sources you want to generate a
data movement script.
3. [optional] Click the Options tab and specify the following generation options as appropriate:
Use Mappings Specifies to use mappings to control the data movement.
Data Movement Method Specifies the type of script to generate:
Insert Location [IQ or ASE only] Create a loadscript for connecting the source database to the
IQ server. If the data source is not an IQ or ASE database, then no loadscript will be generated.
External File Create a dump file from the source database together with a loadscript to upload
it to the IQ server.
4. [optional] Click the Generated Files tab to review the names and locations of the files to be generated.
5. Click OK to begin the generation of the data movement script.

582

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.13 SAP SQL Anywhere

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the SAP SQL Anywhere (formerly AS Anywhere) DBMS
family, select the appropriate version in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the
PowerDesigner metamodel in the Resource Editor, select
Profile node.

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the

Note
The DBMS definition files for AS Anywhere/ SQL Anywhere v9 and v10 are deprecated.
The following sections list the extensions provided for SQL Anywhere.

Note
We do not provide documentation for the properties on the Physical Options and certain other tabs, though
minimal information is available for them in the Resource Editor. For information about these properties,
consult your DBMS reference documentation.

Columns
The following extensions are available on the SQL Anywhere/Sybase tab (v10 and higher):
Table 426:
Name

Description

Column is compressed

Specifies whether this column is stored in a compressed format.

Scripting name: Compressed

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

583

Tables
The following extensions are available on the SQL Anywhere/Sybase tab:
Table 427:
Name

Description

PCTFREE

Specifies the percentage of free space to reserve for each table page. If there is no free space in a
table page, every increase in the size of a row on that page requires the row to be split across mul
tiple table pages, causing row fragmentation and possible performance degradation.
Enter an integer between 0 (no free space is to be left on each page) and 100 (high values cause
each row to be inserted into a page by itself. If PCTFREE is not set, 200 bytes are reserved in each
page.
Scripting name: PctFree

Dbspace (tablespace)

Specifies the dbspace in which the table is to be created

Scripting name: DbspaceIn

Remote location

Creates a table at the specified remote location in addition to a proxy table on the current data
base that maps to the remote table. Supports the semicolon (;) as a field delimiter in the locationstring. If no semicolon is present, a period is the field delimiter.
Scripting name: At

Encrypted

Encrypts the table using the encryption key and algorithm specified at database creation time. En
crypting a table may take time, depending on the size of the table.
Scripting name: Encrypted

Temporary table/Global
temporary table

Specifies either temporary table is a global or a local temporary table.

Scripting name: [v10 and higher] TemporaryTable, [up to v9]

ExtGlobalTemporaryTable
Not transactional

[temporary tables] Specifies that the temporary table is not affected by either COMMIT or ROLL
BACK. This can provide performance improvements because operations on non-transactional
temporary tables do not require entries in the rollback log. For example, NOT TRANSACTIONAL
may be useful if procedures that use the temporary table are called repeatedly with no intervening
COMMITs or ROLLBACKs.
Scripting name: TemporaryTableOptionsNotTransactional

On commit

[temporary tables] Specifies that the rows of a temporary table are deleted on COMMIT.
Scripting name: TemporaryTableOptionsOnCommit

584

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Indexes
The following extensions are available on the SQL Anywhere/Sybase tab:
Table 428:
Name

Description

Tablespace

[Non-text indexes] Specifies the index dbspace.

Scripting name: In

Virtual index

[v10 and higher] The VIRTUAL keyword is primarily for use by the Index Consultant. A virtual index
mimics the properties of a real physical index during the evaluation of query plans by the Index
Consultant and when the PLAN function is used. You can use virtual indexes together with the
PLAN function to explore the performance impact of an index, without the often time consuming
and resource consuming effects of creating a real index.
Scripting name: Virtual

Notify

[Non-text indexes v12 and higher] Gives notification messages after n records are successfully
added for the index.
Scripting name: Notify

Word length

[Non-text indexes v12 and higher] Specifies the maximum word length that is permitted.
Scripting name: Limit

Delimited by

[Non-text indexes v12 and higher] Specifies separators to use in parsing a column string into the
words to be stored in the index.
Scripting name: DelimitedBy

Text index

[v12 and higher] Specifies whether the index is a text index or not.
Scripting name: TextIndex

Configuration

[Text indexes v12 and higher] Specifies the text configuration (see Text Configurations (IQ/SQL
Anywhere) [page 573]) to be used to control the building of the text index.
Scripting name: Configuration

Immediate refresh

[Text indexes v12 and higher] Specifies that the index is refreshed immediately each time data is
written to the table.
Scripting name: Refresh

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

585

Users
The following extensions are available on the General tab (v12 and higher):
Table 429:
Name

Description

Force change

Controls whether the user must specify a new password when they log in. This setting overrides
the password_expiry_on_next_login option setting in the login policy.
Scripting name: ForcePasswordChange

Login policy

Specifies the login policy to assign to the user (see Login Policies (IQ/SQL Anywhere) [page 565]).
Scripting name: LoginPolicy

Web Services
The following extensions are available on the SQL Anywhere/Sybase tab (v9 and higher):
Table 430:
Name

Description

Port number

Specifies the web service port number.

Scripting name: PortNumber

Server name

Specifies the web service server name.

Scripting name: ServerName

Name prefix

[DISH service type] Specifies a name prefix. Only SOAP services whose names begin with this pre
fix are handled.
Scripting name: Prefix

586

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Web Operations
The following extensions are available on the SQL Anywhere/Sybase tab (v9 and higher) when the service type is
not dish:
Table 431:
Name

Description

URL

Determines whether URI paths are accepted and, if so, how they are processed.
Scripting name: Url

2.13.1

Auto-Increment Columns

Auto-increment columns are equivalent to identity columns in those DBMS that support identity columns.
If you switch from SQL Anywhere to a DBMS that supports identity columns, the Identity checkbox will be
selected for each auto-increment column. On the other hand, if you switch to SQL Anywhere, identity columns will
be assigned the autoincrement default value.
When you reverse engineer a script containing identity columns (using ASE-compatible syntax), these are
automatically converted into auto-increment columns in SQL Anywhere.

2.13.2 Mirror Servers (SQL Anywhere)

SQL Anywhere (v12 and higher) supports database mirroring through the use of mirror servers. PowerDesigner
models mirror servers as extended objects with a stereotype of <<MirrorServer>>.

Creating a Mirror Server

You can create a mirror server in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Mirror Servers

to access the List of Mirror Servers, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Mirror Server .

Mirror Server Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a mirror server property sheet, doubleclick its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Mirror Servers folder.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

587

The following extended attributes are available on the Options tab:

Table 432:
Name

Description

Type

Specifies the type of mirror server to create. You can choose between:

Primary - defines a virtual or logical server, whose name is the alternate server name for the data
base, which can be used by applications to connect to the server currently acting as the primary
server. There can be only one PRIMARY server for a database.

Mirror - defines a virtual or logical server, whose name is the alternate server name for the data
base, which can be used by applications to connect to the server currently acting as the read-only
mirror. There can be only one MIRROR server for a database.

Arbiter - assists in determining which of the PARTNER servers takes ownership of the database.
The arbiter server must be defined with a connection string that can be used by the partner servers
to connect to the arbiter. There can be only one ARBITER server for a database.

Partner - is eligible to become the primary server and take ownership of the database. You must
define two PARTNER servers for database mirroring, and both must have a connection string and a
state file. In a read-only scale-out system, you must define one PARTNER server. This server is the
root server, and runs the only copy of the database that allows both read and write operations.

Copy - In a read-only scale-out system, this value specifies that the database server is a copy node.
All connections to the database on this server are read-only. You do not have to explicitly define
copy nodes for the scale-out system; you can choose to have the root node define the copy nodes
when they connect.

Scripting name: Type

Using auto parent

[Copy only] Specifies that the primary server will assign a parent for this server.
Scripting name: UsingAutoParent

Parent

[Copy only] Specifies a tree of servers for a mirroring or scale-out system and indicates the servers
from which the non-participating nodes obtain transaction log pages.
Scripting name: ParentServer

Alternate parent

[Copy only] Specifies an alternate parent for the copy node.

Scripting name: AlternateParentServer

Primary

[Copy only] Specifies that the parent server is the primary server.
Scripting name: PrimaryParentServer

Connection string

Specifies the connection string to be used to connect to the server.

Scripting name: ConnectionString

Log file

Specifies the location of the log file that is sent between mirror servers.
Scripting name: LogFile

588

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Preferred

[Partner only] Specifies whether the server is the preferred server in the mirroring system, which as
sumes the role of primary server whenever possible.
Scripting name: Preferred

State file

[Arbiter, Partner] Specifies the location of the file used for maintaining state information about the
mirroring system.
Scripting name: StateFile

2.13.3 Spatial Data (SQL Anywhere)

SQL Anywhere (v12 and higher) can store spatial data (data that describes the position, shape, and orientation of
objects in a defined space) using spatial reference systems.
For more information, see Spatial Data (IQ/SQL Anywhere) [page 570].

2.13.4 Events, Login Policies, and Full Text Searches (SQL

Anywhere)
PowerDesigner supports modeling for SQL Anywhere events (v10 and higher), login policies (v12 and higher), and
full text searches (v12 and higher).
For detailed information, see Events (IQ/SQL Anywhere) [page 557], Login Policies (IQ/SQL Anywhere) [page
565], and Full Text Searches (IQ/SQL Anywhere) [page 573].

2.13.5 Certificates (SQL Anywhere)

SQL Anywhere (v16.0 and higher) supports X.509 certificates for transport-layer security. PowerDesigner models
certificates as extended objects with a stereotype of <<Certificate>>.

Creating a Certificate
You can create a certificate in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Certificates

to access the List of Certificates, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

New

Certificate .

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

589

Certificate Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a certificate property sheet, double-click
its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Certificates folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 433:
Name

Description

Type

Specifies the type of the certificate, which can be a string, variable, or file.
Scripting name: CertificateSourceType

Certificate

Specifies the source of the certificate.

Scripting name: CertificateSource

2.13.6 Proxy Tables (ASE/SQL Anywhere)

A proxy table is used to access data in a remote table; it has all the attributes of the remote table, but does not
contain any data locally. PowerDesigner uses an extension file to provide support for generating the script for a
proxy table in order to run it in an ASE or SQL Anywhere database.

Procedure
1. To enable the proxy table extensions in your model, select Model Extensions , click the Attach an
Extension tool, select the Proxy Tables file (on the General Purposetab), and click OK to attach it.
2. For each proxy table, right-click a table in another PDM target model, drag it to the model where you want to
create a proxy table, release the right mouse button and select one of the following:
Create Shortcut Here - Creates a non-modifiable reference to the original table.
Replicate Here - Creates a modifiable reference to the original table. You can desynchronize the Code
property of the replica to give the proxy table a different name in the local model.
For more information about shortcuts and replicas, see Core Features Guide > Linking and Synchronizing
Models > Shortcuts and Replicas.

Note
A custom check verifies that the proxy table is not the child table of a reference.
3. Right-click the model in the browser and select New Data Source to create a new data source to
provide access to the remote tables on the server, and ensure that the GenerateAsProxyServer property on
the Extended Attributes tab is set to True.

590

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Note
A single data source can contain information for several models if they represent a single remote server.
4. Add the models from which you have drawn your proxy tables in the Models tab.
5. Click the Database Connection tab, and define the data source name, login and password and click OK to
return to your model.

2.13.6.1

Generating the Remote Server and Proxy Tables

Creation Scripts

You can generate the remote server and proxy tables creation scripts from the model containing proxy tables in
order to run them in the database.

Procedure
1. Select
tab.

Tools

Proxy Tables

Generate Proxy Tables

to open the Generation dialog, and click the Options

2. Set an appropriate value for the UserReplica and UserShorcut options to allow you to generate the proxy
tables corresponding to replica and/or external shortcuts.
3. Set the Generate proxy servers option to True to generate proxy servers. You can deselect any proxy servers
you do not want to generate.
4. Click OK to begin generation.
The generated script is displayed in the Result dialog.
5. [optional] Double-click the generated SQL file or click the Edit button to open the script in a text editor.
6. Run the script on your database in order to create the proxy tables.

2.14 Teradata
To create a PDM with support for features specific to the Teradata DBMS family, select the appropriate version in
the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMS definition files for Teradata V2R5 and V2R6 are deprecated.
The following sections list the extensions provided for Teradata.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

591

Abstract Data Types

The following extensions are available on the Teradata tab (V2R6 and higher):
Table 434:
Name

Description

Predefined data type

[type:distinct] Indicates that character column comparison uses character case (upper and
lower) to raise differences.
Scripting name: PredefinedDataType

Dimension

[v14 and higher, type:array] Specifies the dimension(s) of the array as [n1][n2]....
Scripting name: Dimension

Nullify

[v14 and higher, type:array] Initializes all of the elements of array_type_name to null when the
type is constructed.
Scripting name: DefaultNull

Abstract Data Type Procedures

The following extensions are available on the Teradata tab if the type is distinct (V2R6 and higher):
Table 435:
Name

Description

Return data type

Specifies the name of the data type returned by the method, which can be either a predefined data
type or a UDT.
Scripting name: ReturnDataType

Self as result

Specifies that the method is type-preserving. If so, then the data type specified in the RETURNS
clause for the method must have the same name as UDT_name.
Scripting name: SelfAsResult

As locator

Specifies that BLOB and CLOB types must be represented by a locator. The Teradata Database does
not support in-memory LOB parameters: an AS LOCATOR phrase must be specified for each LOB
parameter and return value.
Scripting name: ReturnAsLocator

Character set

Specifies the CHARACTER SET clause for character data type.

Scripting name: ReturnCharSet

592

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Cast data type

Specifies a computed attribute that show the datatype and its length and precision.
Scripting name: CastDataTypeDisplay

As locator

Specifies that BLOB and CLOB types must be represented by a locator.

Scripting name: CastAsLocator

Specific method name Specifies the specific name of the method whose signature is being added to the type definition for
UDT_name.
Scripting name: SpecificMethodName
Parameter style

Specifies the parameter style for the method defined by this signature.
Scripting name: ParameterStyle

Returns null on null in Specifies that the method defined by this signature is not called if any of the arguments passed to it is
put

null. Instead, it returns a null.

Scripting name: ReturnsNullOnNullInput

Deterministic

Specifies that the result of invoking the method defined by this signature is deterministic.
Scripting name: Deterministic

Glop set

[v13 and higher]Specifies the glop set with which the method is associated.
Scripting name: GlopSet

Language

Specifies the language (either C or C++) used to write the source code for the method defined by this
signature.
Scripting name: Language

Columns
The following extensions are available on the Teradata tab:
Table 436:
Name

Description

Character set

Specifies the character set to be used.

Scripting name: CharacterSet

Case specific

Specifies that character column comparison is case-sensitive.

Scripting name: CaseSpecific

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

593

Name

Description

Compress

Compresses specified values and nulls in one or more columns of a table to zero space. When the data
in a column matches a value specified in the COMPRESS phrase, then that value is stored only once in
the table header regardless of how many times it occurs as a field value for the column, thus saving
disk storage space.
Attribute must be enclosed in parenthesis when it is composed of multiple values.
Scripting name: Compress

Always generate value Specifies that identity column values are always system-generated. You cannot insert values into, nor
update, an identity column defined as GENERATED ALWAYS.
If not selected, identity column values are system-generated unless the user does not enter a non-null
value.
Scripting name: ExtGenAlways
Partition

Specifies the partition to which the column is assigned.

Databases
The following extensions are available on the Teradata tab:
Table 437:
Name

Description

Owning database

Specifies the name of the immediate owning user or database. The default is the user name asso
ciated with the current session.
Scripting name: FromDatabaseName

Account

Specifies the account ID identifiers.

Scripting name: Account

Fallback

Specifies whether to create and store a duplicate copy of each table created in the new database.
Scripting name: Fallback

Journal

Specifies the number of before change images to be maintained by default for each data table cre
ated in the new database.
Scripting name: Journal

After journal

Specifies the type of image to be maintained by default for data tables created in the new data
base.
Scripting name: AfterJournal

594

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Default journal table

Specifies the default table that is to receive the journal images of data tables created in the new
database.
Scripting name: DefaultJournalTable

Permanent

Specifies the number of bytes to be reserved for permanent storage of the new user database.
The space is taken from unallocated space in the database of the immediate owner.
Scripting name: PermanentSpace

Spool

Specifies the number of bytes (n) to be allocated for spool files. The default is the largest value
that is not greater then the owner spool space, and that is a multiple of the number of AMPs on the
system.
Scripting name: SpoolSpace

Temporary

Specifies how much space (in bytes) is to be allocated for creating temporary tables by this user.
Note that temporary space is reserved prior to spool space for any user defined with this charac
teristic.
Scripting name: TemporarySpace

Indexes
The following extensions are available on the Teradata tab:
Table 438:
Name

Description

Primary Index

Specifies that the index is the primary index.

Scripting name: PrimaryIndex

Partition by

[primary key] Lets you select the used function to evaluate partition condition.

case_n: Evaluates a list of conditions and returns the position of the first condition that evalu
ates to TRUE, provided that no prior condition in the list evaluates to UNKNOWN.

range_n: Evaluates an expression and maps the result into one of a list of specified ranges and
returns the position of the range in the list.

Scripting name: PartitionBy

Partition expression

[primary key] Specifies an SQL expression used to define the partition to which a partitioned primary
index row is assigned when it is hashed to its AMP.
Scripting name: PartitionExpression

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

595

Name

Description

Click on the check box

[primary key] Specifies whether the index is defined over multiple partitioning expressions. When

to switch multiple / sin this checkbox is selected, you can specify the partition functions and expressions in a list.
gle partition mode

Ordering type

Scripting name: DisplayMultiplePartitions

[not primary key] Select VALUES to optimize queries that return a contiguous range of values, espe
cially for a covering index or a nested join. Select HASH to limit hash-ordering to one column, rather
than all columns (the default)
Scripting name: OrderingType

Column

[not primary key] Row ordering on each AMP by a single NUSI column: either value-ordered or hashordered.
Scripting name: OrderByColumnList

All

Specifies that a NUSI should retain row ID pointers for each logical row of a join index (as opposed to
only the compressed physical rows).
Scripting name: AllIndex

Index has name

Specifies that the index will be generated with its name (as Teradata allows index with no name).
Scripting name: NamedIndex

Tables
The following extensions are available on the Teradata tab:
Table 439:
Name

Description

Type

Specifies whether the table to be created is a global temporary table or a volatile table:

GLOBAL TEMPORARY - a temporary table definition is created and stored in the data dictionary
for future materialization. You can create global temporary tables by copying a table WITH NO

DATA, but not by copying a table WITH DATA.

VOLATILE - specifies that a volatile table be created, with its definition retained in memory only
for the course of the session in which it is defined.

Scripting name: GlobalTemporary

Commit row action

Specifies the action to take with the contents of a global temporary table when a transaction ends:

DELETE - clears the temporary table of all rows.

PRESERVE - retains the rows in the table after the transaction is committed.

Scripting name: CommitRowAction

596

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Duplicate row control

Controls the treatment of duplicate rows. If there are uniqueness constraints on any column or set of
columns in the table definition, then the table cannot have duplicate rows even if it is declared as

MULTISET. Some client utilities have restrictions with respect to MULTISET tables.
Scripting name: SetOrMultiset
Primary index

Specifies the primary index of the table (see Primary Indexes (Teradata) [page 602]).
Scripting name: PrimaryIndex

Users
The following extensions are available on the Teradata tab :
Table 440:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the database (or user) that owns the current user.
Scripting name: DBOwner

Permanent

Specifies the number of bytes to be reserved for permanent storage of the new user database.
The space is taken from unallocated space in the database of the immediate owner.
Scripting name: PermanentSpace

Spool

Specifies the number of bytes (n) to be allocated for spool files. The default is the largest value
that is not greater then the owner spool space, and that is a multiple of the number of AMPs on the
system.
Scripting name: SpoolSpace

Temporary

Specifies how much space (in bytes) is to be allocated for creating temporary tables by this user.
Note that temporary space is reserved prior to spool space for any user defined with this charac
teristic.
Scripting name: TemporarySpace

Account

Specifies the account ID identifiers.

Scripting name: Account

Fallback

Specifies whether to create and store a duplicate copy of each table created in the new database.
Scripting name: Fallback

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

597

Name

Description

Journal

Specifies the number of before change images to be maintained by default for each data table cre
ated in the new database.
Scripting name: Journal

After journal

Specifies the type of image to be maintained by default for data tables created in the new data
base.
Scripting name: AfterJournal

Default table

Specifies the default table that is to receive the journal images of data tables created in the new
database.
Scripting name: DefaultJournalTable

Database

Specifies the default database name.

Scripting name: DefaultDatabase

Role

Specifies the default role for the user.

Scripting name: DefaultRole

Character set

Specifies the default character data type.

Scripting name: DefaultCharacterSet

Collation

Specifies the default collation for this user.

Scripting name: Collation

Time zone

Specifies the default time zone displacement for the user.

Scripting name: TimeZone

Date format

Specifies the default format for importing and exporting DATE values for the user.
Scripting name: DateForm

Profile name

Specifies a profile to the user.

Scripting name: Profile

Startup string

Specifies a startup string.

Scripting name: Startup

598

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Views
The following extensions are available on the Teradata tab:
Table 441:
Name

Description

Lock type

Specifies the type of lock to be placed.

Scripting name: LockType

Locked object class

Specifies the type (class) of the object to be locked.

Scripting name: LockedClass

Locked object

Specifies the name of the object to be locked.

Scripting name: LockedObjt

No wait

Specifies that if the indicated lock cannot be obtained, the statement should be aborted.
Scripting name: NoWait

2.14.1

Partitions (Teradata)

Teradata partitions allow you partition table data by range, case, or column. PowerDesigner models partitions as
extended sub-objects with a stereotype of Partition.

Creating a Partition
You can create a partition in any of the following ways:
Open the property sheet of a table, select the Partitions tab and click the Add a Row tool. The Partition field on
the Teradata tab is updated to reflect the partitions that you create
Open the property sheet of a table, select the Teradata tab and enter your partition definition in the Partition
field. Partition objects are created, deleted, or modified to reflect changes in this field.

Partition Properties
You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a partition property sheet, double-click its
Browser entry in the Partitions folder under its parent table.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

599

Table 442:
Name

Description

Table

Specifies the parent table of the partition.

Scripting name: ParentObject

Type

Specifies the type of the partition:

Range n - Specify a range and interval in the Expression field.

Case n - Specify criteria for the partition in the Expression field.

Column - [if no primary index is defined on the table] Create objects in the Column Groups list,
open their property sheets and associate columns with them. Select the All but option to create a
single-column partition with autocompression and a system-determined COLUMN or ROW format
for each column, if any, that is not specified in the column group list.

Scripting name: PartitionType, AllBut

Expression

Specifies the partitioning expression for partitions of type Range n or Case n.

Scripting name: Expression

Column Groups

Lists the groups of columns that will be partitioned for partitions of type Column. Select an item in
the list and click the Properties tool to define its type, and the columns of the parent table to which it
applies. You can specify partitioning by:

Row

Column

Auto - Teradata determines the optimum partitioning format.

Select the All but option to compress data as physical rows that are inserted into that column partition
of a column-partitioned table if an appropriate method can be calculated.
Scripting name: PartitionColumns
Add

Specifies that the maximum number of partitions for a partitioning level is the number of partitions it
defines plus the value of the BIGINT constant value specified in this field.
Scripting name: AddConstant

Partition sql

Specifies the SQL statement that defines the partition. You can enter SQL in this field to generate ap
propriate PowerDesigner objects or create the objects and have them generate the SQL in this field.
Changes to objects or the SQL are synchronized with the other.
Scripting name: Gen

600

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.14.2 Transform Groups (Teradata)

A transform is a mechanism for creating an external representation of the UDT that is used when exporting and
importing data between the client and the Teradata server. This mechanism allows most Teradata client utilities
and open APIs to transparently move data to and from a UDT without the need for special logic or metadata.
Transforms usually appear as a named pair of functions or methods (usually referred to as To-SQL and From-SQL
to indicate the direction of data flow to and from the database) called a transform group. A transform group is
required if the type is to be used in a table.
Transform groups are supported for Teradata v2r6 and higher. PowerDesigner models transform groups as
extended objects with a stereotype of <<TransformGroup>>.

Creating a Transform Group

You can create a transform group in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Transform Groups

to access the List of Transform Groups, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Transform Group .

Transform Group Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a transform group property sheet, doubleclick its Browser entry in the Transform Groups folder.
Table 443:
Name

Description

UDT

Specifies the name of the user-defined type associated with the transform group.
Scripting name: UDT

To sql with

Specifies the function name and parameters to be used as the tosql routine for this transform group,
and whether or not it is specific.
Scripting name: ToName, ToParms, ToSpecific

From sql with

Specifies the method or function name and parameters to be used as the fromsql routine for this
transform group, and whether or not it is specific and/or instantiable.
Scripting name: FromType, FromName, FromParms, FromSpecific,

FromInstance, FromUDT

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

601

2.14.3 Database Permissions (Teradata)

You can define multiple databases in a PDM for Teradata, and also define permissions on the database object.
For more information on permissions, see Granting Object Permissions [page 173].

2.14.4 Primary Indexes (Teradata)

In Teradata, users tend to use indexes rather than key constraints.

Procedure
1. Open the property sheet of an index from the Indexes tab of a table, or from the List of Indexes available by
selecting

Model

Indexes .

2. Click the Teradata tab and select the Primary Index checkbox.
3. Click OK to close the index property sheet.
When a primary index is based on a key, it is automatically unique. You can make this primary index nonunique by detaching the index from the key. To do so, select <None> in the Columns Definition list in the
Columns tab of the index property sheet, and set the PrimaryIndex extended attribute of the index to True.
Once defined, you can decide to generate indexes or keys in the SQL script, and you can also decide to
generate them inside or outside the table creation script.

2.14.5 Error Tables (Teradata)

Teradata can record errors encounterd when writing to a data table in an error table associated with the data
table. Error tables are supported for Teradata v12 and higher. PowerDesigner models error tables as extended
objects with a stereotype of <<ErrorTable>>.

Creating an Error Table

You can create an error table in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Error Tables

to access the List of Error Tables, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

602

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

New

Error Table .

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Error Table Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open an error table property sheet, double-click
its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Error Tables folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 444:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the name of the database containing the error table.

Scripting name: Owner

Data table

Specifies the data table for which the error table is being created.
Scripting name: DataTable

Use name at generation

Specifies that the error table will be generated with its name.
Scripting name: HasName

2.14.6 Join Indexes (Teradata)

Join indexes are materialized views that improve access times for cross-table queries, and which are
automatically updated when changed are made to the underlying tables. Join indexes are supported for Teradata
v12 and higher. PowerDesigner models join indexes as views with a stereotype of <<JoinIndex>>.

Creating a Join Index

You can create a join index in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Join Indexes

to access the List of Join Indexes, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Join Index .

To complete the view, specify a view query (see View Queries [page 129]).

Join Index Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a join index property sheet, double-click its
diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Join Indexes folder.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

603

The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:

Table 445:
Name

Description

Fallback

Specifies that the join index uses fallback protection.

Scripting name: Fallback

Checksum

Enables a table-specific disk I/O integrity checksum level. The checksum setting applies to primary
data rows, fallback data rows, and all secondary index rows for the index.
Scripting name: Checksum

2.14.7 Hash Indexes (Teradata)

Hash indexes are designed to improve query performance like join indexes, but may in addition enable you to
avoid accessing the base table. Hash indexes are supported for Teradata v12 and higher. PowerDesigner models
hash indexes as extended objects with a stereotype of <<HashIndex>>.

Creating a Hash Index

You can create a hash index in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Hash Indexes

to access the List of Hash Indexes, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Hash Index .

Hash Index Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a hash index property sheet, double-click
its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Hash Indexes folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 446:
Name

Description

Table

Specifies the base table on which the hash index is defined.

Scripting name: Table

604

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Database

Specifies the name of the database containing the base table. By default the same as the database
in which the hash index is created.
Scripting name: Owner

Fallback

Specifies that the hash index uses fallback protection.

Scripting name: Fallback

Checksum

Enables a table-specific disk I/O integrity checksum level. The checksum setting applies to primary
data rows, fallback data rows, and all secondary index rows for the index.
Scripting name: Checksum

The following extended attributes are available on the Teradata tab:

Table 447:
Name

Description

Columns

Specifies the base table columns on which the hash index is defined
Scripting name: Columns

Distributed columns

Specifies an optional, explicitly specified column set on which the hash index rows are distributed
across the AMPs. This is a subset of index column list.
Scripting name: ByColumns

Order by columns

Specifies the row ordering on each AMP, which must be either value-ordered or hash-ordered.
Scripting name: OrderByColumns

Ordering type

[if Order by columns are specified] Specifies the ordering type of the ORDER BY column.
Scripting name: OrderByType

2.14.8 Glop Sets (Teradata)

Glop sets are sets of persistent data used in external procedures and functions. PowerDesigner supports glop
sets for Teradata v13 and higher as extended objects with a stereotype of <<GlopSet>>.

Creating a Glop Set

You can create a glop set in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Glop Sets

to access the List of Glop Sets, and click the Add a Row tool.

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

605

 Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Glop Set .

Glop Set Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a glop set property sheet, double-click its
diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Glop Sets folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 448:
Name

Description

Owner

Specifies the owner of the glop set.

Scripting name: Owner

2.14.9 Replication Groups (Teradata)

Replication groups contain tables to be replicated. PowerDesigner supports replication groups for Teradata v13
and higher as extended objects with a stereotype of <<ReplicationGroup>>.

Creating a Replication Group

You can create a replication group in any of the following ways:
Select

Model

Replication Groups

to access the List of Replication Groups, and click the Add a Row tool.

Right-click the model (or a package) in the Browser, and select

New

Replication Group .

Replication Group Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a replication group property sheet, doubleclick its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Replication Groups folder.

606

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:

Table 449:
Name

Description

List of tables

Specifies the tables to be included in the replication group. You can enter table names here as a
comma-separated list and on the Tables tab. Both lists are synchronized and if any table name does
not currently exist in the model, then it will be created.
Scripting name: TableList

2.14.10 Replication Rules and Rule Sets (Teradata)

Replication rules are patterns for matching table names to include in replication groups. Rules are collected into
sets, which are in turn associated with replication groups. PowerDesigner supports replication rule sets and rules
for Teradata v13 and higher as extended objects with a stereotype of <<ReplicationRuleSet>> and extended subobjects with a stereotype of <<ReplicationRule>>.

Creating a Replication Rule Set

You can create a replication rule set in any of the following ways:
Select
tool.

Model

Replication Rule Sets

to access the List of Replication Rule Sets, and click the Add a Row

Right-click the model or package in the Browser, and select

New

Replication Rule Set .

Creating Replication Rules

You create replication rules on the Patterns tab of a replication rule set. You can define the rule on the tab or by
clicking the Properties tool to open the rule properties sheet. Rules have the following properties:
Table 450:
Name

Description

Object kind

Specifies the type of database object to be added to the replication rule set.
Scripting name: ObjectKind

Like/And not like

Specifies pattern strings to match or exclude against the fully qualified names of the objects of cer
tain SQL statements. The specified string literals can contain wildcard characters.
Scripting name: LikeClause, NotLikeClause

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

607

Name

Description

Escape character

Specifies an escape character for the like and not like patterns.
Scripting name: EscapeLike, EscapeNotLike

Sql

[property sheet only] Displays the SQL expression corresponding to the values entered in the other
fields.
Scripting name: Definition

Replication Rule Set Properties

You can modify an object's properties from its property sheet. To open a replication rule set property sheet,
double-click its diagram symbol or its Browser entry in the Replication Rule Sets folder.
The following extended attributes are available on the General tab:
Table 451:
Name

Description

Default

Specifies that all the rules in the rule set are default rules.
Scripting name: DefaultRules

Replication group

Specifies the name of the replication group to which the rule set is assigned.
Scripting name: ReplicationGroup

2.15 Other Databases

The following sections list extensions to other DBMS families supported by PowerDesigner.

2.15.1

Informix SQL

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the Informix SQL DBMS family, select the appropriate
version in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in
the Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMSs for Informix v8-9 are deprecated.
The following sections list the extensions provided for Informix SQL.

608

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Columns
The following extensions are available on the Informix tab:
Table 452:
Name

Description

Serial Start

Specifies the initial value of the column with a SERIAL datatype.

Scripting name: ExtSerialStart

Indexes
The following extensions are available on the Extended Attributes tab:
Table 453:
Name

Description

IndexSpec

Specifies an internal index definition (indexkeys column).

Scripting name: IndexSpec

Procedures
The following extensions are available on the Extended Attributes tab:
Table 454:
Name

Description

InternalID

Specifies an internal identifier in the server, which is used to retrieve the function of an index ex
pression.
Scripting name: InternalID

2.15.2 Ingres
To create a PDM with support for features specific to the Ingres DBMS family, select the appropriate version in the
DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the Resource
Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

The following sections list the extensions provided for Ingres.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

609

Columns
The following extensions are available on the Extended Attributes tab:
Table 455:
Name

Description

NotDefault

Specifies that the column needs a value. This generates the "not default" clause in the sql statement.
Scripting name: NotDefault

Users
The following extensions are available on the Ingres tab:
Table 456:
Name

Description

Default group

Specifies the default group the user belongs to.

Scripting name: DefaultGroup

Expiration date

Specifies an optional expiration date associated with each user. Any valid date can be used. Once the ex
piration date is reached, the user is no longer able to log on. If the expire_date clause is omitted, the de
fault is noexpire_date.
Scripting name: ExpireDate

Limiting security

Allows a security administrator to restrict the highest security label with which users can connect to In

label

gres when enforcing mandatory access control (MAC).

Scripting name: LimitingSecurityLabel

Profile

Allows a profile to be specified for a particular user. If the profile clause is omitted, the default is noprofile.
Scripting name: Profile

External password Allows a user's password to be authenticated externally to Ingres. The password is passed to an external
authentication server for authentication.
Scripting name: ExternalPassword

610

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.15.3 Interbase
To create a PDM with support for features specific to the Interbase DBMS family, select the appropriate version in
the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

The following sections list the extensions provided for Interbase.

Indexes
The following extensions are available on the Interbase tab:
Table 457:
Name

Description

Row sort

Defines that the default value of the index (ascending or descending) is defined on the index
and not on the column.
Scripting name: ExtAscDesc

Sequences
The following extensions are available on the Interbase tab:
Table 458:
Name

Description

First value

Specifies the sequence first value for Interbase generator.

Scripting name: ExtStartWith

Increment value

Specifies the sequence increment value for Interbase generator.

Scripting name: ExtIncrement

2.15.4 Microsoft Access

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the MS Access DBMS family, select the appropriate version
in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMS definition file for Microsoft Access 2000 is deprecated.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

611

The following sections list the extensions provided forMS Access.

Columns
The following extended attributes are available on the Access tab:
Table 459:
Name

Description

Allow Zero Length

Specifies whether a zero-length string ("") is a valid entry in a table column.

Applies only to Text, Memo, and Hyperlink table fields.
Scripting name: ExtAllowZeroLength

2.15.4.1

Generating a Microsoft Access Database

PowerDesigner and MS Access use .dat files to exchange information. You must pass via the appropriate
access<version> database delivered with PowerDesigner in order to convert the .dat files generated into
Access database files.

Procedure
1. Select Database Generate Database to launch the standard Database Generation dialog (see
Generating a Database from a PDM [page 304]), set any appropriate options, and click OK.
2. Open the appropriate access<version> database in the PowerDesigner \tools directory.
3. Select the Generate Access database from script file radio button and enter or select a destination database
file in the Select database field.
4. Select the .dat file generated by PowerDesigner in the Script file field.
5. Click the Create button to create the database file, and then click the Open MDB button to open the generated
database.

612

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2.15.4.2 Reverse Engineering a Microsoft Access Database

PowerDesigner and MS Access use .dat files to exchange information. You must pass via the appropriate
access<version> database delivered with PowerDesigner in order to convert an Access database file into
the .dat file required by PowerDesigner.

Procedure
1. Open the appropriate access<version> database in the PowerDesigner \tools directory.
2. Select the Reverse engineer Access database to script radio button and select the database file to reverse in
the Select database field.
3. Enter the .dat file to be generated in the Script file field.
4. Click the Create button to generate the .dat file and then reverse engineer this script in PowerDesigner (see
Reverse Engineering from Scripts [page 328]).

2.15.5 MySQL
To create a PDM with support for features specific to the MySQL DBMS family, select the appropriate version in
the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMSs for MySQL v3.22 and 3.23 are deprecated. In v4.0 the attributes listed below are available on the
Extended Attributes tab.
Note that when developing for MySQL and using double quotes as a delimiter, it is necessary to set the sql_mode
to ANSI_QUOTES:
SET sql_mode='ANSI_QUOTES'
The following sections list the extensions provided for MySQL.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

613

Columns
The following extended attributes are available on the MySQL tab:
Table 460:
Name

Description

Retrieve with leading

When displayed, the default padding of spaces is replaced with zeros. For example, for a column de

zeros

clared as INT(5) ZEROFILL, a value of 4 is retrieved as 00004.

If you specify ZEROFILL for a numeric column, MySQL automatically adds the UNSIGNED attribute to
the column.
Scripting name: ZeroFill

Unsigned

Indicates negative values are not allowed for the column.

Scripting name: Unsigned

National

A way to indicate that a CHAR column should use UTF8 character set.
Scripting name: National

Character set

Set of symbols and encodings.

Scripting name: CharSet

Collation

Set of rules for comparing characters in a character set.

Scripting name: Collate

Indexes
The following extended attributes are available on the MySQL tab:
Table 461:
Name

Description

Full text index

Indicates that the index is a full text index.

Scripting name: FullText

614

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Keys
The following extended attributes are available on the MySQL tab:
Table 462:
Name

Description

Unique key

When set to True, indicates that the key is unique. False implies that the key allows duplicate values.
Scripting name: ExtUnique

Models
The following extended attributes are available on the MySQL tab:
Table 463:
Name

Description

Database type

Indicates the type of the database, as specified in the extended attribute type DatabaseType.
Scripting name: DatabaseType

References
The following extended attributes are available on the MySQL tab:
Table 464:
Name

Description

Reference match type Indicates the reference match type, as specified in the extended attribute type ReferenceMatchType.
Scripting name: ReferenceMatch

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

615

Tables
The following extended attributes are available on the MySQL tab:
Table 465:
Name

Description

Temporary table

[v5.0 and higher] Used to create a temporary table. A temporary table is visible only to the current
connection, and is dropped automatically when the connection is closed.
Scripting name: Temporary

2.15.6 NonStop SQL

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the NonStop SQL DBMS family, select the appropriate
version in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in
the Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

The following sections list the extensions provided for NonStop SQL.

Columns
The following extensions are available on the Extended Attributes tab:
Table 466:
Name

Description

ExtType

Specifies an extended type for columns. Select either signed or unsigned in the Value column.
Scripting name: ExtType

2.15.7 PostgreSQL
To create a PDM with support for features specific to the PostgreSQL DBMS family, select the appropriate version
in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner metamodel in the
Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

Note
The DBMS definition file for PostgreSQL v7.3 is deprecated.
The following sections list the extensions provided for PostgreSQL.

616

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Databases
The following extensions are available on the PostgreSQL tab:
Table 467:
Name

Description

Template

The name of the template from which to create the new database, or DEFAULT to use the default
template.
Scripting name: Template

Encoding

Character set encoding to use in the new database. Specify a string constant (e.g., 'SQL_ASCII'), or
an integer encoding number, or DEFAULT to use the default encoding.
Scripting name: Encoding

Domains
The following extensions are available on the PostgreSQL tab. To display this tab, select BaseType or
CompositeType in the Stereotype field on the General tab and click Apply:
Table 468:
Name

Description

Definition

[Composite Type] The composite type is specified by a list of attribute names and data types. This is
essentially the same as the row type of a table, but using CREATE TYPE avoids the need to create an
actual table when all that is wanted is to define a type. A stand-alone composite type is useful as the
argument or return type of a function.
Scripting name: CompositeDefinition

Length

[Base Type] Specifies the internal length of the new type.

Scripting name: ExtTypeLength

Array Element type

[Base Type] Specifies the type of the array elements.

Scripting name: ExtTypeElement

Array delimiter

[Base Type] Specifies the delimiter character for the array.

Scripting name: ExtTypeDelimiter

By Value

[Base Type] Specifies that operators and functions which use this data type should be passed an ar
gument by value rather than by reference.
Scripting name: ExtTypePassedByValue

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

617

Name

Description

Input function

[Base Type] Specifies the name of a function, created by CREATE FUNCTION, which converts data
from its external form to the internal form of the type.
Scripting name: ExtTypeInput

Output function

[Base Type] Specifies the name of a function, created by CREATE FUNCTION, which converts data
from its internal form to a form suitable for display.
Scripting name: ExtTypeOutput

Send function

[Base Type] Specifies the name of a function, created by CREATE FUNCTION, which converts data
of this type into a form suitable for transmission to another machine.
Scripting name: ExtTypeSend

Receive function

[Base Type] Specifies the name of a function, created by CREATE FUNCTION, which converts data
of this type from a form suitable for transmission from another machine to internal form.
Scripting name: ExtTypeReceive

Groups
The following extensions are available on the PostgreSQL tab (v8 and higher):
Table 469:
Name

Description

Group identifier (id)

The SYSID clause can be used to choose the PostgreSQL group ID of the new group. This is normally
not necessary, but may be useful if you need to recreate a group referenced in the permissions of
some object.
Scripting name: SysId

Procedures
The following extensions are available on the PostgreSQL tab:
Table 470:
Name

Description

Language

The name of the language that the function is implemented in. May be SQL, C, internal, or the name of
a user-defined procedural language. (See also extended attribute type ProcLanguageList.)
Scripting name: ProcLanguage

618

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

References
The following extensions are available on the PostgreSQL tab (v8 and higher):
Table 471:
Name

Description

Deferrable

Controls whether the constraint can be deferred. A constraint that is not deferrable will be checked
immediately after every command. Checking of constraints that are deferrable may be postponed un
til the end of the transaction.
Only foreign key constraints currently accept this clause. All other constraint types are not deferrable.
Scripting name: Deferrable

Foreign key constraint If a constraint is deferrable, this clause specifies the default time to check the constraint.
deferred

False means the constraint is INITIALLY IMMEDIATE, it is checked after each statement. This is the
default.
True means the constraint is INITIALLY DEFERRED, it is checked only at the end of the transaction.
Scripting name: ForeignKeyConstraintDeferred

Tables
The following extensions are available on the PostgreSQL tab (v8 and higher):
Table 472:
Name

Description

Temporary state

If specified, the table is created as a temporary table. Temporary tables are automatically dropped at
the end of a session, or optionally at the end of the current transaction.
Scripting name: Temporary

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

619

Tablespaces
The following extensions are available on the PostgreSQL tab (v8 and higher):
Table 473:
Name

Description

Location

Specifies the directory that will be used for the tablespace. The directory must be specified by an ab
solute path name.
Scripting name: TbspLocation

Owner

Specifies the name of the user who will own the tablespace. If omitted, defaults to the user executing
the command. Only superusers may create tablespaces, but they can assign ownership of tablespa
ces to non-superusers.
Scripting name: TbspOwner

Users
The following extensions are available on the General tab (v8 and higher):
Table 474:
Name

Description

Is schema

Specifies that the user is a schema.

If TRUE, the user is allowed to create databases.
Scripting name: Schema

Owner

[schemas] Specifies the owner of the schema.

Scripting name: Owner

The following extensions are available on the PostgreSQL tab (v8 and higher):
Table 475:
Name

Description

User identifier (id)

Specifies the PostgreSQL user ID of the new user. This is normally not necessary, but may be useful if
you need to recreate the owner of an orphaned object.
Scripting name: SysId

Create database

Specifies that the user can create databases.

Scripting name: CreateDB

620

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Name

Description

Create user

Specifies that the user can create users and turns the user into a superuser who can override all ac
cess restrictions.
Scripting name: CreateUser

Validity

Specifies an absolute time after which the user's password is no longer valid. By default, the password
will be valid forever.
Scripting name: Validity

Encrypted password

Specifies that the password is stored encrypted in the system catalogs.

Scripting name: EncryptedPassword

2.15.8 Red Brick Warehouse

To create a PDM with support for features specific to the Red Brick Warehouse DBMS family, select the
appropriate version in the DBMS field of the New Model dialog. To view these extensions to the PowerDesigner
metamodel in the Resource Editor, select

Database

Edit Current DBMS

and expand the Profile node.

The following sections list the extensions provided for Red Brick Warehouse.

Columns
The following extensions are available on the Red Brick tab:
Table 476:
Name

Description

Unique

Specifies that duplicate values are not allowed in the column. Declaring a column UNIQUE does not
enforce uniqueness on the column; to enforce uniqueness, you must also build a BTREE index on the
column.
Scripting name: IsUnique

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

621

Procedures
The following extensions are available on the Red Brick tab:
Table 477:
Name

Description

Macro Type

Specifies the type of macro. You can choose either Public or Temporary. If you do not select a type, a
private macro is created by default.
Scripting name: MacroType

622

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

Data Modeling
DBMS Definition Reference

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Coding Samples
Any software coding and/or code lines / strings ("Code") included in this documentation are only examples and are not intended to be used in a productive system
environment. The Code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax and phrasing rules of certain coding. SAP does not warrant the correctness and
completeness of the Code given herein, and SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the usage of the Code, unless damages were caused by SAP
intentionally or by SAP's gross negligence.

Accessibility
The information contained in the SAP documentation represents SAP's current view of accessibility criteria as of the date of publication; it is in no way intended to be a
binding guideline on how to ensure accessibility of software products. SAP in particular disclaims any liability in relation to this document. This disclaimer, however, does
not apply in cases of wilful misconduct or gross negligence of SAP. Furthermore, this document does not result in any direct or indirect contractual obligations of SAP.

Gender-Neutral Language
As far as possible, SAP documentation is gender neutral. Depending on the context, the reader is addressed directly with "you", or a gender-neutral noun (such as "sales
person" or "working days") is used. If when referring to members of both sexes, however, the third-person singular cannot be avoided or a gender-neutral noun does not
exist, SAP reserves the right to use the masculine form of the noun and pronoun. This is to ensure that the documentation remains comprehensible.

Internet Hyperlinks
The SAP documentation may contain hyperlinks to the Internet. These hyperlinks are intended to serve as a hint about where to find related information. SAP does not
warrant the availability and correctness of this related information or the ability of this information to serve a particular purpose. SAP shall not be liable for any damages
caused by the use of related information unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct. All links are categorized for transparency
(see: http://help.sap.com/disclaimer).

Data Modeling
Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

623

www.sap.com/contactsap

2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE
or an SAP affiliate company. The information contained herein may
be changed without prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors
contain proprietary software components of other software
vendors. National product specifications may vary.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company
for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty
of any kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for
errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only
warranties for SAP or SAP affiliate company products and services
are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well
as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks
of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other
countries. All other product and service names mentioned are the
trademarks of their respective companies.
Please see http://www.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/
index.epx for additional trademark information and notices.